Sony PDWF800 hand-held camcorder Specification

Document
PROFESSIONAL DISC CAMCORDER
PDW-F800
PDW-700
OPERATION MANUAL [English]
1st Edition (Revised 4)
This label is located
inside the outside
panel of the unit.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of fire or electric
shock, do not expose this apparatus to
rain or moisture.
To avoid electrical shock, do not open
the cabinet. Refer servicing to qualified
personnel only.
Denna etikett finns p&aring;
apparatens ovansida.
Denne m&aelig;rkat sidder
p&aring; apparatets &oslash;verste
panel.
T&auml;m&auml; kyltti sijaitsee
laitteen yl&auml;pinnalla.
Dette merket er
plassert p&aring; oversiden
av produktet.
This Professional Disc Camcorder is
classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.
Laser diode properties
Wavelength: 400 to 410 nm
Emission duration: Continuous
Laser output power: 135 mW (max. of
pulse peak), 65 mW (max. of CW)
Standard: IEC60825-1 (2001)
Egenskaber for laserdiode
B&oslash;lgel&aelig;ngde: 400 til 410 nm
Str&aring;lingsvarighed: Kontinuerlig
Afgivet lasereffekt: 135 mW (maks
str&aring;letoppunkt), 65 mW (maks ved
kontinuerlig str&aring;ling)
Standard: IEC60825-1 (2001)
Tekniska data f&ouml;r laserdiod
V&aring;gl&auml;ngd: 400 till 410 nm
Emissionsl&auml;ngd: Kontinuerlig
Laseruteffekt: 135 mW (max. f&ouml;r
pulstopp), 65 mW (max. f&ouml;r kontinuerlig
v&aring;g)
Standard: IEC60825-1 (2001)
Egenskaper for laserdiode
B&oslash;lgelengde: 400 til 410 nm
Str&aring;lingsvarighet: Uavbrutt
Utgangseffekt for laser: 135 mW (maks av
pulsh&oslash;yde), 65 mW (maks av CW)
Standard: IEC60825-1 (2001)
CAUTION
The use of optical instruments with this
product will increase eye hazard.
Use of controls or adjustments or
performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
VAROITUS!
LAITTEEN K&Auml;YTT&Auml;MINEN MUULLA KUIN
T&Auml;SS&Auml; K&Auml;YTT&Ouml;OHJEESSA MAINITULLA
TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA
K&Auml;YTT&Auml;J&Auml;N TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1
YLITT&Auml;V&Auml;LLE N&Auml;KYM&Auml;TT&Ouml;M&Auml;LLE
LASERS&Auml;TEILYLLE.
VARNING
OM APPARATEN ANV&Auml;NDS P&Aring; ANNAT
S&Auml;TT &Auml;N I DENNA BRUKSANVISNING
SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANV&Auml;NDAREN
UTS&Auml;TTAS F&Ouml;R OSYNLIG
LASERSTR&Aring;LNING, SOM &Ouml;VERSKRIDER
GR&Auml;NSEN F&Ouml;R LASERKLASS 1.
WARNING
Excessive sound pressure from earphones
and headphones can cause hearing loss.
In order to use this product safely, avoid
prolonged listening at excessive sound
pressure levels.
2
For the customers in the U.S.A.
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
— Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
— Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
— Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
You are cautioned that any changes or
modifications not expressly approved in this
manual could void your authority to operate
this equipment.
All interface cables used to connect
peripherals must be shielded in order to
comply with the limits for a digital device
pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC
Rules.
If you have any questions about this product,
you may call;
Sony Customer Information Service Center
1-800-222-7669 or http://www.sony.com/
Declaration of Conformity
Trade Name: SONY
Model:
PDW-F800, PDW-700
Responsible party:
Sony Electronics Inc.
Address:
16530 Via Esprillo,
San Diego, CA 92127
U.S.A.
Telephone Number:
858-942-2230
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
For the customers in Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
For the State of California, USA only
Perchlorate Material - special handling may
apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Perchlorate Material : Lithium battery
contains perchlorate.
For the customers in Europe
This product with the CE marking complies
with the EMC Directive issued by the
Commission of the European Community.
Compliance with this directive implies
conformity to the following European
standards:
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference
(Emission)
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility
(Immunity)
This product is intended for use in the
following Electromagnetic Environments: E1
(residential), E2 (commercial and light
industrial), E3 (urban outdoors), E4
(controlled EMC environment, ex. TV studio).
The manufacturer of this product is Sony
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo,
Japan.
The Authorized Representative for EMC and
product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH,
Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327 Stuttgart,
3
Germany. For any service or guarantee
matters please refer to the addresses given
in separate service or guarantee documents.
For the customers in Taiwan only
4
Table of Contents
Foreword .................................................................................................... 11
Before use........................................................................................ 11
Marks for model-specific functions ................................................ 11
Chapter 1 : Overview
Features ...................................................................................................... 12
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls......................................
Power supply...................................................................................
Accessory attachments ....................................................................
Operating and connectors section ...................................................
HDVF-20A viewfinder (optional)...................................................
Status display on the viewfinder screen ..........................................
15
15
16
17
31
32
Chapter 2 : Preparations
Preparing a Power Supply ........................................................................ 38
Using a battery pack........................................................................ 38
Using AC power.............................................................................. 39
Attaching the Viewfinder ..........................................................................
Attaching the HDVF-20A/C35W ...................................................
Adjusting the viewfinder position...................................................
Moving the viewfinder shoe up.......................................................
Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket ........................
Detaching the eyepiece ...................................................................
Adjusting the viewfinder focus and screen .....................................
39
39
40
40
41
42
42
Setting the Area of Use .............................................................................. 43
Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock ........................................... 44
Mounting the Lens ..................................................................................... 45
Adjusting the Flange Focal Length .......................................................... 46
Preparing the Audio Input System ..........................................................
Connecting a microphone to the MIC IN connector.......................
Connecting microphones to the AUDIO IN connectors .................
Attaching a UHF portable tuner (for a UHF wireless microphone
system) ......................................................................................
Connecting line input audio equipment ..........................................
47
47
48
49
51
Table of Contents
5
Tripod Mounting ....................................................................................... 52
Connecting a Video Light ......................................................................... 53
Using the Shoulder Strap .......................................................................... 53
Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position ....................................................... 54
Connecting the Remote Control Unit ...................................................... 55
Chapter 3 : Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
Setting the Recording Format ..................................................................
Setting the system frequency ..........................................................
Setting the video recording format..................................................
Mixed recording of clips in different formats on the same disc .....
58
58
59
59
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance ............................. 60
Adjusting the black balance ............................................................ 60
Adjusting the white balance ............................................................ 61
Setting the Electronic Shutter................................................................... 66
Shutter modes.................................................................................. 66
Selecting the shutter mode and shutter speed ................................. 67
Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment ............ 70
Adjusting the Audio Level ........................................................................
Manually adjusting the audio levels of the audio inputs from the
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.............................................
Manually adjusting the audio level of the MIC IN connector ........
Recording audio on channels 3 and 4 .............................................
72
72
73
73
Setting the Time Data................................................................................
Setting the timecode........................................................................
Setting the user bits .........................................................................
Synchronizing the timecode............................................................
75
75
75
76
Chapter 4 : Shooting
Handling Discs ...........................................................................................
Discs used for recording and playback ...........................................
Notes on handling ...........................................................................
Write-protecting discs .....................................................................
Loading and unloading a disc .........................................................
Formatting a disc.............................................................................
Handling of discs when recording does not end normally (salvage
function)....................................................................................
79
79
79
79
80
81
81
Basic Procedure for Shooting ................................................................... 83
6
Table of Contents
Playing back the recorded clip ........................................................
Deleting the recorded clip ...............................................................
Using the Freeze Mix function........................................................
Using the Focus Assist function......................................................
85
86
87
87
Advanced Operations for Shooting .......................................................... 88
Recording essence marks ................................................................ 88
Setting clip flags with switches....................................................... 89
Setting the thumbnail image at recording time ............................... 89
Starting a shoot with a few seconds of pre-stored picture data (Picture
Cache function)......................................................................... 89
Time-lapse video (Interval Rec function) ....................................... 91
Shooting with Slow &amp; Quick Motion ............................................. 95
Exchanging discs while recording (Disc Exchange Cache function)
.................................................................................................. 96
Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec function ......................... 97
Retaking the most recent clip.......................................................... 97
Assigning user-defined clip titles automatically ............................. 98
Assigning user-defined names to clips and clip lists .................... 101
Using planning metadata............................................................... 102
Recording video from external devices......................................... 105
Using the Live Logging function .................................................. 106
Recording proxy data .................................................................... 107
Chapter 5 : Operations in GUI Screens
Overview ...................................................................................................
Switching between GUI screens ...................................................
Information and controls in thumbnail screens.............................
Displaying menus..........................................................................
GUI screen operations...................................................................
111
111
113
116
120
Thumbnail Operations ............................................................................
Selecting thumbnails .....................................................................
Searching with thumbnails............................................................
Playing the scene you have found.................................................
Selecting clips by type (Filter Clips function) ..............................
Selecting the information displayed on thumbnails ......................
Changing clip index pictures.........................................................
Checking clip properties ...............................................................
Setting clip flags............................................................................
Locking (write-protecting) clips ...................................................
Deleting clips ................................................................................
121
121
121
124
124
126
126
127
130
130
131
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing) ......................................................... 132
What is scene selection?................................................................ 132
Creating and editing clip lists........................................................ 133
Table of Contents
7
Managing clip lists ........................................................................ 138
Disc Operations ........................................................................................
Checking disc properties ...............................................................
Using planning metadata...............................................................
Checking user-defined essence marks ..........................................
Formatting discs ............................................................................
Displaying disc and clip properties in a web browser...................
139
139
140
141
142
142
Transferring clips (Direct FTP function) ..............................................
Preparations for clip transfers .......................................................
Uploading clips .............................................................................
Downloading clips ........................................................................
Copying clips directly between XDCAM devices ........................
146
147
147
151
151
Shortcut List............................................................................................. 153
Chapter 6 : Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Menu Organization.................................................................................. 154
TOP menu and top-level menus.................................................... 155
Menu List..................................................................................................
OPERATION menu ......................................................................
PAINT menu .................................................................................
MAINTENANCE menu................................................................
FILE menu ....................................................................................
DIAGNOSIS menu .......................................................................
157
157
171
180
199
203
Menu Operations .....................................................................................
Displaying menus..........................................................................
Basic menu operations ..................................................................
Using the USER menu (example menu operation) .......................
Editing the USER menu ................................................................
Resetting USER menu settings to the standard settings................
205
205
205
208
209
213
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD
Monitor...............................................................................................
Selecting the display items............................................................
Change confirmation/adjustment progress messages....................
Setting the marker display.............................................................
Setting the viewfinder ...................................................................
Recording shot data superimposed on the color bars....................
Setting the shot ID.........................................................................
Displaying the status confirmation screens...................................
213
213
214
215
216
217
217
218
Adjustments and Settings from Menus.................................................. 220
Setting gain values for the GAIN selector positions..................... 220
Selecting the output signals........................................................... 220
8
Table of Contents
Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches ....................................
Setting power saving functions .....................................................
Setting up a wireless LAN ............................................................
Setting the color temperature manually ........................................
Specifying an offset for the auto white balance setting ................
Selecting the lens file ....................................................................
Setting the UMID data ..................................................................
221
224
224
227
227
228
228
Chapter 7 : Saving and Loading User Setting Data
Handling the “Memory Stick”................................................................ 230
Saving and Recalling User Files .............................................................
Saving user menu data to the “Memory Stick”.............................
Loading saved data from a “Memory Stick”.................................
Returning the user file settings to the standard settings................
231
231
233
234
Saving and Loading Scene Files .............................................................
Saving a scene file.........................................................................
Loading scene files........................................................................
Returning the scene file settings to the standard settings..............
234
234
236
237
Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page When Inserting a “Memory Stick”
............................................................................................................. 237
Chapter 8 : File Operations
Overview ................................................................................................... 239
Directory structure ........................................................................ 239
File operation restrictions.............................................................. 240
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Windows) ............................
Making FAM connections.............................................................
Operating on files..........................................................................
Exiting file operations ...................................................................
245
245
246
246
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Macintosh) ..........................
Making FAM connections.............................................................
Operating on files..........................................................................
Exiting file operations ...................................................................
247
247
248
248
FTP File Operations ................................................................................ 249
Making FTP connections .............................................................. 249
Command list ................................................................................ 250
Recording Continuous Timecode with FAM and FTP Connections .. 255
Table of Contents
9
Chapter 9 : Maintenance
Testing the Camcorder before Shooting................................................
Preparations for testing .................................................................
Testing the camera ........................................................................
Testing the VDR ...........................................................................
256
256
256
258
Maintenance ............................................................................................. 260
Cleaning the viewfinder ................................................................ 260
Note about the battery terminal..................................................... 261
Operation Warnings ................................................................................ 262
Appendix
Important Notes on Operation ............................................................... 270
Specifications............................................................................................
General ..........................................................................................
Video camera section ....................................................................
Optical disc drive section ..............................................................
Supplied accessories......................................................................
Recommended additional equipment............................................
272
272
272
273
274
274
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories .................................. 276
Using PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software ................................................ 277
List of Supported USB Keyboards ......................................................... 278
Recommended USB Flash Drives (As of June 2009) ............................ 281
Trademarks and Licenses .......................................................................
MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License .....................................
MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio License......................................
About IJG (Independent JPEG Group) .........................................
Character display software “iType” ..............................................
About libupnp................................................................................
About OpenSSL ............................................................................
281
281
281
282
282
282
282
About a “Memory Stick” ........................................................................ 286
Index.......................................................................................................... 288
10
Table of Contents
Foreword
Before use
After purchasing this unit, before operating, it is
necessary to set the region of use.
(Unless this setting is made, the unit will not
operate.)
For details of these settings, see “Setting the Area of
Use” on page 43.
Note
Before attaching/removing optional components or
accessories to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn the
power of the camcorder off.
Marks for model-specific
functions
In this manual, functions that are supported only
by the PDW-F800 or only by the PDW-700 are
indicated by the following marks.
[F800]: PDW-F800
[700]: PDW-700
Foreword
11
Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter
1 Overview
Features
New 2/3-inch full-HD “PowerHAD FX”
CCDs
• IT (Interline Transfer) 2/3-inch progressive
image sensors with 2.2 million pixels, for full
HD resolution (1920 &times; 1080)
• Newly developed “PowerHAD FX” CCDs,
featuring a signal processing ASIC with 14-bit
A/D converters
These new image sensor technologies enable the
capture of very high-quality images, with F11
(59.94i) and F12 (50i) sensitivity and an SN ratio
of 59 dB. 1)
1) The PDW-700 requires installation of the optional
CBKZ-FC02 23.98P Record and Playback Software
and a verification key. For details, contact a Sony
service representative.
2) When the current recording format is 720/59.94P, you
can shoot in 23.98P mode. However, as soon as it is
shot, the video undergoes 2-3 pulldown and is
recorded as 59.94P.
3) The PDW-700 requires installation of the optional
CBKZ-MD01 SD Record and Playback Software and
a verification key. For details, contact a Sony service
representative.
Note
1) With noise suppression on (off value is 54 dB)
Noise suppression uses proprietary Sony signal
processing technology to suppress noise in highfrequency regions.
It is not possible to combine material recorded in
different frame frequency groups on single disc (see
page 59).
Mechanisms for high reliability
Recording of more than 90 minutes of
high-quality video and audio data
A new duct cooling system prevents overheating
inside the unit and on its surfaces, for greater
reliability in high-temperature environments.
Reliability is also enhanced by the drip-proof
design.
Recording can continue even when the unit is
subjected to jarring shocks, because data is stored
in shockproof memory before being recorded to
the media. Reliable recording is ensured by a
recording verification function, similar to the
confidence playback function of tape recorders,
qualifying the unit for use in demanding
broadcast applications.
Multi-format support
The unit supports six system frequencies (1080/
59.94i, 1080/29.97P, 1080/50i, 1080/25P, 1080/
23.98P 1), 720/59.94P 2), and 720/50p), offering
the flexibility needed for worldwide HD
recording. It also supports recording and
playback of SD signals (both NTSC and PAL) 3),
12
allowing a stepwise transition from SD to HD
systems.
A multi-format conversion function enables upand down-conversion between SD and HD, and
cross-conversion between 1080 and 720.
Squeeze, edge cropping, and letterbox are
selectable as the aspect pattern in up- and downconversion between SD and HD.
Features
• Signals captured by the full-HD (1920 &times; 1080)
image sensors are recorded in MPEG HD422
format 1) for consistently high image quality. 2)
• The unit supports recording of four audio
channels 3) sampled at 24 bits for high quality.
• Dual-layer Professional discs can record about
95 minutes of high-quality video and audio
data.
The generous recording times and the highquality of the recorded video and audio allow this
unit to meet the most stringent requirements of
production teams in a wide range of genres, from
news gathering through digital cinema and
program production.
The unit supports a variety of HD formats,
including formats with 720 lines of resolution.
1) The MPEG-2 422P@HL codec performs 4:2:2
sampling and records at a video bit rate of 50 Mbps.
2) Image compression uses the MPEG-2 Long GOP
system.
3) The PDW-HD1500 supports recording of up to eight
channels in MPEG HD422 format.
The unit is capable of recording in the MPEG-2
MP@HL 35/25 Mbps formats used by earlier
XDCAM HD devices. These formats offer longer
recording times than the MPEG-2 422P@HL 50
Mbps format.
It is also capable of recording and playback in the
MPEG IMX 50/40/30 Mbps and DVCAM 25
Mbps formats. 1)
1) The PDW-700 requires installation of the optional
CBKZ-MD01 SD Record and Playback Software and
a verification key. For details, contact a Sony service
representative.
Rich selection of interfaces
• HDSDI and SDSDI output connectors: Allow
free combination of HDSDI and SDSDI signals.
Timecode and other text data can be
superimposed on signals from one of the two
interfaces.
• Composite signal output connector
• Selectable video input connectors: The unit is
designed to support recording in every type of
environment, including reporting by pool
coverage teams. The optional CBK-HD01 HD/
SD SDI Input Board or CBK-SC02 Analog
Composite Input Board can be installed to
enable selection of HD SDI/SD SDI or
composite signals. SD signals can be
upconverted and recorded as HD signals.
• Gen-lock input connector: Enables
synchronized operation of multiple units, with
synchronization possible to either VBS or HDY signals.
• Audio input connectors: Supports AES/EBU
signal input, in addition to microphone input,
+48 V microphone input, and line input.
• Timecode input and output connectors
• Network connector and i.LINK connector:
Enable transfer of MXF-format files. Material
recorded in the field can be transferred to a
computer for immediate cut editing with the
supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software
Version 2.7.
• USB connector: Enables use of a Windows
USB keyboard or mouse. You can also connect
a USB flash drive to record proxy data or load
planning metadata, or connect the optional
Features for improved performance
under various shooting conditions
Picture Cache function
The unit can utilize its internal memory to
continuously record the current video input,
allowing recording to commence a certain time (2
to 30 seconds) in advance of the time when the
recording button is pressed, and allowing discs to
be exchanged seamlessly without interrupting the
recording.
Chapter 1 Overview
Format compatibility with earlier models
CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi adapter to connect to a
wireless LAN network.
[F800]
Two optical filters
The unit is equipped with separate CC filters and
ND filters. Two filters can be used
simultaneously.
[700]
Color temperature filters
Color temperature filters are composed of
electronic circuits, allowing smooth and
instantaneous switching – an important advantage
in ENG (Electronic News Gathering) – and linked
operation with ND filters. Dedicated switches are
provided to enable rapid switching between color
temperature filters, and absolute color
temperature settings can be recalled instantly
without being effected by white balance settings.
Noise suppression circuits
New noise suppression circuits offer improved
performance under difficult evening or nighttime
shooting conditions.
Slow shutter function
A maximum of 16 frames can be accumulated
using the slow shutter function. In low light levels
this allows clear and noiseless video to be shot,
and provides a fantasy video effect with ghost
images.
Time lapse function (interval recording)
Using this function slow-moving subjects can be
shot with the movement compressed in time. This
is convenient for many applications, such as
monitoring plant growth, or the progress of a
construction site.
Features
13
Chapter 1 Overview
[F800]
Slow &amp; quick motion function 1)
This function allows the shooting frame rate to be
different from the playback frame rate, for the
same effect as overcranking or undercranking a
film camera. Unlike low-speed or high-speed
playback of normally shot video, this provides a
smooth slow-motion effect, or action speeded up
beyond actual speed.
1) This function is available when the recording format is
MPEG HD422, 50 Mbps, and the resolution/system
frequency is 1080/23.98P, 1080/25P, or 1080/29.97P.
Freeze Mix function
This allows a still image from previously
captured video to be aligned with the current
video output from the camera. Thus you can
adjust the camera position to get exactly the same
framing for new shots. For example, this function
makes it easy to frame summer and winter shots
of a landscape scene in exactly the same way.
Digital extender function
This magnifies the center section of the video. It
utilizes electronic processing, which prevents the
decrease in sensitivity (F-drop) that occurs when
the lens extender function is used.
Focus magnification function
This magnifies the center section of the
viewfinder by a factor of about two. It enables
highly precise focus adjustments in HD shooting.
[F800]
Image inversion function 1)
This cancels the image inversion that can occur
when a cinema lens converter is mounted.
1) This function is available when the resolution/system
frequency is 1080/23.98P, 1080/25P, or 1080/29.97P.
Assignable switches
Frequently used function can be assigned to
switches for quick and convenient operation.
Hyper gamma
This enables a wide dynamic range without using
the Knee function, by smoothly compressing the
high-luminance range.
Supports new digital wireless
microphone system
The new digital wireless microphone system
offers high-quality, superior resistance to noise,
and simultaneous multi-channel operation.
Installation of the DWR-S01D Digital Wireless
14
Features
Receiver 1) enables simultaneous reception of two
channels.
1) These products are not available in countries where
they are prohibited by radio frequency regulations.
3.5-inch color LCD monitor
The 3.5-inch color LCD monitor displays easyto-read audio meters, menus, disc and battery
capacity indications, and thumbnails of clips
stored on disc.
Inherits unique features of XDCAM series
The unit inherits the workflow features of the
XDCAM series, including thumbnail display and
metadata management, and improves them by
introducing an improved man-machine interface.
Metadata includes new user-settable clip flags
(OK/NG/KEEP) in addition to the existing Rec
Start essence marks. The new metadata types
enable more efficient workflows when clips
recorded on this unit are edited on nonlinear
editing systems.
Power supply
c DC IN (DC power input) connector
(XLR type, 4-pin, male)
To operate the camcorder from an AC power
supply, connect an optional DC power cord to this
terminal and then connect the cord to the DC
output terminal of the BC-L70, BC-L160, or
another battery charger.
d DC OUT 12V (DC power output)
connector (4-pin, female)
Chapter 1 Overview
Locations and Functions
of Parts and Controls
Supplies power for a WRR-860A/861/862 UHF
Synthesized Diversity Tuner (not supplied)
(maximum 0.5 A).
Do not connect any equipment other than the
UHF synthesized diversity tuner.
e Battery attachment shoe
Attach a BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S Battery
Pack. Alternatively, you can attach an ACDN2B/DN10 AC Adaptor to operate the
camcorder on AC power supply.
1
2
3
4 5
a LIGHT switch
Determines how a video light connected to the
LIGHT connector (see page 16) is turned on and
off.
AUTO: When the POWER switch of the video
light is in the on position, the video light is
turned on automatically while the camcorder
is recording.
MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off
manually, using its own switch.
For details about how to attach the battery or AC
adaptor, see “Preparing a Power Supply” on page
38. For information about attaching a synthesized
tuner, see “Attaching a UHF portable tuner (for a
UHF wireless microphone system)” on page 49.
Note
For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the
camcorder, Sony recommends the use of the following
battery packs: BP-GL95, BP-GL65, BP-L60S, and BPL80S.
Notes
• When this switch is set to AUTO, at the beginning of
the recording, the picture is recorded even though the
lighting may fluctuate until the video light comes on.
If the beginning of the recording is important, you
should set this switch to MANUAL.
• To ensure proper operation of the video light, Sony
recommends the use of the BP-GL95/L80S Battery
Pack with the camcorder.
b POWER switch
Turns the main power supply on and off.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
15
f VF (viewfinder) connector (20-pin)
Accessory attachments
Chapter 1 Overview
1
Connect an optional viewfinder.
23 4567
Consult a Sony representative for information about
available viewfinders.
g Lens mount securing rubber
After locking the lens in position using the lens
locking lever, fit this rubber over the lower of the
two projections. This fixes the lens mount,
preventing it from coming loose.
h Viewfinder front-to-back positioning
knob (LOCK knob)
Loosen this knob to adjust the front-to-back
position of the viewfinder (see page 40).
i Fitting for optional microphone holder
8 9 0 qa qs qd qf qgqh qj qk
Fit an optional CAC-12 Microphone Holder (see
page 48).
j Shoulder pad
ql
Raise the shoulder pad fixing lever to adjust the
position in the front-to-rear direction. Adjust the
position for maximum convenience when
operating the unit on your shoulder.
For details of the adjustment, see “Adjusting the
Shoulder Pad Position” on page 54.
k LIGHT (video light) connector (2-pin,
female)
a Shoulder strap fitting
Attach the supplied shoulder strap (see page 53).
b Accessory fitting shoe
Attach an optional accessory such as a video light
(see page 53).
c Viewfinder front-to-back positioning
lever
To adjust the viewfinder position in the front-toback direction, loosen this lever and the LOCK
knob. After adjustment, retighten this lever and
the LOCK knob.
d Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
Loosen this ring to adjust the left-to-right position
of the viewfinder (see page 40).
e Viewfinder fitting shoe
Attach an optional viewfinder.
16
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
A video light with a maximum power
consumption of 50 W, such as the Anton Bauer
Ultralight 2 or equivalent can be connected (see
page 53).
l Lens cable clamp
Clamp a lens cable.
m MIC IN (microphone input) (+48 V)
connector (XLR type, 5-pin, female)
Connect a stereo microphone to this connector.
The power (+48 V) is supplied via this connector.
n LENS connector (12-pin)
Connect a lens cable to this connector.
Note
When connecting the lens cable to this connector,
power off this unit first.
o Tripod mount
p Lens mount (special bayonet mount)
Operating and connectors section
Chapter 1 Overview
When using the unit on a tripod, attach the tripod
adaptor (optional).
Front
Attach the lens.
Consult a Sony representative for information about
available lenses.
q Lens locking lever
After inserting the lens in the lens mount, rotate
the lens mount ring with this lever to lock the lens
in position.
After locking the lens, be sure to use the lens
mount securing rubber to prevent the lens from
becoming detached.
3
r Lens mount cap
Remove by pushing up the lens locking lever.
When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for
protection from dust.
4
1
2
5
6
7
s CA (camera adapter) connector (50pin)
a REC START (recording start) button
Remove the connector cover, and connect the 50pin connector of the HDCA-702 MPEG TS
Adaptor.
Press to start recording. Press it again to stop
recording. The effect is the same as that of the
REC button on the lens.
Refer to the Operation Manual of the HDCA-702 for
more information about how to mount it.
b SHUTTER selector
Set to ON to use the electronic shutter. Flick to
SELECT to switch the shutter speed or shutter
mode setting within the range previously set with
the menu. When this switch is operated, the new
setting appears on the setting change/adjustment
progress message display area for about three
seconds.
For details about the shutter speed and shutter mode
settings, see “Setting the Electronic Shutter” on
page 66.
c FILTER selector
Switches between optical filters built into this
unit.
When this selector is used with the menu item for
filter selection display set to ON (see page 214),
the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen
for about three seconds.
[F800]
The PDW-F800 is equipped with two switchable
filters. You can switch between four electrical CC
filters and four ND filters.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
17
Chapter 1 Overview
FILTER selector
(outer knob) setting
A
B
C
D
CC filter
Cross filter a)
3200K
4300K
6300K
a) A type of special effect filter. A cross of light appears
in the highlight section.
FILTER selector
(inner knob) setting
1
2
3
ND filter
CLEAR (no filter)
1/ ND (reduces the
4
amount of light to about
1/
4)
1/
16 ND(reduces the
amount of light to about
1/
4
16)
1/
64 ND(reduces the
amount of light to about
1/
64)
[700]
The PDW-700 is equipped with one switchable
filter. It is possible to switch between four ND
filters.
FILTER selector
setting
1
2
ND filter
CLEAR
1/
4 ND
(attenuates light
to approximately 1/4)
3
4
1/
16 ND (attenuates light
to approximately 1/16)
1/ ND (attenuates light
64
to approximately 1/64)
For the PDW-700, you can change a
MAINTENANCE menu setting so that different
white balance settings can be stored for different
FILTER selector positions. This allows you to
automatically obtain optimum white balance for
the current shooting conditions in linkage with
the filter selection.
For details, see “Adjusting the white balance” on
page 61.
18
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
d MENU knob
Changes the page selection or a setting within the
menu.
For details about how to use the MENU knob, see
“Menu Operations” on page 205.
e EARPHONE jack (monaural,
minijack)
You can monitor the E-E 1) sound during
recording and playback sound during playback.
When an alarm is indicated, you can hear the
alarm sound through the earphone. You can use
this with the EARPHONE jack on the rear of the
unit at the same time. Plugging an earphone into
the jack automatically cuts off the built-in
speaker.
1) E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric”. In E-E
mode, video and audio signals input to the camcorder
are output after passing through internal electric
circuits only. This can be used to check input signals.
f AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/
black balance adjustment) switch
Activates the automatic white/black balance
adjustment functions.
WHT: Adjusts the white balance automatically.
If the WHITE BAL switch (see page 20) is
set to A or B, the white balance setting is
stored in the corresponding memory. If the
WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST, the
automatic white balance adjustment function
does not operate.
BLK: Adjusts the black set and black balance
automatically.
g MIC (microphone) LEVEL control
Adjusts the input level of audio channels 1, 2, 3
and 4.
For details, see “Adjusting the Audio Level” on page
72.
[700]
Right side (near the front)
2 3 4
5
Press to light the button and change the color
temperature for shooting. You can use this as an
ASSIGN (assignable) switch (see page 221).
c ALARM (alarm tone volume
adjustment) knob
Controls the volume of the warning tone that is
output via the built-in speaker or optional
earphones. When the knob is turned to the
minimum position, no sound can be heard.
However, if the MIN ALARM VOL item on the
AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu is
set to SET, the alarm tone is audible even when
this volume control is at the minimum position.
6 78 9
0
qa
Chapter 1 Overview
1
b COLOR TEMP. (color temperature)
button
qs
ALARM
MENU
STATUS
ON/
SEL
OFF
CANCEL/PRST
ON
ESCAPE
Minimum
Maximum
OFF
qd
qf
a ASSIGN (assignable) 1/2 switches
You can assign the desired functions to these
switches on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the
OPERATION menu.
Nothing is assigned to these switches when the
camcorder is shipped from the factory (equivalent
to a selection of OFF in the menu).
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN
switches” on page 221.
[F800]
b ASSIGN (assignable) 5 switch
You can assign the desired functions to these
switches on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the
OPERATION menu.
Nothing is assigned to these switches when the
camcorder is shipped from the factory (equivalent
to a selection of OFF in the menu).
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN
switches” on page 221.
d MONITOR (monitor volume
adjustment) knob
Controls the volume of the sound other than the
warning tone that is output via the built-in speaker
or optional earphones. When the knob is turned to
the minimum position, no sound can be heard.
e MONITOR (audio monitor selection)
switches
By means of combinations of the two switches,
you can select audio that you want to hear through
the built-in speaker or optional earphones.
Position of down-side switch: CH-1/2
Position of up-side
switch
CH-1/CH-3
MIX
Audio output
Channel 1 audio
Channels 1 and 2 mixed
CH-2/CH-4
audio (stereo) a)
Channel 2 audio
Position of down-side switch: CH-3/4
Position of up-side
switch
CH-1/CH-3
MIX
Audio output
Channel 3 audio
Channels 3 and 4 mixed
CH-2/CH-4
audio (stereo) a)
Channel 4 audio
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
19
Chapter 1 Overview
a) By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE
jack on the rear of the unit, you can hear the audio in
stereo. (On the AUDIO-1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, HEADPHONE OUT must
be set to STEREO.)
f VDR SAVE/STBY (VDR save/standby)
switch
Switches the status of the power supply to the
VDR while recording is stopped (STOP) or
paused (REC PAUSE).
SAVE: The disc stops rotating and some
functions are disabled. Power consumption is
lower than when the camcorder is in STBY
mode. Battery life is extended.
STBY: Recording to the disc starts immediately
when the REC START button is pressed.
Note
An internal operating sound may be recorded at the start
of recording when the VDR SAVE/STBY switch is set to
SAVE.
g GAIN selector
Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match
the lighting conditions during shooting. The gains
corresponding to the L, M, and H settings can be
selected in the menu. (The factory settings are
L=0 dB, M=6 dB, and H=12 dB.)
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting
appears on the setting change/adjustment
progress message display area of the viewfinder
screen for about three seconds.
For details, see “Setting gain values for the GAIN
selector positions” on page 220.
h OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic
contrast control) switch
Switches the video signal, which is output to the
video disc drive (referred to as “VDR”),
viewfinder, and video monitor from the camera
section, between the following two.
BARS: Outputs the color bar signal.
CAM: Outputs the video signal from the camera.
When this is selected, you can switch DCC 1)
on and off.
1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control): Against a very
bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the
subject, objects in the background will be lost in the
glare. The DCC function will suppress the high
intensity and restore much of the lost detail and is
particularly effective in the following cases.
• Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day
20
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
• Shooting a subject indoors, against a background
through a window
• Any high contrast scene
i WHITE BAL (white balance memory)
switch
Controls adjustment of the white balance.
PRST: Adjusts the color temperature to the preset
value (the factory default setting: 3200K).
Use this setting when you have no time to
adjust the white balance.
A or B: Recall the white balance adjustment
settings already stored in A or B. Flick the
AUTO W/B BAL switch (see page 18) on the
WHT side, to automatically adjust the white
balance, and save the adjustment settings in
memory A or memory B.
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch
even when ATW 1) is in use.
B (ATW): When this switch is set to B and
WHITE SWITCH &lt;B&gt; is set to ATW on the
WHITE SETTING page of the
OPERATION menu, ATW is activated.
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting
appears on the setting change/adjustment
progress message display area of the viewfinder
screen for about three seconds.
1) ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance): The white
balance of the picture being shot is adjusted
automatically for varying lighting conditions.
j STATUS ON/SEL/OFF (menu display
on/page selection/display off) switch
To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to OFF.
Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU
ON/OFF switch to OFF.
ON/SEL: Each time this switch is pushed
upward, a window to confirm the menu
settings and status of the camcorder appears
on the viewfinder screen. The window
consists of four pages, which are switched
each time the switch is pushed upward. Each
page is displayed for about 10 seconds.
OFF: To clear the page immediately after
display, push this switch down to the OFF
position.
You can select the pages to be displayed on the
menu.
For details, see “Displaying the status confirmation
screens” on page 218.
k MENU ON/OFF switch
For details about “Memory Stick”, see “Handling
the “Memory Stick”” on page 230.
n Cover
Right side (near the rear)
l CANCEL/PRST (preset)/ESCAPE
switch
To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to ON.
Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU
ON/OFF switch to OFF.
CANCEL/PRST: Flicking this switch up to this
position displays the message to confirm
whether the previous settings are cancelled or
settings are reset to their initial values,
depending on the menu operating condition.
Flicking this switch up to this position again
cancels the previous settings or resets the
settings to their initial values.
ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page,
which has a hierarchical structure, is opened.
Each time the switch is flicked to this
position, the page returns to one stage higher
in the hierarchy.
m “Memory Stick” compartment
Chapter 1 Overview
To use this switch, open the cover.
This switch is used to display the menu on the
viewfinder screen or the test signal screen.
Closing the cover automatically sets this switch to
OFF.
ON: Displays the menu on the viewfinder screen
or the test signal screen.
OFF: Removes the menu from the viewfinder
screen or the test signal screen.
8
9
q;
qa
EJECT
F REV
PLAY/PAUSE
F FWD
Z
m
NX
M
PREV
STOP
NEXT
.
x
&gt;
qs
qd
qf
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
qg
qh
DISP SEL HOLD
EXPAND
qj
qk
ql
RESET
DISPLAY
BRIGHT
CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER TC U-BIT
a Built-in speaker
Label
“Memory Stick” Access indicator
Open the cover of the menu operating section,
and insert a “Memory Stick”, with the notch
facing downward, in the direction shown by the
arrow, so that it clicks into place.
To remove a “Memory Stick”, first press it in to
release the lock, then withdraw.
The “Memory Stick” access indicator lights in
green when a “Memory Stick” is loaded, and
lights in red when the “Memory Stick” is being
accessed for reading or writing.
The speaker can be used to monitor E-E sound
during recording, and playback sound during
playback. The speaker also sounds alarms to
reinforce visual warnings.
If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE
jack, the speaker output is suppressed
automatically.
For details about alarms, see “Operation Warnings”
on page 262.
b LCD monitor
Displays camera video, VDR-related warnings,
remaining battery capacity, remaining disc
capacity, audio levels, time data, and so on.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
21
For details, see “Status Display on the LCD monitor
and monochrome LCD” on page 23.
Chapter 1 Overview
c WARNING indicator
Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs
in the VDR section.
For details about the meaning of the states of the
WARNING indicator, see “Operation Warnings” on
page 262.
k F FWD (fast forward) button and
indicator
d ACCESS indicator
This plays back at high speed in the forward
direction. The indicator lights during high-speed
playback in the forward direction.
This lights when data is written to or read from
the disc.
l PREV button
e Protection cover of the audio control
section
Open to access the audio control section (see page
27).
f Protection cover of the GUI screen
operations section
Open to access the GUI screen operations section
(see page 27).
g Monochrome LCD
This shows the remaining battery capacity,
remaining disc capacity, time data, and so on.
For details, see “Status Display on the LCD monitor
and monochrome LCD” on page 23.
h EJECT button and indicator
Press this button to insert a disc or eject the disc.
The indicator flashes while the disc is being
ejected.
i F REV (fast reverse) button and
indicator
This plays back at high speed in the reverse
direction. The indicator lights during high-speed
playback in the reverse direction.
j PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator
Press this button to view play back video images
using the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor.
The indicator lights during playback.
Press this button again during playback to pause,
outputting a still image. At this time the indicator
flashes.
This unit is equipped with an image search
function at approximately four times normal
playback speed, for easy checking of recorded
material. To use the image search function at
22
approximately four times normal playback speed,
press the F REV button or F FWD button during
playback.
At this time the PLAY indicator and F REV or F
FWD indicator light.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
This jumps to the first frame of the current clip.
During the jump, the F REV indicator flashes.
If you press this together with the F REV button,
the jump is to the first frame of the first recorded
clip on the disc.
m STOP button
Press this button to stop disc playback.
n NEXT button
This jumps to the first frame of the next clip.
During the jump, the F FWD indicator flashes.
If you press this together with the F FWD button,
the jump is to the last frame of the last recorded
clip on the disc.
o DISP SEL (display selection) /EXPAND
(expand function) button
With each press of this button, the display in the
LCD monitor changes as follows.
Display indication
Video with
superimposed
information (CHAR)
Video without
superimposed
information (MONI)
Status display
(STATUS)
Meaning
The LCD monitor displays
the same text information
as the viewfinder.
The video only appears.
Counter indications,
warnings, audio levels, and
similar information appear.
No video image appears.
If you press this button when the thumbnail
screen is displayed, the duration of the selected
clip is divided into 12, and the first frame of each
of the divisions is shown in a further thumbnail
display (expand function). Each time you press
this button, the division is repeated (to a
maximum of three times, with 1,728 divisions).
information for the user such as scene number,
shooting place, etc.
For details of the expand function, see page 122.
For details, see “Setting the Time Data” on page 75.
p HOLD (display hold)/CHAPTER
(chapter function) button
This button returns to the previous screen when
pressed during thumbnail display.
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data
displayed in the counter display section. (The
timecode generator continues running.) Pressing
this button again releases the hold.
You can use this button, for example, to
determine the exact time of a particular shot.
For details, see “GUI screen operations” on page
120.
For details of the counter display, see page 25.
If you press this button when the clip thumbnail
screen is displayed, those frames on which shot
marks are recorded appear in a list (chapter
function). Press the button once more to return to
the normal thumbnail display.
By displaying thumbnails with shot marks
attached in place of index frames, you can check
the contents of clips more easily and more
quickly. This is also useful for cueing up long
clips.
For details of the chapter function, see page 122
q RESET/RETURN button
Resets the value shown in the time counter
display. According to the settings of the PRESET/
REGEN/CLOCK switch (see page 27) and the FRUN/SET/R-RUN switch (see page 27), this
button resets the display as follows.
Settings of switches
DISPLAY switch:
COUNTER
DISPLAY switch:
TC
PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch:
PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
switch: SET
DISPLAY switch:
U-BIT
PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch:
PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
switch: SET
To reset
Counter to 0:00:00:00
Timecode to 00:00:00:00
User bits data a) to 00 00 00
00
Chapter 1 Overview
Hold down the SHIFT button and press this
button to step back through the division process.
r DISPLAY switch
This cycles the data displayed in the counter
display through the sequence COUNTER, TC,
and U-BIT.
COUNTER: Display the elapsed recording/
playback time (hours, minutes, seconds,
frames).
TC: Display timecode.
U-BIT: Display user bit data.
For details, see “Status Display on the LCD monitor
and monochrome LCD” on page 23.
s BRIGHT (brightness) button
Switches the brightness of the LCD monitor
backlight, and turns the backlight of the
monochrome LCD on and off.
Each press of the button selects the next setting in
the order shown in the following table.
Setting LCD monitor
backlight
H
High (select this to view
the LCD monitor
outdoors in the
daytime)
M
Brightness between H
and L
L
Low (select this to view
the LCD monitor
indoors or outdoors at
night)
OFF
Off (the display is also
off)
Monochrome
LCD backlight
Lit
Lit
Lit
Off
Status Display on the LCD monitor and
monochrome LCD
The following display appears on the LCD
monitor display which is set to STATUS with the
DISP SEL/EXPAND button, and on the
monochrome LCD.
a) Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the
disc, those bits which can be used to record useful
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
23
If NTSC AREA is selected 1)
Chapter 1 Overview
1 2
6
7
3
H D422 5 0
1080
PB
59.9i
NDF
MIN
59.9i
OVER
0
24bit
EXT-LK
Indication
5
HOLD
01 .. 23 .. 45 .. 15
H
8
9
4
SEC
59.9P
10
20
FRM
29.9P
WARNING:HUMID
30
40
DISC E
BATT E
B
F
1
ST
2
dB
PEAK
3
4
23.9P a)
Field or frame
rate
59.94 fields per
second
59.94 frames per
second
29.97 frames per
second
23.98 frames per
second
Scan mode
Interlace
Progressive
Progressive
Progressive
0
a) For the PDW-700, when the optional CBKZ-FC02
23.98P Record and Playback Software is installed.
LCD monitor
If PAL AREA is selected 1)
7
Indication
9
50i
0
Monochrome LCD
50P
25P
a Resolution
Field or frame
rate
50 fields per
second
50 frames per
second
25 frames per
second
Scan mode
Interlace
Progressive
Progressive
Indicates the resolution of HD output video.
Indication
1080
720
Resolution (horizontal &times; vertical)
1080 lines (1920 &times; 1080)
720 lines (1280 &times; 720)
b Video format
Indicates the format of video being currently
played back or recorded.
Indication
Format
HD422 50
MPEG HD422
HD420 HQ/SP/ MPEG HD420
Bit rate
50 Mbps
35/25/18 Mbps
LP a)
IMX 50/40/
MPEG IMX
50/40/30 Mbps
DVCAM
25 Mbps
a) LP is playback only.
b) For the PDW-700, when the optional CBKZ-MD01
SD Record and Playback Software is installed.
24
Note
There may be no indication displayed when this unit
cannot identify the system frequency, for example, when
playing back a disc recorded with other equipment.
d Audio format
Indicates the format of audio being currently
played back or recorded.
Indication
30 b)
DVCAM b)
1) Selected by COUNTRY setting on the FORMAT page
of the OPERATION menu (see page 167).
24bit
16bit
Quantization bit rate/sampling
frequency
24 bits/48 kHz
16 bits/48 kHz
e Audio level indicators
Indicates the audio recording or playback levels
of channels 1 to 4.
c System frequency
f Status display
Indicates the system frequency of video being
currently played back or recorded.
PB: Appears during playback.
NDF: Appears when non-drop-frame timecode is
selected.
EXT-LK: Appears when the internal timecode
generator is locked to an external signal input
to the TC IN (timecode input) connector.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Chapter 1 Overview
HOLD: Appears when the internal timecode
generator is stopped.
g Time counter display
Switches displays of time counter, timecode, and
user bits, depending on the position of the
DISPLAY switch.
When the HOLD/CHAPTER button is pressed to
hold the timecode value, the timecode is
displayed in the format shown below. When the
HOLD/CHAPTER button is pressed again to
release the hold, the timecode is displayed in the
normal format.
Lights when the HOLD/CHAPTER button
is pressed.
h Warning indicator area
Displays warnings when trouble with recording
or moisture condensation occurs.
For details, see “Operation Warnings” on page 262.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
25
i Remaining disc capacity indicator
Chapter 1 Overview
Indication
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B (flashing)
DISC E [x x x x x x x] B (flashing)
Remaining recording time
More than 30 minutes
25 to 30 minutes
20 to 25 minutes
15 to 20 minutes
10 to 15 minutes
5 to 10 minutes
2 to 5 minutes
0 to 2 minutes
0 minutes
j Remaining battery capacity indicator
Indication
Battery voltage
BP-L90A/L60S/L80S
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
15.5 V or more
15.1 to 15.5 V
14.6 to 15.1 V
13.8 to 14.6 V
12.9 to 13.8 V
12.0 to 12.9 V
10.8 to 12.0 V
10.8 V or less
Other batteries a)
17.0 V or more
16.0 to 17.0 V
15.0 to 16.0 V
14.0 to 15.0 V
13.0 to 14.0 V
12.0 to 13.0 V
11.0 to 12.0 V
11.0 V or less
a) You can change the threshold voltages on the
BATTERY 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu
(see page 182).
Indication
BATT E [x x x x x x x] F
BATT E [x x x x x x x]
BATT E [x x x x x x x]
BATT E [x x x x x x x]
BATT E [x x x x x x x]
BATT E [x x x x x x x]
BATT E [x x x x x x x]
BATT E [x x x x x x x]
BATT E [x x x x x x x]
26
Battery voltage
BP-GL95/GL65/IL75/M100, Anton Bauer Battery
System
80 to 100%
70%
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
10%
0%
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
GUI screen operations section and audio control
section
2 3 4 5
6
LEVEL
THUMBNAIL
MENU
0
10
0
10
CH-3
ESSENCE
MARK
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
SET
F
R
W
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
SUB CLIP
S.SEL
CH-1
PRESET
DISC MENU
7
8
SHIFT
REGEN
CLOCK
9 0 qa
CH-2
CH-4
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
F
R
W
qs
a THUMBNAIL indicator
This lights when thumbnails are displayed.
b THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK
button
Press this button to carry out a thumbnail search
or create a clip list (see page 121).
When pressed, the whole-screen display changes
to a thumbnail display. Press once more to return
to the whole-screen display.
For a thumbnail search using essence marks, hold
down the SHIFT button and press this button (see
page 123).
c SET/S.SEL (set/scene selection) button
and arrow buttons
Use these buttons to make timecode and user bit
settings, and for GUI screen operations.
The arrow buttons select items and change values,
and the SET/S.SEL button confirms settings.
Pressing this button with thumbnails displayed
and the SHIFT button held down adds a sub clip
to the current clip list (scene selection).
See page 120 for more information about GUI screen
operations.
See page 132 for more information about scene
selection.
d MENU button
Displays a special menu for operations in GUI
screens (see page 116).
When the whole-screen is displayed, pressing this
button has no effect, and the operation is invalid.
Selects the operating mode of the internal
timecode generator. The operating mode is set as
explained below, depending on the position of the
switch.
F-RUN: Timecode keeps advancing, regardless
of the operating state of the VDR. Use this
setting when synchronizing the timecode
with an external timecode.
SET: Sets the timecode or user bits.
R-RUN: Timecode advances only during
recording. Use this setting to have a
consecutive timecode on the disc.
Chapter 1 Overview
1
e F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/
recording run) switch
For details, see “Setting the timecode” on page 75
and “Setting the user bits” on page 75.
f LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel 1/2
recording level) knobs
Adjusts the audio levels to be recorded on
channels 1 and 2 when the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH-2 switches are set to MANUAL.
g SUB CLIP indicator
This lights when using a clip list for playback.
h SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button
Press this to play back according to a clip list.
You can play back a particular clip or sequential
clips, or carry out a search of the selected clip list.
To display the Disc Menu which allows you to
carry out operations such as saving, recalling, or
deleting a clip list, hold down the SHIFT button
and press this button.
i SHIFT button
Use this in combination with other buttons.
j PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/
CLOCK switch
Selects whether to set a new timecode or to utilize
the existing timecode.
PRESET: Records a new timecode.
REGEN: Records timecode continuous with the
existing timecode recorded on the disc.
Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/
R-RUN switch, the camcorder operates in RRUN mode.
CLOCK: Records timecode synchronized to the
internal clock. Regardless of the setting of
the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the
camcorder operates in F-RUN mode.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
27
Chapter 1 Overview
k AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 (audio
channel 1/2 adjustment method
selection) switches
Select the audio level adjustment method for each
of audio channels 1 and 2.
AUTO: Automatic adjustment
MANUAL: Manual adjustment
l AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4
(audio channel 1/2/3/4 input selection)
switches
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
Select the audio input signals to be recorded on
audio channels 1 and 2.
FRONT: Audio input signals from the
microphone connected to the MIC IN
connector
REAR: Audio input signals from an audio device
connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2
connectors
WIRELESS: Audio input signals from the UHF
portable tuner (not supplied) if it is installed
AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 switches
Select the audio input signals to be recorded on
audio channels 3 and 4.
F (FRONT): Audio input signals from a
microphone connected to the MIC IN
connector
R (REAR): Audio input signals from an audio
device connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/
CH2 connectors
W (WIRELESS): Audio input signals from the
UHF portable tuner (not supplied) if it is
installed
Left side and upper section
1
2
3
4
5
SDI IN
(OPTION)
GENLOCK
IN
TEST
OUT
TC
OUT
6
TC IN
7
a ASSIGNABLE 3/4 switches
You can assign the desired functions to these
switches on the ASSIGNABLE page of the
OPERATION menu.
Nothing is assigned to these switches when the
camcorder is shipped from the factory (equivalent
to a selection of OFF in the menu).
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN
switches” on page 221.
b Lid of the disc compartment
This opens when the EJECT button on the top
panel is pressed. Press the side of the lid to close.
c SDI IN (OPTION) connector (BNC
type)
This is an input connector for the optional CBKHD01 HD/SD SDI Input Board. When the CBKHD01 is installed, the unit can record HD-SDI or
SD-SDI signals that are input to this connector.
d GENLOCK IN (genlock signal input)
connector (BNC type)
• This connector inputs a reference signal when
the camera is to be genlocked or when timecode
is to be synchronized with external equipment.
28
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
System frequency
1080/59.94i
1080/50i
1080/29.97P
1080/25P
1080/23.98P
720/59.94P
720/50P
Available reference
signals
1080/59.94i, 525/59.94i
1080/50i, 625/50i
1080/59.94i, 525/59.94i
1080/50i, 625/50i
1080/23.98PsF
1080/59.94i, 525/59.94i
1080/50i, 625/50i
• This connector also inputs a return video signal.
You can display the HD-Y (1080i) signal in the
viewfinder screen while holding the RET button
down with RETURN VIDEO set to ON on the
ASSIGNABLE SW page of the OPERATION
menu.
• Input an external video signal. When the
optional CBK-SC02 Analog Composite Input
Board is installed, the unit can record analog
composite video signals that are input to this
connector.
g TC OUT (timecode output) connector
(BNC type)
To lock the timecode of an external VTR to the
timecode of this unit, connect this connector to
the external VTR’s timecode input connector.
Rear
1
2
3
4
5
6
LINE
To apply an external lock to the timecode of this
unit, input the reference timecode.
AES/EBU
DC OUT
12V
0.5A
DC
IN
e TC IN (timecode input) connector
(BNC type)
Chapter 1 Overview
Use the GENLOCK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu to adjust the genlock
H-phase (phase of horizontal sync signal).
Available reference signals vary depending on
the current system frequency as shown in the
following table.
7
AUDIO IN
MIC
48V
OFF
LINE
AES/EBU
MIC
48V
OFF
AUDIO OUT
SUPER
CH1
1/2
SDI OUT
CH2
3/4
SDI OUT
8 9 0
qa
qs
qd
For details of timecode, see “Setting the timecode”
on page 75.
f TEST OUT connector (BNC type)
This connector outputs the video signal for a
video monitor. The output signal can be selected
from composite video, HD-Y, R, G, B, and a
composite video signal like that displayed in the
LCD monitor. To switch output signals, use the
TEST OUT SELECT item on the OUTPUT 1
page of the OPERATION menu.
If the output signal is set to one of R, G, or B, then
this setting changes to HD-Y when the camcorder
is powered off and on again.
Depending on menu settings, menus, timecode,
and shot data can be superimposed on the image
on the monitor. This connector can also be used to
synchronize the timecode of an external VTR
with the timecode of the camcorder.
a TALLY (back tally) indicator (red)
Lights up during recording. It will not light if the
TALLY switch is set to OFF. This indicator also
flashes to indicate warnings (see page 22) in the
same manner as the REC/TALLY indicator in the
viewfinder.
For details, see “Operation Warnings” on page 262.
b TALLY switch
Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator
function.
c USB connector
This is a USB 2.0 connector.
Connect one of the following devices, depending
on what you want to do.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
29
Chapter 1 Overview
Device
Enables
Windows USB
Text input wth the on-screen
keyboard or mouse software keyboard (see page
128)
USB flash drive
Recording of proxy data (see
page 107)
Loading of planning metadata
(see page 140)
Optional CBKMaking wireless LAN
WA01 Wi-Fi
connections (see page 224)
adapter
Before using this connector, you must set
ETHERNET/USB on the POWER SAVE page of
the OPERATION menu to “ENABL” (see page
224).
d
(network) connector (RJ-45 type)
This is a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connector for
network connection.
Before using this connector, you must set
ETHERNET/USB on the POWER SAVE page of
the OPERATION menu to “ENABL” (see page
224).
CAUTION
For safety, do not connect the connector for peripheral
device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this
port. Follow the instructions for this port.
When you connect the network cable of the unit to
peripheral device, use a shielded-type cable to prevent
malfunction due to radiation noise.
e EARPHONE jack (stereo, minijack)
You can monitor the E-E sound during recording
and playback sound during playback. When an
alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound
through the earphone. You can use this with the
EARPHONE jack on the front of the unit at the
same time. Plugging an earphone into the jack
automatically cuts off the built-in speaker.
You can select monaural or stereo on the AUDIO1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.
f LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selectors
These select the audio source of the audio input
signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2
connectors.
LINE: Line input audio equipment
AES/EBU: AES/EBU format audio signal
MIC: Microphone input
30
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Note
When these switches are in the MIC position, and the
+48V/OFF switch is set to +48V, if you inadvertently
connect any audio device other than a microphone to the
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors, the device may be
damaged.
g +48V/OFF switches
Select either of the following positions for the
microphones to be connected.
+48V: For a microphone to use an external power
supply
OFF: For a microphone to use an internal power
supply
h REMOTE connector (8-pin)
Connect an RM-B150/B750 remote control unit,
which makes it possible to control the camcorder
remotely.
Note
Before connecting/disconnecting the Remote Control
Unit to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn off the
camcorder POWER switch.
i SDI OUT 1 connector (BNC type)
Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal (with
embedded audio). To switch between HDSDI and
SDSDI output, use the SDI OUT 1 SELECT item
on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION
menu.
j SDI OUT 2 connector (BNC type)
Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal (with
embedded audio). To switch between HDSDI and
SDSDI output, use the SDI OUT 2 SELECT item
on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION
menu.
Setting menus, timecode, or shot data can be
superimposed on the camera output video
depending on the menu settings, and you can
view them on the monitor screen.
k AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio channel-1
and channel-2 input) connectors (XLR
type, 3-pin, female)
These are audio input connectors for channels 1
and 2 to which you can connect audio equipment
or a microphone.
When the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector is set
to AES/EBU, the CH1 connector is used for
channel-1 and -2 inputs, and the CH2 connector,
for channel-3 and -4 inputs.
Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio
channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4. The
audio signals are selected by the MONITOR
switch.
m
Use an i.LINK cable (DV cable) to connect the
camcorder to a computer for File Access Mode
file operations.
For details, see “File Operations in File Access
Mode (for Windows)” on page 245).
Note
When you connect the camcorder and other equipment,
such as a hard disk drive, with an i.LINK interface to a
computer with i.LINK connectors, turn off the power of
the computer, the other equipment, and the camcorder
before connecting them using the i.LINK cable (DV
cable). If a bus-powered type 1) hard disk drive or similar
equipment is connected while the computer is powered
on, electric current flows into the camcorder because of
the high voltage caused by the load shift of the computer
power, and this may cause a malfunction.
1) Equipment that can be powered through i.LINK cable
(DV cable)
HDVF-20A viewfinder (optional)
1
ASPECT
d Eyecup
e Indicators and status display
For details, see “Status display on the viewfinder
screen” on page 32.
f Diopter adjustment ring
Allows for optimal focus adjustment.
g Tally indicator
Lights up while camcorder is recording. Set the
TALLY switch to OFF when not in use. The
brightness can also be adjusted with the TALLY
switch.
This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings, in
the same manner as the camera operator tally
indicator and the REC indicator in the viewfinder.
h PEAKING control
i CONTRAST control
6
Adjusts the contrast of the screen. This control
has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
7
8
9
j BRIGHT control
3
ZEBRA
Lights up while camcorder is recording. This
indicator can be covered when not in use.
This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings, in
the same manner as the tally indicator and the
REC indicator in the viewfinder.
5
qg
ON
OFF
MOMENT
Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the
camcorder when it is slid from side to side.
4
2
DISPLAY
b Stopper
Turning this control clockwise adjusts the picture
sharpness, and makes focusing easier. This
control has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
qf
CONTRAST
Connect to the VF connector on the camcorder.
c Camera operator tally indicator
(i.LINK) S400 connector (6-pin,
IEEE1394 compliant)
PEAKING
a Plug
0
Adjusts the brightness of the screen. This control
has no effect on the output signals of the
camcorder.
qa
k TALLY switch
qs
qd
Controls the tally indicator located on the front of
the viewfinder.
HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is set to
high.
BRIGHT
Chapter 1 Overview
l AUDIO OUT connector (XLR type, 5pin, male)
TALLY
HIGH
OFF
LOW
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
31
Chapter 1 Overview
OFF: The tally indicator is disabled.
LOW: The tally indicator brightness is set to low.
TALLY/REC
l ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch
BATT
Controls the zebra pattern display on the
viewfinder screen as follows.
ON: A zebra pattern appears and stays.
OFF: The zebra pattern disappears.
MOMENT: A zebra pattern appears and stays for
about five seconds.
3
4
m DISPLAY/ASPECT switch
Turns the marker indication on and off, and
switches between 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratios for
viewfinder screen display.
DISPLAY: When the marker indication is
enabled with the camcorder, the marker
indication on the viewfinder screen turns on
and off every time you push the switch up to
this position.
ASPECT: Each push of the switch down to this
position toggles the mask display on and off.
(Make mask display settings on the
MARKER 1 page of the OPERATION menu
(see page 163).)
n Viewfinder cable
o Microphone holder
Status display on the viewfinder
screen
Indicators
The following indicators are arranged above and
below the viewfinder screen to show the current
state and adjustments of the camcorder.
1
2
5
VTR
SAVE
6
a TALLY (green tally) indicator
Lights when the camcorder is the following
states.
• Picture Cache mode enabled
• Disc Exchange Cache mode enabled
• Recording with HDSDI REMOTE I/F on the
CAM CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu set to G-TLY
Flashes when the camcorder is the following
states.
• Set to Auto Interval Rec mode or the
consecutive mode of Manual Interval Rec mode
(1 flash per second)
• Recording in Auto Interval Rec mode or
recording in the consecutive mode of Manual
Interval Rec mode (4 flashes per second)
• Set to the single-shot mode of Manual Interval
Rec mode, or recording in that mode (2 flashes
per second)
b BATT (battery) indicator
This indicator starts flashing when the battery
connected to the camcorder is nearly exhausted,
and stays lit when the battery is completely
exhausted.
To prevent interruption during operation, replace
the battery as soon as this indicator starts flashing.
The battery power level at which the indicator starts
flashing can be set on the BATTERY 1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu. For details, see page 181.
c REC (recording, red tally) indicator
Lights up while camcorder is recording.
This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings, in
the same manner as the tally indicator and the
camera operator tally indicator.
32
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
d Viewfinder screen
This indicator lights when the VDR SAVE/STBY
switch is set to SAVE, putting the VDR into
power save mode.
f ! (warning) indicator
This indicator lights when any of the following
conditions occurs with the corresponding item set
to ON on the ‘!’ LED page of the OPERATION
menu.
• The gain is set to other than 0 dB.
• The SHUTTER selector is not set to the
standard setting. 1), 2)
• The WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.
• ATW is enabled.
• The lens extender is used.
• The FILTER selector is set to other than ND:1.
• The reference value of auto iris adjustment is
not the standard value.
For details about the display item selection, see
“Selecting the display items” on page 213.
For details about setting change and adjustment
progress messages, see “Change confirmation/
adjustment progress messages” on page 214.
For details about marker display, see “Setting the
marker display” on page 215.
All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder
screen are shown below.
Top of viewfinder screen
12 3
2) For the PDW-F800, when SHUTTER SELECT on the
SHUTTER SELECT page of the MAINTENANCE
menu is set to DEGREE, the standard setting is
“SHUTTER selector: OFF”, regardless of the
recording format.
Layout of the status display on the
viewfinder screen
The viewfinder screen displays not only the video
picture but also characters and messages
indicating the camcorder settings and operating
status, a center marker, a safety zone marker, etc.
When the menu screen is not displayed and the
DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/ASPECT switch is
set to on, the items for which an ON setting was
made on the VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, or VF DISP
3 page of the OPERATION menu or with related
4 5 6
7
8 9
59.9 i[ 30]
For the PDW-F800, lighting-up conditions of
each item can be set on the ‘!’ LED STD page of
the OPERATION menu.
1) The standard SHUTTER setting differs as follows,
depending on the recording format.
1080/50i, 1080/59.94i, 720/50P, 720/59.94P (SCAN
MODE: 59.9P): The SHUTTER selector is set to
OFF.
1080/23.98P, 720/59.94P (SCAN MODE: 23.9P):
1/ shutter is ON.
48
1080/25P: 1/50 shutter is ON.
1080/29.97P: 1/60 shutter is ON.
Chapter 1 Overview
e VTR SAVE indicator
switches are displayed at the top and bottom of
the screen.
The messages that give details of the settings and
adjustment progress and results can also be made
to appear for about three seconds while settings
are being changed, during adjustment, and after
adjustment.
EX
Z 99
W 1 2
13.4V
HD422 50 E0001:001/004 DC IN
13.9 K +
CONT
35-30
FAN
WHITE:NG
LEVEL TOO HIGH
EXT
REC2
TCG
01:23:45:15 HDSDI
5600
LOW LIGHT
1
W:A
18
dB
1/
2000
35
30
2
1
125C F1.7
0qa
qs
a Color temperature
Displays a color temperature calculated from the
gain of R and B, in the range 0.0 K to 99.9 K (in
steps of 0.1 K). The +/– signs may be displayed
depending on the OFFSET WHT setting (see
page 227).
No display: OFFSET WHT is OFF
+: The value of OFFSET WHT is greater than
3200K.
–: The value of OFFSET WHT is less than
3200K.
b Video format
Indicates the format of video being currently
played back or recorded (see page 58).
The video aspect ratio (16:9 or 4:3) can also be
displayed when the recording format is set to
IMX 50, IMX 40, IMX 30, or DVCAM.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
33
c Extender
Chapter 1 Overview
Displays the extender settings of this unit and the
lens.
EX: The lens extender is on.
08: The lens shrinker is on.
x2D: This unit’s extender function is on.
Ex2D: The lens extender and the digital extender
function of this unit are both on.
The following characters can be displayed in this
area.
• Digits: 0 to 9
• Alphabetic characters: a to z, A to Z
• The following symbols: !, &quot;, #, $, %, &amp;, ', (, ), *,
+, , (comma), -, . (period), /, : (colon), ;
(semicolon), &lt;, =, &gt;, ?, @, [, ], ^, _, {, |, }, ~
• Space
d Zoom position
[F800]
Indicates the zoom position of the zoom lens in
the range from 0 to 99.
f System frequency and frame rate
e Clip information
During shooting, displays information about the
clip being recorded or the clip to be recorded next.
During playback, displays information about the
playback clip.
The information that appears depends on the
setting of DISP CLIP NAME on the VF DISP 3
page of the OPERATION menu. You can also set
DISP CLIP NO(PB) on the VF DISP 2 page of the
OPERATION menu to “ON” to display the clip
number and total number of clips during
playback.
When DISP CLIP NAME is set to “PLAN”:
During shooting, this area displays the title
specified in the currently loaded planning
metadata. (The display format follows the
setting of “Planning Clip Name in Clip Info.
Area” in the Disc Menu.)
When DISP CLIP NAME is set to “AUTO”:
During shooting, this area displays one of the
following, depending on the setting of
AUTO NAMING on the FILE NAMING
page of the OPERATION menu.
• “C****” or “TITLE”: The clip name
(standard name, user-specified name, or
title) specified by “Display Title” in the
Disc Menu
• “PLAN”: The title specified in the
currently loaded planning metadata. (The
display format follows the setting of
“Planning Clip Name in Clip Info. Area” in
the Disc Menu.)
During playback, this area displays the clip
name (standard name, user-specified name,
or title) specified by “Display Title” in the
Disc Menu.
During Slow &amp; Quick Motion shooting and
playback, displays the system frequency and the
frame rate. The frame is rounded to a 2-digit
integer and displayed in brackets ([ ]) (see page
95).
This display does not appear during normal
shooting and playback.
g Wireless microphone reception level
When a UHF portable tuner is installed in the
camcorder, “W” appears together with foursegment reception level indicators for each of the
channels (1 or 2 channels) that can be used by the
tuner. The indications are as follows.
Normal use: The number of white segments
indicates the strength of the signal level.
Muted: The number of gray segments indicates
the strength of the signal level.
Reception level over peak: “P” is displayed
instead of the indicators. 1)
Tuner battery is low: The channel number and
indicator of the corresponding channel
flash. 1)
1) DWR-S01D only
h Power source voltage/battery
remaining capacity
When the unit is powered from a battery pack,
indicates the remaining capacity of the power
source voltage. When the unit is powered from a
battery connected to the DC IN connector or AC
adaptor attached to the battery attachment shoe,
indicates the power source voltage.
i External battery
Appears if the power is supplied from an AC
adaptor connected to the DC IN connector.
j Clip Continuous Rec function
Appears when the Clip Continuous Rec function
(see page 97) is enabled.
34
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
k Cooling fan control mode
This appears when FAN CONTROL on the CAM
CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu
is set to “R.MIN” or “MIN”.
FAN (lit): The cooling fan is operating at low
speed.
FAN (flashing): The cooling fan is operating at
low speed, but the temperature inside the unit
has risen to a level just below the level at
which an alarm occurs.
Note
If you do nothing while the FAN display is flashing, the
unit will attempt to lower the internal temperature by
operating the fan at high speed. When the FAN display
begins to flash, you should stop shooting and other
operations and wait until the internal temperature drops,
and then restart operations.
l Memory symbol and remaining
memory capacity, or wireless LAN
connection status
When a USB flash drive is connected to the
enabled USB connector, a memory symbol
appears indicating the mount status of the USB
flash drive and its remaining capacity.
Memory symbol and remaining capacity
display
Icon Remaining Description
capacity
display
Lit
Proxy data recording is
enabled, and there is at least 5
minute of remaining capacity.
Flashing
Proxy data recording is
enabled, but there is less than
5 minute of remaining
Out
capacity. a)
Proxy data recording is
INH
disabled. b)
The USB flash drive is write
Out
protected. c)
The USB flash drive could not
be mounted. d)
a) Use a USB flash drive with enough free capacity
remaining.
b) Enable the proxy data recording function.
c) Clear the write protection on the USB flash drive.
d) Format or exchange the USB flash drive.
When Wi-Fi on the POWER SAVE page of the
OPERATION menu is set to “ENABL”, the
wireless LAN connection status is displayed in
this area, as follows.
Not connected, or connection destination
unknown: An “&times;” lights.
Connecting: Four gray segments flash.
Connection completed (signal strength 0): One
gray segment lights.
Connection completed (signal strength 1 to 4):
White segments light. The number of white
segments (1 to 4) indicates the reception
signal level (1 to 4).
Chapter 1 Overview
CONT (lit): Continuous recording to extend the
previous clip is possible.
CONT (flashing): A new clip will be created and
recorded.
Bottom of viewfinder screen
1
2
3
EX
Z 99
W 1 2
13.4V
HD422 50 E0001:001/004 DC IN
13.9 K +
CONT
35-30
FAN
WHITE:NG
LEVEL TOO HIGH
EXT
REC2
TCG
01:23:45:15 HDSDI
5600
LOW LIGHT
1
35 - 30 125C F1.7
1 W:A 18 dB 1/ 2000 2
4567890 qa
qs qd qf
a External device control and single clip
playback
REC2: Appears when HDSDI REMOTE I/F in
the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu is set to “CHARA”,
and this unit is controlling recording by an
external device connected to the SDI OUT
1/2 connectors (HDSDI output). 1)
SNGL: Appears when SINGLE CLIP MODE in
the CAM CONFIG 1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu is set to “ON”, and
the unit is searching or playing a clip (see
page 85).
1) SDI OUT 1 SELECT or SDI OUT 2 SELECT on the
OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu must be
set to HDSDI.
b Setting change and adjustment
progress message display area
For details, see “Change confirmation/adjustment
progress messages” on page 214.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
35
Chapter 1 Overview
c External input status and aberration
correction function
EXT HDSDI/SDSDI/VBS: When the REC
VIDEO SOURCE item on the SOURCE SEL
page of the OPERATION menu has been set
to EXT, then “EXT” and the signal type
(HDSDI, SDSDI, or VBS) flashes when a
valid signal is input to this unit.
For details, see “Recording video from external
devices” on page 105.
ALAC: Appears when ALAC in the CAM
CONFIG 3 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu is set to “AUTO” (see page 191).
d Electric color temperature filter/Scene
file number
The electric color temperature filter display
appears when the CC 5600K function is set to
ON.
When DISP SCENE FILE on the VF DISP 3 page
of the OPERATION menu is set to “ON”, the
number of the currently loaded scene file (“S1” to
“S5”) appears instead of the filter display.
e Filter
Indicates the currently selected filter type (see
page 17).
[F800]
The optical CC filter position (A, B, C, or D)
appears to the right side of the ND filter display
(1 to 4).
[700]
When the function that switches between
electrical CC filters has been assigned to an
ASSIGN switch (see page 64), and when a
remote control unit has been connected, the
electrical CC filter position (A, B, C, or D)
appears to the right side of the ND filter display
(1 to 4).
f White balance memory
Indicates the currently selected white balance
automatic adjustment memory.
A: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set
to A.
B: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set
to B.
P: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set
to PRST or when the preset button on an RMB150 has been pushed.
36
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
T: Displayed when ATW is being used.
3200: Displayed when the COLOR TEMP SW
3200K function is set to ON. 1)
4300: Displayed when the COLOR TEMP SW
4300K function is set to ON. 1)
5600: Displayed when the COLOR TEMP SW
5600K function is set to ON. 1)
6300: Displayed when the COLOR TEMP SW
6300K function is set to ON. 1)
1) PDW-700 only
g Timecode
Indicates the elapsed recording/playback time,
timecode, user bits or other information selected
by the DISPLAY switch (see page 23).
h Gain value
Indicates the gain value (in dB) of the video
amplifier, as set by the GAIN selector.
i Shutter speed
Indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode.
However, if the SHUTTER selector (see page 17)
is set to OFF, nothing is displayed.
For details of the displayed shutter speed, see
“Setting the Electronic Shutter” on page 66.
j Operation/alarm message display area
For details, see “Operation/alarm messages” on
page 265.
k Audio level
Indicates the level of audio channel 1 and channel
2. The peak indication of the VDR level meter is
related as follows to the audio level.
1
2
3
-52
-28
-20
-12 -8 (dB)
1 Audio channel 1 level indicator
2 Audio channel 2 level indicator
3 VDR level meter indicator
The segment colors change from gray to white at
or above the AU REF LEVEL set on the AUDIO2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu. This
setting does not affect the relationship between
the number of lit segments and the audio levels.
The example in the above figure shows the colors
when AU REF LEVEL is set to –20 dB.
l Remaining disc capacity
Chapter 1 Overview
Indicates the remaining recording time (in
minutes) of the disc.
Examples of remaining recording time indication
Indication
.
.
.
110 &lt;
100 &lt;
90 &lt;
90 - 85
85 - 80
.
.
.
20 - 15
15 - 10
10 - 5
5MIN (flash)
4MIN (flash)
3MIN (flash)
2MIN (flash)
1MIN (flash)
0MIN (flash)
Remaining recording
time
.
.
.
120 to 110 minutes
110 to 100 minutes
100 to 90 minutes
90 to 85 minutes
85 to 80 minutes
.
.
.
20 to 15 minutes
15 to 10 minutes
10 to 5 minutes
5 minutes
4 minutes
3 minutes
2 minutes
1 minute
0 minutes
Note
During shooting in special modes such as Interval Rec or
Slow &amp; Quick Motion, the indicated remaining disc time
may differ from the time which can be actually shot and
recorded. This is particularly true when FRAME RATE
is set to the maximum value in Slow &amp; Quick Motion
shooting, in which case the actual remaining time is
about half of the indicated remaining disc time.
m Remaining clips display
Displays the remaining number of clips that can
be recorded. The display flashes once per second
when the number of remaining clips is less than
10.
n Iris setting/auto iris override
Indicates the F value (iris setting) of the lens.
Auto iris override is shown by an indicator made
up of two segments each on the upper and lower
sides.
For details, see “Changing the Reference Value for
Automatic Iris Adjustment” on page 70.
Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
37
Chapter
2 Preparations
Chapter 2 Preparations
Preparing a Power
Supply
To attach the battery pack
1
Press the battery pack against the back
of the camcorder, aligning the line on
the side of the battery pack with the
matching line on the camcorder.
For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and
AC adaptors listed below.
• BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S Lithium-ion
Battery Pack
• AC power using the AC-DN2B/DN10 AC
Adaptor
1
Using a battery pack
2
When a BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S Battery
Pack is used, the camcorder will operate
continuously for the time shown below.
Model name
BP-GL95
BP-GL65
BP-L60S
BP-L80S
Operating time
Approx. 120 minutes
Approx. 75 minutes
Approx. 75 minutes
Approx. 100 minutes
WARNING
1 BP-GL95/GL65/L60S/L80S
2 Align these lines.
2
Slide the battery pack down until its
“LOCK” arrow points at the matching
line on the camcorder.
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
Note
The battery pack operating time depends on the
frequency of use of the battery pack, and the ambient
temperature when used.
1
Before use, charge the battery pack with a charger
suitable for each battery.
2
For details on the battery charging procedure, refer
to the battery charger operation manual.
Note on using the battery pack
A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully
recharged.
1 “LOCK” arrow
2 Matching line on the camcorder
Note
If the battery pack is not attached correctly, the terminal
may be damaged.
38
Preparing a Power Supply
To detach the battery pack
Holding the release button in, pull the battery
pack up.
Attaching the Viewfinder
Note
The viewfinder is supplied separately.
Release button
Chapter 2 Preparations
CAUTION
When the viewfinder is attached, do not leave the
camcorder with the eyepiece facing the sun. Direct
sunlight can enter through the eyepiece, be focused in the
viewfinder and cause fire.
Attaching the HDVF-20A/C35W
Notes
• During recording and playback (while the ACCESS
indicator is lit), be careful never to remove the battery
pack.
• Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing
the battery pack.
Using AC power
When using the AC-DN10 AC Adaptor
Mount an AC-DN10 on the camcorder in the
same way as a battery pack, then connect to the
AC power supply.
The AC-DN10 can supply up to 100 W of power.
Note
When attaching the viewfinder, make notes of the
following points.
• Be sure to the power off the camcorder before coupling
the viewfinder connector to the camcorder’s VF
connector. If you make this connection when the
camcorder power is on, the viewfinder may not
function properly.
• Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the
camcorder’s VF connector. If the coupling is loose,
noise may appear on the video or the tally light may not
operate properly.
For more information about the connection of the
viewfinder and camcorder, contact a Sony service
representative.
1
1 Loosen the viewfinder left-to-right
positioning ring, 2 attach the
viewfinder to the viewfinder fitting
shoe, and 3 tighten the viewfinder leftto-right positioning ring.
To an AC outlet
Attaching the Viewfinder
39
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
Stopper
3
1
Chapter 2 Preparations
2
Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob
2
Couple the viewfinder connector to the
VF connector.
Moving the viewfinder shoe up
1
Loosen the front-to-back viewfinder
positioning levers and the front-to-back
viewfinder positioning knobs, and then
pull the viewfinder slide assembly
forward.
2
Using a 2.5 mm diameter hexagonal
wrench, detach the viewfinder slide
assembly and handle front cover.
VF connector
Detaching the viewfinder
You can carry out this by following the attaching
procedure in reverse order, but there is an
additional action to take: when detaching the
viewfinder from the fitting shoe, pull up the
stopper.
Adjusting the viewfinder position
To adjust the viewfinder left-right position,
loosen the left-right positioning ring, and to adjust
the front-back position, loosen the front-to-back
positioning knob.
40
Attaching the Viewfinder
Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder
Rotation Bracket
Handle front cover
Bolt with
hexagonal hole
Viewfinder slide assembly
3
Attach the handle front cover with the
bottom edge up.
1
Carry out steps 1 and 2 of the previous
section “Moving the viewfinder shoe
up” to detach the viewfinder slide
assembly.
2
Attach the BKW-401 with the supplied
bolts.
Chapter 2 Preparations
By fitting a BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation
Bracket (not supplied), you can rotate the
viewfinder out of the way so that your right leg
does not hit the viewfinder while you are carrying
the camcorder.
Bolts supplied
with the BKW-401
To attach the viewfinder
at the top
To attach the viewfinder
at the bottom (factory
default)
4
Attach the viewfinder slide assembly,
reversing the steps of the removal
procedure.
3
Adjust the front-to-back position so
that the arm of the BKW-401 does not
touch the handle when it is raised.
Attaching the Viewfinder
41
Adjust position so that arm
does not touch handle
Chapter 2 Preparations
Detaching the eyepiece
Removing the eyepiece gives a clearer view of the
screen from further away. It is also easy to
remove dust from the viewfinder screen and
mirror when the eyepiece is detached.
1
Turn the eyepiece locking ring fully
counterclockwise, to align the red
marks on the locking ring and the
viewfinder barrel.
1
To reattaching the eyepiece
1
Align the red marks on the eyepiece
locking ring and the viewfinder barrel.
2
Align the red mark on the end of the
eyepiece end with the red marks on the
eyepiece locking ring and the
viewfinder barrel. Then insert the
eyepiece into the viewfinder barrel.
3
Turn the eyepiece locking ring
clockwise until its “LOCK” arrow
points at the red mark on the viewfinder
barrel.
When the eyecup is worn out, replace it with a
new one.
For details of a replacement eyecup, contact a Sony
service representative.
Adjusting the viewfinder focus
and screen
To adjust the viewfinder focus
Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the
viewfinder image is sharpest.
Diopter adjustment ring
32
1 Locking ring
2 Locking ring match mark
3 Match mark on the viewfinder barrel
2
Detach the eyepiece.
To adjust the viewfinder screen
Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the
viewfinder screen with the controls shown below.
Match mark on end of eyepiece
42
Attaching the Viewfinder
1
2
PEAKING
CONTRAST
ZEBRA
DISPLAY
Setting the Area of Use
BRIGHT
TALLY
HIGH
OFF
LOW
1 PEAKING control
2 CONTRAST control
3 BRIGHT control
When using the unit for the first time
The area of use is not factory preset. Before using
this unit, you need to set this item. (You cannot
use the unit without setting this item.)
To set the area of use
Chapter 2 Preparations
ASPECT
ON
OFF
MOMENT
3
POWER switch
MENU knob
1
Set the POWER switch to the ON
position.
The screen for setting the area of use appears
in the viewfinder.
FORMAT SETTING
COUNTRY
: NOT SELECTED
SYSTEM LINE
:
1080
SET FORMAT
AND TURN OFF ONCE.
2
Press the MENU knob.
z on the left of NOT SELECTED changes to
?, and you can now select the area of use.
FORMAT SETTING
COUNTRY
:?NOT SELECTED
SYSTEM LINE
:
1080
SET FORMAT
AND TURN OFF ONCE.
Setting the Area of Use
43
3
Turn the MENU knob to display the
desired area of use.
Setting
NTSC(J)AREA
NTSC AREA
Area of use
Setting the Date/Time of
the Internal Clock
NTSC area (Japan) a)
NTSC area (for areas other
than Japan) b)
Chapter 2 Preparations
PAL AREA
PAL area c)
a) The composite signal output from this unit is an
NTSC signal with no black setup. The system
frequency is 59.94i.
b) The composite signal output from this unit is an
NTSC signal with a black setup (7.5 IRE). The
system frequency is 59.94i.
c) The composite signal output from this unit is a
PAL signal. The system frequency is 50i.
4
1
Display the TIME/DATE page of the
DIAGNOSIS menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
Change the SYSTEM LINE (video
resolution) setting as required.
Setting
1080
720
5
You can set or change the date and time of the
internal clock. The date and time set are reflected
in the timecode.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
D02 TIME/DATE
Resolution (horizontal &times; vertical)
1080 lines (1920 &times; 1080)
720 lines (1280 &times; 720)
Set the POWER switch to OFF, then
once again to ON.
The unit is now ready for use.
2
TOP
ADJUST
:
EXEC
HOUR
MIN
SEC
:
:
:
12
55
58
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
:
:
:
08
03
31
Press the MENU knob.
The TIME ADJUST setting window appears.
TIME ADJUST
ESC
HOUR
MIN
SEC
:
:
:
12
55
58
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
:
:
:
08
03
31
OK
•
•
•
•
•
•
3
HOUR: Sets the hour value.
MIN: Sets the minutes value.
SEC: Sets the seconds value.
YEAR: Sets the year.
MONTH: Sets the month.
DAY: Sets the day.
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the
item you want to set, and press the
MENU knob.
b on the left of the selected item changes to
z and z on the left of the setting changes to
?.
44
Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock
Turn the MENU knob to display the
desired value, and press the MENU
knob.
z changes to b and ? changes to z.
5
To continue the remaining settings,
repeat steps 3 and 4.
6
When you finish settings, turn the
MENU knob to move b to “OK”, then
press the MENU knob.
The internal clock is set with the date and
time set in steps 3 to 5. The TIME/DATE
page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears
again. The time set on the TIME ADJUST
setting window is displayed.
Mounting the Lens
First power off the camcorder, and then mount the
lens using the following procedure.
For information about using the lens, refer to the
operation manual for the lens.
3
Lens mount
securing rubber
Chapter 2 Preparations
4
To cancel the setting
Before executing step 6, move b to “ESC” at the
top right of the window and press the MENU
knob.
Alternatively, flick the CANCEL/PRST/
ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE side.
All settings or changes are discarded and the
TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu
appears.
Note
When you set the time, also set TIME ZONE.
Set TIME ZONE on the UMID SET page of the
OPERATION menu. For details, see “Setting the
UMID data” (page 228).
5
4
21
1
Push the lens locking lever up and
remove the lens mount cap from the
lens mount.
2
Align the center pin on the lens with the
center slot in the lens mount, and insert
the lens into the mount.
3
Holding the lens in place, push the lens
locking lever down to lock the lens.
Caution
If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off
while the camcorder is being used. This could cause
a serious accident. Make sure the lens is firmly
locked. It is recommended that the lens mount
Mounting the Lens
45
securing rubber be put on the lens locking lever as
illustrated above.
4
Connect the lens cable to the LENS
connector.
5
Secure the lens cable with the cable
clamps.
Adjusting the Flange
Focal Length
Chapter 2 Preparations
If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you
zoom from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the
flange focal length (the distance from the plane of
the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane).
Make this adjustment after mounting or changing
the lens.
The position of the controls for adjusting the flange
focal length vary somewhat from lens to lens. Check
the identification of the various controls in the lens
manual.
About 3 m (10 ft)
46
Adjusting the Flange Focal Length
1
Set the iris to manual.
2
Open the iris. Place the flange focal
length adjustment chart about 3 m (10
ft) away from the camera, lit well
enough to provide a satisfactory video
output level.
3
Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or
F.B ring (flange focal length adjustment
ring).
4
Use manual or power zoom to set the
lens to telephoto.
5
Point the camera at the chart by turning
the focus ring and focus on it.
6
Set the zoom ring to wide angle.
7
Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart
is in focus, being careful not to disturb
the focus ring.
8
Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays
in focus all the way from wide angle to
telephoto.
9
Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing
screws.
Preparing the Audio
Input System
You can attach the ECM-680S stereo microphone
(not supplied) to the microphone holder of the
HDVF-20A viewfinder (not supplied).
1
Loosen the screw and open the
microphone holder clamp.
Chapter 2 Preparations
Connecting a microphone to the
MIC IN connector
Microphone holder clamp
1
2
2
Place the microphone in the
microphone holder.
1 Wind the microphone spacer (sheet
type, supplied with this unit and the
ECM-680S) around the microphone,
while peeling off the protective sheets
on both sides of the microphone
spacer.
2 Place the microphone in the holder so
that “UP” is at the top.
3 Close the microphone holder.
4 Tighten the screw.
Preparing the Audio Input System
47
The following is the procedure for attaching an
electret condenser microphone such as the ECM674/678.
2
On how to attach the CAC-12, refer to the operation
manual for the CAC-12.
1
Chapter 2 Preparations
1
4
3
On how to perform this operation, refer to the
operation manual for the microphone.
3
Plug the microphone cable into the MIC
IN connector, then set the AUDIO IN
switch for the channel on which you
want to record the audio from this
microphone to FRONT (for CH-1/
CH-2) or F (for CH-3/CH-4).
Attach the electret condenser
microphone.
1 Loosen the ball joint lock lever.
2 Wind the microphone spacer (sheet
type, supplied with this unit and the
microphone) around the microphone,
while peeling off the protective sheets
on both sides of the microphone
spacer.
3 Place the microphone in the holder so
that “UP” is at the top.
4 Close the microphone holder.
5 Tighten the screw.
6 Position so that the microphone does
not interfere with the viewfinder and
tighten the ball joint lock lever.
When attaching the ECM-674/678, use the
microphone adaptor supplied with the CAC12 Microphone Holder.
Microphone
4
Secure the microphone cable with the
cable clamps.
Connecting microphones to the
AUDIO IN connectors
You can connect up to two monaural
microphones to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2
connectors, using a CAC-12 Microphone Holder
(not supplied).
48
Preparing the Audio Input System
2
Connect the microphone cable to the
AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector.
3
Set the switches as follows.
AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu,
with the REAR XLR AUTO item.
Notes
• If the input level on this unit is not at an appropriate
setting for the microphone sensitivity, loud sounds
may be distorted, and the signal-to-noise ratio may be
affected.
• In order for the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors
on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V
power supply, female XLR connectors (3-pin) are
fitted. If the microphone cable has a female connector,
use an adaptor.
• When you detach a CAC-12 Microphone Holder once
you have attached to the camcorder, be careful not to
lose the two screws fixing the CAC-12 (in step 1).
After detaching the CAC-12, be sure to put the two
screws back into their original places.
Chapter 2 Preparations
Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector to
MIC.
• Set the +48V/OFF switch indicated below,
depending on the power supply type of the
microphone.
Internal power supply: Set the +48V/OFF
switch to OFF.
External power supply: Set the +48V/
OFF switch to +48V.
• Set the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH4) switch for the channel to which the
microphone is connected to REAR (for
CH-1/CH-2) or R (for CH-3/CH-4).
Attaching a UHF portable tuner
(for a UHF wireless microphone
system)
1
2
To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system,
fit one of the following UHF portable tuners.
• DWR-S01D Digital Wireless Receiver
• WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
• WRR-860A/861/862 UHF Synthesized
Diversity Tuner
3
4
1 +48V/OFF switch
2 Monaural microphone
3 AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
4 To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector
4
For details of these units, refer to the operation
manuals for them.
To fit the DWR-S01D or WRR-855S
1
Remove the four fixing screws holding
the cover of the portable tuner/receiver
housing slot located in the rear of this
unit, to remove the cover.
2
Insert the DWR-S01D or WRR-855S
into the housing slot, and fasten the four
fixing screws.
Switch the input level to match the
sensitivity of the microphone used.
Switch the input level by changing the REAR
MIC REF setting on the AUDIO-1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu (factory default setting
is –60 dB). For details, see page 183.
XLR connection automatic detection function
With the XLR connection automatic detection
function being on, when a cable is connected to
the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector, the input
from that connector is automatically selected for
audio recording, regardless of the setting of the
AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch.
The XLR connection automatic detection
function can be switched on or off on the
Preparing the Audio Input System
49
Pack to be attached, and tighten the
adjustment screws to fix its position.
4 Attach the mount plate supplied with
the WRR-862.
DWR-S01D or WRR-855S
About the WRR tuner fitting (service part
number: A-8278-057-B), contact a Sony service
or sales representative.
Chapter 2 Preparations
BP-GL65/GL95/L60S/L80S
3
Set the AUDIO IN switch for the
channel to which you want to input
audio signal to WIRELESS (see page
28).
Adjustment
screws
Mount plate
(supplied with
WRR-862)
Notes
• When the XLR connection automatic detection
function is on, even if the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2
switch is set to WIRELESS, the signal input to the
AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector is automatically
selected when an audio cable is connected to the
AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector. In such a case, set
REAR XLR AUTO to OFF on the AUDIO-1 page of
the MAINTENANCE menu. (The factory default
setting is OFF.)
• When the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector is set to
LINE or MIC, the audio signals recorded on audio
channels 3 and 4 are not affected by the XLR
automatic detection function. They are determined by
the settings of the AUDIO IN CH-3 and CH-4
switches.
Phillips type
screwdriver
2
Attach the battery pack.
On how to attach the battery pack, see “To
attach the battery pack” on page 38.
3
Mount the tuner on the WRR tuner
fitting.
To fit the WRR-862 (when using a BPGL65/GL95/L60S/L80S Battery Pack)
1
Attach the WRR tuner fitting (not
supplied; service part number: A-8278057-B) to the back of the camcorder.
1 Use a Phillips type screwdriver to
tighten the four screws placed in the
tuner fitting. For three of these screws,
insert the screwdriver through the
corresponding hole and tighten the
screw.
Note
Make sure that all four screws are fully tightened.
2 Loosen the adjustment screws on the
tuner fitting.
3 Adjust the tuner fitting position for a
BP-GL65/GL95/L60S/L80S Battery
50
Preparing the Audio Input System
WRR-862
4
Connect the tuner power cord to the DC
OUT connector of the camcorder, and
the audio output cable to the AUDIO IN
CH1 or CH2 connector.
5
Set the switches as follows.
• Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector for
the channel to which the audio output cable
is attached to MIC.
• Set the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH4) switch for the channel to which the audio
output cable is connected to REAR (for
CH-1/CH-2) or R (for CH-3/CH-4).
If the XLR connection automatic detection
function is on, the input signal for audio
recording is selected automatically, and
therefore this setting is not required.
AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu,
with the REAR XLR AUTO item.
4
1
2
3
1 AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
2 To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector
3 Audio equipment
4 LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selectors
1
2
Chapter 2 Preparations
4
3
1 AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
2 To DC OUT connector
3 To AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector
4 LINE / AES/EBU /MIC selectors
Connecting line input audio
equipment
Connect the audio output connector of the audio
equipment that supplies the line input signal to the
AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector.
Switch settings
Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector for the
channel to which the audio signal source is
connected to LINE.
Selecting the audio inputs to be recorded
• With the XLR connection automatic detection
function being off (the factory default setting):
A signal must be selected for audio recording by
setting the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch to
REAR depending on which of the AUDIO IN
CH1 and CH2 connectors is used for connecting
the external audio equipment.
• With the XLR connection automatic detection
function being on: When a cable is connected to
the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector, the
input from that connector is automatically
selected for audio recording, regardless of the
setting of the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch.
The XLR connection automatic detection
function can be switched on or off on the
Preparing the Audio Input System
51
Tripod Mounting
Chapter 2 Preparations
1
Attach the VCT-14 tripod adaptor (not
supplied) to the tripod.
Tripod adaptor
Lever
Note
The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged
position even after the camcorder is removed. If this
happens, press the red button against the lever a second
time and move the lever as shown above until the pin
returns to the stowed position. If the pin remains in the
engaged position, you will not be able to mount the
camcorder on the tripod adaptor.
Camera mount
2
Mount the camcorder on the tripod
adaptor.
Slide the camcorder forward along the
groove in the adaptor until it clicks.
To remove the camcorder from the tripod
adaptor
Hold down the red button and pull the lever in the
direction of the arrow.
52
Red button
Tripod Mounting
Connecting a Video
Light
Using the Shoulder
Strap
To attach the shoulder strap
1
Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap
fitting.
Pull up the strap to lock the fitting.
Chapter 2 Preparations
With this camcorder, you can use the Anton
Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light
(powered by 12 V with maximum power
consumption of 50 W).
• If you connect the video light to the LIGHT
connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT
switch to AUTO, you can turn the light on and
off automatically as you start and stop the VDR
operation.
• The output of the LIGHT connector on the
camcorder is controlled to 12 V even when the
camcorder is supplied with over 12 V power
(through the DC IN connector or battery pack).
The brightness or color temperature of the light
will not change according to voltage increase.
g
Clip
Notes
• Do not use a video light with power consumption of
over 50 W.
• The brightness or color temperature of the light will
change when the voltage (supplied through the DC IN
connector or from the battery pack) is under 12 V.
2
Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap
fitting on the other side of the grip in the
same way as in step 1.
To attach the video light
Fit the video light to the accessory fitting shoe on
the camcorder grip, and connect the video light
cable to the LIGHT connector.
Note
The accessory fitting shoe on this unit is of the 1/4-inch
tapped hole type. If you want to replace this with a slidetype shoe, contact a Sony service representative.
Connecting a Video Light / Using the Shoulder Strap
53
To remove the shoulder strap
Press here and pull in the direction
shown by the arrow to release.
Chapter 2 Preparations
g
Adjusting the Shoulder
Pad Position
You can shift the shoulder pad from its center
position (the factory default setting) backward by
up to 10 mm (3/8 inch) or forward by up to 25 mm
(1 inch). This adjustment helps you get the best
balance for shooting with the camcorder on your
shoulder.
1,3
2
Shoulder pad
54
Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position
1
Raise the lever in the center of the
shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder
pad.
2
Slide the shoulder pad backward or
forward until it is in the most
convenient position.
3
Bring down the lever to lock the
shoulder pad in the selected position.
Connecting the Remote
Control Unit
Connecting the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control
Unit enables remote control of the principal
camera functions.
Connecting the remote control unit to the
REMOTE connector (8-pin) automatically puts
the camcorder into remote control mode. If you
disconnect the remote control unit, the remote
control mode is cancelled.
1
[700]
• Buttons to which the COLOR TEMP SW
3200K/4300K/5600K/ 6300K functions have
been assigned (ASSIGN 1/3/4 switches,
COLOR TEMP. button, and RET button on the
lens)
Paint adjustment when the remote
control unit is connected
The settings of the paint adjustment that were in
effect the last time the remote control unit was
used are recalled.
Chapter 2 Preparations
Note
Before connecting/disconnecting a remote control unit
to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn the power of the
camcorder off.
ASSIGN 5 switch (PDW-F800), or RET button
on the lens)) (when the RM REC START item
on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu is set to RM)
Function of the recording start/stop
buttons when the remote control unit is
connected
When the remote control unit is connected, you
can make a setting to determine which of the
recording start/stop buttons you will use. This
setting is made using the RM REC START item
on the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
2
3
1 RM-B150/B750
2 Remote control cable
3 REMOTE connector
Camcorder switch functions when the
remote control unit is connected
The following switches on the camcorder do not
function.
• GAIN selector
• OUTPUT/DCC switch
• WHITE BAL switch
• AUTO W/B BAL switch
• SHUTTER selector
• Button to which the TURBO SWITCH function
has been assigned (ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch,
COLOR TEMP. button (PDW-700), ASSIGN 5
switch (PDW-F800), or RET button on the lens)
• REC START button (and the VTR button on the
lens, and the button to which the recording start/
stop function has been assigned (ASSIGN 1/3/4
switch, COLOR TEMP. button (PDW-700),
Relationship between the setting of the RM REC
START item and the function of recording start/
stop buttons
Recording start/
stop button
Settings of RM REC
START
RM
CAM
PARA
Disabled Enabled Enabled
Camcorder’s REC
START button
Lens VTR button
Disabled Enabled Enabled
Button to which the Disabled Enabled Enabled
recording start/stop
function has been
assigned
(camcorder
ASSIGN 1/3/4
switch, COLOR
TEMP. button
(PDW-700),
ASSIGN 5 switch
(PDW-F800), or
RET button on the
lens)
Connecting the Remote Control Unit
55
Recording start/
stop button
Remote control
unit’s VTR button
Settings of RM REC
START
RM
CAM
PARA
Enabled Disabled Enabled
Chapter 2 Preparations
When the monitor is connected to the
MONITOR OUT connector of the remote
control unit
The MONITOR connector (BNC type) of the
RM-B150/B750 outputs the same signal as that
from the TEST OUT connector on the camcorder.
Use the black cable supplied with the RM-B150/
B750 to connect the monitor to the MONITOR
connector on the RM-B150/B750.
When the remote control unit is
disconnected from the camcorder
The camcorder settings return to the settings in
effect before the remote control unit was
connected.
Structure of the paint adjustment data
The non-volatile memory of the camcorder used
for storing paint adjustment data consists of two
regions as shown below: one is the “independent
data region” that is used when a remote control
unit is not connected, and the other is the “remote
control data region” that is used when a remote
control unit is connected. Paint adjustment data is
automatically selected and output to the camera
section depending on whether or not a remote
control unit such as the RM-B150 is connected.
Setup menu of the
camcorder
Independent
data region
MASTER BLACK
MASTER GAMMA
KNEE POINT
DETAIL LEVEL
R/B GAIN
R/B BLACK
RM-B150
Remote control
data region
MASTER BLACK
MASTER GAMMA
KNEE POINT
DETAIL LEVEL
R/B GAIN
R/B BLACK
Non-volatile memory
Hardware of the
camera section
RM-B150 connected
RM-B150 not connected
Thus, when a remote control unit is connected to
the camcorder, the effective data region is
switched to the “remote control data region” and
the settings of the paint adjustment that were in
effect the last time the remote control unit was
used are recalled.
The settings of the absolute value rotational
controls 1) and absolute value switches 2) are
overwritten by those on the remote control unit
after the remote control unit is connected.
When the remote control unit is disconnected
from the camcorder, the “independent data
region” becomes effective. Thus the camcorder
will return to the settings that were in effect
before the remote control unit was connected.
1) Absolute value rotational controls: The data
corresponding to the angular position of controls is
output. Rotational controls for which the data
corresponding to the amount of their rotation is output
are called relative value controls.
2) Absolute value switches: Like toggle switches or
slide switches (except momentary switches), the
switches (or knobs) whose positions must coincide
with their functions are called absolute value switches.
When RM COMMON MEMORY on the CAM
CONFIG 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu
is set to “ON”, you can use settings of the paint
adjustment data stored in the independent data
region even if you connect the remote control
unit. In this case, the settings stored in the
56
Connecting the Remote Control Unit
Chapter 2 Preparations
independent data region will be renewed when
you change the settings on the remote control
unit. Thus, the settings of the paint data made
with the remote control unit can be retained even
if the remote control unit is removed. However, if
the switch position on the remote control unit
differs from the one on the camcorder, the switch
position on the camcorder takes precedence over
that on the remote control unit.
Also, it is possible to keep the settings that are in
effect before you connect the remote control unit.
In this case, you should set the control knob to the
relative value mode on the remote control unit.
For details, refer to the operation manual supplied
with the remote control unit.
Connecting the Remote Control Unit
57
Chapter
3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
Setting the Recording
Format
Audio
Recording format
24bit/48kHz
Number of channels
16bit/48kHz
8 channels b)
8 channels a)
4 channels b)
4 channels c)
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
The recording formats supported by this
camcorder are as follows.
Video
Recording format
MPEG HD422 50
(Bit rate: 50 Mbps)
MPEG HD420 HQ/
SP
(Bit rate: 35/25
Mbps)
MPEG IMX 50/40/
Resolution System
1080
720
1080
720
525
b)
frequency a)
59.94i/29.97P/
50i/25P/
23.98P
59.94P/50P
59.94i/29.97P/
50i/25P/
23.98P
59.94P/50P
59.94i c)
29.97P
30
(Bit rate: 50/40/30
Mbps)
625
50i d)
25P
DVCAM b)
525
59.94i c)
(Bit rate: 25 Mbps)
625
a) When the video recording format is set to MPEG
HD422 50.
b) When the video recording format is set to MPEG IMX
50/40/30.
c) When the video recording format is set to MPEG
HD420 HQ/SP or DVCAM.
Notes
• It is not possible to combine material recorded in
different frame frequency groups on single disc (see
page 59).
• This unit can record up to four channels of audio. If
you select a format with eight channels of audio,
silence is recorded in channels 5 to 8.
Setting the system frequency
1
Display the FORMAT page of the
OPERATION menu.
29.97P
024 FORMAT
50i d)
25P
SYSTEM LINE
:
SYSTEM FREQUENCY:
REC FORMAT
a) 59.94i/29.97P/59.94P: When the area of use is set to
NTSC(J)AREA/NTSC AREA.
50i/25P/50P: When the area of use is set to PAL
AREA.
23.98P: For the PDW-700, when the optional CBKZFC02 23.98P Record and Playback Software is
installed.
b) For the PDW-700, when the optional CBKZ-MD01
SD Record and Playback Software is installed.
c) When the combination of the SYSTEM LINE and
SYSTEM FREQUENCY settings is 1080/59.9i or
720/59.9P
d) When the combination of the SYSTEM LINE and
SYSTEM FREQUENCY settings is 1080/50i or 720/
50P
58
Setting the Recording Format
COUNTRY
TOP
:
1080
59.9i
HD422 50
: NTSC(J)AREA
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select SYSTEM FREQUENCY, and
turn the MENU knob to select the
desired system frequency.
You can select the frequency shown below
depending on the combination of the
COUNTRY and SYSTEM LINE settings.
COUNTRY
NTSC(J)AREA
NTSC AREA
PAL AREA
SYSTEM SYSTEM
LINE
FREQUENCY
1080
59.9i/29.9P/
23.98P
720
59.9P
1080
50i/25P
720
50P
Note
When you set SCAN MODE to 23.9P, the video
output signals and video recording signals of this
unit are 59.9 Hz signals after 2-3 pulldown.
Setting the video recording format
1
Display the FORMAT page of the
OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select REC FORMAT, and turn the
MENU knob to select the desired
recording format.
As you turn the MENU knob, the recording
format changes as follows: HD422 50 y
HD420 HQ y HD420 SP y IMX 50 1)
y IMX 40 1) y IMX 30 1) y
DVCAM 1).
1) When the optional CBKZ-MD01 SD Record and
Playback Software is installed.
To set the aspect ratio (when IMX 50, IMX 40,
IMX 30, or DVCAM is selected)
Select ASPECT RATIO(SD) on the FORMAT
page, and turn the MENU knob to select the
desired aspect ratio.
As you turn the MENU knob, the aspect ratio
changes as follows: 16:9 y 4:3.
TOP
SYSTEM LINE
:
SYSTEM FREQUENCY:
1080
59.9i
REC FORMAT
:
IMX 50
ASPECT RATIO(SD):
16:9
AU DATA LEN(IMX): 16bit
COUNTRY
: NTSC(J)AREA
Note
The unit ignores this setting when it records video from
external devices (see page 105).
To set the audio recording format (when IMX 50,
IMX 40, or IMX 30 is selected)
Select AU DATA LEN(IMX) on the FORMAT
page or AUDIO-2 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu, and turn the MENU knob to select the
desired audio recording format.
As you turn the MENU knob, the audio recording
format changes as follows: 16bit y 24bit.
Mixed recording of clips in
different formats on the same disc
As long as the frame frequency group is the same,
clips in different recording formats can be
recorded or written to the same disc. 1)
In this manual, this is referred to as “mixed format
recording mode”.
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
• Change the COUNTRY or SYSTEM LINE
setting as required.
• When SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 and
SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 59.9P,
you can set the camera shooting frequency
(SCAN MODE) to either 59.9 Hz or 23.9
Hz. Set SCAN MODE to either as required.
024 FORMAT
1) The recording format is regarded as different
whenever the system frequency, video resolution,
video codec/bit rate, or number of audio channels or
number of bits does not match.
Notes
• Regardless of frame frequency group matching,
it is not possible to mix clips with different
video resolutions (number of system lines) in
the same clip list.
• When the unit is in a mode that calls for
playback across clips that were recorded in
different recording formats, video and audio
playback may stop at the point where the format
changes from one format into another, and then
start again.
Frame frequency groups
The system frequencies supported by this unit are
divided into frame frequency groups, as shown in
the following table.
Setting the Recording Format
59
Frame frequency group
59.94 Hz
50 Hz
23.98 Hz
System frequency
59.94P
59.94i
29.97P
50P
50i
25P
23.98P
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
You can record clips with different recording
formats, for example HD422 and HD420SP clips,
by putting this unit into mixed format recording
mode.
To enable mixed format recording mode
Set MIXED RECORDING on the CAM
CONFIG 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu
to “ENABL”.
If you want to disable mixing of clips with
different recording formats, leave this item set to
“DSABL”. However, regardless of the mixed
format recording mode setting, it is always
possible to mix clips in the following format
groups.
• HD420 HQ, SP, and LP
• 1080/59.94i and 1080/29.97P
• 1080/50i and 1080/25P
Adjusting the Black
Balance and the White
Balance
To ensure excellent image quality when using this
camcorder, conditions may require that both the
black balance and the white balance be adjusted.
Black balance adjustment
The black balance will require adjustment in the
following cases.
• When the camcorder is used for the first time
• When the camcorder has not been used for a
long time
• When the camcorder is used under conditions in
which the surrounding temperature has changed
greatly
• When the GAIN selector (L/M/H) values have
been changed by using the USER menu
It is not usually necessary to adjust the black
balance when using the camcorder after it has
been off.
White balance adjustment
Always readjust the white balance when the
lighting conditions change.
Viewfinder screen displays
If the black balance or white balance adjustment
is started, messages that report on the progress
and results are displayed on the viewfinder screen
when the VF DISP MODE item is set to “2” or
“3” on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu.
Note
Black balance and white balance adjustment values that
are automatically set by the camcorder and the various
settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained
even when the power is turned off.
Adjusting the black balance
In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are
performed in the following order: black set and
black balance. Manual black balance adjustment
can be selected from the setup menu.
For details of manual black balance adjustment,
refer to the Maintenance Manual.
60
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance
Possible messages are listed below.
Error message
ABB : NG
IRIS NOT CLOSE
ABB : NG
TIME LIMIT
2
1
1 OUTPUT/DCC switch
2 AUTO W/B BAL switch
Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM.
2
Flick the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
BLK and release the switch.
The switch returns to the center position, and
the adjustment is executed.
During adjustment, the following message is
displayed on the viewfinder screen.
If any of the above error messages is displayed,
retry the black balance adjustment.
Keep pushing the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
BLK until “-BLACK SET-” appears after
“-BLACK BALANCE-” appears. If the error
message occurs again, an internal check is
necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to
the Maintenance Manual.
ABB:EXECUTING
BLACK SET
The messages change in the following
sequence :
BLACK SET
r
BLACK BALANCE
The black balance adjustment ends in a few
seconds with the message “ABB:OK” and
the adjustment value is automatically stored
in memory.
Notes
• During the black balance adjustment, the iris is
automatically closed.
• During the black balance adjustment, the gain
selection circuit is automatically activated so you may
see flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not
a fault.
If automatic black balance adjustment
cannot be made
If the black balance adjustment cannot be
completed normally, an error message will appear
for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen.
Note
If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS
connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris.
If this happens, the black balance will be incorrect.
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
1
ABB : NG
R (or G or B) :
OVERFLOW
Meaning
The lens iris did not close;
adjustment was
impossible.
Adjustment could not be
completed within the
standard number of
attempts.
The difference between the
reference value and the
current value is so great
that it exceeds the range.
Adjustment was
impossible.
Black balance memory
Values stored in memory are held until the black
balance is next adjusted.
If a memory error occurs
If the error message “: STORED DATA : NG”
flashes on the viewfinder screen when the
camcorder is turned on, the black balance and
white balance memory contents have been lost.
Adjust the black balance and white balance again.
Contact a Sony representative if this message
continues to appear even after the black balance
and white balance have been adjusted again.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
Adjusting the white balance
1
Set the switches and selectors as shown
in the figure below.
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance
61
3
Place a white test card under the same
lighting conditions as for the subject to
be shot and zoom up to it.
Alternatively, any white object such as a
cloth or a wall can be used.
The absolute minimum white area is as
follows.
Rectangle centered on the screen. The
lengths of the sides are 70% of the length
and width of the screen.
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
1
2 34
1 FILTER selector
2 GAIN selector: Set as low as possible.
3 OUTPUT/DCC switch: CAM
4 WHITE BAL switch: A or B a)
The white object must be within the
rectangle and have an area of at least 10%
of the screen.
a)White balance setting values are stored in
memory B only when the WHITE SWITCH &lt;B&gt;
item is set to “MEM” on the WHITE SETTING
page of the OPERATION menu.
If the setting of the GAIN selector or WHITE
BAL switch is changed, a message reporting
the new setting position appears for about 3
seconds in the setting change and adjustment
progress message display area of the
viewfinder screen.
2
Set the FILTER selector to suit the
lighting conditions as follows.
Note
Make sure there are not bright spots in the
rectangle.
4
Adjust the lens iris.
Manually adjusted lens: set the iris to an
appropriate setting.
Lens with automatic iris: set the automatic/
manual switch on the lens to automatic.
5
Flick the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
WHT and then release the switch.
The possible settings of the FILTER selector
and their corresponding filters to be selected
are listed below.
FILTER selector (inner knob)
setting
1
2
3
4
ND filter
CLEAR
1/ ND
4
1/ ND
16
1/ ND
64
If the setting of the FILTER selector is
changed, a message reporting the setting
appears for about 3 seconds in the setting
change and adjustment progress message
display area of the viewfinder screen (in
display mode 3).
62
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance
AUTO W/B BAL switch
The switch returns to the center position, and
the adjustment is executed.
During adjustment, the message
“AWB:EXECUTING WHITE BALANCE”
is displayed on the viewfinder screen (in
display mode 2 or 3).
The white balance adjustment ends in about
one second with the message shown in the
following figure, and the adjustment setting
is automatically stored in the memory (A or
B) that was selected in step 1.
AWB:OK
. K
Note
If the camera has a zoom lens with an automatic iris,
the iris may hunt 1) during the adjustment. To
prevent this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as
IG, IS, or S) on the lens.
For details, refer to the lens operation manual.
1) Hunting: Repeated brightening and darkening of
the image, resulting from repeated response to
automatic iris control.
If the automatic white balance adjustment
cannot be made
If the white balance adjustment cannot be
completed normally, an error message will appear
for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen.
Possible messages are listed below.
WHITE : NG
COLOR TEMP
HIGH
WHITE : NG
COLOR TEMP LOW
WHITE : NG
TIME LIMIT
WHITE : NG
POOR WHITE
AREA
WHITE : NG
OVER LEVEL
Meaning
The white video level is
too low. Either open the
lens iris or increase the
gain.
The color temperature is
too high.
The color temperature is
too low.
Adjustment could not be
completed within the
standard number of
attempts.
The white area could not
be checked.
The white video level is
too high. Either stop down
the lens iris or change the
ND filter.
If any of the above error messages is displayed,
retry the white balance adjustment. If the error
message occurs again, an internal check is
necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to
the Maintenance Manual.
If you have no time to adjust the white
balance
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
Approximate color temperature
of the subject
Error message
WHITE : NG
LOW LEVEL
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.
For the PDW-700, this makes it possible to
automatically set the white balance to 5600K
(factory default value) by pressing the COLOR
TEMP. button.
The color temperature to which the white balance
is set when the COLOR TEMP. button is pressed
can be selected from among 3200K, 4300K,
5600K, and 6300K on the ASSIGNABLE SW
page of the OPERATION menu. You can also
assign color temperatures to the ASSIGN 1/3/4
switches and the RET button on the lens.
For details of automatic white balance adjustment,
see page 61.
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance
63
[700]
To change the color temperature when
the ND filter is switched
You can assign electrical CC (color correction)
filters to ND filters (see page 17). This allows you
to change the color temperature automatically
when the ND filter is switched.
1
1
2
TOP
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
ND FILTER CTEMP :
ND FLT CTEMP &lt;1&gt;:
ND FLT CTEMP 2-4:
OFF
3200K
5600K
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
3200K
4300K
5600K
6300K
CC&lt;A&gt;:
CC&lt;B&gt;:
CC&lt;C&gt;:
CC&lt;D&gt;:
Select ND FILTER CTEMP, and turn
the MENU knob to display “ON”.
3
To assign an electrical CC filter to
FILTER selector position number 1,
select “ND FLT CTEMP &lt;1&gt;”. To
assign it to positions 2 to 4, select “ND
FLT CTEMP 2-4”.
4
Turn the MENU knob to display the
desired color temperature.
As you turn the MENU knob, the color
temperature changes as follows: 3200K y
4300K y 5600K y 6300K.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required.
[700]
To switch between electrical CC filters
with an ASSIGN switch
You can assign the function that switches
between electrical CC filters to an ASSIGN
switch. This allows you to switch between color
temperatures (3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) that
have been assigned to up to four positions (A to
D) with each press of the ASSIGN switch.
Regardless of assignments to ASSIGN switches,
you can also switch between the color
temperatures assigned to each position from a
remote control unit. 1)
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance
Select the position to which to assign a
CC filter by selecting one of
“ELECTRICAL CC&lt;A&gt;” to
“ELECTRICAL CC &lt;D&gt;”, and then
turn the MENU knob to select the
desired color temperature.
As you turn the MENU knob, the color
temperature changes as follows: 3200K y
4300K y 5600K y 6300K.
To set no color temperature
Select “-----” with ELECTRICAL CC&lt;C&gt; or
&lt;D&gt; selected.
When the ASSIGN switch is pressed, the
setting for that position is not displayed. For
example, if “-----” is set for one position, then
switching between the remaining three
positions is carried out.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205
2
Display the WHITE FILTER page of
the MAINTENANCE menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
Display the WHITE FILTER page of
the MAINTENANCE menu.
M15 WHITE FILTER
64
1) When the RM-B150/B750, MSU-900/950, or RCP750/751/920/921 is connected.
3
Repeat step 2 as required.
4
Assign the electrical CC filter switching
function (ELECTRICAL CC) to an
ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch, the COLOR
TEMP button, or the RET button on the
lens (see page 221).
White balance memory
Values stored in memory are held until the white
balance is next adjusted.
There are two sets of white balance memories, A
and B, and adjustments for each of the CC filters
(PDW-F800) or ND filters (PDW-700) can be
automatically stored in the memory
corresponding to the setting (A or B) of the
WHITE BAL switch. The camcorder has four
built-in CC filters (PDW-F800) or ND filters
(PDW-700), so a total of eight (4 &times; 2) adjustments
can be stored. However, the memory contents are
not linked to the CC filter (PDW-F800) or ND
filter (PDW-700) settings in the following cases.
• For the PDW-700, when the number of
memories allocated to each of A and B is
limited to one by setting the FILTER WHT
To save white balance settings obtained by ATW
Set ATW HOLD MEMORY in the WHITE
SETTING page of the OPERATION menu to
“ON”. When this is done, auto white balance
settings obtained by ATW are written to the
memory corresponding to the setting (A or B) that
is currently selected with the WHITE BAL
switch. 1)
You can then turn ATW off and continue
shooting with the current white balance values.
The unit continues to use the values that were in
effect immediately before ATW was turned off.
1) This function is not available when the WHITE BAL
switch is set to PRST. If you have connected a remote
control unit, the unit uses the memory corresponding
to the remote control unit setting (A, B, or C).
WB
ATW HOLD MEMORY: OFF
a)
ATW: ON
t
ATW: OFF
a) White balance settings stored in memory
A, B, or C
WB
ATW HOLD MEMORY: ON
b)
ATW: ON
ATW: OFF
b) White balance settings immediately
before ATW was turned off.
t
White balance settings used when ATW is turned
off
(WB: White balance setting value, t: Shooting
time)
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
MEM item on the WHITE SETTING page of
the OPERATION menu to OFF.
• When the electrical CC filter switching function
has been assigned to an ASSIGN switch, or
when a remote control unit has been connected.
(In these cases, the contents of white balance
memory are linked to electrical CC filter
positions (A to D).)
If the WHITE BAL switch is set to B, and on the
WHITE SETTING page of the OPERATION
menu, the WHITE SWITCH &lt;B&gt; item is set to
“ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)”, the ATW
function is activated to automatically adjust the
white balance of the picture being shot for
varying lighting conditions.
If a memory error occurs
If the error message “: STORED DATA : NG”
flashes on the viewfinder screen when the
camcorder is turned on, the white balance and
black balance memory contents have been lost.
Adjust the white balance and black balance again.
Contact a Sony representative if this message
continues to appear even after the white balance
and black balance have been adjusted again.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance
65
Setting the Electronic
Shutter
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode
Select this mode for obtaining images with no
horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects
such as monitor screens.
SYSTEM
LINE setting
1080
Shutter modes
The shutter modes that can be used with the
electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can
be selected are listed below.
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
SYSTEM
System
Shutter speed (unit:
LINE setting frequency seconds)
1/
1
1
1080
59.94i
100, /125, /250,
1/
50i
29.97P
25P
23.98P
720
59.94P
(SCAN
MODE:
59.9P)
59.94P
(SCAN
MODE:
23.9P)
50P
1
1
500, /1000, /2000
1
1
60, /125, /250,
1/
1
1
500, /1000, /2000
1/ a), 1/ , 1/ , 1/
40
60 120
1
1
1
125, /250, /500, /1000,
1/
2000
1/ a), 1/ , 1/ , 1/
33
50 100
1
1
1
125, /250, /500, /1000,
1/
2000
1/ a), 1/ , 1/ , 1/ ,
32
48 50 60
1/ , 1/ , 1/
96 125 250,
1/
1
1
500, /1000, /2000
1/
1
1
100, /125, /250,
1/
1
1
500, /1000, /2000
1/
1/
1/ , 1/ , 1/ ,
48 50 60
1/ , 1/
,
96 125 250,
1/
1
1
500, /1000, /2000
1/ , 1/ , 1/
60 125 250,
1/
1
1
500, /1000, /2000
32,
1/
a) This speed cannot be selected when the unit is in Slow
&amp; Quick Motion mode and FRAME RATE on the
REC FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu is
set to a value that is greater than the system frequency.
66
720
Standard mode
Select this mode for shooting fast-moving
subjects with little blurring.
Setting the Electronic Shutter
System
frequency
59.94i
50i
29.97P a)
Shutter speed
(unit: Hz)
60.00 to 4300
50.00 to 4700
30.00 to 2700
25P a)
25.00 to 2300
23.98P a)
24.00 to 2200
59.94P
(SCAN
MODE:
59.9P)
59.94P
(SCAN
MODE:
23.9P)
50P
60.00 to 4300
24.00 to 2200
50.00 to 4700
a) When the unit is in Slow &amp; Quick Motion mode and
FRAME RATE on the REC FUNCTION page of the
OPERATION menu is set to a value that is greater
than the system frequency, the lower limits for shutter
speed settings are as shown below.
29.97P: 60.00Hz
25P: 50.00Hz
23.98P: 48.00Hz
SLS (slow speed shutter) mode
Select this mode for shooting subjects in low level
lighting conditions.
SYSTEM LINE
setting
1080
720
Shutter speed (unit:
frames)
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16
2, 4, 6, 8, 16
Notes
• SLS mode cannot be selected when SCAN
MODE is set to 23.9P.
• Whatever the operating mode of the electronic
shutter, the sensitivity of the CCD decreases
with increasing shutter speed.
• When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens
wider as the shutter speed increases, thus
reducing the depth of field.
• Under artificial light, particularly fluorescent or
mercury lamps, the light intensity may appear to
be constant, but the red, green, and blue
intensities are actually changing in
synchronization with the frequency of the
213 to set the VF DISPLAY MODE
item to “2” or “3” on the VF DISP 1
page of the USER menu.
2
The current shutter setting indication appears
for about 3 seconds in the setting change and
adjustment progress message display area of
the viewfinder screen.
Examples: “: SS : 1/250”, “: ECS : 60.0 Hz”
3
Selecting the shutter mode and
shutter speed
Standard mode (with system frequency: 59.94i)
SLS mode
ECS mode
If you have changed the configuration, only
the selected modes and speeds appear.
• When the unit is shipped from the factory, it is
configured to display all of the modes and
speeds in “Shutter modes” on page 66, except
SLS mode. You can change this configuration
by selecting only the required modes and
speeds on the SHT ENABLE page of the
OPERATION menu (see page 166).
• Shutter speeds in standard mode can also be
switched to angle display by using SHT DISP
MODE in the CAM CONFIG 2 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu (see page 190).
MENU knob
You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the
OPERATION menu to narrow the range of
choice in advance, or to select in advance whether
or not you use ECS or SLS.
Before the shutter setting indication
disappears, flick the SHUTTER
selector down to SELECT again and
repeat this until the desired mode or
speed appears.
When all modes and speeds are displayed,
the display changes in the following order.
Switching the shutter mode, and the shutter
speed in standard mode: Repeatedly flick
the SHUTTER selector to the SELECT side
(see the next section).
Switching the shutter speed in ECS mode and
SLS mode: Select ECS mode or SLS mode
with the SHUTTER selector, and then turn
the MENU knob (see page 67).
SHUTTER selector
Flick the SHUTTER selector from ON
to SELECT.
To set the shutter speed in ECS or SLS
mode
1
Set the shutter speed mode to ECS or
SLS (see the previous item).
To set the shutter mode and standardmode shutter speed
2
Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired frequency or number of frames.
Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained
even when the camcorder power is turned off.
When the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit is
connected
You can set the shutter speed of ECS or SLS with
the rotary encoder of the RM-B150.
1
Follow the procedure described in
“Selecting the display items” on page
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
power supply causing flicker. Using an
electronic shutter under such lighting could
make the flicker even worse. Color flicker is
particularly likely to happen when the power
supply frequency is 60 Hz. However, if the
power frequency is 50 Hz, setting the shutter
speed to 1/100 can reduce this flicker.
• When a bright object is shot in ECS mode in
such a manner that it fills the screen, the upper
edge of the picture may have poor quality
because of an inherent characteristic of CCDs.
Before using ECS mode, check the shooting
conditions.
• The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on
the current system frequency.
Setting the Electronic Shutter
67
camcorder appears along the top and bottom
of the screen.
To change the range of choice of shutter
mode and speed settings
You can reduce the time required to select the
shutter mode and speed by narrowing the choice
of settings in advance. This can be done by using
the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION
menu.
Note
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
The settings selected on the SHT ENABLE page of the
OPERATION menu become invalid when the RM-B150
or another remote control unit is connected to the
camcorder.
1
Display the SHT ENABLE page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
To set the shutter speed in degree units
On the SHUTTER SELECT page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, you can specify degrees
(angle of opening of the shutter) to select the
shutter speed in standard shutter mode.
Note
When you enable degree settings, the unit disables all
items on the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION
menu except SHUTTER ECS and SHUTTER SLS.
1
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
022 SHT ENABLE
SHUTTER
SHUTTER
SHUTTER
SHUTTER
SHUTTER
SHUTTER
SHUTTER
SHUTTER
2
ECS
SLS
1/100
1/125
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the
shutter mode or shutter speed you want,
then press the MENU knob.
b on the left of the selected item changes to
z and z on the left of the setting changes to
?.
3
Turn the MENU knob until ON
appears, then press the MENU knob.
z on the left of the selected item changes to
b and ? on the left of the setting changes to
z.
To set another mode or speed, return to step
2.
Note that only the shutter speeds set to ON
can be selected with the SHUTTER selector.
4
To end the menu operation, set the
MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or close
the cover of the menu operating section.
The menu disappears from the screen and the
display indicating the current status of the
68
[F800]
Setting the Electronic Shutter
Display the SHUTTER SELECT page
of the MAINTENANCE menu, and
press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select SHUTTER SELECT, and turn
the MENU knob to display DEGREE.
M28 SHUTTER SELECT
TOP
SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE
ADD: ---.DEL:
DEGREE
SECOND
1: 216.0
1/99.85
2: 180.0
1/119.7
3: 90.0
1/239.0
4: 45.0
1/475.0
5: 22.5
1/940.0
6: 11.2
1/1880
Six shutter speeds appear. A registered
shuttle angle appears in the DEGREE field of
each line. A shutter speed (exposure time, in
units of seconds) appears in the SECOND
field, as calculated by converting from the
selected frame rate.
Each time that you flick the SHUTTER
selector to the SELECT side, the setting or
mode changes in the following order. (SLS
mode and ECS mode appear only when they
are enabled on the SHT ENABLE page of the
OPERATION menu.)
Example of standard mode display
(shutter degrees setting)
1
2
SLS mode
3
4
5
6
ECS mode
To register user-defined settings
You can register up to six shutter angle settings.
If six settings are already registered, you must
delete one of the registered settings before
registering a new one.
1
TOP
SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE
ADD: ---.DEL:?
DEGREE
SECOND
*1: 216.0
1/99.85
2: 180.0
1/119.7
3: 90.0
1/239.0
4: 45.0
1/475.0
5: 22.5
1/940.0
6: 11.2
1/1880
Turn the MENU knob to move the *
mark to the number of the shuttle angle
that you want to change, and then press
the MENU knob.
The selected setting is deleted. The numbers
of settings after the deleted setting are
incremented to bring them up to replace the
deleted setting. (The following example
shows the display after deletion of the setting
“90.0”, which had been registered as setting
number 3.)
M28 SHUTTER SELECT
TOP
SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE
ADD: ---.DEL:
DEGREE
SECOND
*1: 216.0
1/99.85
2: 180.0
1/119.7
3: 45.0
1/475.0
4: 22.5
1/940.0
5: 11.2
1/1880
6: ---.-------
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b
mark to the ADD position, and press the
MENU knob.
4
Turn the MENU knob to change the
value to the right of the ? mark into the
shutter angle that you want to register,
and then press the MENU knob. (The
setting value can be selected over the
range 360.0 to 4.5.)
The newly specified shutter angle is assigned
to a free slot in the list, and the list is sorted
in order of the setting values. (In the figure
below, the shutter angle “144.0” was added,
and then the list was sorted, so that the angle
“144.0” is registered as item number 3.)
M28 SHUTTER SELECT
TOP
SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE
ADD: ---.DEL:
DEGREE
SECOND
*1: 216.0
1/99.85
2: 180.0
1/119.7
3: 144.0
1/150.0
4: 45.0
1/475.0
5: 22.5
1/940.0
6: 11.2
1/1880
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
M28 SHUTTER SELECT
TOP
SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE
ADD:?180.0
DEL:
DEGREE
SECOND
*1: 216.0
1/99.85
2: 180.0
1/119.7
3: 45.0
1/475.0
4: 22.5
1/940.0
5: 11.2
1/1880
6: ---.-------
Rotate the MENU knob to move the b
mark to the DEL position, and then
press the MENU knob.
The b mark changes into a z mark, and the
z mark changes into a ? mark.
Also, a * mark appears before the number.
2
M28 SHUTTER SELECT
To add more user-defined settings
If there is no empty number in the list:
Repeat steps 1 to 4.
If there is an empty number in the list:
Repeat steps 3 and 4.
Deleting unneeded settings
When you are selecting shutter speeds, the
unit skips numbers that do not have assigned
settings. You will be able to select settings
more quickly if you delete settings that you
use only rarely. You must leave at least one
setting, but you can delete settings numbered
2 through 6.
The b mark changes into a z mark, and the
z mark changes into a ? mark.
Setting the Electronic Shutter
69
Changing the Reference
Value for Automatic Iris
Adjustment
4
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
The AUTO IRIS page disappears from the
screen.
5
Turn the MENU knob to change the
reference value.
Note
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
The reference value for automatic iris adjustment
can be changed to aid the shooting of clear
pictures of back-lit subjects, or to prevent blownout highlights. The reference value for the lens
iris can be set within the following range with
respect to the standard value.
• 0.25 to 1 (increasing by increments of 0.25):
About 0.25 to 1 stop further open
• –0.25 to –1 (decreasing by increments of 0.25):
About 0.25 to 1 stop further close
Also you can set the area where light detection
occurs.
To change the reference value
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the AUTO IRIS page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
016 AUTO IRIS
Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is
not ECS.
The changed reference value is retained until
the power of the camcorder is turned off.
Even if the reference value is changed, it
reverts to the standard value every time the
power is turned on.
To make the iris more open
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as
seen from the front of the camera.
The iris stop indicators as shown in the
following table appear in the upper part to the
left of the F number in the iris indication.
Iris stop
0.25
0.5
0.75
1
To stop down the iris
Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen
from the front of the camera.
The iris stop indicators as shown in the
following table appear in the lower part to the
left of the F number in the iris indication.
Iris stop
–0.25
–0.5
2
Check that the b mark is at the IRIS
OVERRIDE position, and then press
the MENU knob.
–0.75
–1
b on the left of the selected item changes to
z and z on the left of the setting changes to
?.
3
Turn the MENU knob until “ON”
appears, then press the MENU knob.
z on the left of the selected item changes to
b and ? on the left of the setting changes to
z.
The IRIS OVERRIDE item is set to “ON”.
70
Indicator
Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment
Indicator
4
Turn the MENU knob to move b to
IRIS WINDOW, then press the MENU
knob.
b changes to z and z changes to ?.
5
Opening the lens iris
Turn the MENU knob until the desired
auto iris window appears, then press the
MENU knob.
Iris opened by 1
stop (two
segments)
The shaded parts indicate the
area where light detection
z changes to b and ? changes to z.
Stopping down the lens iris
Iris stopped down
by 1 stop (two
segments)
If you select “VARIABLE”, the following
items become effective and you can set the
window of the desired size. Set each item to
the desired size.
Iris stopped down
by 0.5 stop (one
segment)
Item
IRIS VAR WIDTH
IRIS VAR HEIGHT
When the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit is
connected
The IRIS control knob of the RM-B150 can be
used for lens iris setting. In this case, the indicator
is not displayed.
To set the automatic iris window
IRIS VAR V POS.
6
1
Follow the procedure of steps 1 and 2
described in the previous item to
display the AUTO IRIS page.
2
Turn the MENU knob to move b to
IRIS WINDOW IND, then press the
MENU knob.
b on the left of IRIS WINDOW IND.
changes to z and z on the left of the setting
changes to ?.
3
IRIS VAR H POS.
Turn the MENU knob until ON
appears, then press the MENU knob.
z changes to b and ? changes to z.
The currently selected auto iris window
appears on the screen.
If it is not necessary to display the auto iris
window on the screen, set to OFF.
Setting
The width of the
window
The height of the
window
The position of the
window in the
horizontal direction
The position of the
window in the vertical
direction.
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
Iris opened by 0.5
stop (one segment)
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
The menu disappears from the screen and the
display indicating the current status of the
camcorder appears along the top and bottom
of the screen.
To counter problems with very bright
highlights
If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too
much, leaving the overall image dark, or the
highlights may be blown out. In such cases,
setting the highlight clip function on reduces the
luminance range, avoiding problems from the
automatic iris correction.
In the AUTO IRIS page of the USER menu, set
the CLIP HIGH LIGHT item to ON.
Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment
71
Adjusting the Audio
Level
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
Setting the AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2
switches to AUTO automatically adjusts the input
levels of the audio signal to be recorded in audio
channels 1 and 2. You can also adjust the audio
level manually.
For audio channels 3 and 4, menu settings allow
you to select automatic adjustment, manual
adjustment, or fixed.
Target audio level for automatic audio level
adjustment
Make adjustment using –20 dB as the target level.
If the audio level meter shows a maximum level
of 0 dB, then it indicates that the input audio level
is excessive.
0
10
0
10
CH-3
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
F
R
W
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
CH-1
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
CH-2
CH-4
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
F
R
W
MIC LEVEL
control
1
2
1
To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO
IN CH1 or CH2 connector, set the
AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch to
REAR.
To adjust both input signals, set both
switches to REAR.
Excessive
input level
2
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es)
corresponding to the channel(s) selected
in step 1 to MANUAL.
3
With the LEVEL control(s) for the
channel(s) selected in step 1, adjust so
that the audio level meter shows up to
–20 dB for a normal input volume.
Target input
level
Manually adjusting the audio
levels of the audio inputs from the
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors
With the XLR connection automatic detection
function being on, when a cable is connected to
the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector, the input
from these connectors is automatically selected
for audio recording. In this case, start the
operation from step 2.
You can turn on and off the XLR connection
automatic detection function on the AUDIO-1 page
of the MAINTENANCE menu.
Correspondence between recording level
adjustments and audio level controls
On the AUDIO-3 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu, you can select which audio level control
controls the audio recording level of the input to
each of the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. The
correspondences between the settings of the menu
items and the controls are as follows.
REAR1/WRR LEVEL: Audio recording level
of channel 1
Setting
SIDE1
FRONT
F+S1
72
3
LEVEL
Adjusting the Audio Level
Control
LEVEL (CH-1) control (on the left)
MIC LEVEL control
LEVEL (CH-1) control linked with
MIC LEVEL control.
REAR2/WRR LEVEL: Audio recording level
of channel 2
Setting
SIDE2
FRONT
F+S2
Control
LEVEL (CH-2) control (on the right)
MIC LEVEL control
LEVEL (CH-2) control linked with
MIC LEVEL control.
2
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for
the desired channel(s) selected in step 1
to MANUAL.
3
Turn the MIC LEVEL control, and
adjust so that the audio level meter
shows up to –20 dB for a normal input
volume.
Note
Manually adjusting the audio
level of the MIC IN connector
Note
If the XLR connection automatic detection mode is on,
when the cables are connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/
CH2 connectors, the camcorder detects the connection to
the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. Thus, the AUDIO
IN switches are internally reset to REAR and the audio
signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors are
automatically selected.
Before adjusting the audio level of the front microphone,
confirm that no cables are connected to the AUDIO IN
CH1/CH2 connectors. Alternatively, set the REAR XLR
AUTO item to OFF on the AUDIO-1 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
Correspondence between recording level
adjustments and audio level controls
On the AUDIO-3 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu, you can select which audio level control
controls the audio recording level of the front
microphone input. The correspondences between
the settings of the menu items and the controls are
as follows.
MIC CH1 LEVEL: Audio recording level of
channel 1
Setting
SIDE1
FRONT
F+S1
Control
LEVEL (CH-1) control (on the left)
MIC LEVEL control
LEVEL (CH-1) control linked with
MIC LEVEL control.
MIC CH2 LEVEL: Audio recording level of
channel 2
Setting
SIDE2
FRONT
F+S2
Control
LEVEL (CH-2) control (on the
right)
MIC LEVEL control
LEVEL (CH-2) control linked with
MIC LEVEL control.
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2)
controls and MIC LEVEL control linked together, if the
MIC LEVEL control is set to 0, the audio signals on
channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position
of the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL
(CH-1/CH-2) controls.
Note
When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control
and LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls linked together, if the
LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls are set to 0, the audio
signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check
the position of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls before
adjusting the MIC LEVEL control.
LEVEL
0
10
0
10
CH-3
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
F
R
W
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
CH-1
PRESET
REGEN
CLOCK
3
1
CH-2
CH-4
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
F
R
W
2
1
Set either or both of the AUDIO IN
switch(es) to FRONT.
Recording audio on channels 3
and 4
Selecting the recorded audio
You can select the audio recorded on audio
channels 3 and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH4 switches, or you can have the selection made
automatically, as follows.
Adjusting the Audio Level
73
To automatically select the same audio as on
channels 1 and 2
On the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu, set the AUDIO CH3/4 MODE item to “CH
1/2”.
page of the MAINTENANCE menu to
FRONT.
The levels of audio channels 3 and 4 can now
be adjusted with the MIC LEVEL control.
To set to a fixed value
In step 2 of the previous procedure “To adjust
manually”, set the menu items to FIX.
1
2
3
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
4
5
6
CH-3 switch
1 F: The audio signal from the front
microphone is recorded.
2 R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN
CH1 connector is recorded.
3 W: The audio signal of the wireless
microphone is recorded.
CH-4 switch
4 F: Same as with the CH3 switch.
5 R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN
CH2 connector is recorded.
6 W: Same as with the CH3 switch.
Note
When the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector is set to LINE
or MIC, the audio signals recorded on audio channels 3
and 4 are not affected by the XLR automatic detection
function. They are determined by the settings of the
AUDIO IN CH-3 and CH-4 switches.
Adjusting the audio recording levels
To adjust automatically
Set AU CH34 AGC MODE on the AUDIO-2 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu to STREO or MONO.
To adjust manually
74
1
Set AU CH34 AGC MODE on the
AUDIO-2 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu to OFF.
2
Set AUDIO CH3 LEVEL (for audio
channel 3) and AUDIO CH4 LEVEL
(for audio channel 4) on the AUDIO-3
Adjusting the Audio Level
The first (leftmost) digit of timecode flashes.
Setting the Time Data
4
Use the up and down arrow buttons to
change values, and use the left and right
arrow buttons to move the flashing
digit. Repeat until all digits are set.
To reset the timecode value to 00 00 00 00
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
Note
Setting the timecode
The timecode setting range is from 00 : 00 : 00 :
00 to 23 : 59 : 59 : 29 (hours : minutes : seconds :
frames).
1
RESET
DISPLAY
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN or R-RUN.
F-RUN: Free run. The timecode generator
keeps running.
R-RUN: Recording run. The timecode
generator runs only while recording.
To set the drop frame mode/non-drop frame
mode
You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or nondrop frame (NDF) mode on the TIMECODE page
of the MAINTENANCE menu.
To make the timecode consecutive
When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to
R-RUN, recording a number of scenes on the disc
normally produces consecutive timecode.
However, once you remove the disc and record on
another disc, the timecode will no longer be
consecutive when you use the original disc again
for recording. In this case, to make the timecode
consecutive, set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK
switch to REGEN.
Saving the real Time in the Timecode
Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode.
When it is necessary to set the actual time, use the
TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu.
RESET/RETURN
button
DISP SEL HOLD
5
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
Breakup may occur in the camera video when the unit’s
format is set to SYSTEM LINE:720, SYSTEM
FREQUENCY: 59.9P, and SCAN MODE: 23.9P, and
DF/NDF on the TIMECODE page of the
MAINTENANCE menu is set to NDF. This may occur
when you do any of the following.
• Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to CLOCK.
• Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN.
• Sync lock the unit’s internal timecode generator to an
external generator (see page 76).
BRIGHT
LEVE
3,5
4
EXPAND
CHAPTER
COUNTER RC U-BIT
THUMBNAIL
CLIP MENU
0
ESSENCE
MARK
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
SET
For details, see “Setting the Date/Time of the
Internal Clock” on page 44.
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELE
SUB CLIP
S.SEL
CH-1
PRESET
2
10
SHIFT
REGEN
CLOCK
AUDIO IN
Setting the user bits
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
1
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
2
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK
switch to PRESET.
3
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
SET.
By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal
digits), you can record user information such as
the date, time, or scene number on the timecode
track.
Setting the Time Data
75
generators of other camcorders/VTRs with the
internal generator of this camcorder.
Connections for timecode
synchronization
Connect both the reference video signal and the
external timecode as illustrated below.
1
Example 1: Synchronizing with an external
timecode
RESET/RETURN button
DISP SEL HOLD
RESET
DISPLAY
BRIGHT
LEVE
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
2,4
3
EXPAND
CHAPTER
COUNTER RC U-BIT
THUMBNAIL
CLIP MENU
0
ESSENCE
MARK
10
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
SET
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELE
SUB CLIP
S.SEL
CH-1
PRESET
SHIFT
REGEN
CLOCK
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
2
External timecode
Reference video signal
1
Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT.
2
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
SET.
The first (leftmost) digit flashes.
3
Use the up and down arrow buttons to
change values, and use the left and right
arrow buttons to move the flashing
digit. Repeat until all digits are set.
To reset the user bit data to 00 00 00 00
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
4
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN or R-RUN, corresponding to the
desired operating mode for the
timecode generator.
The set user bit data will be recorded for both
LTC and VITC.
To store the user bit setting in memory
The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is
automatically retained in memory even when the
power is turned off.
Synchronizing the timecode
You can synchronize the internal timecode
generator of this camcorder with an external
generator for the regeneration of an external
timecode. You can also synchronize the timecode
76
1
Setting the Time Data
1 GENLOCK
2 TC IN
IN a)
a) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.
Example 2: Interconnecting a number of
camcorders or timecode synchronization
To lock the timecode to an external
source
1
2
Reference camcorder
1
3
4
2
DISP SEL HOLD
RESET
DISPLAY
BRIGHT
LEVEL
EXPAND
CHAPTER
COUNTER RC U-BIT
CLIP MENU
THUMBNAIL
0
ESSENCE
MARK
10
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
SET
0
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
3
SUB CLIP
S.SEL
CH-1
PRESET
4
SHIFT
2
1
REGEN
CLOCK
CH-2
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
2
To another camcorder to be synchronized
1 TEST OUT
2 TC OUT
3 TC IN
4 GENLOCK IN a)
a) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.
SDI IN
(OPTION)
GENLOCK
IN
TEST
OUT
TC
OUT
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
4
3
1
TC IN
5
1
Turn on the POWER switch.
2
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK
switch to PRESET.
3
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN.
4
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
5
Supply a timecode signal and a
reference video signal complying with
the SMPTE standard and in proper
phase relationship, to the TC IN
connector and to the GENLOCK IN
connector, respectively.
Setting the Time Data
77
This operation synchronizes the internal
timecode generator with the external
timecode. After about 10 seconds, you can
disconnect the external timecode without
losing the synchronization. However, there
will be noise on the recorded image if you
connect or disconnect the timecode signal
during recording.
Notes
Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings for Shooting
• When you finish the above procedure, the internal
timecode is immediately synchronized with the
external timecode and the counter display will show
the value of the external timecode. However, wait for
a few seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before
recording.
• If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the
same as the system frequency of the camcorder, the
camera cannot be correctly genlocked. In such a case,
the internal timecode is not correctly synchronized
with the external timecode.
• When the GENLOCK ON/OFF item is set to OFF on
the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu,
the timecode cannot be synchronized with the
reference video signal. In this case, set the GENLOCK
item to ON on the GENLOCK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
User bit settings during timecode
synchronization
When the timecode is synchronized, only the time
data is synchronized with the external timecode
value. Therefore, each camcorder can have its
own user bit settings.
You can lock the users bits of this camcorder to
the user bits of external timecode by setting EXTLK UBIT in the TIMECODE page of the
MAINTENANCE menu to EXT.
To release the timecode synchronization
First disconnect the external timecode, then set
the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.
To change the power supply from the battery
pack to an external power supply during
timecode synchronization
To maintain a continuous power supply, connect
the external power supply to the DC IN connector
before removing the battery pack. You may lose
timecode synchronization if you remove the
battery pack first.
Camera synchronization during timecode
synchronization
During timecode synchronization, the camera is
genlocked to the reference video signal input
from the GENLOCK IN connector.
78
Setting the Time Data
Chapter
4 Shooting
Handling Discs
Discs used for recording and
playback
1) Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Storage
• Do not store discs where they may be subjected
to direct sunlight, or in other places where the
temperature or humidity is high.
• Do not leave cartridges where dust may be able
to gain ingress.
• Store cartridges in their cases.
Care of the discs
• Remove dust and dirt on the outside of a
cartridge using a soft dry cloth.
• If condensation forms, allow ample time to dry
before use.
Notes
• It is not possible to use the following discs for
recording or playback on this unit:
- Blu-ray Disc
- Professional Disc for Data
• PFD50DLA discs can be used only by XDCAM
devices with the DL mark (see the following
illustration). They cannot be used by XDCAM devices
without this mark.
Write-protecting discs
Chapter 4 Shooting
The following Professional Discs 1) can be used
for recording and playback on this unit:
• PFD23A (capacity 23.3 GB)
• PFD50DLA (capacity 50.0 GB)
• Do not disassemble the cartridge.
• The supplied adhesive labels are recommended
for indexing discs. Apply the label in the correct
position.
To protect the content recorded on the disc from
accidental erasure, move the Write Inhibit tab on
the lower surface of the disc in the direction of the
arrow, as shown in the following figure.
Lower surface of the disc
Write Inhibit tab
DL mark
Notes on handling
Handling
The Professional Disc is housed in a cartridge,
and is designed to allow handling free of risk
from dust or fingerprints. However, if the
cartridge is subjected to a severe shock, for
example by dropping it, this can result in damage
or scratching of the disc. If the disc is scratched,
it may be impossible to record video/audio, or to
play back the content recorded on the disc. The
discs should be handled and stored carefully.
• Do not touch the surface of the disc itself within
the cartridge.
• Deliberately opening the shutter may cause
damage.
SAVE
Slide in the direction of the arrow
Write Inhibit tab settings
SAVE
Recording enabled
SAVE
Recording disabled
Handling Discs
79
You can also write protect-individual clips. For
details, see “Locking (write-protecting) clips” on
page 130.
1
Loading and unloading a disc
2
To load a disc
1
Turn on the POWER switch.
V indication on the outside
The disc is loaded.
Note
To insert the disc correctly, make sure that the
camcorder is in the upright position (the grip
upside, the bottom downside).
Chapter 4 Shooting
To unload a disc
LCD monitor
POWER switch
Note
If there is condensation inside the VDR section, the
message “HUMID” appears in the status display on
the color LCD . If this happens, wait until the
indicator goes off before going on to step 2.
2
Press the EJECT button.
This opens the lid of the disc compartment.
EJECT button
3
80
1 Insert the disc in the V direction, and
2 close the disc compartment lid
manually.
Handling Discs
With the power supply on, press the EJECT
button to open the disc compartment lid and eject
the disc, then remove the disc. If you are not
going to insert another disc, close the disc
compartment lid.
To unload a disc when the power supply is off
If the battery is exhausted, it is not possible to
remove the disc by pressing the EJECT button. In
such cases, use the following emergency
procedure to remove the disc manually.
1
Turn off the POWER switch.
2
Carry out the operation shown in the
following figure.
1 Open this rubber cover.
2 Using a screwdriver or similar
implement, slide the black metal plate
visible inside, in the direction of the
rear of the camcorder.
The disc compartment lid opens. A red
Phillips screw is visible inside the
rubber cap.
3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the
screw counterclockwise (the direction
shown on the rubber cap).
This ejects the disc.
4 Close the rubber cover firmly.
Handling of discs when recording
does not end normally (salvage
function)
Notes
You need not return the screw to its original
position after taking out the disc. Turning on the
power makes the disc compartment mechanism
operable again.
Note
Do not touch the disc or try to forcibly remove it until it
has been completely ejected.
Formatting a disc
When using a new disc
An unused disc requires no formatting operation.
The disc is automatically formatted so that it is
ready to use when loaded into this unit.
To format a disc on which material is
recorded
See page 142 for details of formatting a disc.
Note
When a recorded disc is formatted, all the data on the
disc is erased. (Even locked clips (see page 130) are also
erased.)
• Do not disconnect the battery pack or power cord until
recording processing has finished and the ACCESS
indicator has gone out.
• This function salvages as much recorded material as
possible after an unforeseen accident, but 100%
restoration cannot be guaranteed.
• Even when this function is used, it is not possible to
recover data from immediately before the interruption
of recording. The amount of data lost is as follows.
- Quick salvage: From 2 to 5 seconds of data before
the interruption of recording.
- Full salvage: From 3 to 6 seconds of data before the
interruption of recording.
(More data may be lost when the unit is subject to
vibrations, when you switch frequently between
recording and paused, and when you use functions
such as Picture Cash.)
Chapter 4 Shooting
Recording processing does not end normally if,
for example, the battery pack is removed during
recording, or if the power cord is disconnected
during recording. Because the file system is not
updated, video and audio data recorded in real
time is not recognized as files and clip contents
recorded up to that point are lost.
However, this unit has a salvage function which
can hold losses to the minimum by reconstructing
clips on such discs.
Note that no recorded clip contents are lost when
the POWER switch is set to OFF and when
battery exhaustion is detected, because the unit
does not become powered off until after the end
of recording processing.
Quick salvage
When the unit is powered on again after a
recording interruption due to a power
interruption, with the disc still loaded in the unit,
clips are reconstructed on the basis of backup data
stored in nonvolatile memory and markers
recorded on the disc. Processing time is about 5
seconds.
Full salvage
When recording on an XDCAM device is
interrupted because of a power interruption, and a
disc is manually ejected from that device with the
Handling Discs
81
power off, clips are reconstructed on the basis of
markers recorded on the disc when the disc is
loaded in this unit. Therefore, processing takes
longer than for a quick salvage (about 30 seconds,
although it depends on the state of the disc).
Proceed as follows to perform a full salvage.
1
appear when you insert a disc that was not
recorded normally. The “XXXX” in the
message is a code for XDCAM devices that can
salvage the disc. Refer to the table below and
use one of the indicated devices to salvage the
disc.
SALVAGE
Insert the disc on which recording did
not end normally.
DISC CANNOT BE
RECORDED.
The following salvage message appears.
SALVAGE
TO RECORD ON THE
DISC, IT IS NECESSARY
TO EXECUTE SALVAGE.
FORMAT DISC OR CONTACT
SERVICE TO RUN CLIP
SALVAGE PROGRAM.
(XXXX)
PUSH ESCAPE SWITCH
OR ROTARY ENCODER.
SALVAGE OK?
YES
Chapter 4 Shooting
2
NO
Turn the MENU knob to move b to
“YES”, and press the MENU knob.
Salvage processing starts, and the message
“EXECUTING” appears.
A results message appears when the
processing finishes.
• If the salvage succeeded, the message
“COMPLETED” appears.
• If the salvage failed, the message
“INCOMPLETED” appears. Clips for
which recording did not end normally are
lost.
To exit without salvaging
Select NO in step 1 to exit without performing
salvage processing.
However, the status of the disc does not change.
Salvage is still required to recover the clips for
which recording did not end normally. The
salvage message will appear again when that disc
is inserted again, or when the camcorder is
powered on again.
Notes
• If salvage processing is not done, sections
which were recorded normally can be played
back, but no new recording can be done on the
disc.
• Full salvage of discs recorded by this camcorder
can be performed with the PDW-F1600, PDWHD1500, PDW-F800, or PDW-700. Full
salvage cannot be performed with any other
XDCAM device. The following message may
82
Handling Discs
Code (XXXX) Model name
0002
PDW-1500/530/510/R1
PDW-F70/F350/F330
0200
PDW-F70/F350/F330 (Version
1.9 or higher)
PDW-F75/F355/F335
PDW-HD1500/HR1/700
0300 a)
0301 a)
PDW-HD1500/700 (Version 1.5
or higher)
PDW-F1600/F800
a) Does not appear on this unit.
To cancel the message and return to normal
operation, exchange the disc for a usable disc
and flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch
to the ESCAPE side, or press the MENU knob.
Basic Procedure for
Shooting
This section describes the basic procedures for
shooting and recording.
Before a shooting session, ensure that the
camcorder is functioning properly.
For details, see “Testing the Camcorder before
Shooting” on page 256.
Basic procedure for shooting: from power
supply to disc loading
1
Check that there are no obstructions
such as cables near the disc
compartment lid. Then press the
EJECT button to open the disc
compartment lid.
5
After checking that the disc is not writeprotected (see page 79), load it and close
the disc compartment lid.
Basic procedure for shooting: from
adjusting the black balance and white
balance to stopping recording
Switch settings
After turning on the power and loading a disc, set
the switches and selectors as shown below and
begin operation.
2 1
3
2
1
3
Attach a fully charged battery pack.
For details, see “Preparing a Power Supply” on
page 38.
2
Set the POWER switch to ON.
3
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to
switch the LCD monitor to status
display, and check that the following
conditions are met.
6
4
Chapter 4 Shooting
4 5
4
5
1 DISPLAY: ON
2 Iris: Automatic
3 Zoom: Automatic
4 OUTPUT/DCC: CAM, DCC: ON
5 F-RUN/SET/R-RUN: F-RUN or R-RUN
(set as needed)
6 AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2: AUTO
• The HUMID indicator is not showing.
If it is, wait until it disappears.
• The battery status indicator shows at least
five segments (x).
If it does not, replace the battery pack with
a fully charged one.
Basic Procedure for Shooting
83
Shooting
On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN
switches, see page 221.
During recording, the REC indicator lights in
the viewfinder. Perform zooming and focus
control, if necessary.
3
Note
During recording (while the ACCESS indicator is
lit) do not remove the battery pack. If you do, the
internal processing for recording may not finish
properly, which may cause the last few seconds of
recording to be lost.
For details, see “Handling of discs when
recording does not end normally (salvage
function)” on page 81.
5,6 4
Chapter 4 Shooting
1
1
2
6
The REC indicator in the viewfinder goes
off.
The material recorded from step 5 to step 6 is
saved as a single clip.
Flick the AUTO W/B BAL switch to
BLK to adjust the black balance.
For details of black balance adjustment, see
page 60.
2
To check the last two seconds of the
recording (recording review)
If you press the RET button on the lens while
recording is paused, the last two seconds of
the recording is played back. If you hold
down the RET button, a low-speed reverse
search begins at a position two seconds
before the recording end position. When you
release the RET button, the reverse search
stops and playback in the forward direction
begins. After playback, the camcorder is
ready to start recording again.
By assigning the same function as that of the
RET button on the lens to the ASSIGN 1/3/4
switch, COLOR TEMP. button (PDW-700),
or ASSIGN 5 switch (PDW-F800), you can
use the switch in the same way as the lens
RET button.
Select the CC filter and ND filter to
match the lighting conditions, and
adjust the white balance.
For details, see “Adjusting the white balance”
on page 61.
3
Aim the camera at the subject and
adjust the focus and zoom.
On the PDW-F800, you can adjust the focus
by using the Focus Assist function (see page
87).
4
If necessary, set the electronic shutter
for an appropriate mode and speed.
For details, see “Setting the Electronic Shutter”
on page 66.
5
To start recording, press the REC
START button or the VTR button on
the lens.
If the recording start/stop function is
assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1/3/4
switches, COLOR TEMP. button (PDW700), ASSIGN 5 switch (PDW-F800), and
RET button on the lens, you can also use this
switch.
84
Basic Procedure for Shooting
To stop recording, press the REC
START button or the VTR button on
the lens again.
On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN
switches, see page 221.
7
Repeat steps 5 and 6 as required for
shooting.
Each time you repeat steps 5 and 6, successive
clips are recorded on the disc.
2
Clip 1
REC
START
Clip 2
REC REC
STOP START
Clip 3
REC REC
STOP START
The playback pauses and a frozen picture
appears.
The timecode of the frozen frame is
displayed in the counter display and the
PLAY/PAUSE indicator now flashes (one
flash/second).
REC
STOP
Notes
• It is not possible to record a clip shorter than 2 seconds.
If you stop recording within 2 seconds of starting, this
results in a 2-second clip.
If you stop recording and restart within 2 seconds of
the original start, this creates a single continuous clip
from the original start time.
• The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on
a single disc is 300. If an attempt is made to record
more than 300 clips, the error message “MAX # Clips”
appears, even if there is free capacity on the disc.
Playing back the recorded clip
Normal playback
By pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button, you can
review any length of recording on the viewfinder
screen in black and white or in color on the LCD
monitor. There are two other ways to review the
recording.
Recording review: You can view the last two
seconds of the recording on the viewfinder
screen in black and white or in color on the
LCD monitor.
Viewing color playback on a video monitor:
You can view the recording in color on a
color video monitor without the need for any
external adaptor.
You can also view playback video during a fast
forward or reverse search.
For details about the switches and controls used to
select the audio output signal and to adjust the audio
level, see page 19 and page 27.
To freeze a picture during playback
The following operation can also be done from
the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit.
1
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to start
playback.
To restart playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button once again.
To display camera video in the
viewfinder during playback (Live &amp; Play
function)
During playback, the viewfinder normally
displays the playback video. But you can enable
this function to view live camera video instead.
This is a convenient way to frame the next shot
and adjust the focus and exposure while viewing
recorded video on the LCD monitor or an external
monitor.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move the b mark to the
desired item.)
1
Chapter 4 Shooting
Playback control buttons
During recording, the playback control buttons
(EJECT, F REV, F FWD, NEXT, PREV, PLAY/
PAUSE, STOP) have no effect.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button again at
the instant when you want to freeze the
picture.
Display the OUTPUT 2 page of the
OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select LIVE &amp; PLAY, and then turn the
MENU knob to display “ON”.
The camera video appears in the viewfinder,
even during playback.
You can still check the playback video on the
LCD monitor. Playback signals are output
from the video output connectors.
Clip playback modes
You can set the clip playback mode to either of
the following.
Continuous playback mode: The playback
target is all of the clips on the disc (factory
default setting)
Single clip playback mode: The playback target
is the currently selected clip only
To select single clip playback mode
Set SINGLE CLIP MODE in the CAM CONFIG
1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu to “ON”.
Basic Procedure for Shooting
85
Playback in single clip playback mode
Playback stops when it reaches the start or end of
the clip. The next and preceding clips are not
played, even if they exist on the disc. The
available playback types include normal
playback, and high-speed playback in the forward
or reverse directions.
To move to another clip, press the PREV, NEXT,
F REV + PREV, or F FWD + NEXT button, or
perform a thumbnail search.
Disc playback start position
Although this unit uses optical discs, it is
designed to offer the most convenient features of
tape playback by VTRs. One of these is the
playback start position, which works in the same
way as with tape, as described below.
Chapter 4 Shooting
After playback stop
The unit stops at the position where the STOP
button was pressed.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to resume
playback at the stop position.
After recording
The unit stops at the position where recording
ended.
To play back a clip, press the PREV button to
move to the start frame of any clip, or press the
F REV button to move to any position.
After disc insertion
The unit stops at the position of the disc when it
was most recently ejected.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to resume
playback at the most recent position.
The playback position is saved to the disc when
the disc is ejected, which allows playback to start
at that position whenever it is loaded into any
XDCAM player.
Note
The playback position is not recorded to the disc if the
disc is write-protected.
Deteriorating playback conditions
Deteriorating playback may be due to the
following causes.
• Scratches and dust on the disc surface
This includes fingerprints, dust from the air, tar
from cigarette smoke, and so on.
Scratches and soiling which occur before
recording are not a problem because they are
registered in advance as defects, and recording
86
Basic Procedure for Shooting
avoids them. However, scratches and soiling
which occur after recording can lead to
deteriorating playback conditions.
• Aging of disc recording layers
Over several decades, the recording layers of
optical discs can age and cause deteriorating
playback conditions.
• Deteriorating laser diodes performance
The performance of the laser diodes used in
optical heads can worsen with age, leading to
deteriorating playback conditions.
Refer to the Maintenance Manual for an
approximate guide to when it is time to replace
optical heads.
To prevent playback conditions from
deteriorating
Pay attention to the following points when
handling discs.
• Do not open disc cartridges and touch discs
directly with your hands.
• Do not store for long periods in locations which
are dusty or exposed to air circulated by fans.
• Do not store for long periods under high
temperatures or in locations exposed to direct
sunlight.
If playback conditions have deteriorated
Read errors occur when playback conditions
continue to deteriorate.
When a read error occurs, the message “DISC
ERROR!” appears, the video freezes, and the
audio output is suppressed.
If this happens, check the following points.
Whether the disc displays the same playback
condition on other XDCAM devices: If so,
the surface of the disc may be dirty or
scratched, or the performance of the
recording layers on the disc may have
worsened due to age. Do not use discs with
these symptoms.
Whether every disc inserted into an XDCAM
device displays the same playback
conditions: If so, the performance of the
laser diodes may have deteriorated. Check
the total optical output time.
Deleting the recorded clip
For details, see “Deleting clips” on page 131.
Using the Freeze Mix function
The Freeze Mix function allows you to display a
freeze image over the current shooting video. For
example, you can use this function to frame
summer and winter shots of a landscape scene in
exactly the same way, or to resume an interrupted
shooting session with exactly the same framing.
To use the Freeze Mix function, you need to
assign it to an ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch or to the
COLOR TEMP. button (PDW-700) or ASSIGN 5
switch (PDW-F800).
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN
switches” (page 221)
Play the disc that contains the scene you
want to use as the framing standard.
2
When the scene that you want appears,
press the PLAY/PAUSE button to
pause playback.
3
Press the button to which you have
assigned the Freeze Mix function.
To display the focus assist indicator
1
Display the FOCUS ASSIST page in the
OPERATION menu.
See “Basic menu operations” (page 205) for
more information about menu operations.
2
Select FOCUS ASSIST IND, and turn
the MENU knob until ON appears.
The focus assist indicator appears.
3
Set the following items as required.
FOCUS IND POS: Select the focus assist
indicator display position from BOTTM
(bottom), LEFT, TOP, and RIGHT.
FOCUS AREA MARK: Turn the display of
the frame around the focus detection
range OFF (hide) or ON (display).
Focus detection range frame
The playback screen changes to black and
white, and a freeze image appears over the
current shooting video.
Chapter 4 Shooting
1
convenient in situations where it may be difficult
to focus using only the video in the viewfinder.
To change the standard image
Use the PLAY/PAUSE button, the F REV
and F FWD buttons and other controls to find
another image, and repeat step 2.
4
5
Align the framing of the playback
image and the shooting video.
Press the button to which you have
assigned the Freeze Mix function once
more.
The unit exits Freeze Mix mode.
6
Start recording.
Note
If you exchange discs before starting to record, be
careful to keep the unit from moving.
[F800]
Using the Focus Assist function
Displaying the focus assist indicator in the
viewfinder makes it easier to focus. This is
Focus assist indicator
Notes
• The focus indicator is not displayed when the gain is
set to 18 dB or higher.
• When you display the focus assist indicator, the
display of effective pixels (which you select by setting
100% MARKER in the MARKER 1 page of the
OPERATION menu to “ON”) is hidden.
• When you display the frame of the focus detection
range, the box cursor (which you select by setting User
Box in the MARKER 2 page of the OPERATION
menu to “ON”) is hidden.
How to read the focus assist indicator
The “in focus” position is the position where the
bar reaches its maximum length. Focus on a
subject by rotating the focus ring so that the bar
extends to its maximum length.
Basic Procedure for Shooting
87
In focus position: Position
where bar is at maximum
length
Advanced Operations for
Shooting
Note
The focus indicator may show little or no variation when
you are shooting a smooth subject or a dark scene.
Recording essence marks
Shot marks and other essence marks can be
recorded on the disc.
Recording essence marks for scenes containing
important images and sounds enables quick
access to the marked points. This increases
editing efficiency.
Chapter 4 Shooting
To record a shot mark using the RET
button on the lens
To make it possible to record shot marks using the
RET button on the lens, carry out the following
procedure.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the ESSENCE MARK page of
the MAINTENANCE menu.
?M11 ESSENCE MARK
TOP
RET SHOT MARK 1
RET SHOT MARK 2
:
:
ON
ON
INDEX PIC POS
:
0SEC
FIND MODE
:
R.ST
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select the essence mark to be recorded,
and press the MENU knob to display
“ON”.
3
Repeat the step 2, as necessary.
To record shot mark 1/2
When the camcorder is in recording or playback
mode, operate the lens RET button as follows.
Shot mark 1: Press the RET button once.
Shot mark 2: Press the RET button twice in rapid
succession.
88
Advanced Operations for Shooting
“ShotMark1” or “ShotMark2” appears in the
viewfinder screen for about one second near the
timecode display.
If the SHOT MARK 1 or SHOT MARK 2
recording function has been assigned to one of the
ASSIGN 1/3/4 switches, COLOR TEMP. button
(PDW-700), and ASSIGN 5 switch (PDW-F800),
you can also use that switch to record a SHOT
MARK 1 or SHOT MARK 2 essence mark.
On how to assign functions to the ASSIGN switches,
see page 221.
If you connect a Windows USB keyboard to the
USB connector, you can record shot marks from
Shot Mark0 up to Shot Mark9 by pressing the 0 to
9 keys on the numeric keypad.
Setting the thumbnail image at
recording time
When you record a clip, you can specify which
frame to use as the clip thumbnail image (see
page 111).
(The factory default setting is to use the first
frame in the clip as the thumbnail.)
For example, if all clips have the same image in
their first frames, you can specify a frame a few
seconds after the start of the clip, so that all
thumbnails will not show the same image.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Setting clip flags with switches
To set a clip flag
During recording, immediately after recording, or
during playback (including search and still
picture playback), press the button to which the
flag function has been assigned. Press the button
once at the position where you want to set the
flag.
The specified flag is set, and “*** ClpFlg” (***:
OK, NG, or KEEP) appears near the timecode
display in the viewfinder for about three seconds.
To clear a clip flag
During recording or playback, press the button to
which the flag function has been assigned. Press
the button twice in rapid succession.
The flag is cleared, and “ClpFlg DEL.” appears
for about three seconds.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select INDEX PIC POS, and press the
MENU knob.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired time.
4
Press the MENU knob.
Chapter 4 Shooting
You can set three types of clip flags (OK/NG/
KEEP) during recording, immediately after
recording, or during playback. Setting these flags
in each clip that you record makes it easy for
editors and other colleagues to find and select the
clips they need.
You can use switches on the unit to set these
flags. But before you can do so, you need to
assign the corresponding flag functions to the
ASSIGN 1/3/4 switches, the COLOR TEMP
button (PDW-700), ASSIGN 5 switch (PDWF800), or the RET button on the lens (see page
221).
Display the ESSENCE MARK page of
the MAINTENANCE menu, and press
the MENU knob.
Starting a shoot with a few
seconds of pre-stored picture data
(Picture Cache function)
The camcorder has a large capacity internal
memory, in which you can cache the last few
seconds (maximum 30 seconds) of captured
video and audio, so that recording starts from a
point just before you press the REC START
button or the VTR button on the lens.
Note
Picture Cache settings cannot be made while this unit is
in the following states.
• The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled.
• The Live Logging function is set to Live View mode.
• During Slow &amp; Quick Motion shooting (PDW-F800
only)
You can also set and clear clip flags from a GUI
screen. For details, see “Setting clip flags”
(page 130).
Advanced Operations for Shooting
89
Setting the Picture Cache mode/Picture
Cache time
To record in Picture Cache mode, you need to
turn on Picture Cache mode and set the picture
data storage time (Picture Cache time) using the
USER menu.
The Picture Cache time determines the number of
seconds recorded from the Picture Cache,
counting back from the time when you press the
REC START button or the VTR button on the
lens to start recording. However, the number of
seconds actually recorded from the Picture Cache
may be shorter immediately after the setting of
the VDR SAVE/STBY switch is changed, and in
the special situations explained in the following
notes.
Chapter 4 Shooting
• Storage of images to memory begins after you select
Picture Cache mode. If you begin recording
immediately after selecting Picture Cache mode,
images from before the selection will not be recorded.
• During playback, recording review or GUI screen
operations, no data is saved to the Picture Cache
memory. Thus it is not possible to use this function to
rerecord the last few seconds of material from
playback or recording review.
To set the Picture Cache mode/Picture Cache
time
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
Display the REC FUNCTION page of
the OPERATION menu.
005 REC FUNCTION
TOP
CACHE/INTVAL REC:
OFF
DISC EXCHG CACHE:
CLIP CONT REC
:
LIVE LOGGING
:
OFF
OFF
OFF
(The figure shows the PDW-700 menu.)
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
90
Select CACHE REC TIME, and turn
the MENU knob to display the desired
Picture Cache time.
As you turn the MENU knob, the Picture
Cache time changes as follows: 0-2s y 2-4s
y 4-6s y 6-8s y 8-10s y 18-20s y
28-30s.
The Picture Cache mode settings once made
continue to be effective until changed.
You can assign the Picture Cache on/off function
to one of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switches, COLOR
TEMP. button (PDW-700), ASSIGN 5 switch
(PDW-F800), and RET button on the lens.
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN
switches” on page 221.
Notes
Notes
1
3
Select CACHE REC, and turn the
MENU knob to display CACHE.
Advanced Operations for Shooting
• You can do a menu operation to change the Picture
Cache time while the camcorder is in recording mode.
However, the new setting takes effect only after the
recording is finished.
• In Picture Cache mode, the internal timecode generator
operating mode is always F-RUN regardless of the
setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch.
Camcorder operations in Picture Cache mode
The recording procedure in Picture Cache mode
is basically the same as that for normal recording.
However, note the following differences.
• When you record in Picture Cache mode, the
picture you are shooting now is recorded to disc
after the picture data stored in memory (equal to
the Picture Cache time) is recorded to disc. For
this reason, disc access may continue for a short
time after you press the REC START button to
stop recording. During this time, the playback
control buttons are disabled, as in recording
mode. Also, if you press the REC START
button or the VTR button on the lens to restart
recording during this time, a separate clip is
recorded.
• When you press the REC START button or the
VTR button on the lens to restart recording
during disc access, the start point of the
recorded clip may be later than the Picture
Cache time, especially when there are a large
number of clips recorded on the disc. In Picture
Cache mode, you should avoid stop and start
recording operations in quick succession.
• The time disc access stops after the REC
START button is pressed equals the Picture
Cache time. However, if you start recording
within the Picture Cache time immediately after
selecting Picture Cache mode, changing the
Picture Cache time or performing playback or
recording review, the picture data for the
duration of the Picture Cache time will not be
stored in memory. Thus, the time disc access
stops after the STOP button is pressed becomes
shorter than the Picture Cache time.
• In Picture Cache mode, you cannot set the FRUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET to make
timecode settings. To make timecode settings,
first exit Picture Cache mode.
Time-lapse video (Interval Rec
function)
Using the memory in the camcorder, you can
capture time-lapse video. There are two modes
for this function, which is known as “Interval
Rec”.
Auto Interval Rec mode: In Auto Interval Rec
mode, pictures are automatically shot a frame
(two frames when the recording format is set
to 720p) at a time at the specified interval and
stored in memory. To use this function, you
must set the total time for shooting (TAKE
TOTAL TIME) and the length of time for
recording on the disc (REC TIME).
Manual Interval Rec mode: A specified number
of frames (NUMBER OF FRAME) is
recorded when you press the REC START
button or the lens VTR button.
There are two Manual Interval Rec modes: a
single shot mode in which recording is done
once with each press of the button, and a
consecutive mode in which recording is done
repeatedly at a specified interval after the
button is pressed.
Note
Interval Rec settings cannot be made while this unit is in
the following states.
• The Disc Exchange Cache function is enabled.
• The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled.
• The Live Logging function is set to Live View mode.
• During Slow &amp; Quick Motion shooting (PDW-F800
only)
• SCAN MODE on the FORMAT page of the
OPERATION menu is set to “23.9P”.
Operation limitations during recording
Item
(i.LINK)
S400 connector
Time code
Description
Cannot be used.
The internal time code
generator runs in R-RUN mode
regardless of how the F-RUN/
SET/R-RUN switch is set.
Not recorded.
Chapter 4 Shooting
When power is lost during recording in Picture
Cache mode
• If the POWER switch is turned off during
recording in Picture Cache mode, the
camcorder gets powered off after disc access
has continued for a few seconds so that the
picture at the moment when the POWER switch
is turned off is recorded.
• If you remove the battery, pull out the DC cable,
or cut power to the AC adaptor during recording
in Picture Cache mode, video and audio stored
in memory will be lost without being recorded
to the disc. For this reason, make sure you do
not replace the battery while recording.
A pre-lighting function is available in Auto
Interval Rec mode and the consecutive mode of
Manual Interval Rec mode. This function
automatically turns on the light before recording
starts, which allows you to record pictures under
stable light and color temperature conditions.
Audio signals
Playback control • Auto Interval Rec mode and
the consecutive mode of
buttons
Manual Interval Rec mode
The EJECT, F REV, F FWD,
NEXT, PREV, PLAY/PAUSE
and STOP buttons are disabled.
To use these buttons, stop
recording by pressing the REC
START button or the VTR
button on the lens.
• The single shot mode of
Manual Interval Rec mode
The F REV, F FWD, NEXT,
PREV, PLAY/PAUSE, and
STOP buttons are disabled. To
use these buttons, exit the
Interval Rec mode by pressing
the EJECT button.
Advanced Operations for Shooting
91
Item
Description
Menu operations The settings of the Interval Recrelated items on the REC
FUNCTION page of the
OPERATION menu cannot be
changed. To change the settings,
do either of the following.
Chapter 4 Shooting
• Auto Interval Rec mode and
the consecutive mode of
Manual Interval Rec mode
Stop recording by pressing the
REC START button or the VTR
button on the lens.
• The single shot mode of
Manual Interval Rec mode
Exit the Interval Rec mode by
pressing the EJECT button.
• When you set the POWER
When the
switch to OFF, the camcorder
camcorder power
will switch off by itself after
is switched off
disc access has continued for a
few seconds to record the
picture data stored in memory.
• If you remove the battery,
unplug the DC cable, or cut
power to the AC adaptor, picture
data stored before recording
stops (a maximum of ten
seconds) may be lost. Take care
when replacing the battery.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting
changes as follows: OFF y CACHE y
A.INT y M.INT.
3
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting
changes as follows: 5MIN y 10MIN y
15MIN y 20MIN y 30MIN y 40MIN
y 50MIN y 1H y 2H y 3H y 4H
y 5H y 7H y 10H y 15H y 20H
y 30H y 40H y 50H y 70H y
100H.
Here MIN means minutes (5MIN is 5
minutes) and H means hours (1H is one
hour).
4
To make settings
Display the REC FUNCTION page of
the OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select CACHE/INTVAL REC, and
turn the MENU knob to display
“A.INT”.
005 REC FUNCTION
TOP
CACHE/INTVAL REC:
TAKE TOTAL TIME :
REC TIME
:
PRE-LIGHTING
:
A.INT
5MIN
5SEC
OFF
DISC EXCHG CACHE:
CLIP CONT REC
:
LIVE LOGGING
:
OFF
OFF
OFF
(The figure shows the PDW-700 menu.)
92
Advanced Operations for Shooting
Select REC TIME, and turn the MENU
knob to select the desired time to be
recorded on the disc.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting
changes as follows: 5SEC y 10SEC y
15SEC y 20SEC y 30SEC y 40SEC
y 50SEC y 1MIN ... 85MIN.
Here SEC means seconds (5SEC is 5
seconds) and MIN means minutes (1MIN is
one minute).
You cannot set a REC TIME that is more
than one thirtieth of TAKE TOTAL TIME.
The setting value changes within the range
that can be set.
For example: When TAKE TOTAL TIME is
set to 1H, the maximum value of REC TIME
is 2 MIN. (60 minutes divided by 30 gives 2
minutes.)
Auto Interval Rec mode settings and
shooting
1
Select TAKE TOTAL TIME, and turn
the MENU knob to select the desired
total time for shooting.
5
As required, select PRE-LIGHTING,
and turn the MENU knob to select the
lighting on-time before recording starts.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting
changes as follows: OFF y 2SEC y
5SEC y 10SEC.
Note
Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO
to turn on the light before recording. The light
switch must also be set to ON. With these settings,
the light turns on and off automatically. However,
the light remains on continuously if the off time is 5
seconds or less.
When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and
the light switch is set to ON, the light remains on
continuously. (The light does not turn on and off
automatically.)
When the setting is completed, the message
“AUTO INTERVAL **M**S” appears along the
bottom of the viewfinder screen. “**M**S”
indicates the shooting interval.
For example, the message “AUTO INTERVAL
00M04S” indicates that the shooting interval is
four seconds.
The camcorder exits Auto Interval Rec mode
whenever it is powered off. However, the TAKE
TOTAL TIME, REC TIME, and PRELIGHTING settings are maintained. You do not
need to set them again the next time you use Auto
Interval Rec mode.
To shoot and record
After performing the basic procedures
for shooting and recording, following
the instructions in “Basic Procedure for
Shooting” (page 83), secure the
camcorder so that it will not move.
2
Press the REC START button or the
VTR button on the lens.
The camcorder starts recording in Auto
Interval Rec mode. When you use the PRELIGHTING function, recording starts after
the light is switched on.
The actual recording to disc begins when the
camcorder has saved about ten seconds of
video in memory, so disc access is
intermittent.
While recording in Auto Interval Rec mode,
the TALLY (green tally) indicator in the
viewfinder flashes (4 flashes/second) and the
message “AUTO INTERVAL **M**S”
flashes on the viewfinder screen.
When the camcorder is capturing the picture
in memory, the REC (recording, red tally)
indicator in the viewfinder lights.
After the length of time for recording on the
disc (REC TIME) has elapsed, the camcorder
automatically stops recording.
To interrupt shooting
Press the REC START button or the VTR button
on the lens.
Disc access may occur for recording picture data
already stored in memory.
To exit Auto Interval Rec mode
Do either of the following.
• Set the POWER switch to OFF.
• Set CACHE/INTVAL REC to OFF on the REC
FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu.
Time required for shooting and time required for
recording on the disc
Auto Interval Rec mode is effective for shooting
objects that move very slowly. To use this
function, you need to set the total time for
shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME) and the length
of time for recording on the disc (REC TIME).
The time required for shooting is the time
required to capture the very slowly moving
subject, and the camcorder must be arranged so
that during this time the subject is always in the
frame.
The disc recording time indicates the running
time of the completed recording. The camcorder
calculates the time-lapse interval from these two
times.
Total time for shooting (TAKE TOTAL TIME)
Chapter 4 Shooting
1
To continue shooting
Press the REC START button or the VTR button
on the lens again.
Shooting interval
Time for recording on the disc
(REC TIME)
Manual Interval Rec mode settings and
shooting
Manual Interval Rec has the following two
modes.
Single shot mode: Each time the REC START
button or VTR button on the lens is pressed,
the camcorder captures to memory a single
shot consisting of the specified number of
video frames.
Consecutive mode: Once the REC START
button or VTR button on the lens is pressed,
the camcorder captures consecutive shots to
memory at the specified interval, with each
shot consisting of the specified number of
video frames.
Advanced Operations for Shooting
93
To make settings
1
Here SEC means seconds (5SEC is 5
seconds) and MIN means minutes (1MIN is
one minute).
Display the REC FUNCTION page of
the OPERATION menu.
M: The single shot mode (recording only one
shot after one operation). In the
viewfinder, the TALLY (green tally)
indicator flashes twice per second.
A setting value other than “M”: The
consecutive mode (recording shots
repeatedly after one operation). In the
viewfinder, the TALLY (green tally)
indicator flashes four times per second.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select CACHE/INTVAL REC, and
turn the MENU knob to display
“M.INT”.
005 REC FUNCTION
TOP
CACHE/INTVAL REC:
NUMBER OF FRAME :
TRIGGER INTERVAL:
M.INT
1
M
DISC EXCHG CACHE:
CLIP CONT REC
:
LIVE LOGGING
:
OFF
OFF
OFF
Chapter 4 Shooting
(The figure shows the PDW-700 menu.)
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting
changes as follows: OFF y CACHE y
A.INT y M.INT.
When M. INT appears, the camcorder is in
Manual Interval Rec mode and the TALLY
(green tally) indicator in the viewfinder
flashes.
3
Select NUMBER OF FRAME, and turn
the MENU knob to select the desired
number of frames to be recorded in
each shot.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting
changes as follows: 1 y 3 y 6 (when
SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 and REC
FORMAT is set to HD422 50, HD420 HQ, or
HD420 SP: 2 y 6 y 12).
4
Select TRIGGER INTERVAL, and
turn the MENU knob to select the
desired trigger mode or length of
interval.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting
changes as follows: M y 1SEC y 2SEC
y 3SEC y 4SEC y 5SEC y 6SEC
y 7SEC y 8SEC y 9SEC y 10SEC
y 15SEC y 20SEC y 30SEC y
40SEC y 50SEC y 1MIN y 2MIN y
3MIN y 4MIN y 5MIN y 6MIN y
7MIN y 8MIN y 9MIN y 10MIN y
15MIN y 20MIN y 30MIN y 40MIN
y 50MIN y 1H y 2H y 3H y 4H
y 6H y 12H y 24H.
94
Advanced Operations for Shooting
5
When a setting value other than “M”
(the consecutive mode) is selected in
step 4, select PRE-LIGHTING, and
turn the MENU knob to select the
lighting on-time before recording starts
as required.
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting
changes as follows: OFF y 2SEC y
5SEC y 10SEC.
Note
Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO
to turn on the light before recording. The light
switch must also be set to ON. With these settings,
the light turns on and off automatically. However,
the light remains on continuously if the off time is 5
seconds or less.
When the LIGHT switch is set to MANUAL and
the light switch is set to ON, the light remains on
continuously. (The light does not turn on and off
automatically.)
When the setting is completed, the following
message appears along the bottom of the
viewfinder screen.
In single shot mode: MANU INTERVAL *
FRAME
In consecutive mode: INTERVAL * SEC (MIN/
H) * FRAME
“* SEC”, “* MIN”, and “* H” indicate the length
of interval and “* FRAME” indicates the number
of frames.
The camcorder exits Manual Interval Rec mode
whenever it is powered off. However, the
NUMBER OF FRAME, TRIGGER INTERVAL,
and PRE-LIGHTING settings are maintained.
You do not need to set them again the next time
you use Manual Interval Rec mode.
To shoot and record
1
After performing the basic procedures
for shooting and recording, following
the instructions in “Basic Procedure for
Shooting” (page 83), secure the
camcorder so that it will not move.
2
Press the REC START button or the
VTR button on the lens.
To exit Manual Interval Rec mode
Do one of the following.
• In the single shot mode, press the EJECT
button.
• In the consecutive mode, press the REC START
button or the lens VTR button to stop recording.
• Set the POWER switch to OFF.
To enable the function
1
Check that you are not recording and
that the recording format of this unit is
set to MPEG HD422, 50 Mbps, and the
resolution/system frequency is set to
1080/23.98P, 1080/25P, or 1080/29.97P.
2
Display the REC FUNCTION page of
the OPERATION menu.
After the camcorder has exited from Manual
Interval Rec mode, it records picture data stored
in memory to the disc.
[F800]
Shooting with Slow &amp; Quick
Motion
When the recording format is MPEG HD422, 50
Mbps, and the resolution/system frequency is
1080/23.98P, 1080/25P, or 1080/29.97P, you can
specify a recording frame rate that is different
from the playback frame rate.
By shooting with this function, you can obtain
smooth slow motion and fast motion effects.
See “Basic menu operations” (page 205) for
more information about menu operations.
3
Select SLOW &amp; QUICK, and turn the
MENU knob until ON appears.
005 REC FUNCTION
SLOW &amp; QUICK
FRAME RATE
Notes
• No audio is recorded during Slow &amp; Quick Motion
shooting.
• Slow &amp; Quick Motion cannot be enabled when the unit
is set up to record external input video. Switch to
shooting with the camera (see page 105).
Chapter 4 Shooting
The camcorder starts recording in Manual
Interval Rec mode. When you use the PRELIGHTING function, recording starts after
the light is switched on.
While recording in Manual Interval Rec
mode, the TALLY (green tally) indicator in
the viewfinder flashes (2 or 4 flashes/second)
and the message “MANU INTERVAL (*
SEC) * FRAME” flashes on the viewfinder
screen.
• The following functions are disabled automatically
whenever you enable the Slow &amp; Quick Motion
function.
- Picture Cache function
- Interval Rec function
- Disc Exchange Cache function
- Clip Continuous Rec function
- Live Logging function
• When you enable Slow &amp; Quick Motion, limitations
apply to the values that can be selected for the
following items.
- Gain value: 0 to 12 dB only
- Color bar signal: 100% only
• Timecode is recorded as R-RUN during Slow &amp; Quick
Motion shooting.
• Lower resolution in the vertical direction may be
evident in video recorded at frame rates of 25P or
higher (1080/23.98P), 26P or higher (1080/25P), and
31P or higher (1080/29.97P).
• Slow &amp; Quick Motion can be used only with certain
settings, including the recording format (MPEG
HD422 50 Mbps) and the resolution and system
frequency settings (1080/23.98P, 1080/25P, or 1080/
29.97P). Slow &amp; Quick Motion is disabled
automatically if you change any of these to other
settings.
4
TOP
:
:
ON
30P
CACHE/INTVAL REC :
--
DISC EXCHG CACHE :
CLIP CONT REC
:
LIVE LOGGING
:
----
Select FRAME RATE, and turn the
MENU knob until the desired frame
rate appears.
Advanced Operations for Shooting
95
The frame rate setting ranges are as follows.
Recording format
1080/23.98P
1080/25P
1080/29.97P
Frame rate
1 to 48
1 to 50
1 to 60
When you have finished making settings, the
system frequency and the frame rate appear at the
top of the viewfinder screen. You can change the
frame rate with the MENU knob while viewing
this display.
Exchanging discs while recording
(Disc Exchange Cache function)
When the disc exchange cache function is
enabled, the following procedure allows you to
exchange discs while continuing to record.
1
2
Chapter 4 Shooting
1
Display the REC FUNCTION page of
the OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select DISC EXCHG CACHE, and
turn the MENU knob to display “ON”.
The TALLY (green tally) indicator lights in
the viewfinder.
Advanced Operations for Shooting
Press the EJECT button with the unit
still in the recording state.
The REC (recording, red tally) indicator in
the viewfinder and the tally indicator flash
(once per second), and the disc is ejected.
If the message “DISC FULL!” appears
You can continue recording, because video
and audio continue to be saved to internal
memory. Press the EJECT button and
continue to step 3.
Notes
• Disc Exchange Cache settings cannot be made while
this unit is in the following states.
- The Interval Rec function is enabled.
- The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled.
- The Live Logging function is set to Live View mode.
- During Slow &amp; Quick Motion shooting (PDW-F800
only)
• The unit’s internal memory is not unlimited, so the
video and audio may be interrupted if it takes too long
to exchange the disc.
Press the REC START button or the
VTR button on the lens to start
recording.
The REC (recording, red tally) indicator
lights in the viewfinder, and the tally
indicator lights.
Even if you run out of free disc capacity while
recording, you can continue recording by using
the Disc Exchange Cache function. This function
enables seamless recording over extended
recording sessions, too long to fit on one disc, by
recording to the unit’s internal memory while you
exchange the disc.
To enable the Disc Exchange Cache
function
96
To exchange discs with the function
enabled
Note
Do not stop recording before pressing the EJECT
button. If you stop recording, the unit will stop
storing video and audio in internal memory and this
function will not work.
3
Quickly remove the disc, insert a
formatted blank disc, and close the
cover.
When the disc is loaded, the REC (recording,
red tally) indicator in the viewfinder and the
tally indicator change to lit, and recording
continues.
If the REC indicator and tally indicator
begin flashing rapidly during the disc
exchange
If the indicators change to flashing twice per
second, that means that the unit’s internal
memory is almost full. Complete the disc
exchange quickly.
Notes
• If you insert a disc that cannot be recorded (such
as a full disc or one with the Write Inhibit tab of
the disc set to the recording disabled position), the
unit ejects that disc as soon as it is recognized.
• Recording may not start immediately if you insert
an unformatted disc, or a disc that already
contains a large number of clips. As a result, the
video and audio may be interrupted.
Recording with the Clip
Continuous Rec function
Normally, a clip is created as an independent file
each time that you start and stop recording. But
this function allows you to start and stop
recording while continuously recording to the
same clip, for as long as the function remains
enabled. This is convenient when you do not want
to generate a large number of short clips, and
when you want to record without worrying about
exceeding the clip limit (up to 300 clips). It is still
easy to find recording start points, because a Rec
Start essence mark is recorded at the recording
start point each time you start recording.
Display the REC FUNCTION page in
the OPERATION menu.
See “Basic menu operations” (page 205) for
more information about menu operations.
2
Establish a network or FAM connection
Eject the disc
Change the recording format
Power the unit off
To disable the function
Set CLIP CONT REC in the REC FUNCTION
page of the OPERATION menu to OFF.
Retaking the most recent clip
A retake function is available, making it easy to
erase and retake the most recently recorded clip.
To use the retake function, you need to assign it
to one of the ASSIGN 1/3/4 switches, COLOR
TEMP. button (PDW-700), and ASSIGN 5
switch (PDW-F800) in advance.
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN
switches” on page 221.
Example: After recording clip 3, you want to
delete it and record a new clip 3 after clip 2.
Clip 1
You can assign the Clip Continuous Rec on/off
function to one of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switches,
the COLOR TEMP button (PDW-700), the
ASSIGN 5 switch (PDW-F800), and the RET
button on the lens.
To retake the most recent clip
With recording paused or after the end of a
recording review (see page 84), proceed as
follows.
1
Note
To stop the function
When the function is enabled, you can stop it by
executing any of the following operations. (A
new clip will be created when you next start
recording.)
• Operate on a clip (lock, delete, or rename a clip)
Hold down the button to which the
retake function has been assigned.
While the button is held down, the last frame
of the recorded clip and the message “PUSH
RET FOR CLIP DELETE” appears.
For details, see “Assigning functions to ASSIGN
switches” on page 221.
Clip Continuous Rec settings cannot be made while this
unit is in the following states.
• The Picture Cache function is enabled.
• The Interval Rec function is enabled.
• The Disc Exchange Cache function is enabled.
• The Live Logging function is set to Live View mode.
• During Slow &amp; Quick Motion shooting (PDW-F800
only)
Clip 3
New clip
Select CLIP CONT REC and turn the
MENU knob until ON appears.
“CONT” appears in the viewfinder, and the
function is enabled.
Clip 2
Chapter 4 Shooting
1
•
•
•
•
2
In this state, press the RET button.
The message “DELETING LAST CLIP”
appears, and the processing for deleting the
last recorded clip begins.
When the deleting has finished, the message
“LAST CLIP WAS DELETED” appears.
Notes
• The retake function cannot be used when the Clip
Continuous Rec function is enabled.
• If an operation (other than recording review) which is
not a retake operation is carried out after the last clip
has been recorded, the retake function does not work
even when the camcorder is in the recording pause
state.
Advanced Operations for Shooting
97
In this case, the message “RE-TAKE NOT
ALLOWED!” appears. When you want to replace the
last clip with a new clip, delete the clip (see page 131).
Once you carry out a retake operation, the last clip is
deleted even if you do not carry out a recording
operation afterwards.
Assigning user-defined clip titles
automatically
About the automatic title generation
function
Chapter 4 Shooting
By default, clips on each disc are assigned names
in the range C0001.MXF to C9999.MXF. For this
reason, two discs can contain clips with the same
names. The automatic title generation function
allows you to assign titles to all of the clips on
several discs, which facilitates clip management.
For example, if the titles TITLE00001 to
TITLE00020 are assigned to clips C0001.MXF to
C0020.MXF on disc 1, then the titles
TITLE00021 to TITLE00037 are assigned to
clips C0001.MXF to C0017.MXF on disc 2.
Titles are made up of prefixes, up to 10 characters
in length, and five-digit serial numbers such as
TITLE 00001.
Setting the title prefix
You can assign title prefixes by choosing from a
prefix list stored in internal memory, or by
entering the prefix directly.
However, to choose from a prefix list, you must
create the list beforehand on a computer and
transfer it to the unit’s internal memory with a
“Memory Stick”.
Setting the initial value of the serial number
The initial value of the serial number can be set to
00001 (the default) or to any other number. The
number is automatically incremented by 1 each
time you record a clip. When it reaches 99999, it
returns to 00001 for the next clip.
Note
Duplicate clip titles can be generated depending on the
serial number setting, for example if you reset the serial
number to the original value after recording several clips.
Care should be taken when setting the serial number.
To assign user-defined titles
automatically when clips are recorded
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the CLIP TITLE page of the
OPERATION menu.
027 CLIP TITLE
TITLE
TOP
:
DSABL
C0020.MXF
C0002.MXF
C0001.MXF
TITLE00020
TITLE00020
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
TITLE00001
Clips recorded on Disc 1
C0017.MXF
C0002.MXF
C0001.MXF
TITLE00037
TITLE00022
TITLE00021
Clips recorded on Disc 2
98
Advanced Operations for Shooting
2
Select “TITLE” and then press the
MENU knob.
3
Turn the MENU knob to display
“ENABL” and then press the MENU
knob.
027 CLIP TITLE
TITLE
:
SELECT PREFIX
:
CLEAR NUMERIC
:
LOAD PREFIX DATA:
PREFIX : TITLE
NUMERIC : 00001
Note
TOP
This directory is created when you insert a
“Memory Stick” into the camcorder. Do not create
this directory yourself on a computer.
ENABL
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
Clip titles will be generated automatically if
you record in this state.
The title of the next clip to be recorded will
be a combination of the prefix in the PREFIX
field and the serial number in the NUMERIC
field.
2
Insert a “Memory Stick” with the title
prefix file (TITLES.TXT) into the
“Memory Stick” slot of the camcorder.
3
On the CLIP TITLE page of the
OPERATION menu (see page 169),
select “LOAD PREFIX DATA” and
then press the MENU knob.
To create a list of title prefix strings
Prepare the data beforehand according to the
following rules.
File name
Assign the name “TITLES.TXT” to the file.
Input format
Enter title prefixes one at time, separated by
newline (CRLF) characters.
Prefixes can be up to 10 characters long. A prefix
file can contain up to 20 prefixes.
Note
The message “FILE NOT FOUND!” appears if no
list of title prefixes is found.
Check the location where the file is stored on the
“Memory Stick”.
To select a prefix from the title prefix list
Allowable characters
• Digits: 0 to 9
• Alphabetic characters: a to z, A to Z
• The following symbols: !, #, $, %, &amp;, ', ( , ), ~,
=, -, ^, @, [, ], {, }, +, ; (semicolon), , (comma),
. (period), _ (underscore)
• Space
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
Title prefix list example
Tennis&lt;CRLF&gt;
Basketball&lt;CRLF&gt;
Skiing_1&lt;CRLF&gt;
Skiing_2&lt;CRLF&gt;
2
To transfer a title prefix list to the
internal memory of the camcorder
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Copy the title prefix file (TITLES.TXT)
to the following directory on the
“Memory Stick”.
\\MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\GENERAL\VA
L_LIST
Chapter 4 Shooting
“MEMORY STICK ACCESS” appears, and
the file on the “Memory Stick”
(TITLES.TXT) is transferred to the internal
memory of the unit.
The message “COMPLETE!” appears when
the transfer finishes.
1
Display the CLIP TITLE page of the
OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
Select “SELECT PREFIX” and then
press the MENU knob.
A list of up to 20 title prefixes appears.
P00 TITLE PREFIX
001:
002:
003:
004:
005:
006:
007:
008:
009:
010:
ESC
Tennis
Basketball
Skiing_1
Skiing_2
Athletics
Aquatics
Cycling
Softball
Fencing
Sailing
Note
When no list of title prefixes has been transferred to
the internal memory of this unit, only the initial
value “TITLE” appears.
Advanced Operations for Shooting
99
3
Select the desired title prefix from the
list, and then press the MENU knob.
The CLIP TITLE page appears again, and the
selected prefix appears in the PREFIX field.
To return the initial value to 00001
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
To enter a title prefix directly
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the CLIP TITLE page on the
OPERATION menu.
2
Select “PREFIX” and then press the
MENU knob.
3
Chapter 4 Shooting
TOP
TITLE
: ENABL
SELECT PREFIX
:
EXEC
CLEAR NUMERIC
:
EXEC
LOAD PREFIX DATA:
EXEC
PREFIX : TITLE
!#$%&amp;'()+,-.0123456789;
=@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
WXYZ[]^_abcdefghijklmnop
qrstuvwxyz{}~
INS DEL RET
ESC END
3
Move x onto the character you want to
change, and then press the MENU
knob.
4
Turn the MENU knob to move x onto
the desired character in the list of
selectable characters, and then press
the MENU knob.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the
remaining characters.
6
When you have finished entering the
prefix, turn the MENU knob to move x
to “END” and then press the MENU
knob.
The camcorder exits prefix input mode, and
the original CLIP TITLE page appears.
To set the initial value of the clip title
serial number
You can set the initial value of the clip title serial
number to 00001 (default) or to any 5-digit value.
100
Advanced Operations for Shooting
Select “YES” and then press the MENU
knob.
The value in the NUMERIC field returns to
00001.
A prefix string appears.
027 CLIP TITLE
Select “CLEAR NUMERIC”and then
press the MENU knob.
The message “CLEAR OK? bYES NO”
appears.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Display the CLIP TITLE page on the
OPERATION menu.
To set the initial value to any number
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the CLIP TITLE page on the
OPERATION menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select “NUMERIC” and then press the
MENU knob.
3
Move x onto the digit you want to
change, and then press the MENU
knob.
4
Turn the MENU knob to move x onto
the desired digit in the list of selectable
digits, and then press the MENU knob.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the
remaining digits.
6
When you have finished entering the
value, turn the MENU knob to move x
to “END” and then press the MENU
knob.
The camcorder exits numeric input mode,
and the original CLIP TITLE page appears.
To check clip titles
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the
thumbnail screen, and select the clip whose title
you want to check.
The title of the selected clip appears in the upper
left of the screen.
See “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 113) for more
information about the thumbnail screen.
Notes
• It is not possible to specify 00000 as the initial value.
Even if you enter 00000, the value is reset to 00001
when the camcorder exits numeric input mode.
• The value of the serial number is incremented by 1
every time a title is generated. When the value reaches
99999, the next number restarts from 00001.
• Duplicate clip titles can be generated if you reset the
serial number after recording several clips or the same
is true depending on the value setting. Care should be
taken when setting the serial number.
- Clips: Metadata files (C*M01.XML), user
metadata files (C*M02.KLV), proxy AV data
files (C*S01.MXF)
- Clip lists: Metadata files (E*M01.XML)
• The following names cannot be assigned.
- Clips: C0000.MXF
- Clip lists: E0000E01.SMI, E0100E01.SMI to
E9999E01.SMI, E0000.SMI, E0100.SMI to
E9999.SMI
• The following names should be avoided.
- Clips: C5000.MXF to C9999.MXF
- Clip lists: E0001.SMI to E0099.SMI
To assign clip names on this unit
The title assigned to a clip is also used as the name
of that clip (or the file name).
The following standard format names are
assigned automatically to clips and clip lists that
are created or recorded by XDCAM devices.
Clips: C0001.MXF to C9999.MXF
Clip lists: E0001E01.SMI to E0099E01.SMI
When you record or create clips and clip lists, you
can assign user-defined names instead of the
standard format names. Assigning meaningful
names to clips and clip lists can facilitate file
management.
Limitations
• Letters, numbers and symbols from the Unicode
2.0 character set can be used.
However, the following control characters and
symbols cannot be used.
- Control characters: U+0000 to U+001F,
U+007F
- Symbols: &quot;, *, /, :, &lt;, &gt;, ?, \, |
• Depending on the character type, the length of
name (“C*” part) may be limited to 14
characters. (The limit for ASCII characters is 56
characters.)
• All file name extensions are converted
automatically to uppercase.
• Titles are used as user-defined clip names on
this unit. Therefore, the available characters are
limited to those supported by the title function.
• Files generated along with clips and clip lists
are assigned the same names (the “C*” or “E*”
part of the following file names).
C0001.MXF
TITLE00001
Chapter 4 Shooting
Assigning user-defined names to
clips and clip lists
When sub item “AUTO NAMING” is set to
“C****”
TITLE00001.MXF
TITLE00001
When sub item “AUTO NAMING” is set to
“TITLE”
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Before starting, set TITLE on the CLIP
TITLE page of the OPERATION menu
to ENABL and set a title (see page 98).
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Display the FILE NAMING page of the
OPERATION menu.
Advanced Operations for Shooting
101
3
Select NAMING FORM and then press
the MENU knob.
4
Turn the MENU knob to display
“FREE” and then press the MENU
knob.
Fuji.MXF
You can now enter a user-defined name.
028 FILE NAMING
NAMING FORM:
AUTO NAMING:
TOP
User-defined clip names can be used by FAM
and FTP
FREE
C****
Sakura.SMI
5
Chapter 4 Shooting
6
Turn the MENU knob to select “AUTO
NAMING” and then press the MENU
knob.
Turn the MENU knob to display
“TITLE” and then press the MENU
knob.
The same name will now be given to newly
recorded clips.
Notes
• An FTP client software that supports UTF-8 is
required to use Unicode characters other than ASCII
characters. Command prompt FTP commands do not
support UTF-8.
• When the first letter of the title setting on the CLIP
AUTO TITLING menu is a space or period (.), the clip
name is the title string minus the first letter.
To use clip names and clip list names by FAM
and FTP
Carry out steps 2 to 4 of “To assign clip names on
this unit” (page 101).
It is now possible to write, transfer, and rename
clips and clip lists with user-defined names over
file access mode (FAM) connections (see page
245) and FTP connections (see page 249).
User-defined clip list names can be used by FAM
and FTP
To check clip names
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the
thumbnail screen, and select the clip whose name
you want to check.
The name of the selected clip appears in the upper
left of the screen.
See “Clip thumbnail screen” (page 113) for more
information.
Note
The item at the upper left of the screen is displayed
according to the following order of priority.
Title &gt; user-defined clip name &gt; standard format clip
name
Therefore, the display of this item changes as follows,
depending on whether or not there is a title.
• When a title has been set as a clip name on this unit,
the title is displayed for clips recorded on this unit.
• The user-defined name or standard format name is
displayed for clips without a title.
To check clip information (name, title,
etc.)
For details, see “Checking clip properties”
(page 127).
Using planning metadata
Planning metadata is a file that contains metadata
about the clips to be shot and recorded.
To use planning metadata, you need to load a
planning metadata file into the unit’s memory
before starting to shoot.
102
Advanced Operations for Shooting
There are three ways to load files.
• Automatically load a file that has been written
to the following directory on a Professional
Disc via an FTP or FAM connection.
If you do not want to load a file automatically,
add a “load” property to the PlanningMetadata
tag and set the value of the property to “false”,
as shown in the shaded part of the following
example.
Example: &lt;PlanningMetadata …sp
load=&quot;false&quot; spversion=&quot;1.00&quot;&gt;
• Use a GUI screen to load a file that has been
written to the following directories on a
Professional Disc or a USB flash drive (see
page 140).
• Use a web browser to load a planning metadata
file (see page 144). (You must install the
CBKZ-UPG01 Software Upgrade Key.)
File location
Professional Disc:
General/Sony/
Planning
File name
• Format that can be used in
the General directory (see
page 243)
• Extension: XML
directory a)
• ASCII characters (up to
USB Flash drive:
63 characters including
General/Sony/
Planning directory the extension)
Clip name string format
In a text editor, modify the two fields in the
&lt;Title&gt; tag that contain the clip name strings (the
shaded fields in the example below).
Enter a name in the first field in ASCII format (up
to 52 characters), and enter another name in the
second field in UTF-8 format (up to 52 bytes).
Clip name string example
&lt;?xmlspversion= &quot;1.0&quot;spencoding=&quot;UTF-8&quot;?&gt;3
&lt;PlanningMetadataspxmlns=&quot;http://
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
planningmetadata&quot;spassignId=&quot;
P0001&quot;spcreationDate=&quot;
2008-01-20T17:00:00+09:00&quot;splastUpdate=&quot;
2008-03-28T10:30:00+09:00&quot;sp
version=&quot;1.00&quot;&gt;3
&lt;PropertiessppropertyId=&quot;
assignment&quot;spupdate=&quot;2008-01-20T09:00:
00+09:00&quot;spmodifiedBy=&quot;Chris&quot;&gt;3
&lt;TitlespusAscii=&quot; Typhoon &quot;spxml:lang
=&quot;en&quot;&gt; Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo &lt;/
Title&gt;3
&lt;/Properties&gt;3
&lt;/PlanningMetadata&gt;3
Chapter 4 Shooting
File creation rules
2) When no UTF-8 format name string is specified, the
ASCII format name string is registered as the actual
clip name.
• Extension: XML
a) The General/Sony/Planning directory is generated
automatically when you format a disc.
Note
Do not save more than 100 planning metadata files in the
above save locations. The unit may fail to load the files
correctly if more than 100 are saved.
For greater convenience in planning metadata
operations, you can use the optional CBK-WA01 WiFi adapter and the supplied Sony Planning Metadata
Add-in application software. For details, refer to the
operation manual of the CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi adapter.
To set clip names by using planning
metadata
The following two types of clip name strings can
be written in a planning metadata file.
• The ASCII format name that appears in the
viewfinder 1)
• The UTF-8 format name that is actually
registered as the clip name 2)
1) It is also possible to display the UTF-8 format name,
or no name (see page 141).
In the above example, sp indicates a space and 3
indicates a carriage return.
Notes
• When you create a file, enter each statement as a single
line with a CRLF only after the last character in the
statement line, and do not enter spaces except where
specified.
• If the UTF-8 format string is longer than 52 characters,
the ASCII format string is used as the clip name string.
Setting clip names
1
Load a planning metadata file
containing clip names into the unit’s
memory (see page 140 and page 144).
2
Carry out steps 2 to 5 of “To assign clip
names on this unit” (page 101).
3
Turn the MENU knob to display
“PLAN”, and then press the MENU
knob.
Each time that you start recording, the unit
automatically creates clip names using the
Advanced Operations for Shooting
103
names specified in the planning metadata
file. An underscore (_) and a three-digit serial
number (001 to 999) is appended to each clip
name.
Examples of automatically generated clip
names
• Clip names displayed in the viewfinder:
Typhoon_001, Typhoon_002, ...
• The actually recorded clip names:
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_001,
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_002, ... 1)
1) When display of the ASCII format clip name has
been selected (see page 141).
creationDate=&quot;2009-09-10T08:00:00-05:00&quot;sp
lastUpdate=&quot;2009-09-10T13:43:52-05:00&quot;sp
version=&quot;1.00&quot;&gt;3
&lt;Properties propertyId=&quot;assignment&quot;sp
class=&quot;original&quot;spupdate=&quot;
2009-09-10T15:00:00-05:00&quot;sp
modifiedBy=&quot;Chris&quot;&gt;3
&lt;Title usAscii=&quot;Football Game&quot;sp
xml:lang=&quot;ja&quot;&gt;Football Game 10/09/
2009&lt;/Title&gt;3
&lt;Meta name=&quot;MediaName&quot;sp
content=&quot; FootBall &quot;/&gt;3
&lt;/Properties&gt;3
&lt;/PlanningMetadata&gt;3
Notes
Chapter 4 Shooting
• The serial numbers return to 001 on the next
recording operation if you reach number 999.
• Serial numbers are not reset when you power the
unit off or exchange discs (newly generated
numbers are continuous on the old ones).
• If the ASCII format clip name string is longer
than 14 characters, it is displayed in the
viewfinder as the first 8 characters + x
(abbreviated) + the last 4 characters, for a total of
13 characters.
To specify user disc IDs by using
planning metadata
You can use planning metadata to define user disc
IDs which are saved in metadata files on
XDCAM discs. To define a user disc ID, specify
it as an ASCII or UTF-8 format disc name string
in the planning metadata.
Notes
• A user disc ID is set only after the recording is finished.
• User disc IDs cannot be set to the disc where another
user disc ID is already set. Use one of the following to
change the user disc ID, or delete it before starting the
operation described below.
- Software keyboard screen (see page 140)
- PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software Version 2.7
Disc name string format
Use a text editor to enter an ASCII string (up to
127 characters) or a UTF-8 string (up to about 42
multibyte characters) in the shaded part of the
example in the next section, “Example of disc
name specification”.
Example of disc name specification
&lt;?xmlspversion=&quot;1.0&quot;spencoding=&quot;UTF-8&quot;?&gt;3
&lt;PlanningMetadata
xmlns=&quot;http://xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
planningmetadata&quot;spassignId=&quot;H00123&quot;sp
104
Advanced Operations for Shooting
In this example, sp indicates a space and 3
indicates a newline.
You can check user-specified disc name strings in
the Disc Properties screen (see page 139), where
they appear as the user disc ID.
Note
When you create a planning metadata file, enter the
specification as a single statement with newlines at the
indicated newline positions only and spaces at the
indicated space positions only (except for spaces in the
disc name string).
To set essence mark names by using
planning metadata
You can use planning metadata to specify userdefined names for the Shot Mark0 to Shot Mark 9
essence marks that correspond to the 0 to 9 keys
on a USB keyboard. When planning metadata that
contains user-defined essence mark name strings
is loaded into this unit’s memory, the unit
displays those names for the essence marks that
correspond to the keys and that are recorded when
the keys are pressed.
See page 88 for more information about recording
essence marks, and see page 103 for more
information about how to load files.
Essence mark name string format
Use a text editor to enter essence mark names in
the sections indicated by shading in “Essence
mark name string example”. Names can be either
in ASCII format (up to 32 characters) or UTF-8
format (up to 16 characters).
Note
If a name string contains even one non-ASCII character,
the maximum length of that string is 16 characters.
In the above example, sp indicates a space and 3
indicates a carriage return.
You can check user-defined essence mark name
strings in the User Defined Essence Marks screen
(see page 141).
Note
When you create a definition file, enter each statement as
a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in
the statement line, and do not enter spaces except where
specified, except within essence mark name strings.
Recording video from external
devices
You can select between recording of data shot by
the camera and recording of data input from an
external device by using a menu or by using the
ASSIGN 2 switch.
Notes
• If you want to use the ASSIGN 2 switch, you must
assign the video switching function to the ASSIGN 2
switch beforehand (see page 221).
• Switching by the ASSIGN 2 switch takes priority over
switching by the menu. (Switching by menu is not
possible if the function has been assigned to the
ASSIGN 2 switch.)
• Video breakup may occur around the switch if you
switch the input during recording.
• Camera video is recorded if you switch to external
input without inputting an external video signal to the
SDI IN (OPTION) connector or the GENLOCK IN
connector.
• It is not possible to record external input video with a
changed aspect ratio.
To record SDI signals (with the CBKHD01 installed)
Chapter 4 Shooting
Essence mark name string example
&lt;?xmlspversion=&quot;1.0&quot;spencoding=
&quot;UTF-8&quot;?&gt;3
&lt;PlanningMetadata xmlns=&quot;http://
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/planningmetadata
&quot;spassignId=&quot;H00123&quot;spcreationDate=
&quot;2009-04-15T08:00:00Z&quot;splastUpdate=
&quot;2009-04-15T15:00:00Z&quot;spversion=&quot;1.00&quot;&gt;3
&lt;Properties propertyId=&quot;assignment&quot;sp
class=&quot;original&quot;spupdate=
&quot;2009-04-15T15:00:00Z&quot;spmodifiedBy=
&quot;Chris&quot;&gt;3
&lt;Title usAscii=&quot;Football
Game&quot;spxml:lang=&quot;en&quot;&gt;Football Game
15/04/2009&lt;/Title&gt;3
&lt;Meta name=&quot;_ShotMark1&quot;spcontent=
&quot; Goal &quot;/&gt;3
&lt;Meta name=&quot;_ShotMark2&quot;spcontent=
&quot; Shoot &quot;/&gt;3
&lt;Meta name=&quot;_ShotMark3&quot;spcontent=
&quot; Corner Kick &quot;/&gt;3
&lt;Meta name=&quot;_ShotMark4&quot;spcontent=
&quot; Free Kick &quot;/&gt;3
&lt;Meta name=&quot;_ShotMark5&quot;spcontent=
&quot; Goal Kick &quot;/&gt;3
&lt;Meta name=&quot;_ShotMark6&quot;spcontent=
&quot; Foul &quot;/&gt;3
&lt;Meta name=&quot;_ShotMark7&quot;spcontent=
&quot; PK &quot;/&gt;3
&lt;Meta name=&quot;_ShotMark8&quot;spcontent=
&quot; 1st Half &quot;/&gt;3
&lt;Meta name=&quot;_ShotMark9&quot;spcontent=
&quot; 2nd Half &quot;/&gt;3
&lt;Meta name=&quot;_ShotMark0&quot;spcontent=
&quot; Kick Off &quot;/&gt;3
&lt;/Properties&gt;3
&lt;/PlanningMetadata&gt;3
When the optional CBK-HD01 HD/SD SDI Input
Board is installed in this unit, you can record HDSDI or SD-SDI signals input to the SDI IN
(OPTION) connector. When an HD recording
format (MPEG HD422 50, or MPEG HD420 HQ/
SP) is selected, SD-SDI signals are upconverted
to HD signals before recording.
Notes
• It is not possible to record HD-SDI signals when an SD
recording format (MPEG IMX 50/40/30, or DVCAM)
is selected.
• The system frequency and resolution (HD-SDI input
only) of input signals must match the current settings
of this unit. Otherwise the input signals cannot be
recorded.
• Only audio signals embedded in SDI signals are
recorded, regardless of the settings of the AUDIO IN
CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 switches.
1
Display the SOURCE SEL page of the
OPERATION menu.
Advanced Operations for Shooting
105
2
Select REC VIDEO SOURCE, and turn
the MENU knob to display “EXT”.
3
Select EXT VIDEO SOURCE, and turn
the MENU knob to display “VBS”. 1)
1) Does not appear when the optional CBK-SC02
Analog Composite Input Board is not installed.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select REC VIDEO SOURCE, and turn
the MENU knob to display “EXT”.
3
Select EXT VIDEO SOURCE, and turn
the MENU knob to select the desired
signal to be recorded.
Chapter 4 Shooting
As you turn the MENU knob, the setting
changes as follows: HDSDI 1) y SDSDI
y VBS 2).
1) HDSDI cannot be selected when an SD recording
format is selected.
2) Does not appear when the optional CBK-SC02
Analog Composite Input Board is not installed.
After you complete this setting, you can record
the video signals of external devices by inputting
the SDI signals selected in step 3 to the SDI IN
(OPTION) connector.
Recording analog composite signals
(with the CBK-SC02 installed)
When the optional CBK-SC02 Analog
Composite Input Board is installed in this unit,
you can record analog composite signals input to
the GENLOCK IN connector. When an HD
recording format (MPEG HD422 50, or MPEG
HD420 HQ/SP) is selected, analog composite
signals are upconverted to HD signals before
recording.
Note
Even if the GENLOCK item on the GENLOCK page of
the MAINTENANCE menu is set to OFF, the unit
automatically genlocks to external video signals that are
input to the GENLOCK IN connector. When
GENLOCK is set to OFF, the genlock is cancelled when
the input of external video signals stops and the unit
switches to camera shooting.
1
106
Display the SOURCE SEL page of the
OPERATION menu.
Advanced Operations for Shooting
After you complete this setting, you can record
external video signals by inputting analog
composite signals to the GENLOCK IN
connector.
Using the Live Logging function
The Live Logging function allows you to transfer
proxy AV data to a computer as you are shooting,
or to send and receive metadata between this unit
and a computer. 1)
This function can transfer data via Ethernet or a
wireless LAN. 2)
It allows you to do the following, mainly by using
the supplied PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software
Version 2.7.
• View proxy AV data
• Add and edit metadata (titles, comments,
essence marks, and so on)
• Create clip lists
After adding or editing metadata, or creating a
clip list, you can transfer the metadata or clip list
from the computer back to this unit for recording
on the original disc.
1) The CBKZ-UPG01 Software Upgrade Key must be
installed to use the Live Logging function.
2) To make wireless LAN connections, you must install
the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi adapter and the
CBKZ-UPG01 Software Upgrade Key.
See page 224 for more information about wireless
LAN settings.
Refer to the PDZ-1 help file for more information
about the functions provided by the PDZ-1 software
and how to use them.
There are two Live Logging operating modes:
Live mode and Live View mode. The following
table lists the main functions provided by each
operating mode.
Operating
mode
Live
Live View
Main functions as seen from this
unit
• Send clip metadata
• Write edited clip metadata back to
disc
• Receive planning metadata
• Receive clip lists
• Same functions as above
• Send proxy AV data
Notes
You can connect a USB flash drive to the USB
connector and use it to save proxy metadata.
(Here, “proxy metadata” refers to proxy AV data
for the clips on the disc as well as to metadata.) 1)
You can then connect this USB flash drive to a
computer with the PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing
Software installed and use the software to view
the proxy AV data, to edit and enter metadata
(titles, comments, essence marks, and so on), and
to create clip lists.
1) When recording of proxy metadata finishes, the
planning metadata that has been loaded into this unit
(if any) is also copied to the USB flash drive. The data
is saved in the following directories, which are created
automatically when a USB flash drive is mounted.
• Proxy AV data: \MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\
MEMDISC\PROAVID\Sub
• Metadata: \MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\MEMDISC\
PROAVID\Clip
• Planning metadata: \MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\
MEMDISC\PROAVID\General\Sony\Planning
Notes
To record with the Live Logging function
enabled
On the REC FUNCTION page of the
OPERATION menu, set LIVE LOGGING to one
of the following.
LIVE: Live mode
VIEW: Live view mode
Notes
• “LIVE LOGGING” does not appear in the REC
FUNCTION page of the OPERATION menu unless
the CBKZ-UPG01 Software Upgrade Key is installed.
• It is not possible to enable the Live Logging function
while this unit is in the following states.
- The proxy data recording function is enabled.
- During Slow &amp; Quick Motion shooting (PDW-F800
only)
• It is not possible to set the Live Logging function to
Live View mode while this unit is in the following
states.
- The Picture Cache function is enabled.
- The Interval Rec function is enabled.
- The Disc Exchange Cache function is enabled.
- The Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled.
• The Live Logging function is disabled automatically
whenever you enable the proxy data recording
function.
• USB flash drives must be formatted with the FAT32
file system. If a drive is formatted with any other file
system, reformat it on this unit (see page 110).
• Never remove a USB flash drive or disconnect the
battery pack or power cord while it is being accessed
(while this unit’s ACCESS indicator is lit). Doing so
can corrupt the data on the USB flash drive and make
it unusable.
Chapter 4 Shooting
• The CBKZ-UPG01 Software Upgrade Key must be
installed to use the Live Logging function.
• In Live View mode, it is not possible to set time data
by setting the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET. To
set time data, first switch from Live View mode to
another operating mode.
• Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
switch, time data advances in F-RUN mode while the
unit is operating in Live View mode.
• In Live View mode, it is not possible to set the
PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to REGEN and
record timecode that is continuous with timecode read
from the disc.
Recording proxy data
To enable proxy data recording and
copying to USB flash drives
Before starting, set ETHERNET/USB in the
POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION menu
to “ENABL”.
1
In the OPERATION menu, display the
MEMORY REC page.
See “Basic menu operations” (page 205) for
more information about menu operations.
2
Select MEMORY REC, and turn the
MENU knob until ENABL appears.
Advanced Operations for Shooting
107
030 MEMORY REC
MEMORY REC
TOP
: ENABL
COPY CURRENT CLP :
COPY ALL CLIPS
:
ABORT COPY
:
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
DEL ALL MEM CLP
FORMAT MEMORY
EXEC
EXEC
:
:
•
•
This enables proxy data recording and
copying from discs to USB flash drives.
Notes
• It is not possible to make proxy data recording settings
while this unit is in the following states.
- Wireless LAN connections are enabled.
• The Live Logging function is disabled automatically
whenever you enable the proxy data recording
function.
Chapter 4 Shooting
To record proxy data while synchronizing
with disc recording
1
Connect a USB flash drive to the USB
connector.
2
Check the memory symbol and the
memory remaining display (see page
35).
3
After confirming that the USB flash
drive has enough free capacity, press
the REC START button or the VTR
button on the lens to start recording as
normal. 1)
•
•
The clip’s proxy data is written to the USB
flash drive at the same time that the clip is
recorded to the disc.
1) After the unit is powered on. some time is required for
the memory symbol to appear. However, if the
connected USB flash drive has enough free memory
and recording is enabled, then recording of proxy data
to the USB flash drive begins as soon as recording
starts, even if the memory symbol has not yet
appeared. The proxy data is the same data as the proxy
data for clips that are recorded to the disc.
Notes
• If you start recording immediately after powering the
unit on, and then stop recording after only a short time,
the recording operation does not end until the unit has
recognized the USB flash drive and recorded the proxy
data to it. Note that if you enable this function and start
recording without connecting a USB flash drive,
108
•
Advanced Operations for Shooting
•
recording will take longer because the unit will require
more time to recognize that no flash drive is connected.
The message “USB MEMORY INHIBIT!” or “USB
M. INHI” appears if you connect and attempt to access
a write protected USB flash drive, In this case, remove
the USB flash drive, set it to enable recording, and
connect it again.
The message “MEM REC NG!” appears if you start
recording without a USB flash drive connected. After
recording stops, connect a USB flash drive, refer to
“To copy the proxy data of a clip on a disc to a USB
flash drive”, and copy the proxy data that could not be
written to the USB flash drive during recording.
It is not possible to record proxy data to a USB flash
drive while the Clip Continuous Rec function is
enabled. If you attempt to do so, the message “MEM
REC NG!” appears and the data is not recorded. To
record the proxy data, stop recording and copy the data
to the USB flash drive as explained below in “To copy
the proxy data of a clip on a disc to a USB flash drive”,
and then resume shooting.
Never disconnect the battery pack or power cord while
recording to a USB flash drive (while the ACCESS
indicator of this unit is lit). If you do so, recording
processing will not end normally, and the clip proxy
data that was recorded to the USB flash drive before
the interruption will be lost.
The message “MEM REC NG!” appears if the USB
flash drive runs out of memory during recording (while
the ACCESS indicator of this unit is lit), and the clip
proxy data that was being recorded immediately before
the message appeared is lost. If this occurs, exchange
the USB flash drive, refer to “To copy the proxy data
of a clip on a disc to a USB flash drive”, and copy the
proxy data that could not be recorded.
It is not possible to record proxy data to a USB flash
drive only.
To stop recording
Recording to a USB flash drive stops whenever
recording to the disc stops.
To stop recording to the USB flash drive only, set
MEMORY REC on the MEMORY REC page of
the OPERATION menu to “DSABL”.
To copy the proxy data of a clip on a disc
to a USB flash drive
Proceed as follows to select an already recorded
clip on a disc and copy its proxy data to a USB
flash drive.
Note
The following functions stop during execution of a copy.
• Playback cue up
• Picture Cache recording
• DV stream output from the
connector
1
2
(i.LINK) S400
Search for the video of the clip (being
played or stopped) that you want to
copy.
Select COPY CURRENT CLP in the
MEMORY REC page of the
OPERATION menu, and then press the
MENU knob.
The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears.
3
Select “YES”, and then press the
MENU knob.
Note
The message “M. Shortage” appears when the mount of
data to be copied exceed the free capacity of the USB
flash drive. The copy is not executed. Exchange the USB
flash drive for one with enough free capacity.
To cancel a copy to a USB flash drive
1
Select ABORT COPY in the MEMORY
REC page of the OPERATION menu,
and then press the MENU knob.
The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears.
2
Select “YES”, and then press the
MENU knob.
The message “ABORTING” appears in the
viewfinder and on the LCD monitor while
the unit is aborting the copy operation. The
message “ABORT” appears when the abort
processing is completed.
Chapter 4 Shooting
During the execution of the copy, the
message “MEMORY ACCESS **%”
appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD
monitor, where “**” is replaced with a
number (0 to 99) that indicates the
percentage completed. When processing
finishes, the message “COMPLETE!”
appears.
The proxy data of the current clip (the
currently stopped clip, or the one that being
played) is copied to the USB flash drive.
finishes, the message “COMPLETE!”
appears.
The proxy data of all clips on the disc is
copied to the USB flash drive.
To delete recorded proxy data
To copy the proxy data of all clips on a
disc to a USB flash drive
Proceed as follows to copy the proxy data of all
clips on a disc to a USB flash drive.
Note
The following functions stop during execution of a copy.
• Playback cue up
• Picture Cache recording
• DV stream output from the
(i.LINK) S400
connector
1
Select COPY ALL CLIPS in the
MEMORY REC page of the
OPERATION menu, and then press the
MENU knob.
The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears.
2
Select “YES”, and then press the
MENU knob.
During the execution of the copy, the
message “MEMORY ACCESS **%”
appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD
monitor, where “**” is replaced with a
number (0 to 99) that indicates the
percentage completed. When processing
To delete data recorded on the disc at the same
time that you delete proxy data from a USB flash
drive, execute the DELETE CLIP command in
the Thumbnail menu (see page 131).
To delete proxy data from the USB flash drive
only, proceed as follows.
1
Select DELE ALL MEM CLP in the
MEMORY REC page of the
OPERATION menu, and then press the
MENU knob.
The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears.
2
Select “YES”, and then press the
MENU knob.
During the execution of the deletion, the
message “MEMORY ACCESS” appears in
the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.
When processing finishes, the message
“COMPLETE” appears.
All of the proxy data in the USB flash drive
is deleted.
Advanced Operations for Shooting
109
To format a USB flash drive
Proceed as follows to format a USB flash drive
with the FAT32 file system.
1
Select FORMAT MEMORY in the
MEMORY REC page of the
OPERATION menu, and then press the
MENU knob.
The message “EXECUTE OK?” appears.
2
Chapter 4 Shooting
110
Select “YES”, and then press the
MENU knob.
During the execution of the format, the
message “MEMORY ACCESS” appears in
the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.
When processing finishes, the message
“COMPLETE” appears.
All of the data in the USB flash drive is
deleted.
Advanced Operations for Shooting
Chapter
5 Operations in GUI Screens
Overview
You can perform scene searches, play the
searched scenes, and select scenes (edit clip list)
in Graphical User Interface (GUI) screens. The
GUI screens are your gateways to discs and the
data saved on discs.
(The GUI screens can display European
languages, Japanese, Korean, Simplified
Chinese, and Traditional Chinese for clip names
and titles.)
Switching between GUI screens
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
The most important GUI screens are:
Clip thumbnail screen: Displays thumbnails of
clips on the disc. “Clip” is displayed as the
title at the upper left of the screen (see
page 112).
Clip list thumbnail screen: Displays thumbnails
of sub clips in a clip list. “Clip List” is
displayed as the title at the upper left of the
screen (see page 112).
There are also two playback screens:
Clip playback screen: Playback screen for
normal video
Clip list playback screen: Playback screen for
clip list video
You will use the THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE
MARK button 1 and the SUB CLIP/DISC
MENU button 2 to switch between these four
screens. Each press of these buttons switches
between the screens as shown in the following
figure. The THUMBNAIL and SUB CLIP
indicators light as follows, according to the type
of screen that is currently displayed.
Note
To switch between these four screens, a disc with
recorded clips must be loaded in the unit.
Overview
111
Clip playback screen a)
Clip thumbnail screen
Clip:C0006
1
1
TC 00:23:00:25
TC 00:23:40:07
TC 00:24:45:11
TC 00:25:06:14
TC 00:25:49:23
TC 00:26:22:10
TC 00:27:19:04
TC 00:27:51:09
TC 00:28:22:02
TC 00:23:34:18
TC 00:23:54:22
TC 00:28:06:09
DATE&amp;TIME
Unlit
006/040
30 NOV 2005 13:38
DUR
0:00:10:23
Lit
THUMBNAIL
THUMBNAIL
ESSENCE
MARK
Unlit
ESSENCE
MARK
Unlit
SUB CLIP
DISC MENU
2
DISC MENU
2
2
Clip list playback screen a), b)
Clip list thumbnail screen b)
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
1
1
THUMBNAIL
002/013
TC 00:00:00:00
TC 00:00:04:14
TC 00:00:12:04
TC 00:00:20:13
TC 00:00:28:08
TC 00:00:35:15
TC 00:00:46:08
TC 00:00:53:22
TC 00:00:59:16
TC 00:01:06:18
TC 00:01:13:11
DATE&amp;TIME
28 JUL 2006 19:55
Lit
ESSENCE
MARK
Lit
SUB CLIP
DISC MENU
a) The playback screens appear when the LCD
monitor is switched to display of video with
(CHAR) or without (MONI) superimposed text.
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to switch the
LCD monitor to these modes (see page 22).
b) The clip list playback screen appears when a clip
list is loaded into the unit’s memory (see page 138).
The other thumbnail screens are:
• Expand thumbnail screen
• Chapter thumbnail screen
• Essence mark thumbnail screen
112
2
Clip List:E0001
Unlit
Overview
SUB CLIP
TOTAL DUR
TC 00:01:17:27
00:01:31:16
THUMBNAIL
ESSENCE
MARK
Lit
SUB CLIP
DISC MENU
Information and controls in
thumbnail screens
About the display of clip and clip list
names
You can specify that titles should appear instead
of names in the clip name areas of thumbnail
screens. You can also change the display
language.
To specify that titles (see page 101), if they exist,
should be displayed with higher priority than
names, select one of the following under Settings
&gt;Display Title in the Disc Menu.
On: Title1 &quot;title1&quot;: Display in the order title1,
title2, clip or clip list name.
On: Title2 {title2}: Display in the order title2,
title1, clip or clip list name.
To change the display language according to the
area of use (see page 43), select the desired
language under Settings &gt;Select Font in the Disc
Menu.
Displays the name or a title of the selected clip
(see page 113).
b Selection frame
Indicates that the thumbnail is selected. To select
another thumbnail, move the frame (see
page 121). Multiple selection frames appear
when multiple thumbnails are selected (see
page 120).
Select Font Displayable
setting
languages
–
English/Japanese
c Clip number/total number of clips
European
Alphabet
Korean
Simplified
Chinese
Traditional
Chinese
d Scrollbar
English/European
languages
English/Korean
English/Simplified
Chinese
English/Traditional
Chinese
Clip thumbnail screen
This screen displays thumbnails of clips on the
disc in the order that they were recorded. You can
use this screen to work with clips – deleting or
locking them, selecting their index pictures,
adding them to clip lists, and so on.
Displays the total number of clips on the disc, and
the number of the selected clip.
When not all of the thumbnails can be displayed
in the thumbnail display area, the position of the
slider shows the relative position of the currently
displayed clips, and the length of the slider shows
the relative length of currently displayed clips
within all of the clips.
When you have a large number of thumbnails,
you can save time by using the Skip Scroll
function to jump directly to the thumbnail you
want (see page 121).
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Area of use
setting
NTSC(J)AREA
(Japan)
NTSC AREA
(NTSC area
other than
Japan) or PAL
AREA
a Clip name
e Recording format
The recording format of the selected clip is
displayed as a combination of the following
information.
• Video format logo
• Number of system lines
• Recording quality
• Number of audio channels
f Clip date and time
Displays the date and time when the selected clip
was shot and recorded.
Overview
113
g Duration
Displays the duration (recording time) of the
selected clip. When multiple clips are selected,
displays the total recording time of the selected
clips.
1 Thumbnail display items
1
2
selection is the timecode of the first frame or the
timecode of the thumbnail frame.
f Lock icon
This icon appears when the clip is locked
(protected) (see page 130). Clips cannot be
deleted and their clip information cannot be
changed when this mark is displayed.
3
Clip list thumbnail screen
This screen displays thumbnails of the clips in the
current clip list. You can use this screen to create
and edit clips lists.
OK
TC 00:26:22:10
4
5
2
1
6
3 4
Clip List:E0001
002/013
TC 00:00:00:00
TC 00:00:04:14
TC 00:00:12:04
TC 00:00:20:13
TC 00:00:28:08
TC 00:00:35:15
TC 00:00:46:08
TC 00:00:53:22
TC 00:00:59:16
TC 00:01:06:18
TC 00:01:13:11
a Index picture
Displays an image to stand for the content of the
clip. The index picture is normally the first frame
of the clip.
28 JUL 2006 19:55
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
This mark, like the folded-over corner of a page
that you want to remember, appears when the
index picture has been changed to any frame other
than the first frame of a clip (see page 126).
Note
When you cue up a clip, the unit always cues up the first
frame, even when the index picture has been changed to
a different frame.
TC 00:01:17:27
TOTAL DUR
5
b Index picture changed mark
00:01:31:16
6
a Clip list name
Displays the name or a title of the clip list (see
page 113).
b Selection frame
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
113).
c S mark
c Sub clip number/number of sub clips
This mark appears when shot marks or other
essence marks have been set in the clip (see
page 88).
The chapter thumbnail screen can be displayed
for clips that show this mark (see page 115).
Displays the total number of sub clips in the clip
list, and the number of the selected sub clip.
d Clip flag icon
Displays the corresponding icon when a clip flag
(OK/NG/KP (KEEP)) is set in the clip (see
page 130).
e Clip and frame information
Displays the clip or frame information selected
with the Clip Information item in the Thumbnail
Menu (see page 126). The factory default
114
DATE&amp;TIME
Overview
d Scrollbar
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
113).
e Clip list date and time
Displays the date and time when the clip list was
created, or the date and time of its most recent
modification. An asterisk (*) appears after the
date and time of creation when the current clip list
has not been saved to the disc.
e Clip name
Notes
• “New File” appears when no clip list has been loaded
into the unit’s memory, and when a clip list has been
cleared from the unit’s memory.
• A
mark appears before the date of creation or
modification when a disc is write inhibited. You can
create clip lists when the disc is write inhibited, but you
cannot save them.
Displays the total duration of all sub clips in the
clip list.
Expand thumbnail screen
This screen displays thumbnails of equally sized
divisions of the selected clip.
2
3 4
Expand Clip 008/024 x 12
001/012
TC 00:01:38:00
TC 00:01:36:14
TC 00:01:36:27
TC 00:01:37:11
TC 00:01:37:24
TC 00:01:38:08
TC 00:01:38:22
TC 00:01:38:19
TC 00:01:40:02
TC 00:01:40:16
CLIP
Tene
5
Displays the time from the selected thumbnail to
the next one.
DUR
Chapters are the sections between the shot marks,
Rec Start marks, and other essence marks that
have been recorded in clips. This screen allows
you to display thumbnails of the chapters in the
selected clip.
Note
Shot marks can be set by the user during recording and
playback. They can be deleted and moved.
Essence marks other than shot marks are set
automatically. They cannot be deleted or moved.
1
2
3
4 5
Chapter of Clip 001/024
TC 00:23:00:25
TC 00:23:02:00
001/004
TC 00:23:04:00
0:00:00:13
6
a Selection frame
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
113).
b Clip number/total clips x number of
divisions
Displays the number of the selected clip, the total
number of clips on the disc, and the number of
times that the selected clip has been divided to
display the expansion thumbnails.
c Thumbnail number/total thumbnails
Displays the total number of expanded
thumbnails and the number of the selected
thumbnail.
d Scrollbar
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
113).
CLIP
C0001
DUR
6
0:00:01:05
7
a Selection frame
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
113).
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
TC 00:01:35:17
TC 00:01:39:06
f Duration
Chapter thumbnail screen
f Total duration
1
Displays the name or a title of the expanded clip
(see page 113).
b Clip number/total clips
Displays the total number of clips on the disc and
the number of the clip that contains the displayed
chapters.
If the essence mark name is a user-defined name,
it is displayed between quotation marks, for
example as [Chapter: “Touch Down”] (see
page 141).
c S1/S2/RS marks
The “S1”, “S2”, and “RS” marks on the
thumbnails indicate frames where Shot Mark1,
Shot Mark2, and Rec Start essence marks are set.
Overview
115
d Chapter number/total chapters
Displays the total number of chapters and the
number of the selected chapter.
Note
Note
The total number of essence marks is the total number of
essence marks that have been set in all clips on the disc.
d Scrollbar
The total number of chapters is the total number of
chapters in the specified clip only.
e Scrollbar
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
113).
f Clip name
Displays the name or a title of the clip whose
chapter is displayed (see page 113).
g Duration
Displays the time from the first frame of the
selected chapter to the first frame of the next
chapter.
Essence mark thumbnail screen
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
This screen displays thumbnails of the specified
essence mark, found by searching all clips on the
disc.
1 2
3 4
Shot Mark1
001/029
TC 00:23:02:00
TC 00:24:45:25
TC 00:25:07:01
TC 00:25:40:24
TC 00:26:22:11
TC 00:27:19:25
TC 00:27:51:25
TC 00:28:06:17
TC 00:28:35:00
TC 00:28:55:02
TC 00:29:10:05
TC 00:29:20:03
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
113).
e Clip date and time
Displays the date and time when the clip that
contains the selected thumbnail was recorded or
last modified.
f Clip name
Displays the name or a title of the clip that
contains the selected frame (see page 113).
Displaying menus
Thumbnail Menu
The Thumbnail Menu displays menu items that
are valid for the currently displayed thumbnail
screen.
To display the Thumbnail Menu
To display the Thumbnail Menu, press the
MENU button with a thumbnail screen displayed.
To return to the original screen, press the MENU
button again, or press the RESET/RETURN
button.
2 RESET/RETURN button
1 MENU button
30 NOV 2006 19:55
&quot;Capping literally years of spe...&quot;
DISP SEL HOLD
RESET
DISPLAY
BRIGHT
LEVEL
EXPAND
5
6
CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER RC U-BIT
THUMBNAIL
MENU
0
10
0
10
CH-3
ESSENCE
MARK
a Essence mark name
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
SET
b Selection frame
See the description in “Clip thumbnail screen” (page
113).
c Essence mark number/total essence
marks
Displays the total number of essence marks and
the number of the selected essence mark.
116
Overview
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
SUB CLIP
S.SEL
CH-1
PRESET
Displays the name of the essence mark (Shot
Mark1 here). If the shot mark name has been
defined by the user, it is enclosed in quotation
marks (&quot; &quot;) in the display (see page 141).
F
R
W
AUTO
DISC MENU
SHIFT
REGEN
CLOCK
CH-2
CH-4
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
F
R
W
Thumbnail screen a)
Clip:&quot;Navigeting sibiling relati...&quot;
018/036
TC 00:29:19:23
TC 00:29:38:25
TC 00:29:50:04
TC 00:30:25:11
TC 00:30:40:13
TC 01:01:28:25
TC 00:09:43:14
TC 00:24:24:29
TC 00:24:46:22
TC 00:25:42:08
TC 00:25:49:07
TC 00:24:34:27
DATE&amp;TIME
30 NOV 2005 14:14
DUR
1
0:23:22:26
12
Thumbnail Menu
Clip Information
Select Index Picture
Clip Properties
Add Sub Clips
Delete Clip
Lock/Unlock Clip
Set Clip Flag
Skip Scroll
Thumbnail Search
SHIFT+SET
SHIFT+RESET
SHIFT+STOP
Thumbnail Menu b)
a) Clip thumbnail screen
b) Thumbnail Menu of the clip thumbnail screen
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Shortcut operations
Shortcut button names are displayed next to the
menu items of commands that have shortcuts (see
page 153).
Note
Shortcuts displayed within parentheses should be used
with all menus closed.
Thumbnail Menu submenus
• The Thumbnail Search Menu contains the basic
commands for thumbnail searches.
• The Thumbnail View Menu contains the basic
commands for moving to other menus.
Overview
117
Disc Menu
The Disc Menu allows you to do the following.
(Underlined values in the Operation/Setting
column are the factory defaults.)
Item
Load Clip List
Save Clip List
Save Clip list as...
Delete Clip List
Clear Clip List
Load Planning
Metadata/Select Drive
Planning Metadata Properties
Clear Planning Metadata
Lock or Delete All Clips
Sub-Item
Lock All Clips
Unlock All Clips
Delete All Clips
Disc Properties
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Format Disc
Download Clip via Direct FTP
Settings
Sub-Item
SET Key on Thumbnail
Sort Clip List by...
Sort Planning Metadata
by...
Display Title
118
Overview
Operation/Setting
Load clip list into this unit’s memory.
Save a clip list to the disc under its current name,
overwriting the old contents.
Save a clip list to the disc under a new name.
Delete a clip list from the disc.
Clear the current clip list from the unit’s memory.
Select a media disc or drive and load planning
metadata into this unit’s memory.
Display the properties of the currently loaded
planning metadata.
Clear the currently loaded planning metadata from
the unit’s memory.
Lock all clips.
Unlock all clips.
Delete all clips.
Display the properties of the currently loaded disc.
Or edit the user disc ID, title 1, and title 2.
Format (initialize) the currently loaded disc.
Used to send clip to and from remote devices and
remote computers.
Selects the behavior of the unit when the SET/S.SEL
button or MENU knob is pressed with one thumbnail
selected.
Cue up &amp; Still: Cue up the selected thumbnail.
Cue up &amp; Play: Cue up and play the selected
thumbnail.
Selects a method to sort the clip list.
Name (A-Z): Sort in ascending alphabetic order.
Date (Newest First): Sort by date and time of
creation, newest clip list first.
Selects a method to sort the planning metadata.
Name (A-Z): Sort in ascending alphabetic order.
Date (Newest First): Sort by date and time of
creation, newest planning metadata first.
Selects whether to display clip and clip list titles.
On: Title1 &quot;title1&quot;: Display the title in the following
order of priority: Title1, Title2, Clip name or Clip
list name.
On: Title2 {title2}: Display the title in the following
order of priority: Title2, Title1, Clip name or Clip
list name.
Off: Do not display the title. Always display the clip
name or clip list name.
Item
Planning Clip Name in
Clip Info. Area
Setting Format Disc
Select Font
Select USB Keyboard
Language
Select Mouse Pointer
Speed
To return to the original screen, press the RESET/
RETURN button.
Clip list thumbnail screen
Clip List:E0001
002/013
TC 00:00:00:00
TC 00:00:04:14
TC 00:00:12:04
TC 00:00:20:13
TC 00:00:28:08
TC 00:00:35:15
TC 00:00:46:08
TC 00:00:53:22
TC 00:00:59:16
TC 00:01:06:18
TC 00:01:13:11
DATE&amp;TIME
28 JUL 2006 19:55
TOTAL DUR
1+2
TC 00:01:17:27
00:01:31:16
3
3 RESET/RETURN button
Disc Menu
DISP SEL HOLD
RESET
DISPLAY
BRIGHT
LEVEL
EXPAND
CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER RC U-BIT
THUMBNAIL
MENU
0
10
0
10
CH-3
ESSENCE
MARK
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
SET
F
R
W
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
SUB CLIP
S.SEL
CH-1
PRESET
DISC MENU
SHIFT
REGEN
CLOCK
CH-2
CH-4
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
F
R
W
Load Clip List
Save Clip List
Save Clip List as...
Delete Clip List
Clear Clip List
Load Planning Metadata/Select Drive
Planning Metadata Properties
Clear Planning Metadata
Lock or Delete All Clips
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
To display the Disc Menu
To display the Disc Menu, press the SUB CLIP/
DISC MENU button with the SHIFT button held
down in one of the following screens.
• Clip thumbnail screen
• Clip list thumbnail screen
• Clip playback screen
• Clip list playback screen
Operation/Setting
Selects whether to display in the viewfinder the title
contained in a planning metadata file that is loaded
into this unit.
Off: Do not display title.
ASCII Clip Name: Display title in ASCII format.
Clip Name: Display title in UTF-8 format.
Selects whether to disable the Format Disc command.
Disable: Disable the command.
Enable: Enable the command.
Selects the language (font) used to display clip
names, clip list names, and title2 clip titles.
Selects the language of the USB keyboard used in the
software keyboard screen.
Selects the speed of the USB mouse pointer used in
the software keyboard screen from among the
following.
5 Fast/4/3 Middle/2/1 Slow
1 SHIFT button
2 SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button
Overview
119
To return to the previous screen
GUI screen operations
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
To move from a menu level to the next
lower or higher menu level
MENU knob
For a menu item displayed together with a B or b
mark, you can move to the next lower or higher
menu level by pressing the right- or left-arrow
button.
Left-/right-arrow buttons
DISP SEL HOLD
RESET
DISPLAY
To scroll hidden parts of the string into
view
BRIGHT
LEVEL
EXPAND
CHAPTER RETURN COUNTER RC U-BIT
THUMBNAIL
MENU
0
10
0
10
CH-3
ESSENCE
MARK
F-RUN
SET
R-RUN
SET
F
R
W
AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO SELECT
SUB CLIP
S.SEL
CH-1
PRESET
SHIFT
DISC MENU
REGEN
CLOCK
CH-2
CH-4
AUDIO IN
FRONT
REAR
WIRELESS
F
R
W
Up-/down-arrow buttons
SET/S.SEL button
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
To select items
Do one of the following to select thumbnails,
menu items, timecode digits, and other items.
• Turn the MENU knob.
• Press the up-, down-, left-, or right-arrow
button.
• Press the PREV or NEXT button.
• With the SHIFT button held down, press the
PREV or NEXT button (to move to the first or
last item).
• Press the PREV button with the F REV button
held down, or press the NEXT button with the F
FWD button held down (to move to the first or
last item).
• With the SHIFT button held down, press the upor down-arrow button (to move to the previous
or next page).
• Press the F REV or F FWD button (to move to
the previous or next page).
To select multiple thumbnails
Do one of the following.
• With the SHIFT button held down, turn the
MENU knob.
• With the SHIFT button held down, press the
left- or right-arrow button.
120
Overview
When a B or b mark is displayed for an item, you
can press the left or right arrow button to scroll
the display by one character for each press.
The up and down arrow buttons scroll the
beginning and end of the string into view.
To increment and decrement numbers
Do one of the following.
• Press the up- or down-arrow button.
• Turn the MENU knob.
To confirm selections
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Thumbnail Operations
3
The current position moves by an amount
equal to 1/10 of the total number of
thumbnails.
4
You can use thumbnail screens to display clip
information and to find, protect, and delete clips.
The thumbnails provide visual confirmation of
these and other operations.
Turn the MENU knob, or press the up
or down-arrow button.
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob at the new position.
The thumbnail at the position indicated in the
small popup window appears in a thumbnail
screen like the following 1).
Expand
007/235
Selecting thumbnails
The thumbnail selection frame (see page 113)
indicates the currently selected thumbnail.
To move the thumbnail selection frame
Turn the MENU knob, or press the arrow buttons.
To skip quickly through thumbnails (Skip
Scroll function)
See page 120 for more information about operations
in thumbnail screens.
1
2
In the screens like clip thumbnail screen
or expand thumbnail screen, display the
Thumbnail Menu.
Select Skip Scroll, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
A small popup window appears on the
scrollbar to indicate the position of the
currently selected thumbnail within the set of
all thumbnails.
Expand
007/235
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
Skip Scroll
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
CLIP
&quot;Seashore&quot;
DUR
007/235
0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
DUR 0:00:00:01
CLIP
&quot;Seashore&quot;
DUR
0:00:00:01
1) Expand thumbnail screen
To select multiple thumbnails
Move the selection frame to the first thumbnail
that you want to select. Then, with the SHIFT
button held down, Turn the MENU knob, or press
the right-arrow button.
To cancel the multiple selection, move the
selection frame without the SHIFT button held
down.
Clip:&quot;Navigating sibling relati...&quot;
018/036
TC 00:29:19:23
TC 00:29:38:25
TC 00:29:50:04
TC 00:30:25:11
TC 00:30:40:13
TC 01:01:28:25
TC 00:09:43:14
TC 00:24:24:29
TC 00:24:46:22
TC 00:25:42:08
TC 00:25:49:07
TC 00:24:34:27
DATE&amp;TIME
30 NOV 2005 14:14
DUR
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
When you have a large number of thumbnails,
like in expand thumbnail screen, you can use the
Skip Scroll function to skip through them quickly.
DUR 0:00:00:01
0:23:22:26
Searching with thumbnails
By using the thumbnails that appear in the various
thumbnail screens, you can easily cue up and play
clips and sub clips.
Using thumbnails to find clips
The clip thumbnail screen displays thumbnails of
all clips recorded on the disc. You can use this
screen to cue up the selected clip and to carry out
playback (see page 124).
Thumbnail Operations
121
See “Selecting thumbnails” (page 121) for more
information.
Using the expand function to find scenes
The expand function allows you to divide a
selected clip into equally sized blocks, and to
display thumbnails of the first frame in each
block. This is a quick and efficient way to review
the selected clip and search for target scenes. You
can specify 12, 144, or 1728 divisions.
Using the chapter function to find scenes
Chapters are the sections between the shot marks,
Rec Start marks, and other essence marks.
Rec Start essence marks are set automatically at
the start of recording, but shot marks can be set at
any scene during recording or playback.
The chapter function allows you to display
thumbnails of the chapters in a clip.
See “Recording essence marks” (page 88) for more
information.
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
The “S” mark appears on the thumbnails of
clips with chapters set.
Note
The maximum number of blocks may be other than 1728
when the recorded duration of the clip is short. In this
case, the frame interval of expanded thumbnails is fixed
at 1 frame. This allows you to view expanded thumbnails
at equal intervals.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
2
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of the clip that contains the
scene you want to find.
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button.
The selected clip is divided into 12 blocks,
and a list appears in the expand thumbnail
screen (see page 115) with the first frame of
each block displayed as a thumbnail.
3
Select the thumbnail that you want to
expand further.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 up to twice, as
required.
Note
Thumbnails cannot be further expanded when they
already have the minimum duration (1 frame).
To return to the previous expansion level
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button with the
SHIFT button held down.
To display the expand thumbnail screen of the
previous or next clip
With the expand thumbnail screen still active,
press the PREV button or the NEXT button.
122
2
Thumbnail Operations
Press the HOLD/CHAPTER button.
The chapter thumbnail screen (see page 115)
appears, with thumbnails of the frames where
chapters are set.
The “S1”, “S2”, and “RS” marks on the
thumbnails indicate frames where Shot
Mark1, Shot Mark2, and Rec Start essence
marks are set.
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of a clip with chapters set.
To delete the shot mark at a chapter position
You can delete the shot mark (Shot Mark0 to Shot
Mark9) at the chapter position in the chapter
thumbnail screen. (Rec Start essence marks
cannot be deleted.)
1
In the chapter thumbnail screen, select
the thumbnail for the frame whose shot
mark you want to delete.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Delete Essence Mark.
A message appears asking if you are sure that
you want to delete the shot mark.
4
THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK
button with the SHIFT button held
down.
Select OK to delete the mark, or Cancel
to cancel the deletion, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The Select Essence Mark screen appears.
The names of essence marks that are not
recorded on the disc are displayed in gray.
To adjust the position of shot marks at chapter
positions
You can use the chapter thumbnail screen to
adjust the position of shot marks (Shot Mark0 to
Shot Mark9) at chapter positions. (The positions
of Rec Start essence marks cannot be adjusted.)
1
In the chapter thumbnail screen, select
the thumbnail of the shot mark whose
position you want to adjust.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Move Essence Mark.
Select Essence Mark
Shot Mark1
Shot Mark2
Rec Start
Cut
Others
If planning metadata with user-defined
essence mark has been loaded
You can select user-defined essence marks
(see page 141).
The Move Essence Mark screen is displayed.
4
Use the PLAY/PAUSE button or F
REV/F FWD buttons to display the
frame you want.
You can also perform jog playback by
turning the MENU knob.
5
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To display the chapter thumbnail screen of the
previous or next clip with chapters
With the chapter thumbnail screen still active,
press the PREV button or the NEXT button.
The unit searches in the reverse or forward
direction for the next clip with chapters,
beginning with the previous or next clip.
Using essence marks to find scenes
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip playback screen or the clip
thumbnail screen, press the
2
Select the essence mark that you want,
and then press the SET/S.SEL button or
the MENU knob.
The essence mark thumbnail screen (see
page 116) displays a list of frames where the
selected essence mark is set.
To switch directly to the Rec Start essence mark
thumbnail screen
Before starting, set FIND MODE in the
ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE
menu to “R.ST”.
When the Rec Start essence mark thumbnail
screen is displayed, each press of the
THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK button
switches between that screen and the clip
playback screen (Resume function). This setting
allows you to use the THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE
MARK button as a shortcut to Rec Start essence
mark thumbnail screen, which is convenient for
checking start points in clip recorded with the
Clip Continuous Rec function.
To return to the clip thumbnail screen from the
Rec Start essence mark thumbnail screen, press
the RESET/RETURN button.
Thumbnail Operations
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
You can perform playback and searches in
this screen.
123
In the clip playback screen, the PREV and NEXT
buttons jump to the previous or next recording
start points.
Playing the scene you have found
After finding a clip with one of the methods
explained in the previous section, “Searching
with thumbnails” (page 121), you can cue up and
play the clip that you have found.
To search for a thumbnail position and
cue it up
See page 120 for more information about GUI screen
operations.
1
Select the thumbnail that you want to
cue up.
Clip:C0010
010/041
OK
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
TC 00:23:00:25
TC 00:23:40:07
TC 00:24:45:11
TC 00:25:06:14
TC 00:25:49:23
TC 00:26:22:10
TC 00:27:19:04
TC 00:27:51:09
TC 00:28:22:02
TC 00:23:34:18
TC 00:23:54:22
TC 00:28:06:09
DATE&amp;TIME
2
30 NOV 2005 13:40
DUR
0:00:04:14
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
To play clips with the SET/S.SEL button
In the Disc Menu, set Settings &gt;SET Key on
Thumbnail to “Cue up &amp; Play”. Play begins from
the selected frame when you press the SET/S.SEL
button, in the same way as when you press the
PLAY/PAUSE button.
To search for a thumbnail position and
play from there
Selecting clips by type (Filter
Clips function)
You can select clips of a certain type from among
all of the clips on a disc (Filter Clips function).
For example, you can do the following.
• Select clips in a certain video format from a disc
that contains clips in different video formats.
• Select clips that have been set “NG” as a clip
flag, and delete all of those clips in one
operation.
• Select only clips that have been recorded on the
basis of a specified planning metadata entry,
and transfer those clips to an external device
using the Direct FTP function.
To filter clips
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
Display the clip thumbnail screen.
2
If you want to select clips by video
format, select the thumbnails of clips in
that format.
3
Display the Thumbnail menu.
4
Select “Filter Clips”, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The Filter Clips screen appears.
See page 120 for more information about GUI screen
operations.
1
Select the thumbnail that you want to
play.
2
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
5
124
Thumbnail Operations
Select the clip filtering condition.
Item name
Clip Flag: OK
Clip Flag: NG
Clip Flag:
KP(KEEP)
Clip Flag: none
Current Planning
Metadata
AV Format of
Selected Clip
6
Filtering condition
Clip flag set in the clip
(OK/NG/KP(KEEP)/
none)
Clips that have been
recorded according to the
instructions in the
currently loaded planning
metadata
Video format of the
selected clips
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
A filter thumbnail screen appears, showing
only clips that meet the specified condition.
The filtering condition appears at the lower
left of the screen.
If you want to filter the clips again with
a different filtering condition (to
narrow down the filtering results),
repeat steps 2 to 6. (The command name
selected in step 4 changes to Filter
Clips(Narrowing).)
To play selected clips continuously
Register all of the filtered clips in an
automatically generated clip list, and play the clip
list.
1
Display the Thumbnail Menu in the
filter thumbnail screen.
2
Select “Copy to Clip List”, and then
press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
A clip list thumbnail screen appears, showing
filtered clips that have been registered in the
clip list.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The screen changes to the clip playback
screen, and playback starts.
Operations on filtering results
You can use the Thumbnail Menu in the filter
thumbnail screen to perform the following
operations.
Item name
Clip Information
Lock or Delete All
Filtered Clips &gt;Lock
All Filtered Clips
Lock or Delete All
Filtered Clips
&gt;Unlock All Filtered
Clips
Lock or Delete All
Filtered Clips &gt;Delete
All Filtered Clips
Filter
Clips(Narrowing)
Copy to Clip List
Upload Clips via
Direct FTP
Function
Select the information to
be displayed at the bottom
of the thumbnails.
Lock all of the filtered
clips.
Unlock all of the filtered
clips.
Delete all of the filtered
clips.
Narrow down the filtering
results.
Copy all of the filtered
clips to a new clip list.
Transfer all of the filtered
clips to an external device
via a network.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
7
3
To display clip filtering conditions as Title2 titles
For clip lists created with the Copy to Clip List
command, you can display the clip filtering
conditions as Title2 titles.
When Settings &gt;Display Title in the Disc Menu is
set to “On: Title2 {title2}”, the clip filtering
conditions are displayed automatically in screens
such as the Load Clip List screen.
Thumbnail Operations
125
Selecting the information
displayed on thumbnails
You can select the information to be displayed at
the bottom of the thumbnails in thumbnail
screens.
To select a clip index picture while
viewing the video
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of the clip whose index
picture you want to change.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Select Index Picture.
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
Display the Thumbnail Menu in the clip
thumbnail screen.
2
Select Clip Information.
Select Index screen appears.
A window appears in which you can select
the information to display.
Select Index:&quot;Navigating sibling relati...&quot;
018/036
Thumbnail Menu
Clip Information
Return to Upper Menu
Date
Time Code
Duration
Sequence Number
TCR 01:09:16:13
OK
Cancel
You can play and search with this screen.
4
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
3
Select the items that you want to
display.
Return to Upper Menu: Returns to the
Thumbnail Menu
Date: Date and time of creation, or date and
time of the more recent modification
Time Code: Timecode of first frame
Duration: Playback time
Sequence Number: Thumbnail sequence
number
The selected information will appear at the
bottom of the thumbnails when you display a
thumbnail screen.
Changing clip index pictures
The clip thumbnail screen displays thumbnails as
index pictures for clips. Normally the index
picture is the first frame in a clip, but you can set
any frame in the clip as the index picture.
Note
You can only change index pictures from the clip
thumbnail screen. The thumbnails shown in the clip list
thumbnail screen, the expand thumbnail screen, and the
chapter thumbnail screen cannot be changed.
126
Thumbnail Operations
Use the PLAY/PAUSE button or F
REV/F FWD buttons to display the
frame you want.
You can also perform a jog operation by
turning the MENU knob.
5
Press the up-arrow button to select OK,
and then press the SET/S.SEL button or
the MENU knob.
To select index pictures by using the
expand and chapter functions
After using the expand function (see page 122) or
chapter function (see page 122) to find a frame,
you can set that frame as the index picture of the
clip.
The following example explains how to do so
from the expand thumbnail screen.
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the expand thumbnail screen, select
the thumbnail to set as the index
picture.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
TC/DUR: Timecode of the first frame/
Recording time
Created: Date and time of creation
Modified: Date and time of most recent
modification
Rec Device: Name of device that created clip
(product number)
Select Set Index Picture.
A message appears asking you to confirm
that you want to set the current frame as the
index picture.
Expand
TC 00:01:35:17
TC 00:01:38:00
TC 00:01:37:11
TC 00:01:37:24
TC 00:01:38:08
TC 00:01:38:22
TC 00:01:38:19
TC 00:01:40:02
TC 00:01:40:16
TC 00:01:39:06
CLIP
4
001/012
Set Index Picture
TC 00:01:36:14
Tene
OK
Cancel
DUR
TC 00:01:36:27
1) Titles can be displayed in European languages
when the area of use (see page 43) is set to
“NTSC AREA” or “PAL AREA”.
To scroll hidden parts of the string into
view
When a B or b mark is displayed for an item,
you can press the left or right arrow button to
scroll the display by one character for each
press.
The up and down arrow buttons scroll the
beginning and end of the string into view.
0:00:00:13
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
After pressing the RESET/RETURN button
to return to the clip thumbnail screen, check
to make sure that the newly selected frame is
displayed as the index picture.
To display the properties of the previous
or the next clip
Press the PREV button or the NEXT button.
Checking clip properties
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu in the clip
thumbnail screen.
Select Clip Properties.
The Clip Properties screen appears.
To edit clip information
You can edit the name, 1) title 1, and title 2 of a
clip by using a software keyboard.
1) The NAMING FORM item on the FILE NAMING
page of the OPERATION menu must be set to FREE
(see page 169).
Notes
Clip No.: Clip number/total number of clips
Name: Clip name 1)
Title1: Title 1
Title2: Title 2 1)
AV Format: Recording format
Frame Rate: The frame rate from the time
when the clip was shot. For clips shot
using Slow &amp; Quick Motion, PB/
Capture, where PB is the playback frame
rate and Capture is the shooting frame
rate.
• The only characters that can be entered are the
alphanumeric characters and symbols that appear on
the software keyboard, and characters in the fonts
supported by this version of the unit’s firmware.
Japanese kanji cannot be entered.
• Names and titles must be within the specified character
length limits.
• Some symbols cannot be used in clip names. The keys
for those symbols are disabled when you are editing a
clip name.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
To return to the clip thumbnail screen
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
You can check clip properties such as the title,
timecode, duration, date and time of creation, and
date and time of the more recent modification.
See page 120 for more information about GUI
screen operations.
1
In the Clip Properties screen, turn the
MENU knob to select the item you want
to edit (Name, Title1 1), or Title2).
1) Only ASCII characters can be used for Title1.
Thumbnail Operations
127
2
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
An input screen appears for the selected item.
(A keyboard appears that corresponds to the
font selected with Disc Menu item Settings
&gt;Select Font if the area of use setting is
NTSC AREA or PAL AREA. A Japanese
keyboard appears if the area of use setting is
NTSC(J)AREA.)
3
Edit the string in the edit box.
To enter characters
Use the arrow buttons or turn the MENU
knob to select a key, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Functions of special keys
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Key
&lt;, ,
,
Back Space
CapsLock
FShift
4
Function
Move the cursor one character
forward or back.
Move the cursor to Home or
End position.
Deletes the character in front
of the cursor.
Turns the Shift key on
permanently (until pressed
again), and enables input of
capital letters and symbols.
Enables input of capital
letters and symbols. Turns off
after entry of one character.
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
You return to the Clip Properties screen, and
the results of the editing are reflected in the
clip information.
To enter text using a USB keyboard or USB
mouse
You can connect a Windows USB keyboard or a
Windows USB mouse to the USB connector (see
page 29) 1), and use them together with the
software keyboard to enter text.
Connect a Japanese keyboard if the area of use
has been set to NTSC(J)AREA. 2)
128
Thumbnail Operations
Connect a keyboard that corresponds to the font
selected with Disc Menu item Settings &gt;Select
Font if the area of use has been set to NTSC
AREA or PAL AREA.
1) Some USB keyboards or USB mice may not be
recognized. In this case, the message “Unknown
USB” appears.
2) Only ASCII characters can be entered from a Japanese
keyboard.
To change the display language (font) for clip
names, clip list names, and title2 clip titles:
Select one of the following languages (fonts)
with the Disc menu item Settings &gt;Select
Font.
• European Alphabet: The keyboard
language can be selected with the Disc
Menu item Settings &gt;USB Keyboard
Language (see following section).
• Korean: The Korean keyboard is selected
automatically. You can enter Hangul
characters if you have connected a Korean
USB keyboard.
• Simplified Chinese: The keyboard layout is
identical to that of the English [United
States] keyboard. Only ASCII characters
can be entered.
• Traditional Chinese: The keyboard layout
is identical to that of the English [United
States] keyboard. Only ASCII characters
can be entered.
To change the keyboard language: In the Disc
Menu, select Settings &gt;Select USB
Keyboard Language and then select the
desired keyboard from among the following.
• English [United Kingdom]
• English [United States]
• French [France]
• German [Germany]
• Italian [Italy]
• Polish (Programmers) [Poland]
• Russian [Russia]
• Spanish [Spain]
See “List of Supported USB Keyboards” (page 278)
for the characters that can be entered on the various
language keyboards.
Note
The keyboard language cannot be changed in the
following cases.
• When the area of use is set to NTSC(J)AREA.
• When the area of use is set to NTSC AREA or PAL
AREA, and the Disc Menu item Settings &gt;Select Font
is set to Korean, Simplified Chinese, or Traditional
Chinese.
The keyboard icon on the software keyboard is
highlighted when a USB keyboard has been
recognized and enabled for use with this unit, and
the mouse icon is highlighted and a mouse pointer
appears when a USB mouse has been enabled.
Notes
• Use the proper keyboard for the area of use. Some
characters may not be entered correctly if you use a
keyboard designed for use in another area.
• It is not possible to enter Japanese, even on a Japanese
keyboard.
Function
When the cursor is in an edit box:
Move the cursor to the start or end.
When “OK” or “Cancel” has the
focus: Moves the focus between
“OK” and “Cancel”.
Delete
Deletes the character after the cursor.
Shift + T, Selects the string before or after the
Shift + t cursor.
Ctrl + C,
Ctrl + C: Copies the selected string.
X, V, A, Z Ctrl + X: Cuts the selected string.
Ctrl + V: Pastes a copied or cut string.
Ctrl + A: Selects the entire string.
Ctrl + Z: Undoes the immediately
preceding operation.
Enter
When the cursor is in an edit box:
Moves the focus to “OK”.
When “OK” or “Cancel” has the
focus: Exits the software keyboard.
Esc
When the cursor is in an edit box,
moves the focus to “Cancel”.
Tab
Moves the focus between “OK” and
“Cancel”.
USB mouse functions
You can use the mouse to move the cursor on the
software keyboard. You can also left click on a
key to enter the character for that key.
To change the speed of the mouse pointer: In
the Disc Menu, select Settings &gt;Select
Mouse Pointer Speed and then select the
desired speed. Adjust according to the
selected mouse.
To exit the software keyboard from a USB
keyboard
1
With the cursor in an edit box, press the
Enter key to move the focus to “OK”.
2
Do one of the following.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
USB keyboard special functions keys
In addition to the special function keys of the
software keyboard, you can use the following
special function keys on a USB keyboard.
Key
R, r
To confirm the edit and then exit the
software keyboard: While “OK” is
selected, press the Enter key.
To discard the edit and then exit the
software keyboard: On the USB
keyboard, press the r key or the Tab key
to move to “Cancel”, and then press the
Enter key.
To continue editing: Press any key except
the Enter key, the Esc key, and the Tab
key.
Thumbnail Operations
129
Setting clip flags
You can set three types of clip flags (OK/NG/KP
(KEEP)) during recording or playback. Setting
these flags in each clip that you record makes it
easy for editors and other colleagues to find and
select the clips they need.
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of the clip where you want to
set a flag.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select “Set Clip Flag”.
The clip flag setting screen appears.
Thumbnail Menu
Notes
• Locked clips are deleted along with other clips when a
disc is formatted.
• Clips cannot be locked or unlocked when the Write
Inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled
position.
To lock clips
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnails of the clips that you want to
lock.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Lock/Unlock Clip.
4
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
Set Clip Flag
Return to Upper Menu
OK
NG
KP (KEEP)
none
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
4
Select the clip flag that you want to set
(OK/NG/KP (KEEP)).
A clip flag icon (see page 114) appears for
clips that have clip flags set.
To clear clip flags
Carry out steps 1 to 3, selecting a clip that has a
flag set, and then select “none” in step 4.
You can also use switches to set and clear clip flags.
For details, see “Setting clip flags with switches”
(page 89).
A lock icon (see page 114) appears on the
thumbnail of the locked clips.
In step 1, you can also perform a shortcut
operation by pressing the STOP button with the
SHIFT button held down.
To lock all clips
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Lock or Delete All Clips, and then
select Lock All Clips.
A message appears asking you to confirm
locking all clips.
3
Locking (write-protecting) clips
In a clip thumbnail screen, you can lock the
selected clips so that they cannot be deleted or
altered.
Locking prevents the following operations on
clips.
• Deletion
• Renaming by FTP
• Changing the index picture
• Adding and deleting shot marks
• Setting and clearing clip flags
130
Thumbnail Operations
Select OK to lock all clips or Cancel to
cancel it, and then press the SET/S.SEL
button or the MENU knob.
To unlock a specific clip
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of the clip that you want to
unlock.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Lock/Unlock Clip.
A message appears asking you to confirm the
unlocking.
Clip List:E0001
TC 00:00:00:00
TC 00:00:04:14
00:00:12:04
UnlockTCClip
4
TC 00:00:20:13
OK
TC 00:00:28:08
TC 00:00:35:15
TC 00:00:46:08
TC 00:00:59:16
TC 00:00:53:22
Cancel
TC 00:01:06:18
TC 00:01:13:11
28 JUL 2006 19:55
TOTAL DUR
Select Delete Clip.
A window appears asking you to confirm the
deletion. The window displays thumbnails of
four frames from the target clip (the first
frame, two intermediate frames, and the last
frame), along with the name, title 1, date of
creation, and duration of the clip.
One of the following messages also appears,
depending on whether the clip is referenced
in a clip list.
When the clip is not referenced in a clip
list: “Delete Clip”
When the clip is referenced in a clip list:
“Delete Clip &amp; Clip List” (All clip lists
that reference the target clip are deleted
along with the clip.)
002/013
C0004
Unlock this Clip?
DATE&amp;TIME
3
TC 00:01:17:27
00:01:31:16
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
In step 1, you can also perform a shortcut
operation by pressing the STOP button with the
SHIFT button held down.
To unlock all clips
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Lock or Delete All Clips, and then
select Unlock All Clips.
3
4
Select OK to execute the unlock, or
Cancel to cancel it, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Deleting clips
You can delete clips while checking their
contents.
Notes
• Clips cannot be deleted when the Write Inhibit tab of
the disc is set to the recording disabled position.
• Locked clips cannot be deleted.
• If a deletion target clips is referenced by clip lists on
the disc, all of those clip lists are deleted as well.
• If a deletion target clip is referenced in the current clip
list, only those referencing sub clips are deleted at the
same time as the deletion target clip.
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the
thumbnail of the clip that you want to
delete.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The selected clip is deleted, and you return to
the clip thumbnail screen.
In step 1, you can also perform a shortcut
operation by pressing the RESET/RETURN
button with the SHIFT button held down.
To delete all clips
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Lock or Delete All Clips, and then
select Delete All Clips.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
A message appears asking you to confirm
that you want to unlock all clips.
A message appears asking you to confirm
that you want to delete all clips.
3
Select OK to execute the deletion, or
Cancel to cancel it, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Note
Locked clips cannot be deleted.
Thumbnail Operations
131
Scene Selection (Clip
List Editing)
Clip lists
You can use the scene selection function to select
clips from the clips saved on a disc and create a
cut edit list called a “clip list”.
Clip lists have numbers beginning with E, for
example E0001. Up to 99 clip lists can be saved
on a disc.
What is scene selection?
Sub clips (clips in clip lists)
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Scene selection is a function which allows you to
select material (clips) from the material recorded
on a disc and perform cut editing. You can do this
by operating on this unit only.
• Scene selection is a convenient way to perform
cut editing in the field and in other offline
situations.
• In scene selection you create a clip list (editing
data). Since the material itself is not affected,
you can repeat this any number of times.
• You can play back the edit list created by scene
selection on this unit.
• In scene selection you can add whole clips or
add parts of a clip. You can add scenes using
chapters, change the playback sequence, and
amend or delete In and Out points. All of these
operations can be carried out easily on this unit.
• Clip lists (editing data) created with the scene
selection function can be used on XPRI and
other full-feature nonlinear editing systems.
Clips
Material recorded with this unit is managed in
units called clips. A clip contains the material
from a recording start point to a recording end
point.
Clips have numbers beginning with C, for
example C0001.
Recording
start point
of clip 2
Clip 1
(C0001)
Clip 2
(C0002)
Recording
end point
of clip 2
Clip 3
(C0003)
Clip 4
(C0004)
You can also assign titles to your clips and use the
titles to manage them, instead of the clip numbers.
For more information, see “Assigning user-defined
clip titles automatically” (page 98).
132
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)
Clips (or parts of clips) that have been added to a
clip list are called “sub clips”. Sub clips are
virtual editing data that specify ranges in the
original clips. You can use them without
modifying the original data.
The following figure illustrates the relation
between clips and sub clips.
Clips on disc
Clip 1
(C0001)
Clip list
(E0001)
Clip 2
(C0002)
Clip 3
(C0003)
Clip 4
(C0004)
Sub clip 1 Sub clip 2 Sub clip 3
In the above example, the whole of clip 2 has been
added as sub clip 1, and the whole of clip 4 has
been added as sub clip 2.
Sub clip 3 is part of clip 3. Therefore, when clip
list E0001 is played back, clip 4 is played after
clip 2, and then the part of clip 3 shown in gray
color is played.
Clip list editing (current clip list)
To edit a clip list, you need to load the clip list
from the disc into the unit’s internal memory.
The clip list which is currently loaded into the
unit memory is called the “current clip list”.
The current clip list is always the target of sub clip
creation and editing. Clip list playback also uses
the current clip list.
After creating and editing a clip list, you need to
save it to disc.
Unit memory
1
Current clip list can be edited
t Clip list
playback and
thumbnail
display
(adding, deleting, and
reordering sub clips)
SAVE m MLOAD
•
•
•
•
Disc
C0001 (Clip 1)
C0002 (Clip 2)
C0003 (Clip 3)
:
:
Add sub clips: Use the Add Sub Clips
command to add the clips you want to
use to a clip list. You can add up to
300 sub clips to one clip list.This
operation can be carried out in the
following thumbnail screens.
E0001 (Clip list 1)
E0002 (Clip list 2)
E0003 (Clip list 3)
:
:
E0099 (Clip list 99)
2
Clip list playback
Clips and clip lists are saved together on a disc.
To play a clip list, insert a disc into the unit, load
the clip list that you want to play, and press the
PLAY/PAUSE button.
Clips are played according to the data in the clip
list.
3
The following table lists the steps in the creation
and editing of clip lists with the scene selection
function. To create a clip list, you always need to
carry out the steps inside the heavy lines. Other
steps can be carried out as required.
4
Change the sub clip order: Use the
Move Sub Clips command to change
the order of sub clips in a clip list.
Delete sub clips: Use the Delete Sub
Clips command to delete specified
sub clips from a clip list.
Trim sub clips: Use the Trim Sub Clip
command to adjust the In and Out
points of a sub clip. This function can
also be used to adjust the overall
duration of the clip list.
Set the start timecode: Use the Set
Start Time Code command to set the
timecode at the start of a clip list.
Play the clip list: Use the PLAY/
PAUSE button and other playback
controls to play the current clip list
and check its contents.
Save the clip list: Use the Save Clip List
or Save Clip List as… command to
save the newly created clip list to the
disc.
To reedit clip lists on the disc
Use the Load Clip List command to load the clip
lists you want to edit, and perform the steps 2 to
4 in the previous section.
You can also delete clip lists on the disc.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Creating and editing clip lists
Clip thumbnail screen
Expand thumbnail screen
Chapter thumbnail screen
Clip list thumbnail screen
For details, see “Managing clip lists” (page 138).
Note
Clip lists can be created and edited even when the Write
Inhibit tab of the disc is set to recording disabled.
However, if you need to save the clip list, set Write
Inhibit tab to enable recording before you create or edit
the clip list.
To add sub clips
You can add sub clips to clip lists from with the
clip thumbnail screen or the clip list thumbnail
screen. However, you must use the clip list
thumbnail screen to edit clip lists.
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)
133
Adding sub clips from the clip thumbnail screen
The following procedure explains operations in
the clip thumbnail screen. You can proceed in the
same way in the expand thumbnail screen and the
chapter thumbnail screen. Expanded blocks are
added as sub clips in the expand thumbnail
screen, and chapters are added as sub clips in the
chapter thumbnail screen.
Press the RESET/RETURN button.
This returns you to the clip thumbnail screen.
7
Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required to add
more clips.
8
Save the clip list (see page 137).
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the
clip that you want to add as a sub clip
(multiple selections possible).
In step 1, you can hold down the SHIFT button
when you press the SET/S.SEL button. This is a
shortcut that displays the Add Sub Clip screen
immediately. You can also save the clip list
immediately in step 5 by executing the Save Clip
List command in the Disc Menu.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
Adding sub clips from the clip list thumbnail
screen
3
Select Add Sub Clips, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
The Add Sub Clip screen appears.
The clip(s) selected in step 1 appear in the
upper part of this screen, and the clip list
appears in the lower Scene Selection
window. The I cursor in the Scene Selection
window indicates the location where the
currently selected sub clip(s) will be inserted.
1
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
2
Select Add Sub Clips, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Add Sub Clip
TC 00:30:25:11
TC 00:30:40:13
002
TC 01:01:28:25
The Clip List (Add) screen appears.
Clip List (Add)
017/035
TC 00:09:43:14
TC 00:24:24:29
Scene Selection
TC 00:24:34:27
TC 00:24:46:22
TOTAL
017/035
TC 00:30:40:13
TC 01:01:28:25
TC 00:09:43:14
TC 00:24:24:29
TC 00:24:34:27
TC 00:24:46:22
TC 00:24:56:24
TOTAL
00:13:48:24
TC 00:24:56:24
00:13:48:24
3
To display the total duration after
addition of the selected clip
Press the SHIFT button.
5
002
TC 00:30:25:11
Scene Selection
4
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
To check the addition results
Move the cursor.
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)
Select the sub clips that you want to add
from the upper part of the screen (the
part where 8 thumbnails are displayed,
multiple selections possible).
To select from expanded thumbnails
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to
display the expand thumbnail screen.
In the Scene Selection window, move
the I cursor to the location where you
want to insert the clip. (The existing
thumbnails arrange themselves to the
left and right of the I cursor.)
The selected clip is inserted as a subclip and
a “+” mark appears on the thumbnail in the
Scene Selection window.
134
6
To select from chapter thumbnails
Press the HOLD/CHAPTER button to
display the chapter thumbnail screen.
4
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The thumbnail selection is confirmed, and an
I cursor appears at the bottom of the Clip List
(Add) screen (in the Scene Selection
window). The I cursor indicates the location
where the currently selected sub clips will be
inserted.
To display the total duration after
addition of the selected clips
Press the SHIFT button.
5
6
In the Scene Selection window, move
the I cursor to the location where you
want to insert the clip. (The existing
thumbnails arrange themselves to the
left and right of the I cursor.)
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The sub clips are added at the I cursor
position, and you return to the clip list
thumbnail screen.
You can check the results of the addition in
that screen.
7
8
Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required to add
more clips.
4
Move the I cursor to the point where
you want to move the selected
thumbnails.
5
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The sub clips are moved to the I cursor
position.
6
Repeat steps 1 to 5 as required.
7
Save the clip list (see page 137).
To adjust the In and Out points of sub
clips (trim)
Proceed as follows to define the range of a scene
by changing the positions of the In and Out
points.
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
In the clip list thumbnail screen, select a
thumbnail.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Trim Sub Clip, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Save the clip list (see page 137).
In step 1, you can also perform a shortcut
operation by pressing the SET/S.SEL button with
the SHIFT button held down.
The Clip List (Trim) screen appears.
To reorder sub clips
001/034
Clip List (Trim)
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
Total
DUR
00:13:48:24
00:00:21:27
IN
01:17:33:08
1
OUT
In the clip list thumbnail screen, select
the thumbnails of the sub clips that you
want to move (multiple selections
possible).
01:17:55:05
TCR 01:17:33:08
CLIP
019/035
OK
Cancel
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
Like the clip playback screen, this screen
allows you to play and search all clips on the
disc.
3
Select Move Sub Clips, and then press
the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
To display a list of In and Out point
operations that you can perform
Press the MENU button.
The Clip List (Move) screen appears.
006
Clip List (Move)
001/034
TC 00:00:00:00
TC 00:00:21:27
TC 00:04:06:00
TC 00:04:13:14
TC 00:04:35:12
TC 00:04:57:10
TC 00:05:19:08
TC 00:05:41:05
TC 00:06:03:03
TC 00:06:25:00
TC 00:06:46:27
DATE&amp;TIME
08 AUG 2007 11:50
TOTAL DUR
TC 00:07:08:25
00:13:48:24
4
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
1
When you find the point that you want
to make the start point, select “IN” and
then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The timecode of the new In point appears in
the timecode display, and the Total (total
duration) and DUR (clip duration) displays
are updated.
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)
135
5
When you find the point that you want
to make the end point, select “OUT”
and then press the SET/S.SEL button or
the MENU knob.
The timecode of the new Out point appears in
the timecode display, and the Total (total
duration) and DUR (clip duration) displays
are updated.
To cue up the In point or Out point
Display the Thumbnail Menu, select Cue up
Inpoint or Cue up Outpoint, and then press
the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To cancel the In point or Out point setting
Display the Thumbnail Menu, select Reset
Inpoint or Reset Outpoint, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The In point or Out point setting returns to
the previous value.
Note
When this unit is in single clip playback mode (see
page 85), only the selected sub clip can be played.
See page 120 for more information about GUI screen
operations.
To play using GUI screens
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, select
the thumbnail of the sub clip where you
want to start play.
To start play from the start of the clip list
Select the thumbnail of the first sub clip.
2
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
To play using the clip list playback screen
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
6
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
1
Display the clip list playback screen.
7
Repeat steps 1 to 6 as required.
2
8
Save the clip list (see page 137).
Press the PREV button or the NEXT
button to display the sub clip that you
want to play.
To start play from the first sub clip
Press the SHIFT + PREV buttons to move to
the start of the clip list.
To delete sub clips
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
Select the clips to delete in the clip list
thumbnail screen (multiple selections
possible).
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
3
Select Delete Sub Clips, and then press
the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
A message appears asking you to confirm the
deletion.
4
136
To play the clip list
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
5
Repeat steps 1 to 4 as required.
6
Save the clip list (see page 137).
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)
3
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
To change the starting timecode of clip
lists
The timecode of clip lists is continuous timecode,
unrelated to the timecode of the original clips. By
default the timecode (LTC) of the start of the clip
list is 00:00:00:00, but it can be set to any value.
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display
the Thumbnail Menu.
2
Select Set Start Time Code, and then
press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The Set Start Time Code screen appears.
A list of clip lists appears.
Set Start Time Code
Disc Menu
TC
Save Clip List
Name &amp; Date/Sorted by Name
DVD og BI... 08 AUG2007 11:50
E0003
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0004
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0005
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0006
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0007
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0095
18 MAY2006 10:25
E0098
13 JUN2006 13:43
22 : 34 . 56 : 17
H
MIN
SEC
Preset TC 00:00:00:00
FRM
OK
Cancel
Display Select
3
Press the left- or right-arrow button to
select the digit that you want to change.
4
Turn the MENU knob to change the
value of the digit.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required.
To switch the information displayed for
clip lists
Press the right-arrow button.
With each press, the display changes in the
order: “Name &amp; Date” t “Name &amp; Title”
t “Name &amp; Short Date” t...
To sort clip lists
Select one of the following orders by
selecting Settings &gt; Sort Clip List By... in the
Disc Menu.
Name(A-Z): Sort in ascending order by clip
list name.
Date(Newest First): Sort by date and time of
clip list creation, newest first.
To reset the timecode to 00:00:00:00
Select Reset to Zero in the Thumbnail Menu,
and then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
To recall the preset timecode
Select Recall Preset TC in the Thumbnail
Menu, and then press the SET/S.SEL button
or the MENU knob.
6
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
OK is selected.
7
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob again.
8
Save the clip list (see page 137).
To save clip lists
To save under a specified name
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display
the Disc Menu.
2
Select Save Clip List as..., and then
press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
3
Select the desired clip list name, and
then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
To save under the same name
The following procedure saves the current clip
list under its current name (the name that appears
in the clip list thumbnail screen).
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display
the Disc Menu (see page 119).
2
Select Save Clip List, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
To preset the frequently used timecode
Select Save Preset TC in the Thumbnail
Menu, and then press the SET/S.SEL button
or the MENU knob.
The timecode set in steps 3 and 4 is saved as
a preset value.
The clip list is saved. However, Save Clip
List as... is executed when the name
displayed in the clip list thumbnail screen is
“no name”.
Note
If you press the EJECT button before saving a new or
edited clip list, a message appears asking if you want to
discard your changes and continue. Follow the
instructions in the message to continue or cancel the
operation.
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)
137
3
Managing clip lists
The current clip list returns to the unnamed
state “(no name)”.
To load clip lists
The following procedure loads a clip list stored on
the disc into the unit’s internal memory as the
current clip list.
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
2
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display
the Disc Menu.
Select Load Clip List, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To delete clip lists
The following procedure deletes a clip list from
the disc.
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display
the Disc Menu.
2
Select Delete Clip List, and then press
the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
A list of clip lists stored on the disc appears.
A list of clip lists appears.
Disc Menu
Load Clip List
Name &amp; Date/Sorted by Name
DVD og BI... 08 AUG2007 11:50
E0003
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0004
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0005
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0006
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0007
03 AUG2007 17:51
E0095
18 MAY2006 10:25
E0098
13 JUN2006 13:43
3
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Select the desired clip list, and then
press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
Delete Clip List
E0001
Delete this Clip List?
The name of the clip list selected here
appears in the clip list thumbnail screen.
When you execute the Save Clip List
command in the Disc Menu, the clip list will
be saved under that name.
To create a new clip list
Select New File and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
OK
Cancel
4
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To sort clip lists
To clear clip lists
The following procedure clears the current clip
list from the unit’s internal memory.
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display
the Disc Menu.
2
Select Clear Clip List, and then press
the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
A message appears asking you to confirm
that you want to clear the clip list.
138
Select the clip list that you want to
delete, and then press the SET/S.SEL
button or the MENU knob.
A message appears asking you to confirm the
deletion.
Display Select
3
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Scene Selection (Clip List Editing)
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
In the clip list thumbnail screen, display
the Disc Menu.
2
Select Settings, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
3
Select Sort Clip List by..., and then
press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
4
Select one of the following sort methods,
and then press the SET/S.SEL button or
the MENU knob.
Name(A-Z): Sort in ascending order by clip
list name.
Date(Newest First): Sort by date and time of
clip list creation, newest first.
Clip lists will be displayed in the specified
order the next time that you carry out an
operation such as loading a clip list.
Disc Operations
Checking disc properties
See page 120 for more information about GUI screen
operations.
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Disc Properties, and then press
the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
The Disc Properties screen appears.
1) This can be specified with the supplied PDZ-1
Proxy Browsing Software Version 2.7 contained
on the CD-ROM (XDCAM Application
Software).
2) Titles can be displayed in European languages
when the area of use (see page 43) is set to
“NTSC AREA” or “PAL AREA”.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
User Disc ID: User disc ID 1), 2)
Title1: Title 1 1)
Title2: Title 2 1), 2)
Total DUR: Total recording time
Remain: Remaining recording time
Rewrite: Number of times rewritten
To scroll hidden parts of the string into
view
When a B or b mark is displayed for an item,
you can press the left or right arrow button to
scroll the display by one character for each
press.
The up and down arrow buttons scroll the
beginning and end of the string into view.
To return to the previous screen
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
Disc Operations
139
To edit disc information
Disc Menu
You can edit the user disc ID, title 1 1), and title 2
by using a software keyboard.
Load Planning Metadata/
1) Only ASCII characters can be used for the title 1.
See “To edit clip information” (page 127) for
information about operations.
To load planning metadata files
See page 120 for more information about GUI
screen operations.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Select “Load Planning Metadata/Select
Drive”, and then press the SET/S.SEL
button or the MENU knob.
Disc Menu
Select the media where your planning
metadata file is stored, and then press
the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
A list of the planning metadata files stored on
the media appears.
Disc Operations
04 AUG 10:39
Select the desired planning metadata
file, and then press the SET/S.SEL
button or the MENU knob.
The selected planning metadata file is loaded
into the unit’s memory, and the Planning
Metadata Properties screen appears.
Load Planning Metadata/Select Drive
3
140
4
A media selection screen appears.
Return to Upper Menu
Professional Disc
USB Flash Drive
04 AUG 10:39
Notes
For details, see “To set clip names by using planning
metadata” (page 103).
2
04 AUG 10:39
• If MEMORY REC on the MEMORY REC page
of the OPERATION menu is set to ENABL, it is
not possible to load planning data from a USB
flash drive that is write inhibited. Set MEMORY
REC to DSABL before starting, or enable
recording on the USB flash drive and connect it
again.
• If the message “USB M. INHI” appears when you
connect a USB flash drive, disconnect the drive,
enable recording on the USB flash drive, and then
connect it again.
• Depending on the type of USB flash drive, data
may not appear if you attempt to read planning
metadata immediately after connecting the USB
flash drive. In this case, connect the USB flash
drive again, or exit the menu and try again. The
data will then appear correctly.
Planning metadata is a file that contains metadata
about the clips to be shot and recorded.
To use planning metadata, you will need to save a
file in advance in the specified location of a
media, and insert the media into this unit.
Display the Disc Menu.
04 AUG 10:39
Name &amp;Date/ Sorted by Name
Using planning metadata
1
Professional Disc
PM_001_sample
PM_002_sample
PM_003_sample
PM_004_sample
5
Check the information that appears,
and press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
By connecting this unit and a computer over a
network, you can read planning metadata using a
web browser. For details, see “To use a web browser
to load planning metadata” (page 144).
To sort planning metadata
You can sort planning metadata by operating in
the same way as in “To sort clip lists” (page 138).
However, in step 3, select “Sort Planning
Metadata by...”.
The planning metadata will be displayed in the
specified order the next time you load planning
metadata.
To check planning metadata properties
You can check the properties of the planning
metadata that is loaded into this unit’s memory,
including the date and time of creation and the
clip titles.
See page 120 for more information about GUI
screen operations.
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select “Planning Metadata Properties”,
and then press the SET/S.SEL button or
the MENU knob.
The Planning Metadata Properties screen
appears.
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select “Clear Planning Metadata”, and
then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
A message appears asking you to confirm
that you want to clear the planning metadata.
3
Select “OK”, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The planning metadata is cleared from this
unit’s memory.
To switch the title display in the
viewfinder
When planning metadata is loaded into this unit,
you can select the format of the title to display in
the viewfinder.
See page 120 for more information about GUI
screen operations.
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select “Settings”, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
3
Select “Planning Clip Name in Clip
Info. Area”, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
See page 34 for more information about the
Clip Info. Area.
4
1) This can be set as the clip name (see page 103).
To scroll hidden parts of the string into
view
When a B or b mark is displayed for an item,
you can press the left or right arrow button to
scroll the display by one character for each
press.
The up and down arrow buttons scroll the
beginning and end of the string into view.
To return to the previous screen
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
To clear planning metadata
See page 120 for more information about GUI
screen operations.
Select one of the following, and then
press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
Off: Do not display a title.
ASCII Clip Name: Display the ASCII
format title (see page 103).
Clip Name: Display the UTF-8 format title
(see page 103).
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
File Name: Planning metadata file name
Assign ID: Assign ID
Created: Date and time of creation
Modified: Date and time of most recent
modification
Modified by: Name of person who modified
the file
Title1: Title 1 1)
Title2: Title 2
Material Gp: Number of clips recorded with
this planning metadata
1
Checking user-defined essence
marks
You can display the names of user-defined Shot
Mark0 to Shot Mark9 essence marks in planning
metadata (UTF-8 format, maximum 32 bytes).
1
Display the Planning Metadata
Properties screen (see page 141) for the
planning metadata loaded into this unit.
Disc Operations
141
The , button is enabled when the planning
metadata contains user-defined essence
marks (see page 104).
2
Press ,, and then turn the SET/S.SEL
button or the MENU knob.
The User Defined Essence Marks screen
appears.
Formatting discs
See page 120 for more information about GUI screen
operations.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Format Disc, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
A message appears asking you to confirm the
format.
Format Disc
All Clips, Clip Lists and
Non-AV Data (General Files)
will be Deleted.
Format OK?
To disable the Format Disc command
To prevent inadvertent disc formatting, resulting
in the loss of recorded data, you can disable the
Format Disc command.
See page 120 for more information about GUI
screen operations.
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select “Settings”, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
3
Select “Setting Format Disc”, and then
press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
4
Select “Disable”, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Displaying disc and clip
properties in a web browser
By connecting this unit and a computer over a
network, you can display disc properties and clip
properties in a web browser installed on the
computer (Web Thumbnail function).
The Clip Properties page also allows you to
download high-resolution clip data, proxy AV
data, and metadata from this unit and to save that
data on your computer. The Planning Metadata
page allows you to load planning metadata
directly into the memory of this unit. 1)
OK
Cancel
3
1) To load planning metadata, you must install the
CBKZ-UPG01 Software Upgrade Key.
Select OK, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Recommended browsers
To cancel the format
Select Cancel, and then press the SET/S.SEL
button or the MENU knob.
The following browsers are recommended.
• Internet Explorer 7 1)
• Internet Explorer 8 1)
To continue by formatting another disc
Exchange the disc, select OK, and then press
the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
To exit the formatting screen
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob with Exit selected.
1) This function may not work properly in 32-bit
versions of Internet Explorer if you are using a 64-bit
version of Microsoft Windows. You should use a 64bit version of Internet Explorer with 64-bit versions of
Windows.
To display the unit’s XDCAM web pages
1
142
Disc Operations
Connect this unit and a computer to a
network (see page 247).
2
3
Start the browser on the computer, and
enter “http://IP_address_of_this_unit/”
in the address bar of the browser, and
then press the Enter key.
To display disc properties
Click “Disc Properties” in the Disc menu.
The disc properties of this unit appear in the
Disc Properties page.
For example, if the IP address of this unit is
“192.168.001.010”, enter “http://
192.168.1.10/”.
If the connection succeeds, you will be
prompted to enter a user name and a
password.
See “Checking disc properties” (page 139) for
more information about the various properties.
Enter your user name and password,
and then press the Enter key.
The user name and password are set to the
following when the unit is shipped from the
factory.
• User name: admin
• Password: Model name (“pdw-f800” or
“pdw-700”)
After the user name and password are
verified, an XDCAM web page appears.
To display disc and clip properties
Insert a disc into this unit, and put this
unit into the following state.
• Recording, playback, search and other disc
operations: Stopped
• THUMBNAIL button: Off
• Disc access by Lock or Delete All Clips,
Format Disc, and so on in the Disc Menu:
Stopped
• Setting of CACHE/INTVAL REC on the
REC FUNCTION page of the
OPERATION menu: OFF
• FAM or FTP connection for file operations:
Disconnected, or logged out
• Recording of video from external devices:
Disabled
• Connections between this unit and a
computer by the Live Logging function:
Disconnected
• Setting of LIVE LOGGING on the REC
FUNCTION page of the OPERATION
menu: Values other than VIEW (OFF or
LIVE)
• MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF
2
Display the XDCAM web pages in the
browser of your computer (see the
previous section).
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
1
To display clip thumbnails
Click “Thumbnails” in the Disc menu.
A page of thumbnails of clips on the disc
appears. Each thumbnail page displays up to
12 thumbnails.
Like the thumbnails in the unit’s GUI screens
(see page 114), the thumbnails display
several information items, including index
picture changed marks, S marks, clip flag
icons, and lock icons.
When multiple pages exist, you can switch
pages by clicking &lt;&lt; (back five pages), &lt;
(back one page), &gt; (forward one page), or &gt;&gt;
(forward five pages).
To display clip properties
In the Thumbnails page, select a clip by
clicking its thumbnail.
The properties of that clip appear in the Clip
Properties page.
Disc Operations
143
See “Checking clip properties” (page 127) for
more information about the various properties.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
To download high-resolution clip data
(HIGH resolution file), proxy AV data
(LOW resolution file), or metadata (Clip
NRT metadata), click the FTP Download or
HTTP Download button to the right of the
item that you want. Then click “Save” in the
dialog that appears and specify the save
destination.
The specified data is downloaded to the
specified location in your computer.
FTP download limitations
The following limitations apply to FTP
download operations. They do not apply to
HTTP download operations.
• The characters that can be used in the
names of clip-related data files are singlebyte letters, numbers, and symbols.
However, the following symbols cannot be
used.
&quot;#*/:&lt;&gt;?\|
• If you click “Cancel” in the download
dialog, or if the download is cancelled in
some other way with the browser still
connected to the unit by FTP, click “Back
to Thumbnails” to return to the thumbnails
screen, or exit the web browser.
• Recording, playback, search and other disc
operations: Stopped
• THUMBNAIL button: Off
• Disc access by Lock or Delete All Clips,
Format Disc, and so on in the Disc Menu:
Stopped
• Setting of CACHE/INTVAL REC on the
REC FUNCTION page of the
OPERATION menu: OFF
• FAM or FTP connection for file operations:
Disconnected, or logged out
• Recording of video from external devices:
Disabled
• Connections between this unit and a
computer by the Live Logging function:
Disconnected
• Setting of LIVE LOGGING on the REC
FUNCTION page of the OPERATION
menu: Values other than VIEW (OFF or
LIVE)
• MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF
2
To display the Planning Metadata page,
proceed in the same way as described in “To
display the unit’s XDCAM web pages” (page
142). However, in step 2 enter “http://
IP_address_of_this_unit/mobile.htm” in the
address bar.
3
Click “Browse...” to open the “Choose
File” dialog.
4
Select the planning metadata file
(XML) you saved on your computer,
and then click “Open”.
To use a web browser to load planning
metadata
1
144
Insert a disc into this unit, and put this
unit into the following state.
Disc Operations
Display the Planning Metadata page of
the XDCAM web pages in the web
browser of your computer.
The path of the selected file appears in the
“File to send” field.
5
Click “Execute”.
The planning metadata is loaded into the
unit’s memory and stored in the /General/
Sony/Planning directory on the disc.
“OK” appears in the “Status” field when the
transfer is complete.
Note
To load planning metadata, you must install the
CBKZ-UPG01 Software Upgrade Key.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Disc Operations
145
Transferring clips (Direct FTP function)
You can transfer clips (MXF files) between this
unit and external devices over a network. This
unit has an Direct FTP function, which allows
you to connect to any XDCAM device or
computer with an FTP server function and
transfer files with a few simple operations in the
GUI screen.
The following table lists the types of file transfers
that this unit can execute.
Transfer
direction
Upload
Transfer target
One or more clips
Multiple clips with clip
list
Part of one clip
Download One clip
Function
put
partial put
get
Note
File transfers with this function are limited to clips (highresolution data) and clip list files. To transfer files of
other types (proxy AV data, files in the General and User
Data directories, and so on), operate after establishing a
FAM or FTP connection (see page 239).
Upload clip (put)
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Download clip (get)
PDW-HD1500
Network
Laptop computer a)
Local host (this unit)
a) The following software requirements must be satisfied.
• An FTP server function must be available.
• In the case of Windows, Microsoft Window IIS (Internet Information
Service) Version 7.0 or higher.
• In the case of Macintosh, Mac OS X Version 10.5.6 or higher.
146
Transferring clips (Direct FTP function)
Material server
Remote host
Preparations for clip transfers
Check the following points.
• This unit and the target transfer device
(XDCAM device or computer) must be
supplied with stable power and must be
connected to a network.
• The settings under the NETWORK 1 page of
the MAINTENANCE menu must be set to
values that allow network connections.
• The ETHERNET/USB item on the POWER
SAVE page of the OPERATION menu must be
set to ENABL.
• For XDCAM devices that support UPnP
(universal plug and play), the UPnP function
must be enabled (the setting may vary).
3
Select Upload Clips via Direct FTP, and
then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
The Select Transfer Type screen of the
Upload Clips via Direct FTP command
appears.
4
Select the type of clip transfer.
Selected Clips: Clips selected in step 1.
All Clips &amp; ClipList: All clips and clip lists
on the disc.
To enable the UPnP function
The UPnP (universal plug and play) function
allows devices to be easily connected to
networks. The following XDCAM devices
support UPnP.
• PDW-F1600
• PDW-HD1500
• PDW-HR1
• PDW-F800
• PDW-700
To transfer while preserving the UMID of
the transfer source clips
Check the “UMID Unchanged” option.
Note
To reconnect to a remote host
The Reconnect button is enabled if the most
recent operation successfully established a
connection to a remote host.
You can select “Reconnect” and press the
SET/S.SEL button or MENU knob to
reconnect to that host. The host is selected
automatically and the screen changes directly
to the Connecting Status screen (see step 9 in
the procedure).
To enable the UPnP function on this unit, set
UPnP on the NETWORK SETTING page of the
MAINTENANCE menu to ENABLE, and then
power the unit off and on again.
For the settings on other XDCAM devices, refer to
the operation manuals supplied with the devices.
Uploading clips
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
If the remote host is a computer, clips are
transferred with the UMID unchanged regardless of
this setting.
Note
To upload entire clips
Proceed as follows to upload selected clips or all
clips and clip lists on the disc.
See page 120 for more information about thumbnail
screen operations.
1
The Reconnect button is not enabled if the most
recent operation failed to connect to a remote host.
5
Select ,, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The Select Remote Host screen appears.
In the clip thumbnail screen, select the
clip to upload (multiple selections
possible).
To upload all clips and clip lists on the disc,
start from step 2.
2
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
Transferring clips (Direct FTP function)
147
Item
Host Name
IP Address
Setting
Host name
IP address a)
Subnet mask
Setting that specifies
whether to acquire the IP
address automatically from
a DHCP server
Enabled: Acquire
automatically
Disabled: Do not acquire
automatically
Address Status Method used to set IP
address
Manual Set: Manually
DHCP: DHCP function
AutoIP: Auto IP addressing
function
Undefined: Nothing
specified
Default Gateway Default gateway
Subnet Mask
DHCP
6
Select the remote host (the target device
to which you want to transfer the clips).
You can register up to four remote hosts.
Remote Host 1 to 3: Register these in the
settings screen.
Remote Host 4(UPnP): A remote host that
supports UPnP (universal plug and play)
is detected and registered automatically
(see “To enable the UPnP function”
(page 147)).
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
To check remote hosts discovered by the
UPnP function
Select “Hosts Discovered via UPnP”, and
then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob. (If the UPnP function of this
unit is disabled, a confirmation screen
appears prompting you to enable it. Select
“OK” and then press the SET/S.SEL button
or the MENU knob. The UPnP function will
be enabled when you power the unit off and
then on again.)
The Select Host Discovered via UPnP screen
appears. (Some time may be required before
the search for remote hosts finishes.)
Select the name of a remote host from the list,
and press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob. A network settings screen
appears (see step 7). If you establish a
connection with the selected remote host, the
network settings are saved in Remote Host 4.
From the next time that you select “Remote
Host 4(UPnP)”, the remote host that you
select here will be connected.
To check the network settings of this unit
Select “Network Config”, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob. The
following network settings appear.
a) An IP address determined by a DHCP server
appears instantly in this field.
Select OK and press the SET/S.SEL button
or the MENU knob to return to the previous
screen.
7
Select ,, and then press the SET/
S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
A network settings screen for the remote host
appears.
Item
Host Name
Port
148
Transferring clips (Direct FTP function)
Setting
Host name or IP address. (If
this is a host name, a DNS
server must be available on the
connected network.
Specification of an IP address
is recommended.)
Port used by the FTP server
(normally “21”).
Item
Setting
Device Type The type of the remote host
• If the remote host is an
XDCAM device, select the
model name or “Other
XDCAM model” (if the model
name is not in the list) from the
9
Select “Connect”, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
The settings are saved and the Connecting
Status screen appears.
list of model names. a)
• If the remote host is a
computer, select “Others(PC
Server)” from the list of model
names.
Description
Path
Password
a) If an XDCAM device is selected as the Device
Type, then the User Name and Password are set
automatically to the default, and you do not need
to make the Port and Path settings. Simply
selecting the Host Name (or as appropriate the
Description) is enough to fulfill the requirements
for connection.
If the User Name or Password of the device
that you want to connect to changes, set them
here.
8
Set the various items.
To select an item
Turn the MENU knob to move the cursor,
and then push the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
A software keyboard appears so that you can
enter a setting.
The following table lists the various stages
that appear in the connection status screen
and describes the corresponding processing.
Item
DNS Name
Resolving
Description
When host was specified by a
host name instead of an IP
address, the unit is querying a
DNS server for the host’s IP
address.
ping - echo
The unit has issued a ping
back
(communications established)
command and is waiting for a
response.
Open Remote The unit is connecting to the
Host
remote host over the specified
port.
FTP Login
The unit is logging in to the
remote host with specified
user name and password.
Change
When a path was specified,
Directory
the unit is changing to the
specified directory.
The status indicated beside each item lights
in yellow during processing for that item, and
lights in green when the processing finishes.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
User Name
Comment about the remote
host. (UTF-8 encoding, up to
127 bytes. This setting has no
effect on the connection.)
The setting that you make here
appears as the remote host
name in the Select Remote
Host screen (see step 5 of the
procedure).
If the remote host is a
computer, path to the transfer
destination directory. (This is
not needed if the remote host is
an XDCAM device.)
User name for FTP login. (If
the remote host is an XDCAM
device, the default is “admin”.)
Password for FTP login. (If the
remote host is an XDCAM
device, the default is the model
name, such as “pdw-700”.)
If an error occurs
The status indicator changes to red.
Correct the condition that caused the error
and repeat the operation.
If you cannot connect
Check the following points.
• Make sure that this unit and the remote host
are correctly connected to the network.
• If the remote host is an XDCAM device,
make sure that it is not displaying a GUI
screen.
• If the remote host is an XDCAM device,
make sure that a disc is inserted.
Transferring clips (Direct FTP function)
149
When the connection is complete (the
indicators of all items have turned green), the
Upload Clips via Direct FTP screen appears.
• Set the ETHERNET/USB item on the
POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION
menu to DSABL.
To check the connection on the remote
host side
If the remote host is an XDCAM device,
check that the “NETWORK!” has appeared
in the display or other status display location.
When several files are to be transferred, the entire
transfer task is cancelled when the first transfer
failure occurs. Subsequent clips are not transferred.
Note
When the transfer of all files has finished, the
Uploading Result Report screen appears.
Select “OK”, and then press the SET/S.SEL
button or the MENU knob. This returns you
to the clip thumbnail screen.
The progress bars show the progress of the
transfer. If multiple clips are being
transferred, a count of the clips that have
been successfully transferred appears.
If the remote host is an XDCAM device, the
disc usage also appears. (It does not appear if
the remote host is a computer).
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
If a file of the same name already exists at
the transfer destination
The file name is changed so that it does not
conflict with the file at the destination.
The name of the file on the transfer source
(this unit) appears in the “Original” field, and
the name of the file on the transfer
destination appears in the “Copy” field. 1)
1) If the clip name is a standard name, it is changed
to the unused clip name with the smallest
number. (Example: If names C0001 to C0020
are in use, the name “C0021”.)
If the clip name is a user-defined name, a serial
number is appended to the clip name. (Example:
If the name is “EveningNews”,
“EveningNews(1)”.)
To cancel the processing
Do one of the following.
• Select “Abort: Immediately”, and then
press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
• If you are transferring multiple clips, select
“Abort: After this clip”, and then press the
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
(The transfer of subsequent clips will be
cancelled after transfer of the current clip
finishes.)
150
Transferring clips (Direct FTP function)
To upload part of a clip
You can select part of a clip in the expand
thumbnail screen or the chapter thumbnail screen
and upload that part.
Expand thumbnail screen: The clip is divided
arbitrarily into parts of equal length,
regardless of content. Use this method if you
do not need to specify the transfer range
precisely.
Chapter thumbnail screen: Use this method if
you want to transfer a specific range. (By
setting essence marks at the start point and
end point of the transfer range, you can
specify the range with a precision of one
frame.)
1
In the clip thumbnail screen, select a
clip and press the EXPAND or
CHAPTER button.
The expand thumbnail screen or the chapter
thumbnail screen appears.
2
Select the transfer range.
To select multiple thumbnails
While holding the SHIFT key down, turn the
MENU knob, or press the B/IN or b/OUT
button.
• When more 301 or more clips are stored on a
remote host, the denominator indicating the clip
total at the upper right is shown as “- - -”, and the
names of the 301st and following clips are not
displayed.
• File names containing other than ASCII
characters (kanji and so on) are not displayed.
The duration of the transfer range appears in
the lower right of the screen.
Note
When the selected range (duration) in the expand
thumbnail screen is less than two seconds, it is
expanded automatically to two seconds.
3
Execute step 2 to 9 of the previous
section “To upload entire clips”.
4
The download starts.
When the download finishes, the
Downloading Result Report screen appears.
Select “OK”, and then press the SET/S.SEL
button or the MENU knob. This returns you
to the clip thumbnail screen.
Downloading clips
Proceed as follows to download clips from a
remote host (such as other XDCAM device
devices or a material server).
See page 120 for information about thumbnail screen
operations.
1
Display the Disc Menu.
2
Select Download Clip via Direct FTP,
and then press the SET/S.SEL button or
the MENU knob.
Copying clips directly between
XDCAM devices
In the field or another environment where the
devices are not connected to a network, you can
copy (upload) clips between XDCAM devices by
connecting them directly. The example in the
following procedure shows how to copy a clip
from this unit to a PDW-HD1500. Insert discs
into both units and proceed as follows.
1
Connect this unit and the PDWHD1500 by a network cable.
The cable can be either a cross cable or a
straight cable.
3
Execute steps 6 to 9 of “To upload entire
clips” (page 147).
If the connection succeeds, the Select Clip to
Download screen appears.
This unit
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
The Select Remote Host screen of the
Download Clip via Direct FTP command
appears.
Select a clip to download, and then press
the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob.
Network cable
(not supplied)
PDW-HD1500
Notes
2
Set up the two units as follows.
• If the remote host is a computer, only the MXF
files in the specified directory appear.
Transferring clips (Direct FTP function)
151
8
Settings on this unit
Item
POWER SAVE
page of
OPERATION
menu
NETWORK
SETTING page of
MAINTENANCE
menu
Setting
ETHERNET/ ENABLE
USB
DHCP
UPnP
ENABLE
ENABLE
3
4
Setting
ENABLE
ENABLE
Check that the IP addresses of the two
units have been set as follows by the
Auto-IP function.
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
IP address of this unit
Setting
169.254.XX
X.
XXX
(X: any
number)
IP address of the PDW-HD1500
Item
Item M51 in the
MAINTENANCE
menu: IP ADDRESS
PRESET
Setting
169.254.XXX.XXX
(X: any number)
5
In the clip list thumbnail screen of this
unit, select the clip to copy (upload).
6
Display the Thumbnail Menu.
7
Select Upload Clips via Direct FTP, and
then press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
With , selected, the Select Transfer Type
screen of the Upload Clips via Direct FTP
command appears.
152
9
Select “Hosts Discovered via UPnP”,
and then press the SET/S.SEL button or
the MENU knob.
The detected connection destination device
(the PDW-HD1500) appears in the Select
Host Discovered via UPnP screen.
MENU knob.
Detailed information about the connection
destination device (the PDW-HD1500)
appears.
11 With “Connect” selected, press the
Power both units off and on again, and
wait for about three minutes.
Item
NETWORK
IP
SETTING page of ADDRESS
MAINTENANCE
menu
The Select Remote Host screen appears.
10 Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
Settings on the PDW-HD1500
Item
Item M50 in the
MAINTENANCE menu: DHCP
Item M59 in the
MAINTENANCE menu: UPnP
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the
MENU knob.
Transferring clips (Direct FTP function)
SET/S.SEL button or the MENU knob.
Transfer of the clip begins as soon as the
connection is established.
During transfer of the clip, “NETWORK!”
appears in the display of the connection
destination device (the PDW-HD1500).
When transfer of the clip completes, an
Uploading Result Report appears on the
screen.
Press the SET/S.SEL button or the MENU
knob to return to the clip thumbnail screen.
12 Check the copied clip in the clip
thumbnail screen of the connection
destination device (the PDW-HD1500).
Shortcut List
You can access many functions from the
keyboard, without displaying a menu (shortcut
operations).
Shortcuts are available for the following
functions. The plus sign (+) indicates that one
button is held down while another is pressed, for
example “SHIFT + RESET/RETURN”.
Note
The same shortcut may access different functions,
depending on the screen that is active when it is
executed.
Function
Clip List Thumbnail (display clip list thumbnail screen)
Expand Thumbnail (display expand thumbnail screen)
Chapter Thumbnail (display chapter thumbnail screen)
Essence Mark Thumbnail (display essence mark thumbnail
screen)
Add Sub Clip (add sub clip)
Delete Clip (delete clip)
Lock/Unlock Clip (lock or unlock clip)
Set Inpoint (set In point)
Set Outpoint (set Out point)
Cue up Inpoint (cue up In point)
Cue up Outpoint (cue up Out point)
Reset Inpoint (reset In point)
Reset Outpoint (reset Out point)
Cue up (cue up)
Operation
SUB CLIP/DISC MENU
DISP SEL/EXPAND
HOLD/CHAPTER
SHIFT + THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK
Cue up &amp; Play (cue up and play)
PLAY/PAUSE b)
SHIFT + down-arrow or F FWD
SHIFT + up-arrow or F REV
SHIFT + NEXT
SHIFT + PREV
SHIFT + right-arrow or SHIFT + left-arrow
THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK
Chapter 5 Operations in GUI Screens
Shortcut List
153
Page Down (switch to next page)
Page Up (switch to previous page)
Go To End (go to the last item)
Go To Top (go to the first item)
Select Multi Clip (select multiple clips)
Exit (exit the current thumbnail screen)
SHIFT + SET/S.SEL
SHIFT + RESET/RETURN
SHIFT + STOP
Left-arrow + SET/S.SEL
Right-arrow + SET/S.SEL
Left-arrow + PREV or left-arrow + NEXT
Right-arrow + PREV or right-arrow + NEXT
Left-arrow + RESET/RETURN
Right-arrow + RESET/RETURN
SET/S.SEL a)
a) If Settings &gt;SET Key on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu
is set to “Cue up &amp; Play”, then play starts as soon as
cueup is ready.
b) If Settings &gt;SET Key on Thumbnail in the Disc Menu
is set to “Cue up &amp; Play”, then pressing the SET/
S.SEL button has the same effect.
Chapter
6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Menu Organization
[B] OPERATION menu
OPERATION
The following chart shows the organization of
menus in this camcorder.
TOP MENU
USER [A]
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE
ALL
OPERATION [B]
PAINT [C]
MAINTENANCE [D]
FILE [E]
DIAGNOSIS [F]
[A] USER menu
USER
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
154
Menu Organization
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
SUPERIMPOSE
LCD
REC FUNCTION
ASSIGNABLE SW
VF DISP 1
VF DISP 2
' ! ' LED
MARKER 1
GAIN SW
VF SETTING
AUTO IRIS
SHOT ID
SHOT DISP
SET STATUS
LENS FILE
USER FILE
a) PDW-F800 only
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
SUPERIMPOSE
LCD
REC FUNCTION
ASSIGNABLE SW
POWER SAVE
VF DISP 1
VF DISP 2
VF DISP 3
' ! ' LED
' ! ' LED STD a)
MARKER 1
MARKER 2
FOCUS ASSIST a)
GAIN SW
VF SETTING
AUTO IRIS
SHOT ID
SHOT DISP
SET STATUS
WHITE SETTING
OFFSET WHT
SHT ENABLE
LENS FILE
FORMAT
SOURCE SEL
UMID SET
CLIP TITLE
FILE NAMING
SELECT FUNCTION
LENS CONFIG
MEMORY REC
[C] PAINT menu
PAINT
[E] FILE menu
SW STATUS
WHITE
BLACK/FLARE
GAMMA
BLACK GAMMA
KNEE a)
KNEE 1 b)
KNEE 2 b)
DETAIL 1
DETAIL 2
SD DETAIL
SKIN DETAIL
MTX LINEAR
MTX MULTI
V MODULATION
SATURATION
NOISE SUPPRESS
SCENE FILE
FILE
USER FILE
USER FILE 2
ALL FILE
SCENE FILE
REFERENCE
USER GAMMA a)
LENS FILE 1
LENS FILE 2
LENS FILE 3
MEMORY STICK
a) PDW-F800 only
[F] DIAGNOSIS menu
DIAGNOSIS
a) PDW-700 only
b) PDW-F800 only
HOURS METER
TIME/DATE
ROM VERSION 1
ROM VERSION 2
ROM VERSION 3
DEV STATUS
OPTION
[D] MAINTENANCE menu
MAINTENANCE
TOP menu and top-level menus
The TOP menu appears when, with no menu
displayed, you hold down the MENU knob and
set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON. The TOP
menu contains only top-level menus.
&lt;TOP MENU&gt;
USER
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE
ALL
OPERATION
PAINT
MAINTENANCE
FILE
DIAGNOSIS
When you select a top-level menu, the most
recently shown page of that menu appears. The
CONTENTS page appears when the menu is
selected for the first time.
For details about how to use menus, see page 205.
USER menu
This menu allows you to add any desired page
from the OPERATION, PAINT,
MAINTENANCE, FILE, and DIAGNOSIS
menus to suit your needs. By gathering frequently
used pages on the USER menu beforehand, you
can call up them quickly whenever you need
them.
This menu is normally displayed when the
MENU ON/OFF switch is set to ON.
Menu Organization
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
a) PDW-700 only
b) PDW-F800 only
WHITE SHADING
BLACK SHADING
LEVEL ADJUST
BATTERY 1
BATTERY 2
AUDIO-1
AUDIO-2
AUDIO-3
WRR SETTING
TIMECODE
ESSENCE MARK
CAM CONFIG 1
CAM CONFIG 2
CAM CONFIG 3
PRESET WHITE
WHITE FILTER a)
DCC ADJUST
AUTO IRIS 2
GENLOCK
ND COMP
AUTO SHADING
APR
NETWORK 1
NETWORK 2
WPS
Wi-Fi
UP CONVERTER
SHUTTER SELECT b)
155
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu
This menu allows you to add pages to or delete
pages from the USER menu to suit your needs.
ALL menu
This menu allows you to handle all items in the
OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE,
and DIAGNOSIS menus as if they were in one
menu.
OPERATION menu
This menu contains items for changing settings
according to conditions related to the subject
when the camcorder is being operated.
PAINT menu
This menu contains items for making detailed
image adjustments while using a waveform
monitor to monitor the waveforms output by the
camera. Support of a video engineer is usually
required to use this menu. Although you can also
use an external remote control unit to set the items
on this menu, this menu is effective when using
the camcorder by itself outdoors.
MAINTENANCE menu
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
This menu contains items for making settings for
audio, timecode, essence marks, and battery.
FILE menu
This menu is for saving the adjusted data in the
camcorder memory or in a “Memory Stick”. The
following files can be saved.
User files
User files save the setting items and setting data
of customized USER menus. You can save up to
100 user files in a “Memory Stick”. Once you
save a user file in a “Memory Stick”, you can
easily set the USER menu to your preference by
loading the file.
For details on user files, see “Saving and Recalling
User Files” on page 231.
ALL files
ALL files save the setting data of all of the menus.
You can save up to 100 ALL files in a “Memory
Stick”.
156
Menu Organization
Once a camcorder is set up according to your
preferences and you save an ALL file in a
“Memory Stick”, you can easily set other
camcorders to those settings by loading the data
from the “Memory Stick”.
Note
Device specific data (output levels and shading that
requires adjustment for the specific device) is not saved.
Scene files
In the scene file, the setting values of PAINT
menu items set to shoot a particular scene are
saved. You can save up to five scene files in the
camcorder memory and up to 100 scene files in a
“Memory Stick”. For example, first adjust the
settings to shoot a rehearsal of a particular scene
and then save them as a scene file. Then load that
file before the actual shooting so that you can
quickly recreate setup conditions of the rehearsal.
Reference files
Reference files save the reference values that are
set when STANDARD is executed in the SCENE
FILE page of the PAINT menu. You can save one
reference file in the internal memory of the unit
and one in a “Memory Stick”.
Lens files
Lens files save the setting data used to
compensate for the characteristics of lenses, such
as flare, white shading, and auto iris gain. You
can save up to 32 lens files in the internal memory
of the unit and up to 100 lens files in a “Memory
Stick”.
DIAGNOSIS menu
This menu shows the digital hours meter, the
ROM version, and information about the internal
device status of the camcorder.
Menu List
Tips
• No. indicates the PDW-F800 and PDW-700 page number. “—” indicates that the page does not exist.
• The bold-faced numbers designate the pages that have been registered in the USER menu at the factory.
• The following lists include items and settings that appear only when an option board or separately sold
software is installed.
• The bold-faced settings are the factory default settings.
• The initial value of items with a setting range of –99 to 99 is 0.
• When the setup value in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses ( ), the value is a relative
value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in the manual.
OPERATION menu
No.
Page
01/01 OUTPUT 1
Item
Settings
Description
SDI OUT 1 SELECT
OFF/HDSDI/SDSDI
Selects the output signal from the
SDI OUT 1 connector.
SDI OUT 2 SELECT
OFF/HDSDI/SDSDI
Selects the output signal from the
SDI OUT 2 connector.
SDI OUT 2 SUPER
OFF/ON
Sets the superimposed
information output from the SDI
OUT 2 connector.
TEST OUT SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Selects the output signal from the
TEST OUT connector.
TEST OUT SUPER
OFF/ON
Sets the superimposed
information output from the
TEST OUT connector.
Notes
• Regardless of this setting, text
data is output from this connector
when the setting of TEST OUT
SELECT is Y, R, G, or B. During
the display of text data, you can
hide the text data by switching
this item from ON to OFF. (It is
also hidden in the viewfinder.)
• When TEST OUT SELECT is set
to LCD, the mode selected with
the DISP SEL/EXPAND button
determines whether text is
displayed or hidden.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Note
When R, G, or B is selected, turning
the power of the unit off and on
changes the setting to Y.
157
No.
Page
02/02 OUTPUT 2
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
158
Menu List
Item
Settings
Description
LIVE &amp; PLAY
OFF/ON
For details, see “To display
camera video in the viewfinder
during playback (Live &amp; Play
function)” on page 85.
DOWN CON MODE
(Does not appear when
the FORMAT page item
SYSTEM LINE is set to
1080 and the SYSTEM
FREQUENCY item is
set to 23.9P)
CROP/LETTR/SQEZE Sets the conversion mode for
(LETTR is displayed
down-converted output.
when the LETTER BOX
item on the SELECT
FUNCTION page is set
to “ENABL”.)
WIDE ID
THROU/AUTO
Specifies whether to add wide
picture information to the SD
output signal.
THROU: Output the video
signals without adding wide
picture information.
AUTO: When the DOWN CON
MODE item is set to
SQEZE, add wide picture
information to the output
video signals.
No.
Page
03/03 SUPER
IMPOSE
Item
Settings
Description
SUPER(VFDISP)
OFF/ON
SUPER(MENU)
OFF/ON
SUPER(TC)
OFF/ON
When the SDI OUT 2 SUPER
item or the TEST OUT SUPER
item on the OUTPUT 1 page is
set to ON, turn the output of text
(superimposed) information from
the SDI OUT 2 or TEST OUT
connector on or off for each item.
SUPER(MARKER)
OFF/ON
[F800]
Turns the marker display on or off
in the output from the following
connectors.
• SDI OUT 2 connector (when SDI
OUT 2 SELECT on the OUTPUT
1 page is set to HDSDI, and SDI
OUT 2 SUPER is set to ON)
• TEST OUT connector (when
TEST OUT SUPER on the
OUTPUT 1 page is set to ON)
[700]
When the TEST OUT SUPER
item on the OUTPUT 1 page is
set to ON, turns the marker
display output from the TEST
OUT connector on or off.
[F800]
OFF/ON
SUPER(ZEBRA)
Note
This item does not appear when
Slow &amp; Quick Motion is enabled.
04/04 LCD
LCD COLOR
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the LCD color.
LCD
MARKER&amp;ZEBRA
OFF/ON
Turns the marker and zebra
display in the LCD monitor on or
off.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
When SDI OUT 2 SELECT on
the OUTPUT 1 page is set to
HDSDI, and SDI OUT 2 SUPER
is set to ON, turns the output of
the zebra display on and off in the
output from the SDI OUT 2
connector.
159
No.
Page
05/05 REC
FUNCTION
Item
Settings
Description
[F800]
OFF/ON
For details, see “Shooting with
Slow &amp; Quick Motion” on page
95.
SLOW &amp; QUICK
[F800]
FRAME RATE
1080/23.98P: 1 to 48
1080/25P: 1 to 50
1080/29.97P: 1 to 60
CACHE/INTVAL REC OFF/CACHE/A. INT/
M. INT
CACHE REC TIME
TAKE TOTAL TIME
REC TIME
5SEC/10SEC/15SEC/
20SEC/30SEC/40SEC/
50SEC/1MIN to 85MIN
PRE-LIGHTING
OFF/2SEC/5SEC/
10SEC
NUMBER OF FRAME When SYSTEM LINE is
set to 720 and REC
FORMAT is set to
HD422 50, HD420
HQ, or HD420 SP:
2/6/12
When either SYSTEM
LINE or REC
FORMAT is set to
another setting: 1/3/
6
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
160
For details, see “Starting a shoot
with a few seconds of pre-stored
0-2S/2-4S/4-6S/6-8S/8- picture data (Picture Cache
function)” on page 89 and “Time10S/18-20S/28-30S
lapse video (Interval Rec
5MIN/10MIN/15MIN/
function)” on page 91.
20MIN/30MIN/40MIN/
50MIN/1H/2H/3H/4H/
5H/7H/10H/15H/20H/
30H/40H/50H/70H/
100H
TRIGGER INTERVAL M/1SEC to 10SEC/
15SEC/20SEC/30SEC/
40SEC/50SEC/1MIN to
10MIN/15MIN/20MIN/
30MIN/40MIN/50MIN/
1H/2H/3H/4H/6H/12H/
24H
Menu List
DISC EXCHG CACHE OFF/ON
For details, see “Exchanging
discs while recording (Disc
Exchange Cache function)” on
page 96.
CLIP CONT REC
OFF/ON
For details, see “Recording with
the Clip Continuous Rec
function” on page 97.
LIVE LOGGING
OFF/LIVE/VIEW
For details, see “Using the Live
Logging function” (page 106).
No.
Page
Item
Settings
06/06 ASSIGNABLE ASSIGN SW &lt;1&gt;
SW
ASSIGN SW &lt;2&gt;
Description
For details, see “Assigning
functions to ASSIGN switches” on
page 221.
ASSIGN SW &lt;3&gt;
ASSIGN SW &lt;4&gt;
[F800]
ASSIGN SW &lt;5&gt;
ASSIGN SW &lt;RET&gt;
[700]
COLOR TEMP SW
ZOOM SPEED
0 to 20 to 99
RETURN VIDEO
OFF/ON
07/07 POWER SAVE ETHERNET/USB
08/08 VF DISP 1
10/10 VF DISP 3
DSABL/ENABL
REC AUDIO OUT
EE/SAVE
TEST OUT SAVE
OFF/ON
Wi-Fi
DSABL/ENABL
VF DISP
OFF/ON
VF DISP MODE
1/2/3
DISP EXTENDER
OFF/ON
DISP FILTER
OFF/ON
DISP WHITE
OFF/ON
DISP GAIN
OFF/ON
DISP SHUTTER
OFF/ON
DISP AUDIO
OFF/ON
DISP DISC
OFF/ON
DISP IRIS
OFF/ON
DISP ZOOM
OFF/ON
DISP COLOR TEMP
OFF/ON
DISP BATT REMAIN
INT/VOLT/AUTO
DISP DC IN
OFF/ON
DISP 16:9/4:3 ID
(When the CBKZMD01 is installed)
OFF/ON
DISP WRR RF LVL
OFF/ON
DISP REC FORMAT
OFF/ON
DISP CLIP NO(PB)
OFF/ON
DISP TIMECODE
OFF/ON
DISP ALAC
OFF/ON
DISP CLIP NAME
PLAN/AUTO
DISP SCENE FILE
OFF/ON
LOW LIGHT
OFF/ON
LOW LIGHT LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
VF BATT WARNING
10%/20%
ABSOLUTE VALUE
OFF/ON
For details, see “Setting power
saving functions” on page 224.
For details, see “Selecting the
display items” on page 213.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
09/09 VF DISP 2
DSABL/ENABL
i.LINK(FAM)
Menu List
161
No.
Page
11/11 ‘!’ LED
12/— [F800]
‘!’ LED STD
Item
Settings
Description
GAIN &lt;!&gt;
OFF/ON
SHUTTER &lt;!&gt;
OFF/ON
For details, see “Indicators” on
page 32.
[700]
WHITE PRESET &lt;!&gt;
OFF/ON
[F800]
WHITE BAL &lt;!&gt;
OFF/ON
[F800]
CC 5600K &lt;!&gt;
OFF/ON
ATW RUN &lt;!&gt;
OFF/ON
EXTENDER &lt;!&gt;
OFF/ON
[700]
FILTER &lt;!&gt;
OFF/ON
[F800]
FILTER ND &lt;!&gt;
OFF/ON
[F800]
FILTER CC &lt;!&gt;
OFF/ON
OVERRIDE &lt;!&gt;
OFF/ON
GAIN &lt;!&gt;
0dB/LOW/MID/HIGH
FILTER ND &lt;!&gt;
For details, see “Indicators” on
OFF/ESC/ 1/100 / 1/125 page 32.
/ 1/250 / 1/500 / 1/1000 / The setting of SHUTTER &lt;!&gt;
1/2000 /SLS
varies depending on the
resolution and system frequency.
P/A/B/PA/PB/AB
See page 33 for information about
OFF/ON
the standard settings, and see
OFF/ON
page 66 for information about the
OFF/ON
settings.
1/2/3/4
FILTER CC &lt;!&gt;
A/B/C/D
OVERRIDE &lt;!&gt;
OFF/ON
SHUTTER &lt;!&gt;
WHITE BAL &lt;!&gt;
CC 5600K &lt;!&gt;
ATW RUN &lt;!&gt;
EXTENDER &lt;!&gt;
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
162
Menu List
No.
Page
13/12 MARKER 1
14/13 MARKER 2
Item
Settings
Description
MARKER
OFF/ON
CENTER
OFF/ON
For details, see “Setting the
marker display” on page 215.
CENTER MARK
1/2/3/4
SAFTY ZONE
OFF/ON
SAFTY AREA
80%/90%/92.5%/95%
ASPECT
OFF/ON
ASPECT SELECT
15:9/14:9/13:9/4:3/1.85/
2.35
ASPECT MASK
OFF/ON
ASPECT MASK LVL
0 to 12 to 15
100% MARKER
OFF/ON
USER BOX
OFF/ON
USER BOX WIDTH
3 to 240 to 479
USER BOX HEIGHT
3 to 135 to 269
USER BOX H POS
–477 to 0 to 476
USER BOX V POS
–267 to 0 to 266
CENTER H POS
–480 to 0 to 479
CENTER V POS
–270 to 0 to 269
ASPECT SAFE ZONE OFF/ON
ASPECT SAFE AREA 80%/90%/92.5%/95%
15/— [F800]
FOCUS
ASSIST
FOCUS ASSIST IND
OFF/ON
FOCUS IND POS
BOTTM/LEFT/TOP/
RIGHT
16/14 GAIN SW
GAIN LOW
–6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/
For details, see “Setting gain
6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
values for the GAIN selector
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB positions” on page 220.
GAIN MID
–6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/
6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
GAIN HIGH
–6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/
6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
GAIN TURBO
–6dB/–3dB/0dB/3dB/
6dB/9dB/12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
TURBO SW IND
OFF/ON
SHOCKLESS GAIN
OFF/ON
For details, see “Using the Focus
Assist function” on page 87.
FOCUS AREA MARK OFF/ON
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Menu List
163
No.
Page
17/15 VF SETTING
Item
Settings
Description
ZEBRA
OFF/ON
ZEBRA SELECT
1/2/BOTH
For details, see “Setting the
viewfinder” on page 216.
ZEBRA1 DET LVL
20% to 70% to 107%
ZEBRA1 APT LVL
1% to 10% to 20%
ZEBRA2 DET LVL
52% to 100% to 109%
VF DETAIL LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
VF ASPECT (SD)
AUTO/16:9
(When the REC
FORMAT item is set to
IMX50, IMX40,
IMX30, or DVCAM)
18/16 AUTO IRIS
19/17 SHOT ID
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
164
20/18 SHOT DISP
IRIS OVERRIDE
OFF/ON
IRIS SPEED
(–99 to 99)
CLIP HIGH LIGHT
OFF/ON
IRIS WINDOW
1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR
IRIS WINDOW IND
OFF/ON
IRIS VAR WIDTH
20 to 240 to 479
IRIS VAR HEIGHT
20 to 135 to 269
IRIS VAR H POS
–460 to 0 to 459
IRIS VAR V POS
–250 to 0 to 249
ID-1
Blank/up to 12
characters
ID-2
Blank/up to 12
characters
ID-3
Blank/up to 12
characters
ID-4
Blank/up to 12
characters
SHOT DATE
OFF/ON
SHOT TIME
OFF/ON
SHOT MODEL NAME OFF/ON
SHOT SERIAL NO
OFF/ON
SHOT ID SEL
OFF/ID-1/ID-2/ID-3/
ID-4
SHOT 16:9 CHARA
OFF/ON
For details, see “Changing the
Reference Value for Automatic
Iris Adjustment” on page 70.
For details, see “Setting the shot
ID” on page 217.
For details, see “Recording shot
data superimposed on the color
bars” on page 217.
SHOT BLINK CHARA OFF/ON
21/19 SET STATUS
Menu List
STATUS ABNORMAL OFF/ON
STATUS SYSTEM
OFF/ON
STATUS FUNCTION
OFF/ON
STATUS AUDIO
OFF/ON
For details, see “Displaying the
status confirmation screens” on
page 218.
No.
Page
22/20 WHITE
SETTING
Item
Settings
Description
WHITE SWITCH &lt;B&gt; MEM/ATW
Specifies the operating mode
when the WHITE BAL switch is
set to the B side.
MEM: Auto white balance
ATW: Auto tracing white balance
SHOCKLESS WHITE OFF/1/2/3
Specifies the transition time when
the WHITE BAL switch is
changed to a new setting (1 is
fastest)
ATW HOLD
MEMORY
Selects whether ATW (auto
tracing white balance) settings are
saved in the memory (A or B)
selected by the WHITE BAL
switch, in addition to the
dedicated ATW memory.
OFF: Not saved
ON: Saved
OFF/ON
For details, see “To save white
balance settings obtained by
ATW” on page 65.
1/2/3/4/5
Switches the transition speed of
auto tracing white balance (ATW)
(1 is fastest)
AWB FIXED AREA
OFF/ON
Executes AWB (auto white
balance) at the center of the
screen.
FILTER WHT MEM
OFF/ON
Specifies whether to allocate a
white balance memory slot for
each position number of the
FILTER selector.
23/21 OFFSET WHT OFFSET WHITE &lt;A&gt; OFF/ON
WARM-COOL &lt;A&gt;
WARM-COOL BAL
&lt;A&gt;
For details, see “Specifying an
Displays reference color offset for the auto white balance
setting” on page 227.
temperature
(–99 to 99)
OFFSET WHITE &lt;B&gt; OFF/ON
WARM-COOL &lt;B&gt;
Displays reference color
temperature
WARM-COOL BAL
&lt;B&gt;
(–99 to 99)
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
ATW SPEED
165
No.
Settings
Description
24/22 SHT ENABLE SHUTTER ECS
Page
OFF/ON
SHUTTER SLS
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/32
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/33
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/40
OFF/ON
The items which can be set differ
depending on the setting of the
SYSTEM FREQUENCY item on
the FORMAT page. For details,
see “Setting the Electronic
Shutter” on page 66.
SHUTTER 1/48
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/50
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/60
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/96
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/100
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/120
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/125
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/250
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/500
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/1000
OFF/ON
25/23 LENS FILE
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
166
Menu List
Item
SHUTTER 1/2000
OFF/ON
LENS FILE SELECT
1 to 32
F.ID
Display only
L.ID
Display only
L.MF
Display only
When the recording format is
1080/23.98P and 720/59.94P
(SCAN MODE: 23.9P), more
shutter speeds can be selected and
the SHT ENABLE 2 page appears
to display them.
For details, see “Selecting the
lens file” on page 228.
No.
Page
26/24 FORMAT
Item
Settings
Description
SYSTEM LINE
1080/720
SYSTEM
FREQUENCY
59.9i/29.9P/50i/25P/
23.9P/59.9P/50P
The selectable SYSTEM
FREQUENCY settings differ
depending on the setting of
SYSTEM LINE. For details, see
“Setting the Recording Format”
(page 58).
SCAN MODE
59.9P/23.9P
(Only when SYSTEM
LINE is set to 720, and
SYSTEM
FREQUENCY is set to
59.9P.)
REC FORMAT
HD422 50/HD420 HQ/
HD420 SP/IMX50/
IMX40/IMX30/
DVCAM
(IMX50, IMX40,
IMX30, and DVCAM
are displayed when the
CBKZ-MD01 is
installed.)
ASPECT RATIO (SD) 16:9/4:3
(When the REC
FORMAT item is set to
IMX50, IMX40,
IMX30, or DVCAM)
The selectable settings differ
depending on the setting of REC
FORMAT. For details, see
“Setting the Recording Format”
(page 58).
AU DATA LEN (IMX) 16bit/24bit
(When the REC
FORMAT item is set to
IMX50, IMX40, or
IMX30)
COUNTRY
For details, see “Setting the Area
of Use” on page 43.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
NTSC(J)AREA/NTSC
AREA/PAL AREA
167
No.
Page
27/25 SOURCE SEL
Item
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
168
Menu List
Description
Input mode selection for front
microphone.
REC VIDEO SOURCE CAM/EXT
(When the CBK-HD01
or CBK-SC02 option
board is installed)
For details, see “Recording video
from external devices” (page
105).
EXT VIDEO SOURCE
(When the CBK-HD01
or CBK-SC02 option
board is installed)
28/26 UMID SET
Settings
FRONT MIC SELECT MONO/STREO
(When stereo
microphone is
connected)
VBS/SDSDI/HDSDI
(VBS is displayed when
the CBK-SC02 is
installed. SDSDI and
HDSDI are displayed
when the CBK-HD01 is
installed.)
WIDE MODE(EXT)
AUTO/16:9
(When the CBK-HD01
or CBK-SC02 option
board is installed)
When the input signal is SD,
select the method that determines
whether the signal is treated as a
wide signal.
AUTO: When wide picture
information is detected in the
input signal, treat the signal
as a wide signal and set the
up-converter operating mode
to squeeze mode. Record
wide picture information
when recording SD. When
wide picture information is
not detected, set the upconverter operating mode to
edge crop mode and do not
record wide picture
information.
16:9: Always treat the signal as a
wide signal and set the upconverter operating mode to
squeeze mode. Record wide
picture information when
recording SD.
SETUP REMOVE
0.0%/7.5%
(When the COUNTRY
item is set to
“NTSC(J)AREA” or
“NTSC AREA” and the
CBK-SC02 option
board is installed)
Selects whether to modify the
setup level of input video signals.
7.5%: Remove the setup. (Select
when signals with 7.5%
setup are input.)
0.0%: Do not remove the setup.
(Select when signals without
setup are input.)
ORGANIZATION
COUNTRY CODE
Blank/up to 4 characters For details, see “Setting the
Blank/up to 4 characters UMID data” on page 228.
USER CODE
Blank/up to 4 characters
TIME ZONE
00 to 3F
No.
Page
29/27 CLIP TITLE
Item
Settings
Description
TITLE
DSABL/ENABL
For details, see “Assigning userdefined clip titles automatically”
on page 98.
SELECT PREFIX
EXEC
(When the TITLE item
is set to “ENABL”)
CLEAR NUMERIC
EXEC
(When the TITLE item
is set to “ENABL”)
LOAD PREFIX DATA EXEC
(When the TITLE item
is set to “ENABL”)
TITLE/up to 10
PREFIX
(When the TITLE item characters
is set to “ENABL”)
NUMERIC
00001 to 99999
(When the TITLE item
is set to “ENABL”)
30/28 FILE NAMING NAMING FORM
AUTO NAMING
(When the NAMING
FORM item is set to
“FREE”)
C****/FREE
C****/TITLE/PLAN
For details, see “Assigning userdefined names to clips and clip
lists” on page 101.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Menu List
169
No.
Page
Item
31/29 SELECT
LETTER BOX
FUNCTION
(Does not
appear when the
FORMAT page
item SYSTEM
LINE is set to
1080 and the
SYSTEM
FREQUENCY
item is set to
23.9P)
FOCUS MAG
Settings
Description
DISABLE/ENABLE
Enable the selection of “LETTR”
(LETTER BOX) in the DOWN
CON MODE item on the
OUTPUT 2 page.
Note
Breakup may occur in output
signals and in the video and audio
of this unit for about 5 to 10
seconds immediately after this
setting is changed.
DISABLE/ENABLE
Enable the assignment of the
FOCUS MAG function to the
ASSIGN switches.
Note
Breakup may occur in output
signals and in the video and audio
of this unit for about 5 to 10
seconds immediately after this
setting is changed.
HD t SD PHASE
DELAYED
Display only
Appears when LETTER BOX is
set to “ENABLE”, or when
FOCUS MAG is set to
“ENABLE”.
Note
In these states, the phases of HD
output and SD output from this unit
do not match.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
REF t HD-Y PHASE Display only
DELAYED
Appears when FOCUS MAG is
set to “ENABLE”.
Note
In this state, the phase of HD-Y
output from this unit does not match
the phase of the GENLOCK IN
signal. When multiple PDW-700
units are daisy chained via this unit
(see page 77), inter-system phases
do not match.
32/–
[F800]
LENS CONFIG
IMAGE INVERT
OFF/ON
When the recording format is
1080/23.98P, 1080/25P, or 1080/
29.97P, specifies whether to
cancel the image inversion that
can occur when a cinema lens
converter is mounted.
OFF: Do not cancel.
ON: Cancel.
This page does not appear when
the recording format is other than
1080/23.98P, 1080/25P, or 1080/
29.97P.
170
Menu List
No.
Page
33/30 MEMORY
REC
Item
Settings
Description
MEMORY REC
DSABL/ENABL
For details, see “Recording proxy
data” on page 107.
COPY CURRENT CLP EXEC
COPY ALL CLIPS
EXEC
ABORT COPY
EXEC
DEL ALL MEM CLP
EXEC
FORMAT MEMORY
EXEC
Item
Settings
Description
GAMMA
OFF/ON
Turns the gamma correction on
or off.
BLACK GAMMA
OFF/ON
Turns the black gamma
correction on or off.
MATRIX
OFF/ON
Turns the linear matrix correction
and user-set matrix correction
functions on or off.
KNEE
OFF/ON
Turns the knee correction on or
off.
WHITE CLIP
OFF/ON
Turns the white clipping
correction on or off.
PAINT menu
No.
Page
01/01 SW STATUS
OFF/ON
Turns the detail signal on or off.
OFF/ON
Turns the aperture function on or
off.
FLARE
OFF/ON
Turns the flare function on or off.
TEST SAW
OFF/ON
Selects the test signal.
COLOR TEMP &lt;A&gt;
Displays reference color Sets the color temperature of
temperature.
WHITE A.
C TEMP BAL &lt;A&gt;
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the value more precisely
when the color temperature
adjustment through COLOR
TEMP is not satisfactory.
R GAIN &lt;A&gt;
(–99 to 99)
Only the value of R GAIN is
changed.
B GAIN &lt;A&gt;
(–99 to 99)
Only the value of B GAIN is
changed.
COLOR TEMP &lt;B&gt;
Displays reference color Sets the color temperature of
temperature.
WHITE B.
C TEMP BAL &lt;B&gt;
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the value more precisely
when the color temperature
adjustment through COLOR
TEMP is not satisfactory.
R GAIN &lt;B&gt;
(–99 to 99)
Only the value of R GAIN is
changed.
B GAIN &lt;B&gt;
(–99 to 99)
Only the value of B GAIN is
changed.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
02/02 WHITE
DETAIL
APERTURE
171
No.
Page
03/03 BLACK/
FLARE
Item
Settings
Description
MASTER BLACK
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the master black level.
R BLACK
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the R black level.
[F800]
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the G black level.
G BLACK
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
172
Menu List
B BLACK
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the B black level.
MASTER FLARE
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the flare level of the
master.
R FLARE
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the R flare level.
G FLARE
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the G flare level.
B FLARE
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the B flare level.
FLARE
OFF/ON
Turns the flare correction circuit
on or off.
TEST OUT SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Selects the output signal of TEST
OUT connector.
No.
Page
04/04 GAMMA
Settings
Description
GAMMA
OFF/ON
Turns the gamma correction
function on or off.
STEP GAMMA
0.35 to 0.45 to 0.90
Sets the gamma correction curve
by steps.
MASTER GAMMA
(–99 to 99)
Sets the master gamma
correction curve.
R GAMMA
(–99 to 99)
Sets the R gamma correction
curve.
G GAMMA
(–99 to 99)
Sets the G gamma correction
curve.
B GAMMA
(–99 to 99)
Sets the B gamma correction
curve.
TEST OUT SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Selects the output signal of TEST
OUT connector.
GAMMA TABLE
STD/HG/USER
Selects the gamma type.
STD: Standard gamma
HG: Hyper gamma
USER: User gamma (PDW-F800
only)
GAM TABLE (STD)
1 to 5 to 6
Selects the standard gamma type.
1: Corresponds to SD camcorder
2: x 4.5 gain
3: x 3.5 gain
4: Corresponds to SMPTE-240M
5: Corresponds to ITU-R709
6: x 5.0 gain
GAM TABLE (HG)
1 to 4
Selects the hyper gamma type.
1: Compress 325% video input
to100% video output.
2: Compress 460% video input
to100% video output.
3: Compress 325% video input
to109% video output.
4: Compress 460% video input
to109% video output.
[F800]
1 to 5
Selects the user gamma type.
GAM TABLE (USER)
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Item
173
No.
Page
05/05 BLACK
GAMMA
06/06 [700]
KNEE
[F800]
KNEE 1
Item
Settings
Description
BLACK GAMMA
OFF/ON
Turns the black gamma
correction on or off.
BLACK GAM RANGE LOW/L.MID/H.MID/
HIGH
Sets the range affected by black
gamma.
MASTER BLK
GAMMA
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the master black gamma.
R BLACK GAMMA
(–99 to 99)
Sets the correction curve of the R
black gamma.
G BLACK GAMMA
(–99 to 99)
Sets the correction curve of the G
black gamma.
B BLACK GAMMA
(–99 to 99)
Sets the correction curve of the B
black gamma.
TEST OUT SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Selects the output signal of TEST
OUT connector.
KNEE
OFF/ON
Turns the knee correction circuit
on or off.
[700]
50.0% to 95.0% to
109.0%
Sets the knee point level.
(–99 to 99)
Set the knee slope level.
KNEE SATURATION
OFF/ON
Turns the knee saturation
function on or off.
KNEE SAT LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the knee saturation level.
WHITE CLIP
OFF/ON
Turns the white clipping function
on or off.
WHITE CLIP LEVEL
NTSC: 90.0% to
108.0% to 109.0%
PAL: 90.0% to 105.0%
to 109.0%
Adjusts the white clipping level.
KNEE SATURATION
OFF/ON
Turns the Knee Saturation
function on and off.
KNEE POINT (R)
–45.0% to 0.0% to
14.0%
KNEE SLOPE (R)
(–99 to 99)
KNEE POINT (G)
–45.0% to 0.0% to
14.0%
When KNEE SATURATION is
set to OFF, set the RGB knee
point levels and knee slope levels
individually.
KNEE SLOPE (G)
(–99 to 99)
KNEE POINT (B)
–45.0% to 0.0% to
14.0%
KNEE SLOPE (B)
(–99 to 99)
KNEE POINT
[F800]
KNEE POINT (M)
[700]
KNEE SLOPE
[F800]
KNEE SLOPE (M)
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
174
07/— [F800]
KNEE 2
Menu List
No.
Page
08/07 DETAIL 1
09/08 DETAIL 2
Item
Settings
Description
DETAIL
OFF/ON
Sets the detail correction function
on or off.
APERTURE
OFF/ON
Turns the aperture correction
function on or off.
DETAIL LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the general level of the detail
signal.
APERTURE LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the aperture correction level.
DTL H/V RATIO
(–99 to 99)
Sets the level of the V detail
signal.
CRISPENING
(–99 to 99)
Sets the crispening level.
LEVEL DEPEND
OFF/ON
Turns the level depend function
on or off.
LEVEL DEPEND LVL (–99 to 99)
Sets the level of the level depend.
DETAIL FREQUENCY (–99 to 99)
Sets the frequency of the H detail
signal.
KNEE APERTURE
Turns the knee aperture function
on or off.
OFF/ON
KNEE APT LVL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the knee aperture level.
DETAIL LIMIT
(–99 to 99)
Sets the both detail black and
white limiters.
DTL WHT LMT
(–99 to 99)
Sets the detail white limiter.
DTL BLK LMT
(–99 to 99)
Sets the detail black limiter.
DTL V-BLK LMT
(–99 to 99)
Sets the V detail black limiter.
V DTL CREATION
NAM/G/R+G/Y
Selects the source signal of the V
DTL signal.
H/V CONTROL MODE H/V /V
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Selects the operation mode of
DTL H/V RATIO on the
DETAIL 1 page.
H/V: H and V increase and
decrease in inverse
proportion
V: V DTL only enabled
175
No.
Page
10/09 SD DETAIL
Item
Settings
Description
SD DETAIL
OFF/ON
Turns the SD detail correction on
or off.
SD DETAIL LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the general level of the SD
detail signal.
SD CRISPENING
(–99 to 99)
Sets the SD crispening level.
SD DTL WHT LIMIT
(–99 to 99)
Sets the SD detail white limiter.
SD DTL BLK LIMIT
(–99 to 99)
Sets the SD detail black limiter.
SD LEVEL DEPEND
OFF/ON
Turns the SD level depend
function on or off.
SD LV DEPEND LVL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the level of the SD level
depend.
SD DTL FREQUENCY (–99 to 99)
Sets the frequency of the SD H
detail signal.
SD DTL H/V RATIO
Sets the level of the SD V detail
signal.
(–99 to 99)
SD CROSS COLOR
(–99 to 99)
(When NTSC(J)AREA
or NTSC AREA is
selected on the
FORMAT page)
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
176
Menu List
Sets the SD cross color reduction
level.
No.
Page
Item
11/10 SKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL ALL
Settings
Description
OFF/ON
Turns on or off all of channels 1,
2 and 3 for the color detail
function.
SKIN DETECT
Moves to color detection Executes the color detail
page.
function.
SKIN AREA IND
OFF/ON
Turns on and off the function that
displays a zebra pattern where
color was detected.
[F800]
When this is ON, a zebra pattern
is output from the following
connectors.
• SDI OUT 2 connector (when all
of the following are true: SDI
OUT 2 SELECT on the OUTPUT
1 page is set to HDSDI, SDI OUT
2 SUPER is set to ON, and either
SUPER(MENU) or
SUPER(ZEBRA) on the SUPER
IMPOSE page is set to ON)
• TEST OUT connector (when both
of the following are true: TEST
OUT SUPER on the OUTPUT 1
page is set to ON, and
SUPER(MENU) on the SUPER
IMPOSE page is set to ON)
[700]
SKIN DTL SELECT
1/2/3
Selects the type of the color
detail function. The following
items depend on the selected type
of the color detail function.
SKIN DETAIL
OFF/ON
Turns the color detail function on
or off for the type selected in the
above item.
SKIN DETAIL LVL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the level of the color detail
signal.
SKIN DTL SAT
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the saturation level of the
hue possessed by the color detail
function.
SKIN DTL HUE
0 to 359
Adjusts the center phase of the
hue possessed by the color detail
function.
SKIN DTL WIDTH
0 to 39 to 359
Adjusts the width of the hue
possessed by the color detail
function.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
When this is ON, a zebra pattern
is output from the TEST OUT
connector (when both of the
following are true: TEST OUT
SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page
is set to ON, and
SUPER(MENU) on the SUPER
IMPOSE page is set to ON)
177
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Description
OFF/ON
Turns the linear matrix correction
and user-set matrix correction
functions on or off.
MATRIX(USER)
OFF/ON
Turns the user-set matrix
correction function on or off.
MATRIX(PRESET)
OFF/ON
Turns the preset matrix
correction function on or off.
MATRIX(PRST) SEL
1/2/3/4/5/6
Selects the preset matrix
correction function.
MATRIX(USER) R-G
(–99 to 99)
Sets the arbitrary R-G user-set
matrix coefficients.
MATRIX(USER) R-B
(–99 to 99)
Sets the arbitrary R-B user-set
matrix coefficients.
MATRIX(USER) G-R
(–99 to 99)
Sets the arbitrary G-R user-set
matrix coefficients.
MATRIX(USER) G-B
(–99 to 99)
Sets the arbitrary G-B user-set
matrix coefficients.
MATRIX(USER) B-R
(–99 to 99)
Sets the arbitrary B-R user-set
matrix coefficients.
MATRIX(USER) B-G
(–99 to 99)
Sets the arbitrary B-G user-set
matrix coefficients.
MATRIX
OFF/ON
Turns the linear matrix correction
and multi matrix correction
functions on or off.
MATRIX (MULTI)
OFF/ON
Turns the multi matrix correction
function on or off.
MATRIX AREA IND
OFF/ON
Turns the zebra indication on or
off in the area corresponding to
the currently selected setting.
12/11 MTX LINEAR MATRIX
13/12 MTX MULTI
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
178
MATRIX COLOR DET Moves to color detection Detects color.
page.
MTX(MULTI)PRESET EXEC
Menu List
Return MTX(MULTI)HUE and
MTX(MULTI)SAT values to
preset values for each of the 16
axes.
MTX (MULTI) AXIS
B/B+/MG–/MG/MG+/ Sets 16 hue axes as the targets of
R/R+/YL–/YL/YL+/G–/ the multi matrix correction
G/G+/CY/CY+/B–
function.
MTX (MULTI) HUE
(–99 to 99)
Sets hue correction values for
each of the 16 axis modes.
MTX (MULTI) SAT
(–99 to 99)
Sets saturation correction values
for each of the 16 axis modes.
No.
Page
Item
14/13 V MODULATION V MOD
Settings
Description
OFF/ON
Turns the V modulation function
on or off.
MASTER VMOD
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the master V modulation
level.
R VMOD
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the R V modulation
level.
G VMOD
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the G V modulation
level.
B VMOD
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the B V modulation
level.
TEST OUT SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Selects the output signal of the
TEST OUT connector.
OFF/ON
Turns the low key saturation
function on or off.
L KEY SAT LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the saturation level of the
low luminance part.
L KEY SAT RANGE
LOW/L.MID/H.MID/
HIGH
Sets the luminance level at which
the low key saturation function
becomes effective.
Y BLACK GAMMA
OFF/ON
Turns the Y black gamma
function on or off.
Y BLK GAM LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Sets the gamma curve in the low
luminance part.
15/14 SATURATION LOW KEY SAT
Sets the luminance level at which
the Y black gamma becomes
effective.
16/15 NOISE
SUPPRESS
NOISE SUPPRESS
OFF/ON
Turn on and off the noise
suppression function.
17/16 SCENE FILE
1
STANDARD
2
STANDARD
Recalls the scene file saved in the
memory of the camcorder.
3
STANDARD
4
STANDARD
5
STANDARD
STANDARD
–
Clears all current detail-adjusted
settings and switch settings and
returns the settings to the
standard settings saved in the
reference file.
SCENE RECALL
EXEC
Recalls the scene file from the
memory of the camcorder or the
“Memory Stick”.
SCENE STORE
EXEC
Stores the scene file in the
memory of the camcorder or the
“Memory Stick”.
F.ID
Blank/up to 16
characters
Sets the File ID.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Y BLK GAM RANGE LOW/L.MID/H.MID/
HIGH
179
MAINTENANCE menu
No.
Page
01/01 WHITE
SHADING
02/02 BLACK
SHADING
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
180
03/03 LEVEL
ADJUST
Menu List
Item
Settings
Description
WHT SHAD CH
SEL
R/G/B/TEST
Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If
TEST is selected, the setting is linked to the
setting of TEST OUT SELECT.
TEST OUT
SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/
LCD
Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT
connector.
R/G/B WHT H
SAW
(–99 to 99)
H Saw white shading compensation.
R/G/B WHT H
PARA
(–99 to 99)
H Parabola white shading compensation.
R/G/B WHT V
SAW
(–99 to 99)
V Saw white shading compensation.
R/G/B WHT V
PARA
(–99 to 99)
V Parabola white shading compensation.
WHITE SAW/
PARA
OFF/ON
Turns white shading Saw and Parabola
compensation on and off.
BLK SHAD CH
SEL
R/G/B/TEST/
LCD
Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If
“TEST” is selected, the setting is the same as
the setting of TEST OUT SELECT.
TEST OUT
SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/
LCD
Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT
connector.
R/G/B BLK H SAW (–99 to 99)
H Saw black shading compensation.
R/G/B BLK H
PARA
H Parabola black shading compensation.
(–99 to 99)
R/G/B BLK V SAW (–99 to 99)
V Saw black shading compensation.
R/G/B BLK V
PARA
(–99 to 99)
V Parabola black shading compensation.
BLACK SAW/
PARA
OFF/ON
Turns black shading Saw and Parabola
compensation on and off.
MASTER BLACK
(–99 to 99)
Master black level adjustment.
MASTER
GAIN(TMP)
–6dB/–3dB/0dB/ Temporarily adjusts the master gain value.
3dB/6dB/9dB/
12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/
36dB/42dB
VBS VIDEO
LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the composite signal video level.
HD-Y LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the Y level of the HD component
signal.
TEST OUT
SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/
LCD
Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT
connector.
No.
Page
04/04 BATTERY 1
Item
Settings
Info BEFORE END 5%/10%/
15%...95%/
100%
Description
Used when a BP-GL65/GL95 Battery Pack is
used. Sets the remaining power (% value) of
the battery at which the BEFORE END
warning should be issued. a)
Info END
0%/1%/2%/3%/ Used when a BP-GL65/GL95 Battery Pack is
4%/5%
used. Sets the remaining power (% value) of
the battery at which the END warning should
be issued. b)
Sony BEFORE END 11.5V to 17.0V
(in 0.1V steps)
Used when a BP-L60S/L80S Battery Pack is
used. Sets the voltage level of the battery at
which the BEFORE END warning should be
issued. a)
Sony END
11.0V to 11.5V
(in 0.1V steps)
Used when a BP-L60S/L80S Battery Pack is
used. Sets the voltage level of the battery at
Other BEFORE
END
11.5V to 11.8V
to 17.0V (in
0.1V steps)
Used when a battery pack other than a Sony
battery pack is used. Sets the voltage level of
the battery at which the BEFORE END
warning should be issued.
Other END c)
11.0V to 14.0V
(in 0.1 V steps)
Used when a battery pack other than a Sony
battery pack is used. Sets the voltage level of
the battery at which the END warning should
be issued.
DC IN BEFORE
END
11.5V to 11.8V
to 17.0V (in 0.1
V steps)
Used when an external power source is
connected to the DC IN connector. Sets the
voltage level of the connected external power
source at which the BEFORE END warning
should be issued.
DC IN END
11.0V to 14.0V
(in 0.1 V steps)
Used when an external power source is
connected to the DC IN connector. Sets the
voltage level of the connected external power
source at which the END warning should be
issued.
DETECTED
BATTERY
Info/Sony/Other/ Displays the type of automatically detected
DC IN
battery.
which the END warning should be issued. b)
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Menu List
181
No.
Page
05/05 BATTERY 2
Item
Settings
Description
TYPE DETECTION AUTO/OTHER AUTO: Automatically detects the type of the
battery.
OTHER: Always judges the battery to be of
the “OTHER”c) type regardless of the
actual battery type.
SEGMENT NO.7
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
182
Menu List
11.0V to 17.0V
(in 0.1 V steps)
When the battery type
judgment is “OTHER”,
sets the voltage level
below which the battery
status indicator segment
No.7 should turn off.
SEGMENT NO.6
11.0V to 16.0V
to 17.0V (in 0.1
V steps)
When the battery type
judgment is “OTHER”,
sets the voltage level
below which the battery
status indicator segment
No. 6 should turn off.
SEGMENT NO.5
11.0V to 15.0V
to 17.0V (in 0.1
V steps)
When the battery type
judgment is “OTHER”,
sets the voltage level
below which the battery
status indicator segment
No. 5 should turn off.
SEGMENT NO.4
11.0V to 14.0V
to 17.0V (in 0.1
V steps)
When the battery type
judgment is “OTHER”,
sets the voltage level
below which the battery
status indicator segment
No. 4 should turn off.
SEGMENT NO.3
11.0V to 13.0V
to 17.0V (in 0.1
V steps)
When the battery type
judgment is “OTHER”,
sets the voltage level
below which the battery
status indicator segment
No. 3 should turn off.
SEGMENT NO.2
11.0V to 12.0V
to 17.0V (in 0.1
V steps)
When the battery type
judgment is “OTHER”,
sets the voltage level
below which the battery
status indicator segment
No. 2 should turn off.
SEGMENT NO.1
11.0V to 17.0V
(in 0.1 V steps)
When the battery type
judgment is “OTHER”,
sets the voltage level
below which the battery
status indicator segment
No. 1 should turn off.
Battery status
indicator
segments
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(“E” d) and “F”
are always on.)
No.
Page
06/06 AUDIO-1
Item
Settings
FRONT MIC
SELECT
MONO/STREO Input mode selection for front microphone.
Description
AUDIO CH3/4
MODE
CH1/2/SW
Selects the sources to be recorded to channels
CH-3/4.
CH1/2: Same sources as CH-1/2.
SW: Signals selected by the AUDIO IN CH3/CH-4 switches.
REAR XLR AUTO OFF/ON
Turns the XLR connection automatic
detection on or off.
FRONT MIC REF
–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB
Sets the reference level of the front
microphone.
REAR MIC REF
–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB
Sets the reference level when the AUDIO IN
CH1 connector is set to MIC.
MIN ALARM VOL OFF/SET
Volume of the monitor speaker alarm tone
when it is turned all the way down.
OFF: Almost inaudible.
SET: Faintly audible.
SP ATT LEVEL
Lowers the volume of the monitor speaker.
Has no effect on earphone volume.
OFF/3dB/6dB/
9dB
HEADPHONE OUT MONO/STREO Selects whether to make the rear earphone
monaural or stereo.
07/07 AUDIO-2
16bit/24bit
For details, see “Setting the Recording
Format” (page 58).
AU REF LEVEL
–20dB/–18dB/
–16dB/–12dB/
EBUL
Sets the output level of the 1 kHz test signal.
AU REF OUT
0dB/+4dB/
–3dB/EBUL
Sets the output reference level.
AU CH12 AGC
MODE
MONO/STREO Selects whether to perform automatic input
level adjustment of analog audio signals to be
recorded on channels 1 and 2 independently
for each channel, or in stereo mode.
AU CH34 AGC
MODE
MONO/STREO/ Selects whether to perform automatic input
OFF
level adjustment of analog audio signals to be
recorded on channels 3 and 4 independently
for each channel, or in stereo mode, or not at
all (OFF).
AU AGC SPEC
–6dB/–9dB/
–12dB/–15dB/
–17dB
AGC saturation level setting.
AU LIMITER
MODE
OFF/–6dB/
–9dB/–12dB/
–15dB/–17dB
For manual audio input level adjustment,
selects the limiter saturation level for loud
input signals.
AU OUT LIMITER OFF/ON
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
AU DATA LEN
(IMX)
(When the CBKZMD01 is installed)
Turns the audio output limiter on or off.
Menu List
183
No.
Page
08/08 AUDIO-3
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Item
Settings
AU SG (1KHz)
ON/OFF/AUTO Sets whether to output a 1 kHz test tone
during the Color Bar mode or not.
ON: A 1 kHz test tone is output during the
Color Bar mode.
OFF: A 1 kHz test tone is not output during
the Color Bar mode.
AUTO: A 1 kHz test tone is output only when
the AUDIO SELECT CH-1 switch on the
inside panel is in the AUTO position.
MIC CH1 LEVEL
SIDE1/FRONT/ When recording the front microphone sound
F+S1
on CH 1, selects which control is to be used
for the level adjustment.
SIDE 1: LEVEL control (left side)
FRONT: MIC LEVEL control
F+S1: LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC
LEVEL control (The two controls are
linked to each other.)
MIC CH2 LEVEL
SIDE2/FRONT/ When recording the front microphone sound
F+S2
on CH 2, selects which control is to be used
for the level adjustment.
SIDE 2: LEVEL control (right side)
FRONT: MIC LEVEL control
F+S2: LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC
LEVEL control (The two controls are
linked to each other.)
REAR1/WRR
LEVEL
SIDE1/FRONT/ Selects any of these controls to adjust the
F+S1
audio level of the equipment that is connected
to the wireless microphone and whatever is
connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 connector
on the rear panel.
SIDE 1: LEVEL control (left side)
FRONT: MIC LEVEL control
F+S1: LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC
LEVEL control (The two controls are
linked to each other.)
REAR2/WRR
LEVEL
SIDE2/FRONT/ Selects any of these controls to adjust the
F+S2
audio level of the equipment that is connected
to the wireless microphone and whatever is
connected to the AUDIO IN CH2 connector
on the rear panel.
SIDE 2: LEVEL control (right side)
FRONT: MIC LEVEL control
F+S2: LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC
LEVEL control (The two controls are
linked to each other.)
AUDIO CH3
FIX/FRONT
LEVEL e)
184
Menu List
Description
Selects the audio level recorded on channel 3.
FIX: Fixed
FRONT: Level as adjusted by the MIC
LEVEL control on the front panel of the
camcorder
No.
Page
08/08 AUDIO-3
Item
Settings
Description
AUDIO CH4
FIX/FRONT
Selects the audio level recorded on channel 4.
FIX: Fixed
FRONT: Level as adjusted by the MIC
LEVEL control on the front panel of the
camcorder
LEVEL e)
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Menu List
185
No.
Page
09/09 WRR
SETTING
Item
Settings
Description
WRR VALID CH
ALL/CH1
Selects whether to enable channels 1 and 2 of
the wireless receiver, or channel 1 only.
ALL: Enable both channel 1 and 2.
CH1: Enable channel 1 only. Select this
setting to use the wireless receiver as a
monaural receiver.
WRR CH SELECT TX1/TX2
Specifies the target channel for other items in
this menu.
TX1: Channel 1
TX2: Channel 2
SEL f)
f)
WRR DELAY
OFF/ON
Enables or disables the delay compensation
function for wireless audio input.
OFF: Disables the function.
ON: Enables the function (the audio in all EE
output is delayed by about 8 ms).
–
Displays the name of the transmitter whose
signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH SELECT.
The channel number and name shown here are
recorded inside the &lt;Description&gt; tag in the
clip metadata file C*M01.XML (where * is
0001 to 9999).
---/PEAK
Displays whether the AF level of the
transmitter whose signals are being received
on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT
is over the peak.
MIC/LINE
Displays whether the input level of the
transmitter whose signals are being received
on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT
is set to MIC or LINE.
COMP f)
TX*(*: channel
number) f)
TX* AUDIO
PEAK(*: channel
number) f)
TX* INPUT
LEVEL(*: channel
number) f)
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
186
TX* ATT LEVEL(*: –
channel number) f)
TX* LCF FREQ(*: –
channel number) f)
TX* SYSTEM
DELAY(*: channel
number) f)
Menu List
AUTO/
0.0ms~8.0ms
Sets the ATT level of the transmitter whose
signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH SELECT (the
permissible setting range may vary depending
on the transmitter device).
Sets the Low Cut Filter frequency of the
transmitter whose signals are being received
on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT
(the permissible setting range may vary
depending on the transmitter device).
When WRR DELAY COMP is set to ON, sets
the amount of audio delay for the channel
selected by WRR CH SELECT.
AUTO: Automatically adjusts the amount of
delay so that the delay in the audio
received from the wireless receiver is
zero.
0.0ms~8.0ms: Sets the amount of anticipated
wireless system delay, for cases in
several wireless systems are being used
over a device such as an audio mixer.
No.
Page
10/10 TIMECODE
Item
Settings
Description
TC OUT
AUTO/GENE
Selects the timecode signal output.
AUTO: Outputs the timecode generator
output during recording and outputs the
timecode reader output during playback.
GENE: Outputs the timecode generator
output during recording and playback.
Sets DF or NDF mode.
DF: Drop frame mode
NDF: Non-drop frame mode
EXT-LK DF/NDF
INT/EXT
(When SYSTEM
FREQUENCY is set
to “59.94i”,
“29.97P”, or
“59.94P”)
Selects either internal setting or external
setting for DF/NDF.
INT: Internal
EXT: External
EXT-LK UBIT
INT/EXT
Sets whether the LTC UBIT setup value locks
to an INT or an EXT source when the
timecode is locked to an external source.
INT: Internal lock
EXT: External lock
LTC UBIT
FIX/TIME
Sets the data to be recorded in U-BIT of LTC.
FIX: Records the data that is set by the user.
TIME: Records the present time.
VITC UBIT (SD)
(When the CBKZMD01 is installed)
FIX/TIME
Sets the data to be recorded in U-BIT of
VITC.
FIX: Records the data that is set by the user.
TIME: Records the present time.
WATCH AUTO
ADJ
OFF/ON
Matches the time of the internal clock with the
time data of the user bits of an external
timecode. Turns the automatic time correction
function of the internal clock on or off.
UBIT GROUP ID
000/101
Selects the U-BIT GROUP ID.
VITC INS LINE 1
(When the CBKZMD01 is installed)
NTSC: 12H to
Selects the line into which VITC is to be
16H to 19H inserted.
PAL: 9H to 19H
to 22H
VITC INS LINE 2
(When the CBKZMD01 is installed)
NTSC: 12H to
18H to 19H
PAL: 9H to 21H
to 22H
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
DF/NDF
DF/NDF
(When SYSTEM
FREQUENCY is set
to “59.94i”,
“29.97P”, or
“59.94P”)
187
No.
Page
11/11 ESSENCE
MARK
Item
Settings
RET SHOT MARK OFF/ON
1
Description
For details, see “Recording essence marks”
on page 88.
RET SHOT MARK OFF/ON
2
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
188
Menu List
INDEX PIC. POS
0SEC to 10SEC For details, see “Setting the thumbnail image
(in 1 sec steps) at recording time” on page 89.
FIND MODE
R.ST/CLIP
Specify the frame to be cued up when the
PREV or NEXT button is pressed.
R.ST: The frame where a Rec Start essence
mark is set
CLIP: The first frame of the clip
No.
Page
12/12 CAM
CONFIG 1
Item
Settings
Description
REC TALLY
BLINK
OFF/ON
Turns the tally illumination control on or off
when the battery is almost exhausted or the
disc is almost full.
REC START BEEP OFF/ON
Turns on or off the REC START/STOP alarm
sound.
SUB LCD MODE
SEL
TIMER/OFF/
CONT
Sets the timecode (TC) display after poweroff
as follows.
TIMER: The TC display turns off after the
elapse of the time set by the SUB LCD
TIMER below.
OFF: Not displayed.
CONT: Displayed.
SUB LCD TIMER
1H/3H/8H
Sets the duration of time after which the TC
display is to be turned off after power-off,
when the SUB LCD MODE SEL item, above,
is set to “TIMER” (H: hours).
HDSDI REMOTE I/ OFF/CHARA/
F
G-TLY/R-TLY
Note
When R-TLY is selected, the TALLY indicator
lights even when the unit is not recording.
PROAV DISPLAY
DSABL/ENABL Specifies whether to display the PROAV
directory when this unit is accessed by a
FAM/FTP connection.
DSABL: Do not display.
ENABL: Display.
MIXED
RECORDING
DSABL/ENABL For details, see “Mixed recording of clips in
different formats on the same disc” on page 59.
SINGLE CLIP
MODE
OFF/ON
For details, see “Clip playback modes” on
page 85.
PB POSITION
KEEP/TOP
When you switch between the clip playback
screen and the clip list playback screen,
specifies the clip or sub clip playback start
position.
KEEP: Play from the position where
playback stopped.
TOP: Play from the first frame of the first clip
or sub clip.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Selects whether to use the function that
enables recording control from this unit of an
external device connected to the CA (camera
adapter) or one of the SDI OUT 1/2
connectors (HDSDI output) of this unit. g)
Also selects the indication that shows whether
the external device is recording.
OFF: Do not use the remote recording control
function.
CHARA: Use the function, and indicate by
the controlling external device indicator
in the viewfinder (see page 35).
G-TLY: Use the function, and indicate by the
TALLY indicator in the viewfinder.
R-TLY: Use the function, and indicate by the
REC (recording, red tally) indicator in
the viewfinder.
189
No.
Page
13/13 CAM
CONFIG 2
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
190
Item
Settings
Description
TEST SAW
SELECT
SAW/REC
Selects the test signal.
COLOR BAR
SELECT
ARIB/100%/
75%/SMPTE
Selects the HD color bar type.
USER &amp; ALL
ONLY
OFF/ON
Show only USER menu in the top menu.
RM COMMON
MEMORY
OFF/ON
Selects whether or not to share settings for
when a remote control unit is connected and
when the unit is used alone.
RM REC START
RM/CAM/
PARA
When an RM remote control unit is
connected, selects which recording start/stop
buttons are enabled.
RM: remote control unit
CAM: camcorder
PARA: both
SHT DISP MODE
SEC/DEG
Selects shutter speed display (seconds or
degrees).
RM F NO DISPLAY CTRL/RET
Switches the iris F value display type on
remote control units such as the MSU-900.
CTRL: Display based on control value from
camera
RET: Display based on position value from
lens
FAN CONTROL
Specifies the control method for the cooling
fan. (This setting is retained even when the
unit is powered off.)
AUTO: Control the rotation of the cooling fan
automatically.
R.MIN: Rotate the cooling fan at low speed
during recording only (and stop the
rotation when this unit is used in an
environment so cool that temperatures
inside the unit do not rise).
MIN: Rotate the cooling fan at low speed
(and stop the rotation when this unit is
used in an environment so cool that
temperatures inside the unit do not rise).
AUTO/R.MIN/
MIN
Note
Regardless of this setting, the cooling fan
rotates at high speed if temperatures inside the
unit rise to a temperature near the alarm level.
FOCUS MAG SW
Menu List
MTRY/ALT
Selects the method that activates the FOCUS
MAG function when the function is assigned
to an ASSIGN switch.
MTRY: The function is on as long as the
switch is held down.
ALT: Each press of the switch toggles
between on and off. (The function goes
off automatically five seconds after it is
turned on.)
No.
Page
14/14 CAM
CONFIG 3
Item
Settings
Description
ALAC
OFF/AUTO
Specifies whether to activate the aberration
correction function.
OFF: Do not activate.
AUTO: Activate aberration correction when a
lens that supports aberration correction is
mounted.
Note
For some aberration correction lenses, the
aberration correction function may not
activate (“ALAC” does not appear in the
viewfinder) immediately after this unit is
powered on, even when this item is set to
“AUTO”. If this occurs, turn the zoom and
focus rings of the lens all the way to one side,
and then check to make sure that “ALAC” has
appeared in the viewfinder.
Contact your dealer or a Sony service
representative for more information about
lenses that support aberration correction.
DC SDI
BANDWIDTH
15/15 PRESET
WHITE
WIDE/NARW
Specifies the video bandwidth of SD-SDI
output after down conversion.
WIDE: Wideband
NARW: Narrowband
Sets the white balance preset value.
C TEMP BAL &lt;P&gt;
(–99 to 99)
Finer setting when the desired color could not
be obtained with the COLOR TEMP &lt;P&gt;
color temperature setting.
R GAIN &lt;P&gt;
(–99 to 99)
Sets the R gain preset value.
G GAIN &lt;P&gt;
(–99 to 99)
Sets the G gain preset value.
AWB ENABLE &lt;P&gt; OFF/ON
When the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST,
turns the function that enables execution of
AWB (auto white balance) on and off.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
COLOR TEMP &lt;P&gt; Display
reference color
temperature.
191
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Description
–/16
[700]
ND FILTER
CTEMP
OFF/ON
Turns on and off the function which assigns
electrical CC filters to neutral density (ND)
filters.
ND FLT CTEMP
&lt;1&gt;
3200K/4300K/
5600K/6300K
Select the color temperatures when the
electrical CC filters are assigned to the ND
filters.
WHITE
FILTER
ND FLT CTEMP 2- 3200K/4300K/
4
5600K/6300K
ELECTRICAL
CC&lt;A&gt;
3200K/4300K/
5600K/6300K
ELECTRICAL
CC&lt;B&gt;
3200K/4300K/
5600K/6300K
ELECTRICAL
CC&lt;C&gt;
3200K/4300K/
5600K/6300K/
-----
ELECTRICAL
CC&lt;D&gt;
3200K/4300K/
5600K/6300K/
-----
16/17 DCC ADJUST DCC FUNCTION
SEL
DCC D RANGE
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
192
Menu List
For details, see “To change the color
temperature when the ND filter is switched”
(page 64).
Select the color temperatures selected by
electrical CC filter switching, when the
electrical CC filter switching function is
assigned to an ASSIGN switch.
For details, see “To switch between electrical
CC filters with an ASSIGN switch” (page 64).
DCC/FIX
Enables or disables automatic knee point
adjustment when the OUTPUT/DCC switch is
set to CAM, DCC: ON.
DCC: Automatically adjust the knee point
according to the luminance of the
subject.
FIX: Set the knee point to a fixed value.
400%/450%/
500%/550%/
600%
Sets the dynamic range when the OUTPUT/
DCC switch is set to CAM, DCC: ON.
DCC POINT
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the DCC minimum knee point.
DCC GAIN
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the gain to DCC detected value.
DCC DELAY TIME (–99 to 99)
Adjusts the DCC reaction speed.
DCC PEAK FILTER (–99 to 99)
Adjusts the response sensitivity to the peak of
the DCC detected value.
No.
Page
Item
17/18 AUTO IRIS 2 IRIS WINDOW
IRIS WINDOW
IND
Settings
Description
1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR Selects the auto iris detection window.
VAR: variable
OFF/ON
Turns on and off the function which displays a
frame marker for the auto iris detection
window.
IRIS LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the level of the auto iris target value.
IRIS APL RATIO
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the mix ratio of auto iris detection
peak value and average value.
IRIS VAR WIDTH
20 to 240 to 479 Adjusts the width of detection frame when the
auto iris detection window is set to VAR.
IRIS VAR HEIGHT 20 to 135 to 269 Adjusts the height of detection frame when
the auto iris detection window is set to VAR.
IRIS VAR H POS
–460 to 0 to 459 Adjusts the horizontal position of detection
frame when the auto iris detection window is
set to VAR.
IRIS VAR V POS
–250 to 0 to 249 Adjusts the vertical position of detection
frame when the auto iris detection window is
set to VAR.
IRIS SPEED
(–99 to 99)
CLIP HIGH LIGHT OFF/ON
18/19 GENLOCK
Turns on and off the function which, during
auto iris adjustment, ignores very bright areas
by dulling the reaction to high luminescence.
GENLOCK
OFF/ON
Turns genlock on and off.
GL HD H PHASE
(–99 to 99)
Sets the HD output H phase for genlock
operation.
GL SD H PHASE
(–99 to 99)
(Does not appear
when the FORMAT
page item SYSTEM
LINE is set to 1080
and the SYSTEM
FREQUENCY item
is set to 23.9P)
Sets the SD output H phase for genlock
operation.
REFERENCE
INTERNAL/
GENLOCK/
SDI IN
Displays the type of reference signal used by
this unit.
ND OFFSET
ADJUST
OFF/ON
Turns on and off the mode which sets ND
(neutral density) filter color compensation
values.
CLEAR ND
OFFSET
EXEC
Clear ND filter color compensation values.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
19/20 ND COMP
Adjusts the auto iris speed.
193
No.
Page
20/21 AUTO
SHADING
21/22 APR
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
194
Menu List
Item
Settings
Description
AUTO BLK
SHADING
EXEC
Executes the auto black shading correction
function.
RESET BLK SHD
EXEC
Clear black shading compensation values.
TEST OUT
SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/
LCD
Selects the signal output of the TEST OUT
connector.
MASTER
GAIN(TMP)
–6dB/–3dB/0dB/ Temporarily sets the master gain value.
3dB/6dB/9dB/
12dB/18dB/
24dB/30dB/
36dB/42dB
APR
EXEC
Suppresses white flecks by executing the
automatic pixel noise reduction function.
APR(SLS)
EXEC
(Does not appear
when the FORMAT
page item SYSTEM
LINE is set to 720,
the SYSTEM
FREQUENCY item
is set to 59.9P, and
the SCAN MODE
item is set to 23.9P.)
Suppresses white flecks in SLS (Slow Speed
Shutter) mode by executing the automatic
pixel noise reduction function.
APR PRESET
Deletes white flecks data that was added by
execution of the APR and automatic black
balance adjustment functions.
EXEC
Note
The execution time for this function is about 30
minutes. More time may be required when
temperatures inside the unit are low.
No.
Page
Item
Settings
22/23 NETWORK 1 NETWORK SETUP
DHCP
NETWORK
SETTING
Description
EXEC
Displays the
NETWORK
SETTING page,
so that you can
make network
settings.
Display only
Enables or
disables
automatic
acquisition of an
IP address from a
DHCP server
IP ADDRESS
Display only
IP address
SUBNET MASK
Display only
Subnet mask
DEF.GATEWAY
Display only
Default gateway
LINK SPEED
Display only
Link speed
DUPLEX
Display only
Communications
method
DNS1
Display only
DNS server 1
UPnP
Display only
Enable or disable
UPnP.
DHCP
ENABLE/
DISABLE
Selects whether to enable automatic
acquisition of the IP address from a DHCP
server.
Notes
IP ADDRESS
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Set the IP address of this unit.
192.168.1.10
SUBNET MASK
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Sets the subnet mask.
255.255.255.0
DEF.GATEWAY
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Set the address of the default gateway.
0.0.0.0
LINK SPEED
AUTO/10Mbps/ Sets the communications speed.
100Mbps
DUPLEX
AUTO/FULL/
HALF
DNS1
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Set the address of DNS server 1.
0.0.0.0
DNS2
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Set the address of DNS server 2.
0.0.0.0
UPnP
DISABLE/
ENABL
Sets the duplex mode.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
• IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and
DNS server 1 and 2 cannot be set when DHCP
is set to “ENABLE”.
• To check automatically acquired settings, close
the menu and open it again.
Select whether to enable the UPnP (universal
plug and play) function.
DISABLE: Disable the UPnP function.
ENABLE: Enable the UPnP function.
Menu List
195
No.
Page
Item
Settings
Description
EXEC
Reset network settings to the factory defaults.
MAC
Display only
MAC address of this unit
Wi-Fi
WPS MODE
DSABL/ENABL For details, see “To specify a connection
destination by WPS operations” (page 226).
ONE PUSH/
PIN
UPDATE
23/24 NETWORK 2 NET CFG RESET
24/25 WPS
PIN CODE
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
196
Menu List
WPS START
EXEC
WPS STATUS
Display only
No.
Page
25/26 Wi-Fi
Item
Settings
Description
Wi-Fi SETUP
EXEC
Displays the Wi-Fi SETTING page so that
you can make wireless LAN settings.
Wi-Fi STATUS
[-----]/
[xxxxx]/
CONNECT
(display only)
Communication/connection status
xxxxx: Displays the signal strength by
the number of x’s.
CONNECT: Executing the connection
sequence
WIRELESS MODE ----/802.11b/
IEEE 802.11 standard
802.11g/802.11n
(display only)
(unknown)/up to Network name
32 characters
(display only)
NETWORK TYPE
----/INFRA/
ADHOC
(display only)
CH
--/1 to 14
Wireless channel
(display only. 13
and 14 are for
automatically
detected
channels only.)
AUTH
----/OPEN/
Network authentication
SHARED/WPA/
WPA2 (display
only)
ENCRYPTION
----/DISABLE/ Data encryption
WEP/TKIP/AES
(display only)
SCAN
NETWORKS
EXEC
SSID
Blank/up to 32
characters
NETWORK TYPE
INFRA/
ADHOC
CH
1 to 11
AUTH
OPEN/
SHARED/WPA/
WPA2
ENCRYPTION
DISABLE/
WEP/TKIP/AES
WEP KEY INDEX
1/2/3/4
INPUT SELECT
ASCII5/
ASCII13/
HEX10/HEX26
KEY
Blank/up to 26
characters
Connection mode
For details, see “Setting up a wireless LAN”
(page 224).
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Wi-Fi
SETTING
SSID
197
No.
Page
Item
Settings
27/28 UP
UP CON PROCESS FIELD/ADPT
CONVERTER
28/–
[800]
SHUTTER
SELECT
Selects the conversion source picture when
SD is upconverted to HD.
FIELD: Use the field picture.
ADPT: Optimize the ratio of conversion from
the frame or field picture.
UC DETAIL
LEVEL
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the sharpness of edge enhancement
by the upconverter.
UC CRISPENING
(–8 to 7)
Sets the amplitude width at which the
upconverter does not emphasize lowamplitude signals.
UC DETAIL LIMIT (–99 to 99)
Sets the maximum level of edge enhancement
by the upconverter.
UC LV DEPEND
LVL
(–8 to 7)
Sets the luminance of edge enhancement by
the upconverter.
UC DTL
FREQUENCY
3.2M/4.5M/
5.0M/4.0M
Sets the center frequency and frequency
properties of edge enhancement by the
upconverter.
3.2M: 3.2 &plusmn; 1.1 MHz
4.5M: 4.5 &plusmn; 1.4 MHz
5.0M: 5.0 &plusmn; 0.7 MHz
4.0M: 4.0 &plusmn; 2.0 MHz
UC DTL H/V
RATIO
(–3 to 4)
Sets the horizontal/vertical ratio of edge
enhancement by the upconverter.
SHUTTER SELECT SECOND/
DEGREE
Selects the shutter speed display unit.
SECOND: Second units
DEGREE: Degree units (shutter opening
angle)
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
See page 68 for more information about
degree unit settings.
ADD
(only when
SHUTTER SELECT
is set to “DEGREE”)
360.0 to 180.0 to Registers a shutter degree setting in an empty
4.5 (upper limit number from 1 to 6 (this item is disabled if no
of shutter angle number is empty).
degrees)
DEL
–
(only when
SHUTTER SELECT
is set to “DEGREE”)
Deletes the setting assigned to a number from
1 to 6 (numbers with no settings assigned
cannot be selected).
1 to 6
Display only
(only when
SHUTTER SELECT
is set to “DEGREE”)
Displays the shutter opening angle assigned to
number 1 to 6, and the corresponding speed in
second units, as calculated on the basis of the
selected frame rate.This differs as follows,
depending on the setting of SYSTEM
FREQUENCY.
59.94i, 29.97P: 1: 216.0, 2: 180.0, 3: 90.0, 4:
45.0, 5: 22.5, 6: 11.2
50i, 25P: 1: 180.0, 2: 150.0, 3: 90.0, 4: 45.0,
5: 22.5, 6: 11.2
23.98P: 1: 180.0, 2: 172.8, 3: 144.0, 4: 45.0,
5: 22.5, 6: 11.2
a) The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of
Other BEFORE END when TYPE DETECTION in
198
Description
Menu List
the BATTERY 2 page is set to “OTHER”.
b) The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of
Other END when TYPE DETECTION in the
BATTERY 2 page is set to “OTHER”.
c) When TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page
is set to “AUTO”, any batteries other than Sony BPseries batteries and Anton Bauer intelligent battery
systems are classified as “Others”.
d) Flashes once per second when the battery status is
“BEFORE END”, and flashes 4 times per second
when the battery status is “END”.
e) A setting for this item is required when AU CH34
AGC MODE in the AUDIO-2 page is set to OFF.
f) A setting for this item is required when the DWRS01D Digital Wireless Receiver is installed.
g) SDI OUT 1 SELECT or SDI OUT 2 SELECT in the
OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu must be
set to HDSDI.
FILE menu
No.
Page
01/01 USER FILE
02/02 USER FILE 2
Item
Settings
Description
USER FILE LOAD
EXEC
USER FILE SAVE
EXEC
F.ID
Blank/up to 16
characters
For details, see “Saving and
Recalling User Files” on page
231.
USER PRESET
EXEC
For details, see “Resetting USER
menu settings to the standard
settings” on page 213.
Save settings for items on pages
registered in the USER menu as
the standard settings.
CLEAR USR PRESET EXEC
Clear the standard setting of pages
registered in the USER menu.
CUSTOMIZE RESET EXEC
Return the pages registered in the
USER menu to the factory default
state.
LOAD CUSTOM
DATA
OFF/ON
Selects whether to load page and
item customization data when
USER FILE LOAD on the USER
FILE page is executed.
LOAD OUT OF USER OFF/ON
Selects whether to load USER
FILE data for items other than the
current USER menu items when
USER FILE LOAD on the USER
FILE page is executed.
BEFORE FILE PAGE
OFF/ON
Selects whether to load data for
items on the pages beyond USER
FILE in the USER menu when
USER FILE LOAD on the USER
FILE page is executed.
USER LOAD WHITE OFF/ON
Selects whether to load white
balance data when USER FILE
LOAD on the USER FILE page is
executed.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
STORE USR PRESET EXEC
199
No.
Page
03/03 ALL FILE
04/04 SCENE FILE
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
200
05/05 REFERENCE
Item
Settings
Description
ALL FILE LOAD
–
Load ALL file.
ALL FILE SAVE
–
Save ALL file.
F.ID
Blank/up to 16
characters
Name ALL file.
ALL PRESET
EXEC
Save the current settings of all
items as preset values.
CLEAR ALL PRESET EXEC
Clear the preset values of all
items.
3SEC CLR PRESET
OFF/ON
Turns the following function on
and off: When the CANCEL/
PRST/ESCAPE switch is held on
the CANCEL/PRST side for three
seconds, clear the preset values of
each item.
NETWORK DATA
OFF/ON
Selects whether or not to read in
the network-related data.
For details, see “Saving and
Loading Scene Files” on page
234.
1
STANDARD
2
STANDARD
3
STANDARD
4
STANDARD
5
STANDARD
STANDARD
–
SCENE RECALL
EXEC
SCENE STORE
EXEC
F.ID
STANDARD
REFERENCE STORE EXEC
Save reference file saved in the
“Memory Stick” in internal
memory.
REFERENCE CLEAR EXEC
Clear reference file.
REFERENCE LOAD
EXEC
Load reference file.
REFERENCE SAVE
EXEC
Save reference file to “Memory
Stick”.
F.ID
Blank/up to 16
characters
Enter reference file name.
SCENE WHITE DATA OFF/ON
Menu List
Return all items to preset values.
STORE ALL PRESET EXEC
Selects whether to load white
balance data when SCENE
RECALL or STANDARD on the
SCENE FILE page is executed.
No.
Page
06/— [F800]
USER
GAMMA
07/06 LENS FILE 1
Item
Settings
Description
GAMMA LOAD
EXEC
Loads user-created gamma table
data (a user gamma file) from a
“Memory Stick” into internal
memory.
GAMMA RESET
EXEC
Clears a user gamma file from
internal memory.
F.ID
—
Displays the name of the user
gamma file in internal memory.
F.ID
—
Displays the name of a user
gamma file in a “Memory Stick”.
DATE
—
Displays the date and time of
creation of a user gamma file in a
“Memory Stick”.
Load lens file.
EXEC
Save lens file.
F.ID
No Offset/up to 16
characters
Sets the name of the last selected
lens file.
SOURCE
MEMORY1
Displays the number of last
loaded lens file.
LENS NO OFFSET
EXEC
Clear lens file.
LENS AUTO
RECALL
OFF/ON/S.No
Specifies whether to automatically
load the lens file of a lens that
supports serial communications.
OFF: Do not use the lens file
function.
ON: Load the lens file
corresponding to the lens
model name, and reflect the
contents of the file.
S.No: If the lens can communicate
its serial number, load the
lens file corresponding to the
lens model name and serial
number, and reflect the
contents of the file. If the lens
serial number cannot be
communicated, load the lens
file corresponding to the lens
model name (same as the ON
setting).
L.ID
—
Display the name of the connected
lens that supports serial
communications.
L.MF
—
Display the manufacturer of the
connected lens that supports serial
communications.
Menu List
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
LENS FILE RECALL EXEC
LENS FILE STORE
201
No.
Page
08/07 LENS FILE 2
Item
Settings
Description
LENS M VMOD a)
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the lens file V SAW
shading compensation.
LENS CENTER H a)
–480 to 0 to 479
Compensates the horizontal
position of lens file center marker.
LENS CENTER V a)
–270 to 0 to 269
Compensates the vertical position
of lens file center marker.
TEST OUT SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Selects the signal output of the
TEST OUT connector.
LENS R FLARE a)
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the lens file flare (R).
LENS G FLARE a)
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the lens file flare (G).
FLARE a)
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the lens file flare (B).
OFST a)
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the white balance (R)
compensation value of the lens
file.
LENS W-B OFST a)
(–99 to 99)
Adjusts the white balance (B)
compensation value of the lens
file.
SHADING CH SEL
R/G/B/TEST
Selects the channel adjusted by
this menu. If TEST is selected, the
setting is linked to the setting of
TEST OUT SELECT.
TEST OUT SELECT
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Selects the signal output of the
TEST OUT connector.
LENS B
LENS W-R
09/08 LENS FILE 3
LENS R/G/B H SAW a) (–99 to 99)
LENS R/G/B H
(–99 to 99)
PARA a)
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
202
LENS R/G/B V SAW a) (–99 to 99)
Adjusts the V Saw white shading
compensation.
Adjusts the V Parabola white
shading compensation.
M.S. FORMAT
EXEC
Format “Memory Stick”.
M.S. IN &gt; JUMP TO
OFF/USER/ALL/
For details, see “Jumping to a
SCENE/LENS/REFER/ File-Related Menu Page When
USER1
Inserting a “Memory Stick”” on
page 237.
PARA a)
a) “EX” is displayed when the extender is on, and “08”
is displayed when the shrinker is on.
Menu List
Adjusts the H Parabola white
shading compensation.
(–99 to 99)
LENS R/G/B V
10/09 MEMORY
STICK
Adjusts the H Saw white shading
compensation.
DIAGNOSIS menu
No.
Page
01/01 HOURS
METER
02/02 TIME/DATE
Item
Description
OPERATION
Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on, in
units of hours.
LASER
Displays the total number of output parameters to the optical
heads.
OPERATION (rst)
Displays the total time that this unit has been powered on, in
units of hours (reset possible).
SPINDLE (rst)
Displays the total time that the spindle has been rotating, in
units of hours (reset possible).
LOADING (rst)
Displays the number of times that discs have been loaded
(reset possible).
SEEK (rst)
Displays the total seek time by the optical heads, in units of
hours (reset possible).
ADJUST
For details, see “Setting the Date/Time of the Internal Clock”
on page 44.
HOUR
MIN
SEC
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
03/03 ROM VERSION PACKAGE: X.XX
1
SY1: X.XX
Displays ROM version.
SY2K: X.XX
SY2U: X.XX
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
DRV: X.XX
AT: X.XX
FP: X.XX
04/04 ROM VERSION LVIS: X.XX
2
TSYS: X.XX
TMBP: X.XX
FAM: X.XX
LABY: X.XX
BRDG: X.XX
PIER: X.XX
CAVA: X.XX
05/05 ROM VERSION DSP0: X.XX
3
DSP2: X.XX
PRXA: X.XX
Menu List
203
No.
Page
06/06 DEV STATUS
Item
Description
I/O: MS, FP, CN,
DCP, VF
Displays the status of each internal device of this unit.
D/A: DCP1, DCP2,
DCP3
EEPROM: CN, DCP,
DR
FRAM: AT
FAN: MB
LSI: DCP1, DCP2,
DCP3, DCP4, TG
SCI: SY, RM
07/07 OPTION
HD/SD-SDI INPUT
a appears when the optional CBK-HD01 HD/SD SDI Input
Board is installed.
COMPOSITE INPUT a appears when the optional CBK-SC02 Analog Composite
Input Board is installed.
[700]
SD REC &amp; PB
[700]
24P REC &amp; PB
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
204
Menu List
a appears when the optional CBKZ-MD01 SD Record and
Playback Software is installed.
a appears when the optional CBKZ-FC02 23.98P Record
and Playback Software is installed.
Menu Operations
indicating the current status of the camcorder
appears on the viewfinder screen.
For details, see “Selecting the display items” on
page 213.
To display the TOP menu
With no menu displayed on the screen, hold down
the MENU knob and set the MENU ON/OFF
switch to ON.
Displaying menus
1
Depending on the internal switch settings, display of
the TOP menu may be disabled. For details, refer to
the Maintenance Manual.
Basic menu operations
By pressing and turning the MENU knob, you can
set various menu items. In the remainder of this
section, the LCD monitor is generally shown as
an example of the menu display, but a similar
display also appears on the viewfinder screen.
5 4 32
1 Viewfinder
2 LCD monitor
3 DISP SEL/EXPAND button
4 MENU ON/OFF switch
5 POWER switch
To select the setting items and values on
the menu
Turn the MENU knob to select in the cases
explained below.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
To use the MENU ON/OFF switch, open the
cover of the menu operating section.
When the camcorder is powered on, set the
MENU ON/OFF switch to ON to display the
menu on the viewfinder screen and the LCD
monitor.
If this is the first time the menu has been used
after the camcorder has been powered on, the
USER menu is displayed. If the menu has been
used before, the last accessed page appears.
When the menu is not displayed on the LCD
monitor
Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button below the
LCD monitor to select the CHAR display.
To clear the menu display from the
screen
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF. (When
the cover of the menu operating section is closed,
this switch is automatically set to OFF.)
When the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/ASPECT
switch on the viewfinder is set to on, the display
Menu Operations
205
To scroll pages
?001 OUTPUT1
TOP
SDI OUT1 SELECT:
OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT:
SDI OUT2 SUPER :
OFF
OFF
TEST OUT SELECT:
TEST OUT SUPER :
VBS
OFF
?005 REC FUNCTION
TOP
CACHE/INTVAL REC:
OFF
DISC EXCHG CACHE:
CLIP CONT REC
:
LIVE LOGGING
:
OFF
OFF
OFF
(The figure shows the PDW-700 menu.)
When ? blinks, turn the MENU knob to switch pages.
To select a menu or setting item
001 OUTPUT1
TOP
001 OUTPUT1
SDI OUT1 SELECT:
OFF
SDI OUT1 SELECT:
TOP
OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT:
SDI OUT2 SUPER :
OFF
OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT:
SDI OUT2 SUPER :
OFF
OFF
TEST OUT SELECT:
TEST OUT SUPER :
VBS
OFF
TEST OUT SELECT:
TEST OUT SUPER :
VBS
OFF
When b appears, turn the MENU knob to move b up and down.
To change a setting value
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
206
001 OUTPUT1
TOP
001 OUTPUT1
TOP
SDI OUT1 SELECT:
OFF
SDI OUT1 SELECT:
OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT:
SDI OUT2 SUPER :
OFF
OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT:
SDI OUT2 SUPER :
OFF
OFF
TEST OUT SELECT:?
TEST OUT SUPER :
VBS
OFF
TEST OUT SELECT:?
TEST OUT SUPER :
Y
OFF
When ? blinks, turn the MENU knob to change the setting (ON/OFF, value, etc.).
To confirm the selection of a menu, a
setting item, or a setting value
Each time you press the MENU knob, the menu
display switches in the following sequence.
Menu Operations
Example: When using the OPERATION menu
TOP menu
CONTENTS page
?000 CONTENTS
&lt;TOP MENU&gt;
USER
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE
ALL
OPERATION
PAINT
MAINTENANCE
FILE
DIAGNOSIS
ADVANCED
If the menu
has not been
used
TOP
01.OUTPUT 1
02.OUTPUT 2
03.SUPERIMPOSE
04.LCD
05.REC FUNCTION
06.ASSIGNABLE SW
07.POWER SAVE
08.VF DISP 1
09.VF DISP 2
10.VF DISP 3
If the menu has
been used before
Menu selection mode
Menu selection page
TOP
000 CONTENTS
SDI OUT1 SELECT:
OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT:
SDI OUT2 SUPER :
OFF
OFF
TEST OUT SELECT:
TEST OUT SUPER :
VBS
OFF
01.OUTPUT 1
02.OUTPUT 2
03.SUPERIMPOSE
04.LCD
05.REC FUNCTION
06.ASSIGNABLE SW
07.POWER SAVE
08.VF DISP 1
09.VF DISP 2
10.VF DISP 3
?001 OUTPUT1
TOP
Setting item selection mode
TOP
OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT:
SDI OUT2 SUPER :
OFF
OFF
TEST OUT SELECT:
TEST OUT SUPER :
VBS
OFF
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
001 OUTPUT1
SDI OUT1 SELECT:
Setting value selection mode
001 OUTPUT1
TOP
SDI OUT1 SELECT:?
OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT:
SDI OUT2 SUPER :
OFF
OFF
TEST OUT SELECT:
TEST OUT SUPER :
VBS
OFF
Note
If the TOP menu has not been displayed since the
camcorder is powered on, “TOP” does not appear at the
upper right on the above screen, and you cannot go to the
TOP menu. In this case, follow the procedure in “To
display the TOP menu” (page 205).
Menu Operations
207
When you set items on the ALL,
OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE,
FILE, and DIAGNOSIS menus, move b to
the menu that contains the desired item in the
TOP menu, and then press the MENU knob.
To display the TOP menu when another
menu is displayed
Move b to “TOP” displayed at the top right of
each page of the menu, and press the MENU
knob. Or flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch repeatedly to ESCAPE until the TOP
menu is displayed.
2
Turn the MENU knob until the desired
page appears.
?005 REC FUNCTION
Using the USER menu (example
menu operation)
This section explains menu operations using the
USER menu as an example. The operations are
the same for the ALL, OPERATION, PAINT,
MAINTENANCE, and DIAGNOSIS menus.
For details about how to operate the USER MENU
CUSTOMIZE menu, see “Editing the USER menu”
(page 209).
1
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
1 Press the MENU knob. Then turn the
MENU knob to move b to the desired
page number.
?U00 CONTENTS
208
3
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
Press the MENU knob.
005 REC FUNCTION
TOP
CACHE/INTVAL REC:
OFF
DISC EXCHG CACHE:
CLIP CONT REC
:
LIVE LOGGING
:
OFF
OFF
OFF
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the
desired item, and then press the MENU
knob.
b changes to z, and z changes to ?.
5
Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting.
Depending on the direction of turning the
knob, the setting value increases, decreases,
switches between ON and OFF, and so on.
01.OUTPUT 1
02.OUTPUT 2
03.SUPERIMPOSE
04.LCD
05.REC FUNCTION
06.ASSIGNABLE SW
07.VF DISP 1
08.VF DISP 2
09.'!' LED
10.MARKER 1
To interrupt changing the settings
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
By setting the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON
again, the values that were displayed when
you interrupted the setting operations will
reappear so you can continue making
settings.
This indicates that the menu
screen can be scrolled.
Menu Operations
DISC EXCHG CACHE:
CLIP CONT REC
:
LIVE LOGGING
:
b and z appear.
TOP
2 Press the MENU knob again.
The page selected in 1 is displayed.
Go to step 3.
OFF
(The figure shows the PDW-700 menu.)
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
Normally, the USER menu appears.
If it does not, turn the MENU knob to move
b to USER in the TOP menu, and press the
MENU knob.
If the USER menu has been used before, the
last accessed page appears. In this case, go to
step 2.
If this is the first time the USER menu has
been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the
USER menu appears. In this case, follow the
procedure below.
TOP
CACHE/INTVAL REC:
6
Press the MENU knob.
z changes to b, and ? changes to z. The
selection is confirmed.
7
To continue setting other items on the
same page, repeat steps from 4 to 6.
8
To end the menu operation, set the
MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
To move to another page
The menu disappears from the screen, and
the display indicating the current status of the
camcorder appears along the top and bottom
of the screen.
To cancel a change or return to the
standard settings
Note
Depending on the setting item, in some cases only the
function to return to the standard setting is valid.
1
Before pressing the MENU knob in step
6 of the above procedure, flick the
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch to the
CANCEL/PRST position.
The message “CANCEL DATA OK?”
appears.
2
OFF
DISC EXCHG CACHE:
CLIP CONT REC
:
LIVE LOGGING
:
OFF
OFF
OFF
(The figure shows the PDW-700 menu.)
When ? appears in front of the page number
Turn the MENU knob to switch pages.
When nothing appears in front of the page
number
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the page
number, and press the MENU knob. Then turn the
MENU knob to switch pages.
Editing the USER menu
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch to the CANCEL/PRST position
again.
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows
you to configure a USER menu that consists only
of pages and items that you need by adding,
deleting or replacing the pages.
The message “CANCEL DATA” appears to
indicate that the change has been cancelled.
To add a new page
To return to the standard settings after
pressing the MENU knob in step 6 of the
above procedure, flick the CANCEL/
PRST/ESCAPE switch to the
CANCEL/PRST position.
The message “PRESET DATA OK?”
appears on the screen.
4
CACHE/INTVAL REC:
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch to the CANCEL/PRST position
again.
This returns to the standard settings.
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows
you to add a new page to the USER menu.
While the EDIT page contains factory-preset
items, the EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19 pages
are all blank in their initial state. You can register
up to 10 items, including blank lines, on each of
these pages.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the TOP menu (see page 205).
2
Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE,
and press the MENU knob.
If this is the first time the USER MENU
CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed, the
CONTENTS page of the menu appears.
Menu Operations
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
3
TOP
?U05 REC FUNCTION
209
?E00 CONTENTS
01.EDIT
02.EDIT
03.EDIT
04.EDIT
05.EDIT
06.EDIT
07.EDIT
08.EDIT
09.EDIT
10.EDIT
3
PAGE
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
TOP
?P00 CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
If the CONTENTS page is displayed,
press the MENU knob. Then select one
of EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19, and
press the MENU knob.
6
Example: when the EDIT USER 9 page is
selected
Add the items as follows.
1 Press the MENU knob, scroll the page
until the desired item appears, and then
press the MENU knob again.
2 Press the MENU knob again, select the
desired item, and then press the MENU
knob.
If a different page other than the
CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the
MENU knob until the desired page appears,
then press the MENU knob.
E10 EDIT USER 9
TOP
01.OUTPUT 1
02.OUTPUT 2
03.SUPERIMPOSE
04.LCD
05.REC FUNCTION
06.ASSIGNABLE SW
07.POWER SAVE
08.VF DISP 1
09.VF DISP 2
10.VF DISP 3
The EDIT USER 9 page appears again,
displaying the newly added item.
7
TOP
Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add the remaining
items.
You can add up to 10 items on one page.
To delete items from a page by using the
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
4
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
line where you want to add an item, and
press the MENU knob.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
EDIT FUNCTION
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new
page” (page 209).
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
item that you want to delete.
3
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch to the CANCEL/PRST position.
The message “DELETE ITEM OK?”
appears.
ESC
INSERT
MOVE
DELETE
BLANK
4
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch to the CANCEL/PRST position
again.
To delete items from a page by using the menu
5
Select INSERT, and press the MENU
knob.
The following menu appears.
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new
page” (page 209).
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
item that you want to delete, and press
the MENU knob.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
210
Menu Operations
3
4
Select DELETE, and press the MENU
knob.
To add a page
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
The previously displayed page appears
again, and the message “DELETE OK? YES
b NO” appears.
1
Display the TOP menu (see page 205).
Select YES, and press the MENU knob.
2
Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE,
and press the MENU knob.
To replace items on a page
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new
page” (page 209).
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
item that you want to replace, and press
the MENU knob.
If this is the first time the USER MENU
CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed, the
CONTENTS page appears. If the menu has
been used before, the last accessed page
appears.
3
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
3
Select MOVE, and press the MENU
knob.
If a different page is displayed, turn the
MENU knob until the EDIT PAGE screen
appears.
The previously displayed page appears
again.
4
The EDIT PAGE appears.
Select the position to which you want to
move the item, and press the MENU
knob.
?E01 EDIT PAGE
To insert a blank line
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
item that you want to replace, and press
the MENU knob.
4
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
3
Select BLANK, and press the MENU
knob.
The previously displayed page appears
again, and a blank line is inserted above the
specified item.
Note
You cannot insert a blank line on a page where 10 items
have already been registered.
To add/delete/replace pages
You can add a new page to the USER menu,
delete a page from the USER menu, or replace
pages, using the EDIT PAGE of the USER
MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
position where you want to add the
page, and press the MENU knob.
5
Select INSERT, and press the MENU
knob.
The CONTENTS page appears.
6
Select the desired page, and press the
MENU knob.
The number and name of the page selected in
step 6 is added above the item selected in
step 4.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a new
page” (page 209).
TOP
01.OUTPUT 1
02.OUTPUT 2
03.SUPERIMPOSE
04.LCD
05.REC FUNCTION
06.ASSIGNABLE SW
07.VF DISP 1
08.VF DISP 2
09.'!' LED
10.MARKER 1
The item selected in step 2 moves to the
position that you selected in step 4.
1
If the CONTENTS page is displayed,
press the MENU knob. Then select
EDIT PAGE, and press the MENU
knob.
To cancel adding a page
Before pressing the MENU knob in step 6,
select ESC at the top right of the screen, and
press the MENU knob.
The EDIT PAGE screen appears again.
Menu Operations
211
To delete a page by using the CANCEL/PRST/
ESCAPE switch
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page”
(page 211).
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
page that you want to delete.
To rename pages
The names of pages (USER 1 to USER 19)
created with EDIT USER 1 to EDIT USER 19
can be changed. (The maximum name length is
15 characters.)
Note
The ASSIGN ITEM SEL page cannot be renamed.
3
4
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch to the CANCEL/PRST position.
1
The message “DELETE PAGE OK?”
appears.
Display the EDIT PAGE NAME1 or
EDIT PAGE NAME2 of the USER
MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.
Flick the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch to the CANCEL/PRST position
again.
EDIT PAGE NAME1: To rename USER1
to USER10
EDIT PAGE NAME2: To rename USER11
to USER19
To delete a page by using the menu
E22 EDIT PAGE NAME1 TOP
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page”
(page 211).
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
page that you want to delete, and press
the MENU knob.
USER1 :
USER2 :
USER3 :
USER4 :
USER5 :
USER6 :
USER7 :
USER8 :
USER9 :
USER10:
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
3
Select DELETE, and press the MENU
knob.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
2
Press the MENU knob. Then select the
page that you want to move, and press
the MENU knob.
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.
3
Select MOVE, and press the MENU
knob.
The previous screen appears again.
Select the position to which you want to
move the page, and press the MENU
knob.
The page selected in step 2 is moved to the
position.
Menu Operations
Select the page that you want to rename
(USER 1 to USER 19), and press the
MENU knob.
A character table appears.
Select YES, and press the MENU knob.
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add a page”
(page 211).
4
212
2
E22 EDIT PAGE NAME1 TOP
USER1 :?
USER2 : USER 2
USER3 : USER 3
USER4 : USER 4
USER5 : USER 5
!#$%&amp;'()*+,-./012345678
9:;&lt;=&gt;?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
QRSTUVWXYZ[&copy;]abcdefghijk
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~
INS DEL RET
ESC END
To replace pages
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
The previously displayed page appears
again, and the message “DELETE OK? YES
b NO” appears at the upper right.
4
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
3
Follow steps 3 and 4 described in
“Setting the shot ID” on page 217 to
enter characters.
4
When you have finished entering the
name, turn the MENU knob to move x
to END, and press the MENU knob.
The entered name is now displayed.
E22 EDIT PAGE NAME1 TOP
USER1 :
USER2 :
USER3 :
USER4 :
USER5 :
USER6 :
USER7 :
USER8 :
USER9 :
USER10:
SPECIAL ITEM
USER 2
USER 3
USER 4
USER 5
USER 6
USER 7
USER 8
USER 9
USER 10
Resetting USER menu settings to
the standard settings
You can return all settings in the USER menu to
standard settings.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the USER FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
?F01 USER FILE
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
TOP
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
F.ID : ssssssssssssssss
USER PRESET
:
Setting the Status
Display on the
Viewfinder Screen and
the LCD Monitor
This section explains the menu settings for the
display of the viewfinder screen. These settings
are also used for the display of the LCD monitor
in the same way.
Selecting the display items
To select the items to be displayed on the
viewfinder screen (with the viewfinder
DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/ASPECT switch set
to on) and the LCD monitor, use the
VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, and VF DISP 3 pages of
the OPERATION menu.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
EXEC
Display the VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, or
VF DISP 3 page of the OPERATION
menu, and press the MENU knob.
2
Press the MENU knob, then select
USER PRESET, and press the MENU
knob.
The message “PRESET OK? YES b NO”
appears.
F01 USER FILE
PRESET OK?
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
TOP
YES NO
:
EXEC
:
EXEC
F.ID : ssssssssssssssss
USER PRESET
3
:
EXEC
Select YES, and press the MENU knob.
The message “COMPLETE” appears, and
the settings for all items in the USER menu
are reset to the standard settings.
2
Select the desired setting item, and
press the MENU knob.
On the VF DISP 1, VF DISP 2, and VF DISP
3 pages, you can select any of the following
items to turn its display on or off.
VF DISP 1 page
Item
VF DISP
VF DISPLAY
MODE
Description
Turning on or off the
viewfinder display a)
Selecting the display
mode b)
DISP EXTENDER Extender indicator
DISP FILTER
Types of the ND filter
DISP WHITE
White balance memory
indicator
DISP GAIN
Gain indicator
DISP SHUTTER Shutter speed and ECS
mode indicator
DISP AUDIO
Audio level indicator
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
213
Item
DISP DISC
DISP IRIS
AUTO: The remaining power is shown as a
percentage value (%) when one of the above
batteries is installed. Otherwise the voltage
(VOLT) is displayed continuously.
VOLT: The voltage (VOLT) is displayed
continuously.
Description
Remaining disc capacity
indicator
Iris opening indicator
a) The viewfinder display can be also turned on or
off by using the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/
ASPECT switch on the viewfinder.
b) For detailed information on the display mode, see
“Change confirmation/adjustment progress
messages” (page 214).
VF DISP 3 page
Item
DISP CLIP
NAME
display. a)
DISP SCENE Turns on or off the display of
FILE
the number of the currently
loaded scene file.
LOW LIGHT Turns on and off the on-screen
warning that the average level
of the video has dropped
beneath a set level.
LOW LIGHT Sets the LOW LIGHT
LEVEL
threshold value.
VF BATT
Specifies the remaining battery
WARNING
capacity level that starts the
flashing warning in the
viewfinder.
ABSOLUTE Turns on and off the mode that
VALUE
displays numeric menu
VF DISP 2 page
Item
DISP ZOOM
DISP COLOR
TEMP
DISP BATT
REMAIN a)
DISP DC IN
DISP 16:9/4:3
ID
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
214
DISP WRR RF
LVL
DISP REC
FORMAT
DISP CLIP
NO(PB)
DISP
TIMECODE
DISP ALAC
Description
Zoom position indicator
Displays the color
temperature.
Displays the battery
voltage/remaining capacity
of an internal battery pack
or an external battery
connected to the DC IN
connector.
Displayed when the power
is supplied from an external
battery connected to the
DC IN connector.
Displays the video aspect
ratio (16:9 or 4:3). (When
the CBKZ-MD01 is
installed.)
Displays the reception level
of the wireless microphone.
Displays the recording
format.
During playback, displays
the clip number and total
number of clips.
Displays the timecode.
Aberration correction
function display
a) When an Anton Bauer battery system or a BPGL65/GL95 battery pack is installed, the
remaining battery power is shown as a
percentage value (%) according to the setting of
this item.
INT: When one of the above batteries is
installed, the remaining power is shown as a
percentage value (%) when there is a change
in the value or when the power is low.
Description
Selects the type of clip name to
settings as absolute values. b)
a) Displayed clip names are also linked to the
settings of “Display Title” and “Planning Clip
Name in Clip Info. Area” in the Disc Menu.
b) This makes it possible to display settings that
include reference settings, stored with STORE
ALL PRESET or other functions, as absolute
values.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired setting (ON, OFF, or value), and
press the MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
Change confirmation/adjustment
progress messages
You can limit or suppress the messages that give
details of setting changes and adjustment
progress and results by setting a display mode.
The conditions under which messages are
displayed and their correspondence with the
display mode are as follows:
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor
Y: Message is displayed.
N: Message is not displayed.
Message display
condition
When the filter
selection has been
changed
When the gain
setting has been
changed
Message
FILTER: n (where
n = 1, 2, 3, 4)
Display
mode
setting
1 2 3
N N Y
GAIN: n (where n N N Y
= –6dB, –3dB, 0dB,
3dB, 6dB, 9dB,
12dB, 18dB, 24dB,
30dB, 36dB, 42dB)
When the setting of WHITE: n (where n N N Y
the WHITE BAL
= A CH, B CH,
switch has been
PRESET) or ATW:
changed
RUN
When the
DCC: ON (or OFF) N Y Y
OUTPUT/DCC
switch has been set
to DCC ON or OFF
:SHUTTER:
N Y Y
When the shutter
1/100 (or 1/125,
speed and mode
1/250, 1/500, 1/
setting has been
1000, 1/2000, ECS)
changed a)
When the black or
white balance has
been adjusted
E.g. AWB : OK
N Y Y
Changing the display mode
1
Display the VF DISP 1 page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select VF DISP MODE, and press the
MENU knob.
3
Select the desired display mode, and
press the MENU knob.
Setting the marker display
Switch the display of the center and safety zone
markers on or off, and select whether the area
1
Display the MARKER 1 or MARKER 2
page of the OPERATION menu, and
press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the
MARKER 1 and MARKER 2 pages.
MARKER 1 page
Item
MARKER
Description
To hide all markers, set to
“OFF”.
CENTER
To display the center marker,
set to “ON”.
CENTER
Selects the display mode of the
MARK
center marker.
SAFETY
To display the safety zone, set
ZONE
to “ON”.
SAFETY
Selects the safety zone range
AREA
(80%, 90%, 92.5% or 95%).
ASPECT
To display the aspect marker,
set to “ON”.
ASPECT
Selects the aspect mode (15:9/
SELECT
14:9/13:9/4:3/1.85/2.35).
To make the areas out of the
ASPECT
selected aspect marker dimmer,
MASK a)
set to “ON”.
ASPECT
To set the mask level, when the
MASK LVL ASPECT MASK is set to
“ON”.
To display the effective pixel
100%
MARKER b) area, set to “ON”.
a) The ASPECT MASK setting affects the
viewfinder and LCD monitor display. In the
following cases, it also affects the VBS signal.
• When TEST OUT SELECT on the OUTPUT 1
page is set to VBS.
• When both TEST OUT SUPER on the
OUTPUT 1 page and SUPER(MARKER) on
the SUPER IMPOSE page are set to ON.
On the PDW-700, ASPECT MASK is ignored
for displays in the viewfinder when the following
are true.
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
a) This is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the
SHUTTER selector is set to ON.
indicated by the safety zone marker is 80%, 90%,
92.5%, or 95% of the screen area.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
215
• TEST OUT SELECT on the OUTPUT 1 page
is set to HD-Y, and a cable is connected to the
TEST OUT connector.
• TEST OUT SELECT on the OUTPUT 1 page
is set to HD-Y, and TEST OUT SAVE on the
POWER SAVE page is set to OFF.
b) On the PDW-F800, 100% MARKER is disabled
when the focus assist indicator is displayed.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
Note
The four items ASPECT, ASPECT SELECT,
ASPECT MASK, and ASPECT MASK LVL are
ignored when the recording format is IMX50/40/30
or DVCAM and the aspect ratio is 4:3.
MARKER 2 page
Item
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Description
USER BOX a) Turns the display of the box
cursor on and off.
USER BOX Sets the width of the box
WIDTH
cursor (distance from center to
left or right edge).
USER BOX Sets the height of the box
HEIGHT
cursor (distance from center to
top or bottom edge).
USER BOX Sets the horizontal position of
H POS
the center of the box cursor.
USER BOX Sets the vertical position of the
V POS
center of the box cursor.
CENTER H Sets the horizontal position of
POS
the center marker.
CENTER V Sets the vertical position of the
POS
center marker.
ASPECT
Turns the display of the aspect
SAFE ZONE safety zone on and off.
ASPECT
Selects the range of the aspect
SAFE AREA safety zone (80%/90%/92.5%/
95%).
a) On the PDW-F800, USER BOX is disabled when
FOCUS AREA MARK on the FOCUS ASSIST
page of the OPERATION menu is set to “ON”.
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting, and press the MENU knob.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
Setting the viewfinder
You can make settings for viewfinder screen
display functions.
216
Display the VF SETTING page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the VF
SETTING page.
Item
ZEBRA
Description
Turns the zebra display on or
off. a), b)
ZEBRA
Selects ZEBRA 1, ZEBRA 2 or
SELECT
BOTH.
ZEBRA 1
Adjusts the level of the zebra 1
DET. LVL
(20% to 70% to 107%) display.
ZEBRA 1
Adjusts the aperture level of the
APT. LVL
zebra 1 display. (1% to 10% to
20%)
ZEBRA 2
Adjusts the level of the zebra 2
DET. LVL
(52% to 100% to 109%)
display.
VF DETAIL Adjusts the sharpness of the
LEVEL
viewfinder (–99 to 99).
VF ASPECT Specifies whether to set the
(SD)
viewfinder screen and LCD
monitor aspect ratio
automatically or to set it to 16:9
when the IMX50/40/30 or
DVCAM recording format is
selected.
When “16:9” is selected, then
the screen is always displayed
as a 16:9 screen (before being
cut out to 4:3), even when
ASPECT RATIO (SD) is set to
“4:3”.
a) If you are using a viewfinder which is not
equipped with a ZEBRA switch, use this item to
turn the display on and off. If you are using a
viewfinder with a ZEBRA switch, you can turn
the display on and off either with the ZEBRA
switch or with this menu operation.
b) On the PDW-F800, the zebra display is included
in the HDSDI signals output from the SDI OUT
2 connector when all of the following are true.
• SDI OUT 2 SELECT on the OUTPUT 1 page
is set to HDSDI.
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor
• Both SDI OUT 2 SUPER on the OUTPUT 1
page and SUPER(ZEBRA) on the SUPER
IMPOSE page are set to ON.
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting, and press the MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
Item
Description
SHOT 16:9 Turns the following function on
CHARA
and off: When displaying aspect
ratio 4:3 video, record
superimposed “16:9” in the
locations where 16:9 video is
cut.
SHOT
Selects whether or not the
BLINK
blinking * is superimposed (ON
CHARA
or OFF).
Recording shot data
superimposed on the color bars
In the SHOT DISP page of the USER menu, you
can select which shot data is recorded
superimposed on the color bars. You can also
select which of the shot IDs (1 to 4) set in the
SHOT DATA page is recorded superimposed on
the picture.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the SHOT DISP page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
You can set the following items on the SHOT
DISP page.
Item
SHOT
DATE
SHOT
TIME
SHOT
MODEL
NAME
SHOT
SERIAL
NO.
SHOT ID
SEL
Description
Selects whether or not the shot
data is superimposed (ON or
OFF).
Selects whether or not shot time
is superimposed (ON or OFF).
Selects whether or not the model
name is superimposed (ON or
OFF).
Selects whether or not the serial
number is superimposed (ON or
OFF).
Selects whether or not the shot
ID set on the SHOT ID page is
superimposed. a)
3
Turn the MENU knob to select whether
or not to record the selected item
superimposed on the color bars or the
SHOT ID number, and press the
MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
To carry out superimposed recording
To actually record the items selected for
superimposed recording on the SHOT DISP page,
set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to BARS, DCC
OFF.
The items selected for superimposed recording
appear on the screen and are recorded
superimposed on the color bars.
Example display: when SHOT DATA is set to
ON
08/03/15
Setting the shot ID
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
a) To carry out superimposed recording, select the
SHOT ID number (1 to 4). Not to carry out
superimposed recording, select “OFF”.
You can set a shot ID of up to 12 alphanumeric
characters, spaces, and symbols.
When the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to BARS,
DCC OFF, this shot ID is output with the color
bar signal. You can set four shot IDs (ID-1 to
ID-4).
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor
217
2 Turn the MENU knob until the x mark
moves to the character position that
you want to select, then press the
MENU knob.
Note
When the menu is displayed, the shot ID is not displayed
even if the color bar signal is output.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
017 SHOT ID
ID-1
ID-2
ID-3
ID-4
Display the SHOT ID page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
!#$%&amp;'()*+,-./012345678
9:;&lt;=&gt;?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~
INS DEL RET
ESC END
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
017 SHOT ID
ID-1
ID-2
ID-3
ID-4
:
:
:
:
TOP
ssssssssssss
ssssssssssss
ssssssssssss
ssssssssssss
TOP
:?+
: ssssssssssss
: ssssssssssss
: ssssssssssss
4
Repeat step 3 for each of the remaining
characters.
5
When the input is complete, turn the
MENU knob to move the x mark over
END, then press the MENU knob.
This ends the input, and returns to the
original SHOT ID page.
2
Select one of ID-1 to ID-4, and press the
MENU knob.
A x mark appears over the first character
position in the string, and characters can now
be input.
017 SHOT ID
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
ID-1
ID-2
ID-3
ID-4
To delete a character
Enter or change the shot ID.
In step 3 of “Setting the shot ID” (page 217),
move the x mark over DEL, and press the
MENU knob.
This deletes the character under the x mark in the
shot ID row.
To cancel deleting the character, move the x
mark over RET, and press the MENU knob.
When you are entering the whole shot ID, go
to 2.
To cancel changing shot ID
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the x
mark to the character which you want
to change, then press the MENU knob.
017 SHOT ID
ID-1
ID-2
ID-3
ID-4
Before executing step 5 of “Setting the shot ID”
(page 217), move the b mark over ESC, then
press the MENU knob or flick the CANCEL/
PRST/ESCAPE switch to ESCAPE.
TOP
:? x
: ssssssssssss
: ssssssssssss
: ssssssssssss
!#$%&amp;'()*+,-./012345678
9:;&lt;=&gt;?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~
INS DEL RET
ESC END
218
In step 3 above, move the x mark over INS, and
press the MENU knob.
To cancel inserting a space, move the x mark
over RET, then press the MENU knob.
TOP
:? x
: ssssssssssss
: ssssssssssss
: ssssssssssss
!#$%&amp;'()*+,-./012345678
9:;&lt;=&gt;?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~
INS DEL RET
ESC END
3
To insert a space
Displaying the status
confirmation screens
You can confirm the settings or status of the
camcorder on the LCDs by displaying the
following four screen.
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor
ABNORMAL &lt;!&gt; screen
This window allows you to confirm why the !
(warning) indicator lights in the viewfinder.
You can use the ‘!’ LED page of the
OPERATION menu to set whether or not the !
(warning) indicator lights.
You can set the following items on the SET
STATUS page.
SYSTEM screen
This screen displays information such as the
system frequency, the recording format, whether
output from the TEST OUT connector is on or
off, and the type of output signal.
STATUS
SYSTEM
STATUS
FUNCTION
FUNCTION screen
This screen displays the functions assigned to the
ASSIGN switches, the detection level, and other
information.
STATUS
AUDIO
AUDIO STATUS screen
This screen allows you to confirm the following
items related to audio.
• Audio bit rate
• Setting condition of DF/NDF
• Type of front microphone
• Type of input signal to audio channels 1 to 4
• Input level of audio channels 1 to 4
Item
STATUS
ABNORMAL
Description
Selects whether or not the
ABNORMAL window is
displayed (ON or OFF).
Displays (ON) or hides
(OFF) the SYSTEM menu.
Selects whether or not the
FUNCTION window is
displayed (ON or OFF).
Selects whether or not the
STATUS AUDIO window is
displayed (ON or OFF).
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting, and press the MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
You can use the SET STATUS page of the
OPERATION menu to set whether or not the
status confirmation screens are displayed.
You can use the CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch as the STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch
when the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to OFF
(when the cover of the menu operating section is
closed, OFF is automatically selected).
To disable display of the status
confirmation screens
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the SET STATUS page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
To display the status confirmation
screens
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor
219
Item
TURBO
SW IND
Adjustments and
Settings from Menus
Setting gain values for the GAIN
selector positions
You can set the gain values for the L, M, and H
positions of the GAIN selector, which switches
the gain of the video amplifier.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the GAIN SW page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
SHOCKLESS
GAIN
3
Select the item for the switch position,
then press the MENU knob.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
220
Description
Sets the gain value
corresponding to the L position
of the GAIN selector.
GAIN MID Sets the gain value
corresponding to the M position
of the GAIN selector.
GAIN
Sets the gain value
HIGH
corresponding to the H position
of the GAIN selector.
GAIN
Sets the gain value
TURBO
corresponding to TURBO GAIN
function.
Turn the MENU knob to select the gain
value, and press MENU knob.
Any of –6, –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36 or
42 dB can be set for each of the L, M, H, and
TURBO positions, in any sequence.
You can set the following items on the GAIN
SW page.
Item
GAIN
LOW
Description
OFF: When you operate the
GAIN selector after
pressing the button to which
the TURBO GAIN function
has been assigned once, the
video gain is changed
according to the GAIN
selector operation.
ON: When the video gain is
boosted to the video gain to
the value preset by pressing
the button to which the
TURBO GAIN function has
been assigned once, the
video gain is not changed
even if you operate the
GAIN selector, until you
press the button once more.
Turns shockless gain on or off.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
Selecting the output signals
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the OUTPUT 1 page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the
OUTPUT 1 page.
Adjustments and Settings from Menus
Item
SDI OUT 1
SELECT
SDI OUT 2
SELECT
SDI OUT 2
SUPER
TEST OUT
SELECT
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting, and press the MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
You can assign functions by using the
following items.
Item
ASSIGN SW
&lt;1&gt;
Description
Assigns the function to
ASSIGN 1 (push-type)
switch.
ASSIGN SW
Assigns the function to
&lt;2&gt;
ASSIGN 2 (slide-type)
switch.
ASSIGN SW
Assigns the function to
&lt;3&gt;
ASSIGN 3 (push-type)
switch.
ASSIGN SW
Assigns the function to
&lt;4&gt;
ASSIGN 4 (push-type)
switch.
Assigns the function to
[F800]
ASSIGN 5 (push-type)
ASSIGN SW
switch.
&lt;5&gt;
ASSIGN SW
Assigns the function to RET
&lt;RET&gt;
button on the lens.
Assigns the function to
[700]
COLOR TEMP COLOR TEMP. button.
SW
2
Select the desired switch or button, and
press the MENU knob.
A selection screen for the selected switch or
button appears. You can use these screens to
assign one of the following functions.
Description
Assigns no function.
Assigns the function that
switches between stereo and
monaural when a stereo
microphone is connected.
Assigns execution of
recording in picture cache
mode.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
TEST OUT
SUPER
Setting
Selects the signal output from
the SDI OUT1 connector.
OFF: Do not output video.
HD-SDI: Output HD-SDI.
SD-SDI: Output SD-SDI
Selects the signal output from
the SDI OUT2 connector.
OFF: Do not output video.
HD-SDI: Output HD-SDI.
SD-SDI: Output SD-SDI
Selects whether to superimpose
(ON) or not superimpose (OFF)
text information on the signal
output from the SDI OUT2
connector.
Selects the output signal from
the TEST OUT connector.
VBS: Output composite video
signal. When you select
VBS, connect to the
VIDEO IN connector of
your monitor.
Y: Output HD-Y signal.
R/G/B: Output HD RGB
signal.
LCD: Output a signal like the
display in the LCD
monitor.
Selects whether to superimpose
(ON) or not superimpose (OFF)
text information on the signal
output from the TEST OUT
connector.
Adjustments and Settings from Menus
221
Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 1/
3/4 (push-type) switch, COLOR TEMP.
button (PDW-700), ASSIGN 5 switch
(PDW-F800), or RET button on the lens
Function
OFF
FRONT MIC
Assigning functions to ASSIGN
switches
You can assign the desired function to any of the
ASSIGN switches.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
PICTURE
CACHE
Display the ASSIGNABLE page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
Function
SUPER
(VFDISP&amp;
MENU)
MARKER
RETAKE b)
ATW
RETURN
VIDEO
LENS RET
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
REC SWITCH
TURBO
SWITCH
ZEBRA
FREEZE MIX
COLOR TEMP
SW 3200K
COLOR TEMP
SW 4300K
COLOR TEMP
SW 5600K
COLOR TEMP
SW 6300K
222
Description
Assigns a mixing switch
function that selects mixing
or no mixing of
superimposed viewfinder
and menu text data into the
video signals output from the
SDI OUT 2 or TEST OUT
connector, when SDI OUT 2
SUPER or TEST OUT
SUPER on the OUTPUT 1
page of the OPERATION
menu are set to ON.
Assigns the function that
displays or hides all
markers. a)
Assigns the function that
deletes the last recorded clip.
Assigns the function that
turns auto tracing white
balance ON and OFF.
Assigns the function that
displays in the viewfinder
the HD-Y (1080i) signal
input to the GENLOCK IN
connector. c)
Assigns the functions
executed by the RET button
on the lens (recording review
and so on).
Assigns the function that
starts and stops recording.
Assigns the turbo gain
function.
Assigns the zebra pattern
display function.
Assigns the function that
mixes a still picture
(monochrome) and camera
video (color) (effective for
framing shots).
Assigns the function that
switches the white balance to
3200K.
Assigns the function that
switches the white balance to
4300K.
Assigns the function that
switches the white balance to
5600K.
Assigns the function that
switches the white balance to
6300K.
Adjustments and Settings from Menus
Function
Description
ELECTRICAL Assigns the function that
CC
switches between electrical
CC filters (3200K/4300K/
5600K/6300K).
CC 5600K
Assigns the function that
applies an electrical 5600 K
filter.
ZOOM TELE/ For use with a lens that
supports serial
WIDE d)
communications, assign the
ZOOM TELE setting to
ASSIGN 3, and the WIDE
setting to ASSIGN 4.
ZOOM WIDE/ For use with a lens that
supports serial
TELE d)
communications, assign the
ZOOM WIDE setting to
ASSIGN 3, and the TELE
setting to ASSIGN 4.
SHOT MARK1 Assigns the function that
records a SHOT MARK 1
essence mark.
SHOT MARK2 Assigns the function that
records a SHOT MARK 2
essence mark.
CLIP FLAG
Assign the functions that set
OK
or clear OK, NG, and KEEP
flags during recording or
CLIP FLAG
playback.
NG
CLIP FLAG
KEEP
FOCUS MAG Assigns the function that
magnifies the central part of
the viewfinder picture, for
easier focus adjustment.
(This function does not
affect recorded video or
other signal output.)
DIGITAL
Assigns the function that
EXTENDER e) electronically magnifies the
central part of the picture.
(All video output is
magnified, including
recorded video.)
CLIP CONT
Assigns the function that
REC
turns the Clip Continuous
Rec function on and off.
UA01 to
Assigns the items assigned
in the ASSIGN SEL menu.
UA10 f)
a) Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on
the MARKER page of the USER menu, the
ASSIGN 1/3/4 switches allow you to display or
not to display all markers.
b) This function cannot be assigned to the RET
button on the lens.
c) Even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to OFF
on the ASSIGNABLE SW page of the
OPERATION menu, you can use this switch to
display the image of the return video signal on
the viewfinder.
d) Only the Assign 3 SEL and Assign 4 SEL screens
appear.
e) Video momentarily becomes black and audio is
momentarily muted when the digital extender is
switched on and off.
f) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the
Assign menu.
Function
DIGITAL
Content
Assigns the function that
EXTENDER c) electronically magnifies the
central part of the picture. (All
video output is magnified,
including recorded video.)
CLIP CONT
Assigns the function that
REC
turns the Clip Continuous Rec
function on and off.
UA01 to
Assigns the items assigned in
the ASSIGN SEL menu.
UA10 d)
a) Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on
the MARKER page of the USER menu, the
ASSIGN 2 switch allows you to display or not to
display all markers.
b) The optional CBK-SC02 Analog Composite
Input Board is required for VBS signal input. The
optional CBK-HD01 HD/SD SDI Input Board is
required for SD-SDI/HD-SDI signal input.
c) Video momentarily becomes black and audio is
momentarily muted when the digital extender is
switched on and off.
d) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the
Assign menu.
Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 2
(slide-type) switch
Function
OFF
FRONT MIC
PICTURE
CACHE
SUPER
(VFDISP&amp;M
ENU)
REC VIDEO
SOURCE
markers. a)
Switches the recording target
video between the video shot
by the camera and the video
input from an external device
(VBS or SD-SDI/HD-SDI). b)
ZEBRA
Assigns the zebra pattern
display function.
FREEZE MIX Assigns the function that
mixes a still picture
(monochrome) and camera
video (color) (effective for
framing shots).
Note
For functions that are assigned to the ASSIGN 2
(slide-type) switch, you cannot change those
settings using other menus. The function assigned
to the ASSIGN 2 switch takes precedence over the
menu setting.
3
Select the desired function, and press
the MENU knob.
The function is assigned, and the
ASSIGNABLE SW page appears again.
Operation of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switches when
UA01 to UA10 are assigned
When an on/off switchable function (or menu
item) is assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4
switches, each time the switch is pressed toggles
the function on or off.
When another type of menu item is assigned,
pressing the switch displays the item and its
setting value on the viewfinder screen.
You can then change the setting by pressing and
turning the MENU knob.
The viewfinder screen display disappears
approximately three seconds after the last
operation.
Adjustments and Settings from Menus
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
MARKER
Content
Assigns no function.
Assigns the function that
switches between stereo and
monaural when a stereo
microphone is connected.
Assigns execution of
recording in picture cache
mode.
Assigns a mixing switch
function that selects mixing or
no mixing of superimposed
viewfinder and menu text data
into the video signals output
from the SDI OUT 2 or TEST
OUT connector, when SDI
OUT 2 SUPER or TEST OUT
SUPER on the OUTPUT 1
page of the OPERATION
menu are set to ON.
Assigns the function that
displays or hides all
223
Setting power saving functions
You can limit the function of some output
connectors to save power consumption.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the POWER SAVE page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the
POWER SAVE page.
Item
ETHERNET/
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Description
Enables or disables the
network connector and USB
USB
connector.
a) Enables or disables the
i.LINK(FAM)
i.LINK connector (FAM
function).
Puts the AUDIO OUT
REC AUDIO
OUT
connectors in EE or SAVE
mode.
TEST OUT
Switches the TEST OUT
SAVE
connector power saving
function on and off.
ON: No signals are output if
a cable is not
connected.
OFF: Signals are always
output, regardless of
whether a cable is
connected.
Wi-Fi
Enables or disables the
wireless LAN function.
Setting up a wireless LAN
You can install the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi
adapter in this unit, and set up a wireless LAN as
explained in this section.
When you connect this unit to a computer over a
network, you can make the settings explained here
from a Web menu. For details, refer to the operation
manual supplied with the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi
adapter.
Notes
• The CBKZ-UPG01 Software Upgrade Key must be
installed to make these settings.
• For information about connecting to a wireless LAN,
refer to the operation manual supplied with the
optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi adapter.
• Even when the optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi adapter is
installed in this unit, the message “NO Wi-Fi
ADAPTER!” may appear if you attempt to set up a
wireless LAN immediately after powering the unit on.
If this occurs, wait for a while and try again.
• If the message “IEEE802.1X IS ENABLED!” appears
when you change the settings, execute NET CFG
RESET on the NETWORK 2 page of the
MAINTENANCE menu and then try again.
• The proxy data recording function is disabled
automatically whenever you enable the wireless LAN
connection function.
Before starting, set ETHERNET/USB and Wi-Fi
on the POWER SAVE page of the OPERATION
menu to “ENABL”.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
See “Basic menu operations” (page 205) for
more information about menu operations.
a) The unit must be powered off and on again to
enable changes to this setting.
3
4
Wi-Fi SETUP
:
EXEC
Wi-Fi STATUS :
[-----]
WIRELESS MODE:
802.11b
SSID: (unknown)
Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired setting, and press the MENU
knob.
NETWORK TYPE
CH
AUTH
ENCRYPTION
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
Adjustments and Settings from Menus
TOP
M26 Wi-Fi
2
224
Display the Wi-Fi page of the
MAINTENANCE menu, and then press
the MENU knob.
:
:
:
:
INFRA
1
OPEN
DISABLE
Select “Wi-Fi SETUP” and then press
the MENU knob.
The screen changes to the Wi-Fi SETTING
page.
Wi-Fi SETTING
ESC
SCAN NETWORKS:
EXEC
SSID: 00:11:22:33:44:55
NETWORK TYPE :
ADHOC
CH
:
1
AUTH
:
OPEN
ENCRYPTION
:
DISABLE
To specify a connection destination
manually
Specify the following items on the Wi-Fi
SETTING page.
SET
3
If you do not want to specify a connection
destination on this page, or if no connection
destination was detected, select “ESC” and
then press the MENU knob to return to the
Wi-Fi SETTING page.
Specify the connection destination (see
the next section for how to specify it).
Item name
Setting
SSID (network name) Up to 32 alphanumeric
characters or symbols
To specify a connection destination by
automatic detection
NETWORK TYPE
(connection mode)
1
CH (wireless channel) 1 to 11 (can be specified
only in ad hoc mode)
On the Wi-Fi SETTING page, select
“SCAN NETWORKS” and then press
the MENU knob.
The screen changes to the NETWORKS
page, and automatic detection of the
connection destination starts.
Several minutes may be required for network
detection.
P00 NETWORKS
SCAN
AUTH (network
authentication)
ESC
01.SSID:
TYPE: ADHOC
LVL : 4
MODE: 802.11b/g/n
TYPE: INFRA
LVL : 3
MODE: 802.11b/g/n
This page displays the following network
items.
2
Item
Description
SSID
Network name
TYPE
Network connection mode
INFRA: Infrastructure mode
ADHOC: Ad hoc mode
LVL
Signal strength
0 (minimum) to 4 (maximum)
MODE
IEEE 802.11 standard
Select the desired access point or
computer from the detected items, and
then press the MENU knob.
You return to the Wi-Fi SETTING page.
Check the various setting items.
OPEN: Open system
authentication
SHARED: Shared key
authentication
WPA: WPA (Wi-Fi
Protected Access)
authentication
WPA2: WPA2 (Wi-Fi
Protected Access 2)
authentication
ENCRYPTION (data DISABLE: Disable
encryption)
WEP: WEP (Wired
Equivalent Privacy)
method
TKIP: TKIP (Temporal
Key Integrity Protocol)
method
AES: AES (Advanced
Encryption Standard)
method
Note
Some limitations apply to combinations of the
“NETWORK TYPE”, “AUTH”, and “ENCRYPTION”
settings.
To enter an SSID
Select SSID, press the MENU knob to display the
Wi-Fi&gt;SSID page, and then press the MENU
knob again.
When you press the MENU knob once more, an
x appears over the first character in the input
string, and the unit enters character input mode.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
02.SSID:
INFRA: Infrastructure
mode
ADHOC: Ad hoc mode
To return to the Wi-Fi SETTING page
Adjustments and Settings from Menus
225
Wi-Fi&gt;SSID
RET
SSID:?
!#$%&amp;&quot;()+.-,0123456789:
=@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
WXYZ[]^_abcdefghijklmnop
qrstuvwxyz{}~
INS DEL RET
ESC END
Notes
• WPS does not support the following.
- Ad hoc mode
- IEEE 802.1x
• The access point must support WPS.
• In addition to the settings made here, you must also
make network settings on the NETWORK page of the
MAINTENANCE menu.
See steps 3 and 4 in “Setting the shot ID” (page 217)
for information about how to enter characters.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
To set ENCRYPTION options
Depending on the setting of ENCRYPTION, you
must set the following options.
1
When ENCRYPTION is WEP:
Item name
Setting
WEP KEY INDEX
1 to 4
INPUT SELECT
ASCII5: 5 characters ASCII
(network key format
format
and length)
ASCII13: 13 characters
ASCII format
HEX10: 10 hexadecimal
digits
HEX26: 26 hexadecimal
digits
KEY (network key)
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
226
ASCII characters or
hexadecimal number (format
specified with INPUT
SELECT)
See “Basic menu operations” (page 205) for
more information about menu operations.
2
M25 WPS
3
ASCII characters or
hexadecimal number (format
specified with INPUT
SELECT)
TOP
Wi-Fi
:
ENABL
WPS MODE
: ONE PUSH
WPS START
:
EXEC
WPS STATUS
:
-----
Set WPS MODE to one of the following.
ONE PUSH: Connect using the one push
method
PIN CODE: Connect using the PIN code
entry method.
Setting
INPUT SELECT
ASCII8-63: 63 characters
(network key format
ASCII 8-bit format
and length)
HEX64: 64 hexadecimal
digits
KEY (network key)
Select “ENABLE” and then press the
MENU knob.
The screen changes to the operation screen.
When ENCRYPTION is TKIP or AES:
Item name
Display the WPS page of the
MAINTENANCE menu and then press
the MENU knob.
When you select “PIN CODE”
A PIN item appears. Execute “UPDATE” in
that item to display a PIN code for this unit.
4
Select “WPS START” and then press
the MENU knob.
To specify a connection destination by
WPS operations
WPS setup starts. During execution, the
progress and results appear after WPS
STATUS.
SCANNING: Scanning for an access point
OK: Detection successful
NG: Detection failed
In infrastructure mode only, you can use WPS
(Wi-Fi Protected Setup) to specify a connection
destination (access point) semi-automatically.
When execution finishes, the screen changes
to the ACCESS PNT page.
See steps 3 and 4 in “Setting the shot ID” (page 217)
for information about how to enter the key.
Adjustments and Settings from Menus
5
Select the desired connection
destination from the detected access
points, and then press the MENU knob.
Setting the color temperature
manually
You can manually adjust the value of the white
balance by setting the color temperature.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
By setting an offset for the value of auto white
balance, you can make the picture warmer or
colder.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the WHITE page of the PAINT
menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Specifying an offset for the auto
white balance setting
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items on the
WHITE page.
Item
COLOR
TEMP &lt;A&gt;
The above table shows the adjustment of the
white balance of channel A. Items followed
by &lt;B&gt; are used to adjust the white balance
of channel B.
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting, and press the MENU knob.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set
all of the desired items.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select the desired item, and press the
MENU knob.
You can set the following items in the
OFFSET WHT page.
Item
Description
OFFSET
When this item is set to ON,
WHITE &lt;A&gt; the offset adjusted on this page
is added to the white balance
for channel A.
WARMWhen OFFSET WHITE &lt;A&gt;
COOL &lt;A&gt; is “ON”, sets the offset for the
white balance of channel A,
using the color temperature.
Adjust the value while looking
at the real image because error
tends to be bigger for
adjustment of high color
temperature.
WARMAdjusts the value more
COOL BAL precisely if the adjustment by
&lt;A&gt;
WARM-COOL &lt;A&gt; is not
satisfactory.
OFFSET
When this item is set to ON,
WHITE &lt;B&gt; the offset adjusted on this page
is added to the white balance
for channel B.
WARMWhen OFFSET WHITE &lt;B&gt;
COOL &lt;B&gt; is “ON”, sets the offset for the
white balance of channel B,
using the color temperature.
Adjust the value while looking
at the real image because error
tends to be bigger for
adjustment of high color
temperature.
Adjustments and Settings from Menus
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
Description
Sets the color temperature for
the desired value. Adjust the
value while looking at the real
image because error tends to be
bigger for adjustment of high
color temperature.
C TEMP
Adjusts the value more
BAL &lt;A&gt;
precisely when the color
temperature adjustment
through COLOR TEMP is not
satisfactory.
R GAIN &lt;A&gt; Changes only the value of R
GAIN.
B GAIN &lt;A&gt; Changes only the value of B
GAIN.
Display the OFFSET WHT page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
227
Item
WARMCOOL BAL
&lt;B&gt;
3
Description
Adjusts the value more
precisely if the adjustment by
WARM-COOL &lt;B&gt; is not
satisfactory.
Set the WHITE BAL switch to the
channel (A or B) that you want to set.
Note
If the WHITE BAL switch is not set to A or B, the
adjusted value is not reflected in the video output
even though you carry out the following operation.
4
Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting, and press the MENU knob.
If you want to set the other channel, go back
to step 2.
Selecting the lens file
The LENS FILE page of the USER menu allows
you to change the lens file according to the lens in
use.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
228
Display the LENS FILE page of the
USER menu, and press the MENU
knob.
The LENS FILE page shows the name (F.ID)
of the currently selected lens file.
The lens name (L.ID) and manufacturer
(L.MF) appear when a lens that supports
serial communications is mounted.
U17 LENS FILE
TOP
LENS FILE SELECT:
1
F.ID:No Offset
&lt;LENS INFORMATION&gt;
L.ID: J16ax8B4 IRSD
L.MF: Canon
2
Select LENS FILE SELECT, and press
the MENU knob.
3
Turn the MENU knob to change the
setting, and press the MENU knob.
Adjustments and Settings from Menus
Setting the UMID data
What is a UMID?
The UMID (Unique Material Identifier) is a
unique identifier for audio-visual material
defined by the SMPTE330M-2003 standard.
The UMID may be used either as the 32-byte
Basic UMID or as the Extended UMID, which
includes an additional 32 bytes of Source Pack to
make a total 64 bytes.
For details, refer to SMPTE 330M.
Globally unique ID is automatically recorded in
clip units.
The Extended UMID is metadata that provides
additional information such as location, time/
date, company and so on.
Using the Extended UMID
You have to enter a country code, organization
code and user code. Set the country code referring
to the ISO 3166 table, and set the organization
code and user code independently.
For details, see “About UMID ownership
information” (page 229).
Functions of UMID data
The UMID data enables the followings:
• Add a globally unique ID to every clip of audiovisual material. The unique ID is used to detect
the material source and to link it with the
original source material.
• Distinguishing between original material and
copied material. 00 is added to the Instance
Number for original material.
• Recording based on the UTC. The UTC is used
when recording the UMID. This enables
uniform control of source material recorded all
over the world based on the universal timecode.
• Calculating the date difference among source
materials. The source material is recorded based
on the MJD (Modified Julian Date), which
enables easy calculation of date difference
among source materials.
To set UMID ownership information
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the UMID SET page of the
OPERATION menu, and press the
MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Set the following item.
Item
COUNTRY CODE
ORGANIZATION
USER CODE
TIME ZONE
Contents
Country code
Organization code
User code
Time difference from
UTC
For details on how to enter characters, see
“Setting the shot ID” (page 217).
3
Press the MENU knob.
About UMID ownership information
USER CODE
Enter the 4-byte alphanumeric strings for user
identification.
The user code is registered with each organization
locally. It is usually not centrally registered.
When the country code is less than 4 bytes, enter
the country code from the beginning of the 4
bytes and enter the space character (20h) in the
remaining strings.
This user code is determined by the organization.
The methods used depend on the organization.
Note
User code cannot be entered when no organization code
has been entered.
TIME ZONE
Set the time difference from UTC.
Notes
• The UTC is calculated based on the local time, using
the time zone. If the time zone is not set, the UTC is not
recorded correctly.
• When you change the time zone, adjust the internal
clock to local time and turn the power of the camcorder
off and then the power on again.
Chapter 6 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings
COUNTRY CODE
Enter an abbreviated alphanumeric string (4-byte
alphanumeric strings) according to the values
defined in ISO 3166-1.
There are about 240 country codes.
Find your own country code on the following
home page.
Refer to ISO 3166-1:
http://www.iso.org/iso/country-codes/
iso_3166_code_lists.htm
When no organization code has been acquired, it is
forbidden to enter an arbitrary string. As a rule, the
code “00” must be entered. Freelance operators who do
not belong to an origination should enter “~”.
• There are no problems in recording or playing back
audio-video signals, if ORGANIZATION is not set.
When the country code is less than 4 bytes, the
active part of the code will occupy the first part of
the 4-bytes and the remainder must be filled with
the space character (20h).
Example: In the case of Japan
For Japan, if the country code is JP, it is 2 bytes,
if JPN, it is 3 bytes.
Thus, enter the following:
JP_ _
or
JPN _
where _ represents a space.
ORGANIZATION (organization code)
Enter an abbreviated 4-byte alphanumeric string
for the organization code.
Notes
• Organization codes must be acquired by applying to
the SMPTE registration office.
Adjustments and Settings from Menus
229
Chapter
7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
Handling the “Memory
Stick”
The “Memory Stick” can be inserted to or
removed from the camcorder with the power
turned on or off.
”Memory Sticks” usable with this
camcorder
With this camcorder, you can use a Sony
“Memory Stick”, “Memory Stick Duo”,
“Memory Stick PRO” whose capacity does not
exceed 4 GB, and “Memory Stick PRO Duo”.
For details, see “About a “Memory Stick”” on page
286.
Note
If it does not fit into the slot properly or if there is some
resistance when you insert it, the “Memory Stick” may
be turned around or upside down. Do not force the
“Memory Stick” into the slot. Confirm the direction of
the notch and arrow on the “Memory Stick” before
inserting the “Memory Stick” and then try inserting it
again.
To remove the “Memory Stick”
1
Check that the access indicator is not lit,
then gently press in the “Memory
Stick” once and release.
The “Memory Stick” pops out.
2
Pull the “Memory Stick” towards you
to withdraw it from the slot.
Note
Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while the access
indicator is lit. You may lose data, or damage the
“Memory Stick”.
Inserting a “Memory Stick”
To protect saved data
To prevent accidental erasure of important setup
data, slide the LOCK switch on the “Memory
Stick” right to the write protect position.
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
230
Label
1
Open the cover of the menu operating
section.
2
Hold the “Memory Stick” with the
notch facing downward and the arrow
facing away from you, and insert the
“Memory Stick” into the “Memory
Stick” slot until it clicks into place. Then
close the cover.
It is now impossible to write or delete data on the
“Memory Stick”. If you try to do so, the message
“MEMORY STICK LOCKED” appears and the
data cannot be overwritten or deleted.
Note
“Memory Stick Duo” and “Memory Stick PRO Duo” do
not have this function.
To format a “Memory Stick”
Note
Do not format the “Memory Stick” using a PC.
Handling the “Memory Stick”
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the MEMORY STICK page of
the FILE menu, and press the MENU
knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select M.S. FORMAT, and press the
MENU knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3
Select “YES” and press the MENU
knob.
Saving and Recalling
User Files
The camcorder is equipped with a “Memory
Stick” slot, which enables you to save the settings
in the USER menu as a user file onto the
“Memory Stick”. You can load these files from
the “Memory Stick” for immediate recall of a
particular setting configuration.
In addition to user files, you can save scene files,
reference files, lens files and ALL files in a
“Memory Stick”.
When a menu is displayed, inserting a “Memory
Stick” displays the appropriate file-related menu
page automatically.
Saving user menu data to the
“Memory Stick”
You can save USER menu settings held in the
camcorder as user files in the “Memory Stick”.
You can save up to 100 user files in the “Memory
Stick”.
Insert the “Memory Stick” then proceed as
follows.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the USER FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
?F01 USER FILE
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
TOP
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
F.ID : ssssssssssssssss
USER PRESET
:
EXEC
To set a file ID for the data to be saved
Set the file ID before going to step 2.
For details on setting the file ID, see “To set the
file ID” on page 232.
Saving and Recalling User Files
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
231
2
Select USER FILE SAVE, and press the
MENU knob.
The USER SAVE page appears.
Up to 20 pages, from P00 to P19, can be used
to save user files to the “Memory Stick”.
Each page can hold up to five files.
3
Turn the MENU knob until the page
which contains the desired file number
appears, and press the MENU knob.
4
Select the desired file number, and
press the MENU knob.
The message “SAVE OK? YES b NO”
appears.
If a file number is followed by “NEW FILE”,
this means that the file is empty. If data is
stored in the file, the file number is followed
by the file name.
5
To carry out the save, select YES and
press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b
pointing to NO.
The access indicator lights. When the saving
is completed, the message “COMPLETE”
appears and the access indicator goes off.
If no “Memory Stick” has been inserted
The message “NO MEMORY STICK” will
appear. Insert a “Memory Stick” and carry
out the operation once again.
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
232
If you select a file number where data has
already been saved
The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b
NO” appears.
• To stop overwriting, press the MENU knob
leaving b pointing to NO.
• To overwrite, select YES and press the
MENU knob.
You can select the information displayed on
each USER SAVE or USER LOAD page.
For details, see “To select the file information
items to be displayed” on page 233.
About the USER menu settings to be saved in the
“Memory Stick”
Settings for items on all pages of the USER menu
are saved in the “Memory Stick” as a user file.
Saving and Recalling User Files
Note
The following items cannot be saved.
• LOAD CUSTOM DATA, LOAD OUT OF USER,
BEFORE FILE PAGE, and USER LOAD WHITE on
the USER FILE 2 page
• SCENE WHITE DATA on the REFERENCE page
• SLOW&amp;QUICK, FRAME RATE on the REC
FUNCTION page
• LENS FILE SELECT on the LENS FILE page
• SYSTEM LINE, SYSTEM FREQUENCY, SCAN
MODE, and COUNTRY on the FORMAT page
• NUMERIC on the CLIP TITLE page
• SKIN AREA IND and SKIN DTL SELECT on the
SKIN DETAIL page
• MATRIX AREA IND and MTX(MULTI) AXIS on
the MTX MULTI page
If data cannot be saved
If one of the following error messages appears
during or after the save operation, then the data
was not saved.
Error message
NO MEMORY
STICK
(flashing)
Cause
No “Memory
Stick” is
inserted.
MEMORY
STICK
LOCKED
The LOCK
switch on the
“Memory
Stick” is set to
the write
protect
position.
Circuit or
MEMORY
STICK ERROR “Memory
Stick” fault.
(flashing)
Action
Insert or
reinsert the
“Memory
Stick”.
Set the LOCK
switch to the
write enable
position.
Recheck and
consult a Sony
service
representative.
To set the file ID
You can set an file ID before you save your data
as a user file. This will help you identify the user
file quickly. The file ID that has been set is saved
together with the data.
Note
Set the file ID before saving data in the “Memory Stick”.
Otherwise, the file ID is not saved with the other data.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the USER FILE page of the
FILE menu.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select F. ID, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select DISPLAY MODE, and press the
MENU knob.
3
Select the desired type of file
information, and press the MENU
knob.
A character table appears.
F01 USER FILE
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
TOP
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
F.ID :? x
i#$%&amp;'()*+,-./012345678
9:;&lt;=&gt;?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~
INS DEL RET
ESC END
3
4
Display type
ALL
F.ID
DATE
Follow steps 3 and 4 described in
“Setting the shot ID” on page 217 to
enter characters.
When you have finished entering the
file ID, turn the MENU knob to move x
to END, and press the MENU knob.
The entered file ID is now displayed.
F01 USER FILE
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
TOP
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
:
EXEC
F.ID : ID-001
USER PRESET
MODEL
Loading saved data from a
“Memory Stick”
Note
The data loaded from the “Memory Stick” overwrites the
data saved in the camcorder.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
You can select the user file information items to
be displayed on the USER FILE SAVE page and
USER FILE LOAD page (P00 to P19), that are
the pages used to save and call up the data to and
from “Memory Stick”.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display a USER FILE LOAD page or
USER FILE SAVE page of the USER
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
2
Select USER FILE LOAD, and press
the MENU knob.
The USER LOAD page appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob until the page
which contains the desired file number
appears, then press the MENU knob.
4
Select the desired file number, and
press the MENU knob.
The message “LOAD OK? YES b NO”
appears.
5
To carry out the load, select YES and
press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b
pointing to NO.
The access indicator lights.
Saving and Recalling User Files
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
To select the file information items to be
displayed
Display the USER FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
File ID that has been set appears.
When you carry out a user file save operation (see
page 231), the set file ID is saved to the “Memory
Stick” together with the data.
Description
File ID (10 characters) and
date (year/month/day)
File ID (16 characters)
Date saved (year/month/day/
hours/minutes/seconds)
Information on the model
233
When the load is completed, the message
“COMPLETE” appears and the access
indicator goes off.
If data cannot be loaded
If one of the following error messages appears
during or after the load operation, then the data
was not loaded.
Error
message
NO
MEMORY
STICK
(flashing)
MEMORY
STICK
ERROR
(flashing)
FILE
ERROR
(flashing)
Cause
Action
No “Memory
Stick” is
inserted.
Insert or reinsert
the “Memory
Stick”.
Circuit or
Recheck, and
“Memory Stick” consult a Sony
fault.
service
representative.
The “Memory
Data saved to a
Stick” contains “Memory Stick”
data that cannot using a
be loaded into
camcorder
this camcorder. whose model is
not the same as
this camcorder
cannot be loaded
into this
camcorder.
Returning the user file settings to
the standard settings
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
234
Display the USER FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select USER PRESET, and press the
MENU knob.
Saving and Loading
Scene Files
You can save various settings for shooting a
particular scene as a scene file. By loading the
scene file, you can quickly recreate setup
conditions suitable for the scene. You can save up
to five scene files in the camcorder memory and
up to 100 scene files in a “Memory Stick” .
You can also load data from the “Memory Stick”
into the camcorder memory.
Data that can be saved in a scene file
You can save the following data in a scene file:
• Values adjusted using the PAINT menu
• Shutter speed settings made in the standard
mode and ECS mode
• The white balance data included in a scene file
depends on the SCENE WHITE DATA setting
on the REFERENCE page of the FILE menu.
Saving a scene file
To save a scene file to the “Memory Stick”, insert
the “Memory Stick” into the “Memory Stick” slot
before starting the following operation.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Display the SCENE FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operation, see “Basic menu
operations” on page 205.
?F04 SCENE FILE
TOP
s1
:STANDARD
s2
:STANDARD
s3
:STANDARD
s4
:STANDARD
s5
:STANDARD
s STANDARD
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
F.ID: STANDARD
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
To set a file ID for the data to be saved
Set the file ID before going to step 2.
For details on setting the file ID, see “To set the
file ID” on page 232.
Saving and Loading Scene Files
2
3
Select SCENE STORE, and press the
MENU knob.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
The SCENE STORE page appears.
1
Press the MENU knob, then select the
desired file number, and press the
MENU knob again.
The file to be saved is selected.
When no “Memory Stick” is inserted
Select the desired memory number, and press
the MENU knob.
When the save is completed, the SCENE
FILE page appears again.
When you select a file number where data
has already been saved
The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b
NO” appears.
• To cancel the overwriting, press the MENU
knob leaving b pointing to NO.
• To overwrite, select YES and press the
MENU knob.
When a “Memory Stick” is inserted
You can use up to 20 pages, from P01 to P20,
to save scene files in the “Memory Stick”.
Each page can hold up to five files.
You can select the file information items
to be displayed on each page of SCENE
STORE and SCENE RECALL.
For details, see “To select the file information
items to be displayed” on page 233.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select SCENE STORE, and press the
MENU knob.
One of the SCENE STORE pages appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select the
desired SCENE STORE page, and
press the MENU knob.
4
Select 5FILE SAVE B MEM1-5, and
press the MENU knob.
The message “STORE OK? YES b
NO”appears.
5
To carry out the save, select YES and
press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b
pointing to NO.
When the save is completed, the message
“COMPLETE” appears.
Note
If files have been saved in the page selected in step 3,
those files are replaced with files loaded from the
camcorder memory. For example, files from 001 to 005
are replaced by the above procedure.
To set the file ID
You can set an file ID before you save your data
as a scene file. This will help you identify the
scene file quickly. The file ID that has been set is
saved together with the data.
You can carry out a scene file ID setting operation
on the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu.
For details about this operation, see the description
of step 2 and following of “To set the file ID” on
page 232.
To save scene files stored in the
camcorder memory to the “Memory
Stick”
The five scene files stored in the camcorder
memory can be saved to the “Memory Stick” all
in a single operation.
Saving and Loading Scene Files
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
1 Turn the MENU knob until the page
which contains the desired file number
appears, then press the MENU knob.
2 Select the desired file number, and
press the MENU knob.
The message “STORE OK? YES b
NO” appears.
3 To carry out the save, select YES and
press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob
leaving b pointing to NO.
Display the SCENE FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
235
To select the file information items to be
displayed
To load a scene file saved in the “Memory
Stick”
You can select the items of file information to be
displayed on the SCENE STORE pages (P01 to
P20) or the SCENE RECALL pages (P01 to P20)
used for saving data to or loading data from a
“Memory Stick”.
You can select the scene file information items to
be displayed on the SCENE STORE page and
SCENE RECALL page of the SCENE FILE
menu.
1 Select SCENE RECALL, and press the
MENU knob.
The SCENE RECALL page appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob until the page
which contains the desired file number
appears, then press the MENU knob.
3 Select the desired file number, and
press the MENU knob.
The message “RECALL OK? YES b
NO” appears.
For details about item selection, see the description
of step 2 and following of “To select the file
information items to be displayed” on page 233.
3
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b
pointing to NO.
When the loading is completed, the message
“COMPLETE” appears. The camcorder is
set up according to the loaded scene file. If no
file is present with a particular file number,
this is shown as “NO FILE”.
Loading scene files
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
2
Display the SCENE FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
To load scene files from the “Memory
Stick” into the camcorder memory
To load the scene file stored in the
camcorder, select the desired file
number, and press the MENU knob.
You can load up to five scene files stored in the
“Memory Stick” into the camcorder memory all
in a single operation.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
s on the left of the file number changes to
x. The camcorder is set up according to the
loaded scene file.
F04 SCENE FILE
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
236
To carry out the recall, select YES and
press the MENU knob.
s1
:SCENE 25
x2
:SCENE 26
s3
:SCENE 27
s4
:SCENE 28
s5
:NO FILE
s STANDARD
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
F.ID :SCENE21
1
TOP
Display the SCENE FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
:
:
EXEC
EXEC
When DISP SCENE FILE on the VF DISP 3
page of the OPERATION menu is set to
“ON”, the number of the currently loaded
scene file is displayed on the viewfinder
screen (see page 36).
To cancel the selected scene file
Turn the MENU knob to move b to x, and
press the MENU knob again. x changes to
s. The camcorder returns to the settings
before selecting this scene file.
Saving and Loading Scene Files
Select SCENE RECALL, and press the
MENU knob.
The SCENE RECALL page appears.
3
Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE
RECALL page which contains the
desired scene files appears, and press
the MENU knob.
4
Select 5FILE LOAD b MEM1-5, and
press the MENU knob.
The message “RECALL OK? YES b NO”
appears.
P01 SCENE RECALL
ESC
RECALL OK?
YES NO
DISPLAY MODE
:
ALL
001.SCENE1
002.SCENE2
003.NO FILE
004.SCENE4
005.SCENE5
***.5FILE LOAD
5
Jumping to a File-Related
Menu Page When Inserting
a “Memory Stick”
MEM1-5
To carry out the load (recall), select
YES and press the MENU knob.
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b
pointing to NO.
When loading is complete, the message
“COMPLETE” appears and the access
indicator goes off.
Notes
• The scene files loaded from the “Memory Stick”
overwrite data saved in the camcorder memory.
• To load the scene file saved in the camcorder
memory when the “Memory Stick” is inserted,
return to the P00 SCENE RECALL page and load
the desired scene file in the camcorder memory.
• When there is no file to be loaded (shown as “NO
FILE”), an existing file of the same number is
unaffected. In the example shown in step 4,
MEM3 is not overwritten.
A “Memory Stick” enables you to save user files,
scene files, lens files, reference files and ALL
files.
The camcorder menu system allows you to make
a setting so that when a “Memory Stick” holding
these files is inserted while in menu operating
mode, a menu page relating to the desired file is
automatically displayed on the screen. Thus you
can proceed to file operation quickly. This is very
convenient especially when you manage data files
using “Memory Stick”s.
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Setting
OFF
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
USER
ALL
SCENE
LENS
REFER
USER 1
Select STANDARD, and press the
MENU knob.
s displayed on the left of STANDARD
changes to x. When x changes to s once
again, the settings of the camcorder are reset
to the standard settings.
If you press the MENU knob again while x
is displayed, the operation is cancelled and
the camcorder returns to the settings before
STANDARD was selected.
3
Description
Disables this function. Menu pages
do not change when a “Memory
Stick” is inserted.
Jumps to the USER FILE page.
Jumps to the ALL FILE page.
Jumps to the SCENE FILE page.
Jumps to the LENS FILE 1 page.
Jumps to the REFERENCE page.
Jumps to the USER 1 FILE page.
Turn the MENU knob until the name of
the desired file page appears, then press
the MENU knob.
Note
In the following cases, jumping to the target page is
impossible.
• When the power is turned on after you insert a
“Memory Stick”.
• When OFF is selected on the MS IN &gt; JUMP TO page.
Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page When Inserting a “Memory Stick”
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
Display the SCENE FILE page of the
FILE menu, and press the MENU knob.
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
2
Select MS IN &gt; JUMP TO, and press the
MENU knob.
The MS IN &gt; JUMP TO page allows you to
select one of the following settings.
Returning the scene file settings
to the standard settings
1
Display the MEMORY STICK page of
the FILE menu, and press the MENU
knob.
237
• When any of the following menu pages is already
displayed.
- A file-related page such as the USER FILE page of
the FILE menu
- MEMORY STICK, ALL FILE, SCENE FILE,
LENS FILE, REFERENCE or ROM VERSION
page
Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data
238
Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page When Inserting a “Memory Stick”
Chapter
8 File Operations
Overview
A remote computer can be connected to this unit
and used to operate on recorded data which has
been saved in data files, such as video and audio
data files.
There are two ways to connect a remote
computer.
• FAM connection
Connect the (i.LINK) S400 connector on this
unit to the i.LINK (IEEE1394) connector on the
remote computer, using an i.LINK cable (see
page 245).
• FTP connection
Connect the network connectors on this unit and
the remote computer, using a network cable (see
page 249).
Directory structure
The following figure shows the directory
structure of discs visible to a remote computer.
Note
This structure is not the same as the actual structure
recorded on the disc.
Overview
Chapter 8 File Operations
(Continued)
a) Root directory
b) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING
page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE
c) Files generated when voice over editing is executed on
the PDW-HR1.
239
(Continued)
File operation restrictions
This section explains which operations are
possible on files stored in each directory.
When required, the following operation tables
distinguish reading and writing from partial
reading and writing.
Read: Read data sequentially from the start to the
end of the file.
Partial read: Read only a part of the data in the
file.
Write: Write data sequentially from the start to
the end of the file.
Partial write: Write data to a part of the file only.
Note
Operations other than Read and Partial read are possible
only when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to
recording enabled.
Root directory
Chapter 8 File Operations
240
File name
Content
INDEX.XML
Contains data for management of the
material on the disc.
Contains conversion tables for assigning
user-defined names to clips and clip lists.
Contains metadata to indicate the disc
properties.
Contains a list of materials on the disc,
basic properties, related information, and
information about access methods.
Contains system setting information and
menu setting information for the devices.
ALIAS.XML a)
DISCMETA.XML
MEDIAPRO.XML
SYSPRO.XML
Overview
Operations
Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete
Partial Partial
read
write
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes b)
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
File name
Content
Other files
Files other than the above
a) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING
page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE.
b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM.
Operations
Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete
Partial Partial
read
write
No
No
Notes
• Directories cannot be created in the root directory.
• The directories in the root directory (Clip, Edit, Sub,
UserData, General, and PROAV) cannot be deleted or
renamed.
Clip directory
File name
C*.MXF a)
C*M01.XML a)
C*M02.KLV a)
Other files
Content
Operations
Read/ Write/ Rename Create
Partial Partial
read
write
Clip file created by recording (MXF file) Yes
Yes c)
No b), c) Yes d)
*: 0001 to 9999
Metadata file generated automatically
Yes
No g)
No h)
Yes f)
when C*.MXF file is created.
*: 0001 to 9999
User metadata file. This type of file is
Yes
No g)
Yes f)
Yes f)
generated automatically during recording
via an FTP or FAM connection when the
unit recognizes that an MXF file contains
metadata that was generated by a nonXDCAM device.
*: 0001 to 9999
Files other than the above
No
No
Yes e)
No i)
Yes i)
-
Note
Directories cannot be created in the Clip directory.
Chapter 8 File Operations
a) The “C*” part can be changed to a user-defined name.
b) Overwriting is not possible.
c) Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length, in
a format matching the format (system frequency
(59.94i, 50i, or 25P)) and recording format (MPEG
HD422 and number of audio channels) of the recorded
sections of the disc, and which can be overwritten by
XDCAM. (Partial writing is not possible.)
d) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING
page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE.
e) Any clip may be selected and deleted.
f) Only files which can be written by XDCAM.
g) When the “C*” part of a C*.MXF file name is
changed, a C*M01.XML file (or a C*M02.KLV file)
with the same name in the “C*” part is also changed
automatically.
h) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*M01.XML file
with the same name in the “C*” part is created
automatically.
i) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*M01.XML file
(or a C*M02.KLV file) with the same name in the
“C*” part is also deleted automatically.
Delete
Overview
241
Component directory
File name
P*.MXF a)
Other files
Content
Audio clip files (MXF files)
generated when you execute voice
over editing on the PDW-HR1
*: 0001 to 0099
Files other than the above
Operations
Read/
Write/
Partial
Partial
read
write
Yes
Yes b), c)
-
a) The “P*” part can be handled like a file with a userdefined name.
b) Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length and
which can be written by XDCAM.
c) Overwriting is not possible.
d) Multiple files cannot be opened at the same time.
No
Rename
Create
Delete
Yes e)
Yes b), d)
Yes f)
-
No
-
e) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING
page of the OPERATION menu is set to “FREE”.
f) Selection and deletion of any specified clip is possible.
Note
Directories cannot be created in the Component
directory.
Edit directory
File name
Content
E*E01.SMI a)
Clip list file
*: 0001 to 0099
Metadata file generated automatically
when E*E01.SMI file is created.
*: 0001 to 0099
Files other than the above
E*M01.XML a)
Other files
Chapter 8 File Operations
242
a) The “E*” part can be changed to a user-defined name.
b) Only files which can be written by XDCAM. Partial
writing is not possible.
c) Only when NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING
page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE.
d) Only files which can be written by XDCAM.
e) When the “E*” part of a E*E01.SMI is changed, an
E*M01.XML file with the same name in the “E*” part
is also changed automatically.
f) When an E*E01.SMI file is created, an E*M01.XML
file with the same name in the “E*” part is also
generated automatically.
g) When an E*E01.SMI file is deleted, an E*M01.XML
file with the same name in the “E*” part is also deleted
automatically.
Note
Directories cannot be created in the Edit directory.
Overview
Operations
Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete
Partial Partial
read
write
Yes
Yes d) Yes
Yes b) Yes c)
Yes
Yes b)
No e)
No f)
No g)
-
No
-
No
-
Sub directory
File name
Content
C*S01.MXF a)
Proxy AV data (MXF file) generated
automatically when a C*.MXF file is
created.
*: 0001 to 9999
Files other than the above
Other files
a) The “C*” part can be changed to a user-defined name.
b) When the “C*” part of a C*.MXF file name is
changed, a C*S01.MXF file with the same name in the
“C*” part is generated automatically.
c) When a C*.MXF file is created, a C*S01.MXF file
with the same name in the “C*” part is generated
automatically.
Operations
Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete
Partial Partial
read
write
Yes
No
No c)
No d)
No b)
-
No
-
No
-
d) When a C*.MXF file is deleted, the C*S01.MXF file
with the same name in the “C*” part is also deleted
automatically.
Note
Directories cannot be created in the Sub directory.
UserData directory
File name
Content
Any file
a) UTF-8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length.
(Depending on the character type, file names
(including extension) may be limited to 21
characters.)
Operations
Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete
Partial Partial
read
write
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes a)
The following directory operations are possible in the
UserData directory.
• Directory creation (up to 62 levels, including the
UserData directory)
• Deletion and renaming of directories
General directory
File name
Content
Any file
The following directory operations are possible in the
General directory.
• Directory creation (up to 63 levels, including the
General directory)
• Deletion and renaming of directories
Notes
• The maximum number of files that can be created on
one disc, including directories, is 5,000 for a singlelayer disc and 6,000 for a dual-layer disc.
• File names and directory names can use letters,
numbers, and symbols from the Unicode 2.0 (UTF-8)
character set. 1)
However, the following control characters and
symbols cannot be used.
- Control characters: U+0000 to U+001F, U+007F
- Symbols: &quot;, *, /, :, &lt;, &gt;, ', ?, \, |
Overview
Chapter 8 File Operations
a) UTF-8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length.
(Depending on the character type, file names
(including extension) may be limited to 21
characters.)
Operations
Read/ Write/ Rename Create Delete
Partial Partial
read
write
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes a)
243
• To create a new directory in the General directory, first
create a directory on the desktop and rename it using
only characters that can be used on this unit. Then drag
it from the desktop and drop it in the General directory.
1) The following character codes cannot be used by FAM
connections.
U+010000, U+020000, U+030000, U+040000,
U+050000, U+060000, U+070000, U+080000,
U+090000, U+0A0000, U+0B0000, U+0C0000,
U+0D0000, U+0E0000, U+0F0000, U+100000
PROAV directory
This directory displays individual files on the
disc.
To enable display of the PROAV directory, set
PROAV DISPLAY on the CAM CONFIG 1 page
of the MAINTENANCE menu to “ENABL”.
Chapter 8 File Operations
244
Overview
File Operations in File
Access Mode (for
Windows)
File access mode operating environment
For Windows 7:
Open “Programs and Features” in the control
panel, and then check the version of “ProDisc”.
To enable FAM connections over the i.LINK
connector
(How to select an item in the menu screen: Turn
the MENU knob to move b to the desired item.)
1
Operating system requirements for file operations
by file access mode (called FAM below) are as
follows.
Computer operating system: Microsoft
Windows XP Professional SP3 or higher,
Microsoft Windows Vista Business/Ultimate
(32 bit/64 bit) SP2 or higher, or Microsoft
Windows 7 Professional/Ultimate (32 bit/
64 bit)
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
U07 POWER SAVE
Preparations
Install the FAM driver on the remote computer.
To install the FAM driver
Insert the supplied CD-ROM (XDCAM
Application Software) into the CD-ROM drive of
your computer, navigate to the FAM Driver
directory, and run the installer in the directory for
your operating system, then follow the
installation instructions.
Use Version 2.10 or higher of the FAM driver. The FAM
driver on the supplied CD-ROM is Version 2.10 or
higher.
If a FAM driver is already installed on your computer,
check the version (see the next section).
To check the FAM driver version
For Windows Vista:
(1) Select Control Panel &gt; Programs, open the
Programs and Features window, right click in the
window’s header bar (including the Name,
Publisher, and other headers), and select Others...
(2) In the Choose Details dialog, check the
Version check box and click OK. The Version
column is displayed, allowing you to check the
version of ProDisc.
:
:
DSABL
DSABL
REC AUDIO OUT
:
EE
TEST OUT SAVE
:
ON
Wi-Fi
:
DSABL
Move b to i.LINK(FAM) then press the
MENU knob.
3
Turn the MENU knob to select
“ENABL”, then press the MENU knob.
The message “Valid after power off.”
appears.
4
Power the camcorder off, and then
power it on again.
The setting made in step 3 is enabled.
Making FAM connections
1
Insert a disc into this unit, and put this
unit into the following state.
Recording, playback, search and other
disc operations: Stopped
THUMBNAIL indicator: Off
Disc access by clip deletion, disc
formatting, or other operation:
Stopped
Picture Cache function and Interval Rec
function: Off
Connections between this unit and a
computer by the Live Logging
function: Disconnected
Chapter 8 File Operations
For Windows XP:
Select Control Panel &gt; Add or Remove Programs
&gt; ProDisc, and click on “Click here for support
information.”
TOP
ETHERNET/USB
iLINK(FAM)
2
For details, refer to the ReadMe file contained on the
CD-ROM disc.
Note
Turn the MENU knob to scroll to the
POWER SAVE page of the
OPERATION menu, then press the
MENU knob.
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Windows)
245
Setting of LIVE LOGGING on the REC
FUNCTION page of the
OPERATION menu: Values other than
VIEW (OFF or LIVE)
MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF
Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear
2
3
depending on the number of other peripherals
connected to the remote computer.)
2
You can operate in the same way that you
operate on local drives and files on network
computers.
If this unit is connected to a remote
computer by FTP, log out from the FTP
session (see page 250).
Notes
• If you power this unit off during a FAM
connection, the data transferred thus far is
discarded.
• All file operations are not possible for some types
of files.
Connect the (i.LINK) S400 connector
on this unit to the i.LINK (IEEE1394)
connector on the remote computer,
using an i.LINK cable.
Windows recognizes this unit as a removable
disc, and displays one of the following icons
on the remote computer’s taskbar:
• Windows XP:
• Windows Vista or Windows 7:
The remote computer is now able to perform
file operations when a disc is inserted into
this unit.
Use Explorer to perform file operations
on the disc loaded in this unit.
For details, see “File operation restrictions”
(page 240).
To eject discs from a remote computer
Right click the icon representing this unit in
Explorer, and select Eject from the menu which
appears.
Exiting file operations
Note
You will not be able to log in if you put the unit into
the state described in step 1 after connecting the
cable. To log in, disconnect the cable, put the unit
into the state described in step 1, and connect it
again.
When you make your first FAM connection
The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog appears
when you connect this unit to your computer.
Select “Install the software automatically
(Recommended)”, and then click the Next button.
Click the Finish button when the software
installation finishes.
Chapter 8 File Operations
246
Operation limitations during FAM connections
• With the exception of the EJECT button,
recording buttons and playback control buttons
are disabled.
• VDR of this unit cannot be controlled from
devices connected to the REMOTE connector
(8-pin) and (i.LINK) S400 connector.
Operating on files
1
Start Explorer.
Check that a drive letter has been assigned to
this unit. (The drive letter will differ
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Windows)
For Windows XP or Windows Vista
Note
Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1 to
3.
1
Do one of the following on the
or
icon displayed in the remote computer’s
taskbar.
• Double click.
• Right click to display the context menu and
select “Safely Remove Hardware” from the
context menu.
The Safely Remove Hardware dialog
appears.
2
Select “Sony XDCAM PDW-**** IEEE
1394 SBP2 Device” (****: “F800” or
“700”) and click “Stop”.
The Stop a Hardware device dialog appears.
3
Select “Sony XDCAM PDW-**** IEEE
1394 SBP2 Device” (****: “F800” or
“700”) and click “OK”.
In Windows XP, “Sony XDCAM PDW**** IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device” (****:
“F800” or “700”) is deleted from the list of
hardware devices.
In Windows Vista, the message “This device
can be safely removed from your computer.”
appears.
This unit can now resume normal operations.
(The limitations described in “Operation
limitations during FAM connections” on
page 246 no longer apply.)
4
File Operations in File
Access Mode (for
Macintosh)
File access mode operating environment
Disconnect the i.LINK cable as
required.
Operating system requirements for file operations
by file access mode are as follows.
Computer operating system: Mac OS X
v10.4.11 or higher
For Windows 7
Note
Do not disconnect the cable before performing step 1.
Preparations
1
Do the following on the remote computer and this
unit.
• Install the FAM driver on the remote computer
(see the next item).
• Set i.LINK(FAM) on the POWER SAVE page
of the OPERATION menu to ENABL (see
page 224).
Click the
icon displayed in the
remote computer’s taskbar, and then
click “Eject Solid state disk”.
“The ‘Sony XDCAM PDW-**** IEEE 1394
SBP2 Device’ device can now be safely
removed from the computer” (****: “F800”
or “700”) appears.
This unit can now resume normal operations.
(The limitations described in “Operation
limitations during FAM connections” no
longer apply.)
2
To install the FAM driver
Insert the supplied CD-ROM (XDCAM
Application Software) into the CD-ROM drive of
your computer, and execute the FAM Driver
&gt;Mac &gt;dmg file of the FAM Driver, then follow
the installation instructions.
Disconnect the i.LINK cable as
required.
For details, refer to the ReadMe file contained on the
CD-ROM disc.
To make a reconnection
To check the FAM driver version
Connect this unit to your computer with an
i.LINK cable, and then, with a disc loaded, start
the system profiler utility of the application. The
version appears to the right of “prodisk_fs” when
you select “Advanced Functions” under
“Software”.
Making FAM connections
1
Insert a disc into this unit, and put this
unit into the following state.
Recording, playback, search and other
disc operations: Stopped
THUMBNAIL indicator: Off
Disc access by clip deletion, disc
formatting, or other operation:
Stopped
Picture Cache function and Interval Rec
function: Off
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Macintosh)
Chapter 8 File Operations
To reconnect after exiting file operations, do one
of the following, depending on whether an
i.LINK cable is connected.
i.LINK cable is not connected: Connect this unit
and a remote computer with an i.LINK cable.
i.LINK cable is connected: Disconnect the
i.LINK cable from either this unit or the
remote computer, wait for at least 10
seconds, and then reconnect the disconnected
cable.
The unit is powered off and an i.LINK cable is
connected: Power the unit on.
247
Connections between this unit and a
computer by the Live Logging
function: Disconnected
Setting of LIVE LOGGING on the REC
FUNCTION page of the
OPERATION menu: Values other than
VIEW (OFF or LIVE)
MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF
Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear
2
If this unit is connected to a remote
computer by FTP, log out from the FTP
session (see page 250).
3
Connect the (i.LINK) S400 connector
on this unit to the i.LINK (IEEE1394)
connector on the remote computer,
using an i.LINK cable.
When a disc is inserted into this unit, the
remote computer recognizes this unit as a
removable disc. The following icon appears
in the Finder on the remote computer,
indicating that the computer is now able to
perform file operations.
Operation limitations during FAM connections
• With the exception of the EJECT button,
recording buttons and playback control buttons
are disabled.
• Do not use the EJECT button to eject discs.
Always eject discs from the computer.
• Do not disconnect the i.LINK cable during a
FAM connection. Doing so may result in
unstable operation. Always eject any loaded
disc before disconnecting the i.LINK cable.
Chapter 8 File Operations
248
Notes
• If you power this unit off during a FAM
connection, the data transferred thus far is
discarded.
• All file operations are not possible for some types
of files.
For details, see “File operation restrictions”
(page 240).
To eject discs from a remote computer
Click the eject button to the right of the icon for
this unit in the Finder, or drag the icon for this unit
from the Finder to the Trash.
Exiting file operations
Note
Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1
and 2.
1
Eject the disc by clicking the eject
button to the right of the icon for this
unit in the Finder, or by dragging the
icon for this unit from the Finder to the
Trash.
2
Disconnect the i.LINK cable as
required.
To make a reconnection
To reconnect after exiting file operations, do one
of the following, depending on whether an
i.LINK cable is connected.
i.LINK cable is not connected: Connect this unit
and a remote computer with an i.LINK cable.
i.LINK cable is connected: The unit is mounted
automatically, so you do not need to do
anything.
The unit is powered off and an i.LINK cable is
connected: Power the unit on.
Operating on files
1
Start the Finder.
Check to be sure that a drive has been
assigned to this unit.
2
Operate from the Finder on the files on
the disc in this unit.
You can operate in the same way that you
operate on local drives and files on network
computers.
File Operations in File Access Mode (for Macintosh)
U07 POWER SAVE
FTP File Operations
File operations between this unit and a remote
computer can be carried out by the File Transfer
Protocol (called FTP below).
Preparations
1
2
Connect the network connectors of this
unit and a remote computer with a
network cable. Or connect this unit to
the network to which the remote
computer is connected.
On the NETWORK SETTING page of
the MAINTENANCE menu, set the IP
address and other network setting items
for this unit. 1)
For details on menu operations, see “Basic
menu operations” on page 205.
If network settings have already been
made
Check the IP address of this unit.
1) This unit is able to acquire an IP address
automatically from a DHCP server. It also
supports an Auto-IP function to assign an IP
address automatically when access from this unit
to the DHCP server times out. You can check
DHCP settings and the assigned IP address on the
NETWORK 1 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu.
Note
3
Turn the MENU knob to scroll to the
POWER SAVE page of the
OPERATION menu, then press the
MENU knob.
:
:
DSABL
DSABL
REC AUDIO OUT
:
EE
TEST OUT SAVE
:
ON
Wi-Fi
:
DSABL
4
Move b to ETHERNET/USB then press
the MENU knob.
5
Turn the MENU knob to select
“ENABL”, then press the MENU knob.
Making FTP connections
FTP connections between this unit and a remote
computer can be made with either of the
following.
• The command prompt
• FTP client software
This section explains how to use the command
prompt. For more information about using FTP
client software, refer to the documentation of the
FTP client software on your system.
To log in
If this unit is connected to a remote computer with
a FAM connection, first exit file operations on the
FAM connection (see page 246).
1
Load a disc into this unit and put the
unit into the following state.
Recording, playback, serch, and other disc
operations: Stopped
THUMBNAIL indicator: Off
Disc access by clip deletion, disc
formatting, or other operation:
Stopped
Picture Cache function and Interval Rec
function: Off
Recording of video from external devices:
Disabled
Connections between this unit and a
computer by the Live Logging
function: Disconnected
Setting of LIVE LOGGING on the REC
FUNCTION page of the
OPERATION menu: Values other than
VIEW (OFF or LIVE)
FTP File Operations
Chapter 8 File Operations
If this unit is directly connected to a computer
running Windows Vista with a network cable,
change the setting as follows:
(1) Open “Network and Sharing Center” &gt;“Manage
network connections” &gt;“Local Area Connection”
in the control panel. (2) In the “Local Area
Connection Properties”, uncheck the “Internet
Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6)”, and then click the
OK button.
TOP
ETHERNET/USB
iLINK(FAM)
249
MENU ON/OFF switch: OFF
Unsaved current clip list: Save or clear
Note
Login is not possible unless the unit is in the state
described above.
2
Start the command prompt.
3
Enter “ftp &lt;SP&gt; &lt;IP address&gt;”, and
press the Enter key. (&lt;SP&gt; refers to a
space.)
For example, if the IP address of this unit is
set to 192.168.001.010, enter “ftp
192.168.1.10”.
Refer to the Windows help for more information
about the FTP command.
If the connection succeeds, you are prompted
to enter a user name.
4
Enter the user name “admin” and press
the Enter key.
When the user name is verified, your are
prompted to enter a password.
5
This unit supports standard protocol (see the next
section), and extended protocol (see page 253).
Notes
• To execute FTP commands, you must install
application software such as PDZ-1 on your computer.
• The commands supported by application software
vary.
• An FTP client that supports UTF-8 is required to use
Unicode characters other than ASCII characters.
Command prompt FTP commands do not support
UTF-8.
Standard commands
In the command syntax column, &lt;SP&gt; means a
space, entered by pressing the space bar, and
&lt;CRLF&gt; means a new line, entered by pressing
the Enter key.
USER
Send this command to begin the login process.
Syntax: USER &lt;SP&gt; &lt;username&gt; &lt;CRLF&gt;
Input example: USER admin
Enter the password and press the Enter
key.
The password is set to the model name
(“pdw-f800” or “pdw-700”) when the unit is
shipped from the factory.
The login is complete when the password is
verified.
See “Command list” (page 250) for the protocol
supported by this unit.
If the connection times out
This unit terminates FTP connections if no
command is received within 90 seconds of
the last command. If this occurs, log out (see
the next section) and repeat steps 2 to 4.
Note
Chapter 8 File Operations
250
Command list
If you power this unit off during an FTP connection,
the data transferred thus far is discarded.
To log out
To log out after finishing file operations, enter
“QUIT” at the command prompt and press the
Enter key.
FTP File Operations
PASS
After sending the USER command, send this command
to complete the login process.
Syntax: PASS &lt;SP&gt; &lt;password&gt; &lt;CRLF&gt;
Input example: PASS pdw-700
QUIT
Terminates the FTP connection. If a file is being
transferred, terminates after completion of the
transfer.
Syntax: QUIT &lt;CRLF&gt;
PORT
Specifies the IP address and port to which this unit
should connect for the next file transfer (for data transfer
from this unit).
Syntax: PORT &lt;SP&gt; &lt;h1,h2,h3,h4,p1,p2&gt;
&lt;CRLF&gt;
h1 (most significant byte) to h4 (least
significant byte): IP address
p1 (most significant byte), p2 (least
significant byte): Port address
Input example: PORT 10,0,0,1,242,48
(IP address: 10.0.0.1, Port number: 62000)
PASV
LIST
This command requests this unit to “Listen” on a data
port (which is not its default data port). It puts this unit
into passive mode, waiting for the remote computer to
make a data connection.
Syntax: PASV &lt;CRLF&gt;
Sends a list of files from this unit to the remote computer.
Syntax: LIST &lt;SP&gt; &lt;options&gt; &lt;SP&gt; &lt;path-name&gt;
&lt;CRLF&gt;
TYPE
Specifies the type of data to be transferred.
Syntax: TYPE &lt;SP&gt; &lt;type-code (options
delimited by &lt;SP&gt;)&gt; &lt;CRLF&gt;
&lt;type-code&gt; can be any of the following. However,
for XDCAM, data is always transferred as “I”,
regardless of the type-code specification.
• A: ASCII
- N: Non-print
- T: Telnet format
- C: ASA Carriage Control
• E: EBCDIC
- N: Non-print
- T: Telnet format
- C: ASA Carriage Control
• I: IMAGE (Binary) (default)
• L: LOCAL BYTE
- SIZE: byte size
Input example: TYPE I
STRU
Specifies the data structure.
Syntax: STRU &lt;SP&gt; &lt;structure-code&gt; &lt;CRLF&gt;
&lt;structure-code&gt; can be any of the following.
However, for XDCAM, the structure is always “F”,
regardless of the structure-code specification.
• F: File structure (default)
• R: Record structure
• P: Page structure
Input example: STRU F
MODE
&lt;mode-code&gt; can be any of the following.
However, for XDCAM, the mode is always “S”,
regardless of the mode-code specification.
• S: Stream mode (default)
• B: Block mode
• C: Compressed mode
Input example: MODE S
The following data is transferred, depending on
whether &lt;path-name&gt; specifies a directory or file.
• Directory specified: A list of the files in the
specified directory
• File specified: Information about the specified
file
• No specification: A list of the files in the current
directory.
The wildcard characters “*” (any string) and “?”
(any character) may be used in &lt;path-name&gt;.
Input example 1: LIST -a Clip
Input example 2: LIST Clip/*.MXF
NLST
Sends a list of file names from this unit to the remote
computer, with no other information.
Syntax: NLST &lt;SP&gt; &lt;options or path-name&gt;
&lt;CRLF&gt;
The following options may be specified when no
path name is specified.
• -a: Also display file names that begin with “.”
• -I: Display information other than file name
(gives the same result as the LIST command).
• -F: Append “/” to directory names.
The following data is transferred, depending on
whether &lt;path-name&gt; specifies a directory or file.
• Directory specified: A list of the file names only
in the specified directory
• No specification: A list of the file names only in
the current directory.
The wildcard characters “*” (any string) and “?”
(any character) may be used in &lt;path-name&gt;.
Input example 1: NLST-I
Input example 2: NLST Clip/*.MXF
RETR
Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the specified path on
this unit to the current directory on the remote computer.
Syntax:RETR &lt;SP&gt; &lt;path-name&gt; &lt;CRLF&gt;
Input example: RETR Clip/C0001.MXF
FTP File Operations
Chapter 8 File Operations
Specifies the transfer mode.
Syntax: MODE &lt;SP&gt; &lt;mode-code&gt; &lt;CRLF&gt;
&lt;options&gt; can be any of the following.
• -a: Also display file names that begin with “&middot;”.
• -F: Append “/” to directory names.
251
STOR
Begins transfer of a copy of a file in the specified path on
the remote computer to the current directory on this unit.
Depending on the type of file transferred, the following
items are created.
• C*.MXF file 1), 3)
- C*M01.XML file (metadata)
- C*M02.KLV file (user metadata)
- C*S01.MXF file (proxy AV data)
- For C*.MXF files, the UMID of the copy source file
is not saved. However, it is saved if an immediately
preceding SITE UMMD extended command has
been issued.
• E*E01.SMI file 2), 3)
- E*M01.XML file (metadata)
1) *: 0001 to 9999
2) *: 0001 to 0099
3) The unit can handle files with user-defined names in
the “C*” and “E*”parts.
Notes
• For C*.MXF files, some data, such as file header
metadata, may be missing.
• Depending on the transfer destination directory and the
file type, transfer may not be possible.
• For C*.MXF files, the UMID of the copy source file is
not saved. However, it is saved if an immediately
preceding SITE UMMD extended command has been
issued.
For details, see “File operation restrictions” (page
240).
Syntax: STOR &lt;SP&gt; &lt;path-name&gt; &lt;CRLF&gt;
Input example: STOR Edit/E0001E01.SMI
RNFR
RNTO
Chapter 8 File Operations
252
Rename a file. Specify the file to be renamed with the
RNFR command, and specify the new name with the
RNTO command. (Always follow a RNFR command
with a RNTO command.)
Syntax: RNFR &lt;SP&gt; &lt;path-name (before
change)&gt; &lt;CRLF&gt;
RNTO &lt;SP&gt; &lt;path-name (after change)&gt;
&lt;CRLF&gt;
Input example: RNFR General/info.txt
RNTO General/clip_info.txt
DELE
Deletes the specified file on this unit.
Note
Depending on the directory and file type, deletion may
not be possible.
FTP File Operations
For details, see “File operation restrictions” (page
240).
Syntax: DELE &lt;SP&gt; &lt;path-name&gt; &lt;CRLF&gt;
Input example: DELE Clip/C0099.MXF
STAT
Sends information about properties of the specified file,
or about data transfer status, from this unit to the remote
computer.
The following property information is sent, depending
on the file type.
• MXF file
- File name
- File type
- CODEC type
- Frame rate
- Number of audio channels
- Duration
- UMID
• non-MXF file
- File name
Syntax: STAT &lt;SP&gt; &lt;path-name&gt; &lt;CRLF&gt;
The following data is transferred, depending on
whether a file is specified with &lt;path-name&gt;.
• File specified: The properties of the specified
file
• No specification: The size of the data transferred
thus far (unit: bytes)
Input example: STAT Clip/C0001.MXF
ABOR
Requests this unit to abort a file transfer currently in
progress.
Syntax: ABOR &lt;CRLF&gt;
SYST
Displays the system name of this unit.
Syntax: SYST &lt;CRLF&gt;
HELP
Displays a list of the commands supported by this unit,
or an explanation of the specified command.
Syntax: HELP &lt;SP&gt; &lt;command-name&gt; &lt;CRLF&gt;
The following data is transferred, depending on
whether a command name is specified with
&lt;command-name&gt;.
• Command name specified: Explanation of the
specified command.
• No specification: Command list
• Input example: HELP RETR
NOOP
Does nothing except return a response. (Used to check
whether this unit is running.)
Syntax: NOOP &lt;CRLF&gt;
PWD
Displays the current directory (“/” if the directory is the
root directory).
Syntax: PWD &lt;CRLF&gt;
“YYYYMMDDhhmmss” (YYYY: year, MM: month,
DD: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second).
Note
The date and time cannot be acquired in the following
cases.
• When the path name includes a wildcard (“*”,
replaced by any string of characters, or “?”, replaced
by any single character).
• When the size of the path name is greater than 1023
bytes.
Syntax: MDTM &lt;SP&gt; &lt;path-name&gt; &lt;CRLF&gt;
Input example: MDTM PROAV/
DISCMETA.XML
CWD
Changes the current directory (moves from the current
directory to another directory).
Syntax: CWD &lt;SP&gt; &lt;path-name&gt; &lt;CRLF&gt;
Moves to a directory as follows, depending on
whether a directory is specified with &lt;path-name&gt;.
• Directory specified: To the specified directory
• No specification: To the root directory
Extended commands
In the command syntax column, &lt;SP&gt; means a
space, entered by pressing the space bar, and
&lt;CRLF&gt; means a new line, entered by pressing
the Enter key.
SITE REPF
Input example: CWD General
CDUP
Moves one level up in the directory structure (makes the
parent of the current directory be the current directory).
Syntax: CDUP &lt;CRLF&gt;
MKD
Creates a new directory.
Note
Directories can be created only in the General directory.
For details, see “File operation restrictions” (page
240).
Sends an MXF file from the specified path on this unit to
the remote computer. This command allows you to
specify a segment in the body of the MXF file (composed
of video and audio data), for transfer of the required
segment only.
Notes
• A segment greater than the file size cannot be
specified.
• This command cannot be used when the path name
contains a space. Use the SITE REPFL command
instead.
Syntax: SITE REPF &lt;SP&gt; &lt;path-name&gt; &lt;SP&gt;
&lt;start-frame&gt; &lt;SP&gt; &lt;transfer-size&gt;
&lt;CRLF&gt;
Syntax: MKD &lt;SP&gt; &lt;path-name&gt; &lt;CRLF&gt;
RMD
Note
Directories can be deleted only in the General directory.
For details, see “File operation restrictions” (page
240).
Syntax: RMD &lt;SP&gt; &lt;path-name&gt; &lt;CRLF&gt;
MDTM
Acquires the date and time of the most recent
modification of the file in the format
Input example: SITE REPF Clip/C0001.MXF 5
150 (Transfer C0001.MXF. Body data is
transferred only from frame 6 to frame
150.)
SITE REPFL
Chapter 8 File Operations
Deletes a directory.
&lt;start-frame&gt; specifies an offset from the start of
the file. Data is transferred from the video frame at
the offset (the first frame is 0).
&lt;transfer-size&gt; specifies the number of video
frames to transfer (specify 0 to transfer to the end of
the file).
Sends an MXF file from the specified path on this unit to
the remote computer. This command allows you to
FTP File Operations
253
specify a segment in the body of the MXF file (composed
of video and audio data), for transfer of the required
segment only.
SITE DF
Acquires the amount of free disc space.
Syntax: SITE &lt;SP&gt; DF &lt;CRLF&gt;
Note
A segment greater than the file size cannot be specified.
Syntax: SITE REPFL &lt;SP&gt; “&lt;path-name&gt;” &lt;SP&gt;
&lt;start-frame&gt; &lt;SP&gt; &lt;transfer-size&gt;
&lt;CRLF&gt;
&lt;path-name&gt; specifies the path name of the file to
transfer. Enclose the path name in double quotation
marks.
&lt;start-frame&gt; specifies an offset from the start of
the file. Data is transferred from the video frame at
the offset (the first frame is 0).
&lt;transfer-size&gt; specifies the number of video
frames to transfer (specify 0 to transfer to the end of
the file).
Input example: SITE REPFL “Clip/sakura
0001.MXF 5” 150 (Transfer sakura
0001.MXF. Body data is transferred only
from frame 6 to frame 150.)
SITE FSTS
Acquires the system status of this unit.
One of the following status codes is sent.
0: Initial state, or no disc is loaded.
1: File system mount is OK.
3: File system mount is not OK.
Syntax: SITE FSTS &lt;CRLF&gt;
SITE MEID
Acquires the media ID of the disc loaded in this unit.
Syntax: SITE MEID &lt;CRLF&gt;
SITE CHMOD
Locks and unlocks clips. Also sets permissions for
directories and files in the General directory.
Syntax: SITE CHMOD &lt;SP&gt; &lt;flag&gt; &lt;SP&gt; &lt;pathname&gt; &lt;CRLF&gt;
Specify one of the following values in &lt;flag&gt;,
according to the specification in &lt;path-name&gt;.
• When a clip is specified in &lt;path-name&gt;:
444: Lock.
666: Unlock.
• When a directory in the General directory is
specified in &lt;path-name&gt;:
555: Forbid writing to the directory.
777: Allow writing to the directory.
• When a file in the General directory is specified
in &lt;path-name&gt;:
444: Forbid writing to and execution of the file.
555: Forbid writing to the file, but allow
execution.
666: Allow writing to the file, but forbid
execution.
777: Allow writing to and execution of the file.
Input example: SITE CHMOD 444 Clip/
C0001.MXF (Lock clip C0001.MXF)
SITE TCPR
Presets the starting timecode of a clip copied with the
STOR command. Specify the timecode in the format
“ffssmmhh” (ff: frames, ss: seconds, mm: minutes, hh:
hours).
Notes
SITE FUNC
Chapter 8 File Operations
254
Acquires the function and version of the expanded
commands.
Information is sent in the following format.
&lt;main function&gt; &lt;SP&gt; &lt;branch function&gt; &lt;SP&gt;
&lt;branch function version&gt;
For XDCAM, sent in a format like “200 MXF DISK 1”
(200 is a response code).
Syntax: SITE FUNC &lt;CRLF&gt;
SITE UMMD
When C*.MXF file is sent with the STOR, the copy
source UMID is saved if this command is invoked
immediately before the STOR command.
Syntax: SITE UMMD &lt;CRLF&gt;
FTP File Operations
• This command remains in effect until a STOR
command is executed, or (if no STOR command is
executed) until the FTP connection is terminated.
• If a SITE UMMD command is executed after this
command, the SITE UMMD command takes priority
and this command is discarded.
• If this command is executed several times in sequence,
the last command takes priority.
Syntax: SITE TCPR &lt;SP&gt; &lt;timecode &gt; &lt;CRLF&gt;
Input example: SITE TCPR 00050001
(The starting timecode is preset to
01:00:05:00.)
Recording Continuous
Timecode with FAM and
FTP Connections
When you are connected to the unit by FAM or
FTP, you can create new clips with timecode that
is continuous with the timecode of the last frame
of the last clip on the disc. To record continuous
timecode, set PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch
to “REGEN”, and then proceed as follows.
FAM connection
Write clip files to the unit from the computer or
other device that is connected to this unit.
FTP connection
Use the “STOR” command to transfer clip files
from the computer that is connected to this unit. If
you issue the “SITE UMMD” command
immediately before the “STOR” command, the
original timecode of the transferred file is
recorded, regardless of the setting of PRESET/
REGEN/CLOCK switch.
Chapter 8 File Operations
Recording Continuous Timecode with FAM and FTP Connections
255
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Chapter
9 Maintenance
Testing the Camcorder
before Shooting
4
After confirming that the disc is not
write-protected, load the disc and close
the disc compartment lid.
Testing the camera
Check the functions of the camcorder before
setting out for a shooting session, preferably by
operating the camcorder together with a color
video monitor.
Set the switches and selectors as follows.
1
Preparations for testing
4 1
3
2
34 5 6
1 Iris switch: Automatic
2 Zoom selector: SERVO/MAN
3 VDR SAVE/STBY switch: SAVE
4 GAIN selector: Set as low as possible.
5 OUTPUT/DCC switch: BARS
6 WHITE BAL switch: A or B
2
1
Attach a fully charged battery pack.
2
Set the POWER switch to ON and
check that the HUMID indicator does
not appear and that the BATT indicator
shows at least five segments.
• If the HUMID indicator appears, wait until
it disappears.
• If the BATT indicator does not show at
least five segments, replace the battery
pack with a fully charged one.
3
256
Check that there are no obstructions
near the disc compartment, and then
press the EJECT button to open the disc
compartment lid.
Testing the Camcorder before Shooting
Testing the viewfinder
1
Adjust the position of the viewfinder.
2
Check that the color bars are displayed
on the viewfinder screen, and adjust the
BRIGHT, CONTRAST, and
PEAKING controls to give the best
color bar display.
3
Check each of the following operations.
4
Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM,
and change the FILTER selector
position in the sequence of 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Check that the FILTER indicator on the
viewfinder screen displays the correct
numbers.
5
Carry out of the following operations,
and check that the ! indicator lights if
the corresponding item has been turned
on on the ‘!’ LED page of the USER
menu.
• Set the gain to anything but 0 dB by using
the GAIN selector and the GAIN SW page
of the OPERATION menu.
• Set the SHUTTER selector to ON.
• Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.
• Use the lens extender.
• Set the reference value of the auto iris to
other than the standard value.
6
Flick the SHUTTER selector from ON
to SELECT repeatedly, and check that
the shutter setting changes on the
viewfinder screen.
7
Pointing the camera at a suitable
subject, focus the camera and check the
picture on the viewfinder screen.
8
Set both of the AUDIO IN switches to
FRONT, and check that when sound is
input to a microphone connected to the
MIC IN connector on the front of the
camcorder, the audio level indicators
appear on the viewfinder screen.
9
Check that setting the ZEBRA switch to
ON and OFF makes the zebra pattern
appear and disappear on the viewfinder
screen.
Note
The results of checking in steps 3 to 9 may not be as
expected, depending on the settings relating to the
viewfinder display function. In this case, set the desired
items on the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the
USER menu.
Chapter 9 Maintenance
• The menu is displayed on the viewfinder
screen.
• Turn the MENU knob and check that the
menu page changes to the next page.
• Press the MENU knob and check that
settings of each item of the selected page
are displayed.
• Turn the MENU knob and check that b
moves within the page.
• Press the MENU knob and check that b
placed before the item changes to z and z
placed before the setting of the item
changes to ?.
• Turn the MENU knob and check that the
setting of the selected item changes.
For details, see “Selecting the display items” on
page 213.
Testing the iris and zoom functions
1
Set the zoom to automatic zoom mode
and check that the power zoom operates
correctly.
2
Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and
check the zoom functions manually.
3
Set the iris switch on the lens to AUTO
and point the camera at objects of
different brightness. Check that the
automatic iris adjustment operates
correctly.
4
Set the iris switch on the lens to
MANUAL and check that turning the
iris ring manually adjusts the iris
correctly.
5
Set the iris switch on the lens back to
AUTO and check the following points
when the GAIN selector is moved from
L to M to H.
• Even when the brightness of the object
does not change, the iris is automatically
adjusted in accordance with the change in
the gain setting..
• The gain indicator on the viewfinder screen
changes to correspond to the change in
setting.
Testing the Camcorder before Shooting
257
6
Chapter 9 Maintenance
If an extender mechanism is
incorporated in your lens, put the
extender lever of the lens into the 2&times;
position and check the following points.
8
• The indication “EX” appears at the top left
on the viewfinder screen.
• The auto iris functions correctly.
9
Testing the VDR
Check that fast reverse playback and normal
playback are performed.
1
Set the VDR SAVE/STBY switch to
SAVE and check that the SAVE
indicator in the viewfinder goes on.
2
Set the VDR SAVE/STBY switch to
STBY and check that the SAVE
indicator in the viewfinder goes off.
3
4
5
10 Press the STOP button again, then
11 Press the NEXT button, and check that
the image of the beginning of the next
clip is displayed.
(2) Testing the automatic audio level
adjusting functions
Set the switches located below the color
LCD as follows.
2
BRIGHT button: H, M or L
DISP SEL/EXPAND button: STATUS
DISPLAY switch: COUNTER
Set the AUDIO SELECT (CH-1/CH-2)
switches to AUTO.
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 switches
to F (FRONT).
4
Aim the microphone connected to the
MIC IN connector at a suitable sound
source. Check that the level indications
for channels 1 to 4 correspond to the
sound level, respectively.
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK
switch to PRESET, and set the F-RUN/
SET/R-RUN to R-RUN.
Press the REC START button and
check the following points.
Press the REC START button again.
Repeat the checks of steps 5 and 6, this
time using the VTR button on the lens.
Press the RESET/RETURN button and
check that the indication in the counter
display on each of the LCD monitor and
monochrome LCD is “00:00:00:00”.
258
Check that the image of the beginning of the
current or previous clip is displayed.
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
to FRONT.
Check that recording stops and that the REC
indicator in the viewfinder goes off.
7
press the PREV button.
1
• The indication in the counter display on
each of the LCD monitor and monochrome
LCD is changing.
• The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on.
• The RF and SERVO indicators on the color
LCD are off.
6
Press the STOP button, then press the F
FWD button.
Check that playback stops and fast forward
playback are performed.
Perform tests (1) to (7) consecutively.
(1) Testing the recording and playback
functions
Press the F REV button, then press the
PLAY/PAUSE button.
Testing the Camcorder before Shooting
(3) Testing the manual audio level
adjusting functions
1
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
to FRONT.
2
Turn the MIC LEVEL control. Check
that the channel-1 and -2 audio level
meters on the LCD monitor and
monochrome LCD show more and
more segments as you turn the control
counterclockwise as seen from the front
of the camcorder.
Turn the MONITOR volume control
and check that the speaker volume
changes accordingly.
Perform the operations of steps 1 and 2
explained in “(5) Testing external
microphones”.
2
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches
to FRONT.
2
Connect an earphone to the front or
rear EARPHONE jack.
3
3
Check that the speaker sound is cut off
and that you can hear the sound from
the microphone in the earphone.
Perform the operations of steps 4 and 5
explained in “(5) Testing external
microphones”.
4
Turn the MONITOR volume control
and check that the earphone volume
changes accordingly.
5
Connect the earphone to the other
EARPHONE jack. Check the earphone
as in step 3.
1
If the audio level meters on the color and
monochrome LCDs and the audio level
indicators in the viewfinder reflect the
changing sound level, the function of the
XLR connection automatic detection is
working correctly.
If it does not reflect the changing sound level,
the function of the XLR connection
automatic detection function is off. Set
REAR XLR AUTO to “ON” on the VDR
MODE 1 page of the MAINTENANCE
menu.
If it does not reflect even after making this
setting, the XLR connection automatic
detection function does not work correctly.
(5) Testing external microphones
1
Connect external microphones to the
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.
2
Set the +48V/OFF switches as follows.
• If the connected microphone is of the
internal power supply type, set the switch
to OFF.
• If the connected microphone is of the
external power supply type, set the switch
to +48V.
3
Set the AUDIO IN switches to REAR.
4
Aim the microphones at a sound source.
5
Check that the audio level meters on the
LCD monitor and monochrome LCD
and the audio level indicators in the
viewfinder reflect the changing sound
level.
(6) Checking the XLR connection
automatic detection function
Before starting to check, remove the front
microphone connected to the MIC IN connector if
it is connected.
Chapter 9 Maintenance
1
(4) Testing the earphone and speaker
(7) Checking the user bit and timecode
functions
1
Set the user bits as required.
For the operation, see “Setting the user bits” on
page 75.
2
Set the timecode.
For the operation, see “Setting the timecode”
on page 75.
3
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
R-RUN.
4
Press the REC START button, and
check that recording starts and that the
timecode indication in the counter
display changes.
5
Press the REC START button again,
and check that recording stops and that
the timecode indication stops changing.
Testing the Camcorder before Shooting
259
Chapter 9 Maintenance
6
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN, and check that the timecode
indication starts changing again and
continues to change even when you
restart recording and stop recording
again.
7
Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT, and
check that the user bit data that was set
is displayed.
Maintenance
Cleaning the viewfinder
Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and
mirror inside the viewfinder barrel.
Clean the lens and protecting filter with a
commercially available lens cleaner.
Caution
Never use organic solvents such as thinners.
Disassembling the eyepiece for cleaning
1
4
1
2
1 Viewfinder barrel
2 Eyecup holder
3 Protecting filter
4 Packing ring
5 Eyecup
1
3
2
4
5
3
Detach the eyepiece from the viewfinder
barrel.
For the detaching procedure, see “Detaching
the eyepiece” on page 42.
260
Maintenance
2
Remove the eyecup from the eyecup
holder.
3
Remove the protecting filter, together
with the packing ring, from inside the
eyecup holder.
4
Detach the protecting filter from the
packing ring.
Fog-proof filter
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Depending on the temperature and humidity, the
protecting filter may mist because of vapor or
your breath. To ensure that the viewfinder is
always clear, replace the protecting filter with a
fog-proof filter (option, part No. 1-547-341-11).
Fitting the fog-proof filter
Replace the protecting filter on the packing ring
with the fog-proof filter.
Be sure to correctly assemble the fog-proof filter,
the packing ring, and the eyecup so that the
reassembled eyepiece is waterproof.
Note
When cleaning the fog-proof filter, wipe it very gently
with a soft cloth to avoid damaging the anti-fogging
coating.
Note about the battery terminal
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for
battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable
part.
Power may not be supplied to the unit properly if
the pins of the battery terminal are bent or
deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they
become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use.
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep
the unit working properly and to prolong its
usable lifetime.
Contact a Sony service or sales representative for
more information about inspections.
Maintenance
261
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Operation Warnings
If a problem occurs when the camcorder is
powered or is being operated, a warning is issued
by various visible and audible indicators. These
visible and audible indicators are:
• In the status display on the LCD monitor: a
warning message (“A” in the “Layout of the
table of warning messages” below) and a
warning indication (“B”)
• The WARNING indicator on the side panel of
the camcorder (“C”), and a warning sound from
the speaker and earphones (“D”)
• In the viewfinder: a warning message (“A”),
and an indicator above or below the viewfinder
screen (“E”)
The volume of the warning sound can be adjusted
with the ALARM knob. Set the ALARM knob to
the minimum position to suppress the sound.
Layout of the table of warning messages
A
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
Warning sound REC/TALLY
BATT
B
C
D
E
Problem
VDR operation
• The operation of the WARNING indicator and
the indicators in the viewfinder is represented
by graphic symbols as follows.
: Continuous
: 1 flash/s
: 4 flashes/s
• The warning sounds are represented by graphic
symbols as follows.
: Continuous beep
: 1 beep/s
: 4 beeps/s
262
Operation Warnings
E
Action to take
MEM Full!
ILL REC!
Verify ERR!
Cache Full!
Warning
indication
State
—
—
WARNING
indicator
Warning sound
REC/TALLY
BATT
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Recording error
Recording stops.
Turn off the power and
consult a Sony service
representative.
Warning
indication
State
—
—
WARNING
indicator
Warning sound
b)
b)
REC/TALLY
b)
BATT
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Shockproof memory overflow
Recording continues but may be
substandard.
Protect the unit from shocks
and vibrations.
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
REC/TALLY
—
—
Warning sound
b)
b)
b)
BATT
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Input sync error
Recording continues but may be
substandard.
Turn off the power and
contact a Sony service
representative. (This
indication may be given
momentarily when a
GENLOCK signal is
connected or disconnected,
but this does not indicate a
problem.)
WARNING
indicator
REC/TALLY
Warning
indication
State
—
—
Warning sound
b)
b)
b)
BATT
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
An error was detected in the
signals recorded on the disc.
Recording continues but may be
substandard.
Exchange the disc.
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
REC/TALLY
—
—
b)
Warning sound
—
b)
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Error**-** a)
Warning messages
BATT
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Cache memory became full
during a Disc Exchange Change
mode operation.
Video and audio recording may be
interrupted.
Exchange the disc quickly.
Operation Warnings
263
Disc Error!
MAX # Clips
DISC FULL! d)
Near MAX # i)
Before Full h)
HUMID!
Chapter 9 Maintenance
264
Warning
indication
State
—
—
WARNING
indicator
Warning sound
b)
b)
REC/TALLY
b)
BATT
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
A disc defect was detected.
Recording continues, avoiding the
defect, but may be substandard.
If defects are detected
repeatedly, exchange the disc.
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
REC/TALLY
—
—
Warning sound
b)
b)
b)
BATT
—
c)
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Condensation on the optical
pickup
Recording/playback continues but
stops when an error occurs on the
drive.
Stop recording/ playback, turn
off the power, then turn it on
again, and wait until the
HUMID indicator disappears.
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
REC/TALLY
DISC
flash f)
Warning sound
b)
b)
BATT
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Disc almost full.
Operation continues.
Be prepared to exchange the
disc.
WARNING
indicator
REC/TALLY
Warning
indication
State
—
—
Warning sound
BATT
—
b)
(only when
recording the
300th clip)
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Nine or fewer clips remain until
the upper limit of 300 is reached.
Operation continues.
Be prepared to exchange the
disc.
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
REC/TALLY
DISC and E
flash g)
d)
Warning sound
d)
d)
BATT
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Disc full.
Recording stops.
Exchange the disc.
Warning
indication
State
—
—
WARNING
indicator
d)
Warning sound
d)
REC/TALLY
d)
BATT
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
The upper limit of 300 recorded
clips reached.
Cannot record.
Exchange the disc.
Operation Warnings
MAX # Files
LOW BATT! h)
BATT EMPTY!
High TEMP!
ACC Sensor!/
Skew Sensor
State
—
—
WARNING
indicator
Warning sound
d)
d)
REC/TALLY
BATT
—
d)
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
The upper limit of files reached.
Cannot record.
Exchange the disc.
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
BATT
flash f)
Warning sound
e)
REC/TALLY
BATT
e)
Problem
VDR operation
Battery almost exhausted.
Operation continues.
Replace the battery.
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
REC/TALLY
BATT and E
flash g)
Problem
Action to take
Warning sound
VDR operation
Battery exhausted.
Operation stops.
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
—
—
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Warning
indication
BATT
Action to take
Replace the battery.
Warning sound
REC/TALLY
BATT
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Internal temperature high.
Operation continues.
Power the unit off and move it
to a cool place.
Warning
indication
State
WARNING
indicator
REC/TALLY
—
—
Warning sound
BATT
—
Problem
VDR operation
Action to take
Internal drive sensor error
Operation continues.
Protect the unit from shocks
and vibrations, turn off the
power, and contact a Sony
service representative.
a) Asterisks (*) are replaced by digits in the display.
b) During recording
c) During playback, fast forward, fast reverse, or stop
d) During recording pause
e) During recording or pause
f) 1 flash/s
g) 4 flashes/s
h) During recording, displayed in the LCD monitor only
(When the DISP SEL/EXPAND button is set to
STATUS)
i) During recording and recording pause, displayed in
the LCD monitor only (When the DISP SEL/
EXPAND button is set to STATUS)
Operation/alarm messages
Operation and alarm messages are displayed in
the operation/alarm message display area (see
page 36) of the viewfinder screen.
For details about the warning displays and alarm
messages on the viewfinder, see the next item.
Operation Warnings
265
Chapter 9 Maintenance
AUTO
INTERVAL
**M**S
The unit is operating in Auto
Interval Rec mode (**M**S:
Indicates the shooting interval in
minutes and seconds).
MANU
INTERVAL
*FRAME
The unit is operating in the singleshot mode of Manual Interval Rec
mode (*FRAME: Indicates the
number of frames recorded in one
shot).
INTERVAL
**S (M/H)
*FRAME
The unit is operating in the
consecutive mode of Manual
Interval Rec mode (**S (M/H):
Indicates the trigger interval, in
seconds (minutes or hours),
*FRAME: Indicates the number
of frames recorded in one shot).
Disc Damage
A disc that cannot be recorded was
inserted. To record, exchange the
disc.
Non AV Full
MAX # Files
Over DUR!
The disc is full. Exchange or
format the disc.
DI read err
The disc was not recognized. Try
Read err
ejecting the disc and inserting it
DRV ADJ err again. Or exchange the disc.
Run Salvage
A disc that requires salvage was
inserted. To record on the disc,
eject the disc, insert it again, and
execute salvage processing.
Salvage NG!
Salvage processing failed.
For details, see “Handling of discs
when recording does not end
normally (salvage function)” on
page 81.
LOW LIGHT Depending on the setting, the
subject illumination is inadequate.
ON-BOARD
BATTERY
EMPTY
The backup battery of the internal
DCP
EEPROM
DATA NG!
DR EEPROM
DATA NG!
DCP/DR
EEPROM
DATA NG!
If this message continues to
appear even after the unit is
powered off and on again several
times, then the factory adjustment
data is invalid. Contact a Sony
service representative.
clock is empty. a)
Salvage
XXXX
The loaded disc cannot be
salvaged by this unit. The
“XXXX” in the message is a code
for XDCAM devices that can
salvage the disc. Refer to the list
of device codes (see page 82) and
salvage the disc using one of the
indicated devices.
REC INHI.!
The Write Inhibit tab of the disc is
in the recording disabled position,
or salvage processing needs to be
done on the loaded disc. Set the
tab to the recording enabled
position. Or eject the disc, insert it
again, and perform salvage
processing.
1080/50i
1080/25P
1080/59.94i
1080/29.97P
1080/23.98P
720/50P
720/59.94P
625/50i
525/59.94i
This appears when mixed format
recording mode is disabled and the
current resolution or system
frequency setting of this unit does
not match the resolution or system
frequency of the inserted disc. To
carry out recording operations,
exchange the disc, or change the
resolution or system frequency
setting of this unit, or enable
mixed format recording mode.
a) Contact a Sony service representative to replace the
battery.
VDR operation messages are displayed in the
setting change and adjustment progress message
display area of the viewfinder screen (see
page 35). Take the actions listed in the following
table.
ILL. Disc!
A disc that cannot be used by this
unit was inserted. Insert another
Professional Disc.
ILL. Index!
Index file or file system error.
No FS!
Exchange or format the disc.
Unknown FS!
266
No Support!
A recorded clip cannot be handled
by this unit. Exchange or format
the disc.
FORMAT
NG!
The disc could not be formatted
automatically. Exchange the disc.
Operation Warnings
This appears when mixed format
recording mode is disabled and the
current recording format of this
unit does not match the recording
format of the inserted disc. To
carry out recording operations,
exchange the disc, or change the
recording format of this unit, or
enable mixed format recording
mode.
System FREQ This appears when the current
system frequency of this unit does
not match the system frequency of
clips recorded on the inserted disc.
To carry out recording operations,
exchange the disc, or change the
system frequency of this unit.
Mixed REC!
This appears when mixed format
recording mode is disabled and the
current recording format of this
unit does not match the recording
format of the inserted disc. To
carry out recording operations,
exchange the disc, or change the
recording format of this unit, or
enable mixed format recording
mode.
Loading!
Unloading!
An operation was attempted while
a disc was loading or unloading.
Wait for the disc to finish loading
or unloading and try again.
Disc Top!
Disc End!
The operation is not possible
because the disc is at the top or
end.
Clip Top!
Clip End!
In single clip playback mode, the
specified operation is not possible
because playback has reached the
top or end of the clip.
Formatting!
The disc is being automatically
formatted. Wait until the format
ends.
Recording
The unit is writing to the file
system. Wait until writing
finishes.
No EM Space Essence marks cannot be inserted.
EM Full!
For details, see “Recording
essence marks” on page 88.
Cache REC!
An attempt was made to perform
an operation that cannot be
performed when the picture cache
function is enabled. The operation
will be ignored.
Disc Exchag!
An attempt was made to perform
an operation that cannot be
performed when the disc exchange
cache function is enabled. The
operation will be ignored.
Live Logg!
An attempt was made to perform
an operation that cannot be
performed when the Live Logging
function is set to Live View mode.
The operation will be ignored.
Index File!
There is an unsupported index file
on the disc to which you are trying
to record. Exchange or format the
disc.
File System
There is an unsupported file
system on the disc to which you
are trying to record. Exchange or
format the disc.
ILL. PLAY!
An A/V phase error occurred
during playback. Stop the disc.
Lid Closed!
The lid of the disc compartment
does not open. Check the lid.
Lid Open!
The lid of the disc compartment is
not closed. Close it securely.
No Clip!
There are no clips recorded on the
disc. Exchange for a recorded
disc.
No SEL List
No clip list is selected. Create a
new clip list, or load a clip list
from the disc.
No Disc!
There is no disc loaded. Insert a
disc and try the operation again.
No List!
There is no clip list. Create a clip
list.
No SUB Clip
There are no sub clips in the clip
list. Register a sub clip, or load
another clip list.
STOP ONCE! The operation is not possible
REC mode!
while the disc is being played or
recorded. Stop the disc.
Chapter 9 Maintenance
HD422 1080
HD422 720
HD420 1080
HD420 720
IMX50 Clip
IMX40 Clip
IMX30 Clip
DVCAM Clip
8CHx16 Clip
4CHx24 Clip
2CHx16 Clip
SB CLP mode An essence mark or clip flag
operation was attempted while the
SUB CLIP indicator was lit. Press
the SUB CLIP/DISC MENU
button to turn the indicator off and
try again.
Operation Warnings
267
Chapter 9 Maintenance
SUB Clip NG The In and Out point positions are
invalid. Set correct In and Out
points.
MAX# SB
CLP
The total number of sub clips is
over the upper limit (300).
Resolution
An attempt was made to register a
clip in a clip list with a different
resolution.
CL OVER
DUR
The total duration of sub clips in
the current clip list is over the
upper limit (24 hours).
FAN Stopped The main unit or drive fan has
DR-FAN Stop stopped. Avoid use under high
temperatures, turn off the power,
and contact a Sony service
representative.
NVRAM NG! An error was detected while
accessing internal memory. Power
the unit off and contact a Sony
service representative.
268
Update Err!
A firmware update failed. Power
the unit off and contact a Sony
service representative.
Unknown
USB
An unsupported USB device was
connected to this unit.
NO USB
MEMORY!
A USB flash drive write operation
was attempted with no USB flash
drive connected.
USB
MEMORY
INHIBIT!
USB M. INHI
A write inhibited USB flash drive
was connected with MEMORY
REC on the MEMORY REC page
of the OPERATION menu set to
ENABL.
USB
MEMORY
ERROR!
The connected USB flash drive
was not usable when a USB flash
drive write operation was
attempted.
M. Shortage
A USB flash drive write operation
was attempted without enough
free memory in the USB flash
drive.
USB
MEMORY
FULL!
A USB flash drive write operation
was attempted without free
memory in the USB flash drive.
MEM REC
NG!
A USB flash drive write operation
failed with MEMORY REC on the
MEMORY REC page of the
OPERATION menu set to
ENABL.
Operation Warnings
M. access!
An attempt was made to switch
GUI screens during a USB flash
drive write operation.
Alarm messages during thumbnail
search, scene selection, and clip list
operations
An alarm message may appear in the LCD
monitor during thumbnail search, scene selection,
and clip list operations. In that case, take the
action indicated in the following table.
Cannot
Expand Clip
any Further.
The clip cannot be expanded into
more blocks. This alarm appears
when the DISP SEL/EXPAND
button is pressed when the number
of blocks is maximum, or when
the duration of an expanded
thumbnail is one frame.
Selected
Essence Mark
Does not
Exist.
The selected essence mark does
not exist.
This alarm appears in the essence
mark selection screen when the
specified essence mark does not
exist on the disc.
Sub Clip is
Invalid. Set
Appropriate
IN/OUT
Points.
The temporal relationship between
the specified In and Out points in a
TRIM operation (see page 135) is
not correct. Reset so that the value
of the Out point timecode is larger
than the value of the In point
timecode.
Duration of
One Clip List
must be Less
than 24
Hours.
The total duration of the current
clip list exceeds the upper limit of
24 hours as the result of an Add
Sub Clips (see page 133) or Trim
Sub Clip (see page 135) operation.
No More Sub
Clips can be
Added to the
Clip List.
The total number of the sub clips
of the current clip list exceeds the
upper limit of 300 as the result of
an Add Sub Clips (see page 133)
or Trim Sub Clip (see page 135)
operation.
Sub Clip does An attempt is made to execute a
not Exist.
Move Sub Clips (see page 135),
Trim Sub Clip (see page 135),
Delete Sub Clips (see page 136),
or Set Start Time Code (see
page 136) operation with no sub
clips in the current clip list.
Set NAMING An attempt was made to rename a
FORM to
clip with Set Clip Name when
“free”
NAMING FORM is not set to
“FREE” (see page 101).
Move is
Invalid.
An attempt is made to execute a
Move Sub Clips operation (see
page 135) when there are no sub
clip in the current clip list, or when
there is only one.
“No Flash
Drive”
In the media selection screen of
the Load Planning Metadata/
Select Drive command, “USB
Flash Drive” was selected with no
USB flash drive connected.
Shot Mark
does not
Exist.
An attempt is made to execute a
Delete Shot Mark (see page 122)
operation on a clip with no shot
marks recorded in.
Not Loaded.
A command related to planning
metadata was executed with no
planning metadata loaded. Try
again after loading planning
metadata.
Chapter does An attempt was made to display a
not Exist.
nonexistent chapter.
Some Essence An attempt is made to delete an
Mark cannot essence mark that cannot be
be Deleted.
deleted with a Delete Essence
Mark operation. Rec Start and Cut
essence marks cannot be deleted.
Some Essence An attempt is made to move an
Mark cannot essence mark that cannot be
be Moved.
moved with a Move Essence Mark
operation. Rec Start and Cut
essence marks cannot be moved.
Command
Disabled.
An attempt was made to execute
the Format Disc command with
Setting Format Disc set to
“Disable”.
Clip is
Locked.
An attempt is made to delete a
clip, set the clip thumbnail, or
delete a shot mark when the clip is
locked.
All Clips are
Locked.
An attempt is made to execute a
Lock All Clips operation when all
clips are already locked.
All Clips are
Unlocked.
An attempt is made to execute an
Unlock All Clips operation when
all clips are already unlocked.
A File with
A file name that was specified in a
the Name you Set Clip Name operation already
Specified
exists.
Already
Exists.
Specify a
Different
Name.
Chapter 9 Maintenance
Clip List does An attempt is made to execute a
not Exist.
Delete Clip List operation (see
page 138) when there are no clip
lists on the disc.
Syntax Error! Loading of planning metadata
failed because of a syntax error.
Correct the error and try loading it
again.
Irregular Disc
is Used.
Use
Professional
Disc.
The inserted disc cannot be
recorded or played. This unit can
record and play Professional
Discs. Insert a Professional Disc.
The Disc
Write Protect
TAB is set to
Save.
An attempt was made to format a
write protected disc. Try
formatting the disc after moving
the write protect tab away from the
Save position.
Auto
Formatting
was not
Completed.
Automatic disc formatting failed.
Video
Resolution
Differ from it
on Clip List.
An attempt was made to add a clip
to a clip list when the video
resolution (number of system
lines) did not match the video
resolution of clips in the clip list.
Clips cannot be added to a clip list
unless the video resolution
matches.
No Clip
Meets the
Condition.
No clip meeting the clip filtering
conditions was found.
Operation Warnings
269
Appendix
Appendix
Important Notes on
Operation
Use and storage
Do not subject the unit to severe shocks
The internal mechanism may be damaged or the
body warped.
Before storing the camcorder for a long period
Remove the battery pack.
To prevent electromagnetic interference from
portable communications devices
The use of portable telephones and other
communications devices near this unit can result
in malfunctions and interference with audio and
video signals.
It is recommended that the portable
communications devices near this unit be
powered off.
Shipping
• Remove the disc before transporting the unit.
• If sending the unit by truck, ship, air or other
transportation service, pack it in the shipping
carton of the unit.
Note on laser beams
Laser beams may damage the CCDs.
If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam, be
careful not to let the laser beam be directed into
the lens of the camera.
Care of the unit
Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the
lenses or optical filters using a blower.
If the body of the unit is dirty, clean it with a soft,
dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth steeped in
a little neutral detergent, then wipe dry. Do not
use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinners,
as these may cause discoloration or other damage
to the finish of the unit.
Condensation
Do not cover the unit while operating
Putting a cloth, for example, over the unit can
cause excessive internal heat build-up.
After use
Always turn off the POWER switch.
In the event of operating problems
If you should experience problems with the unit,
contact a Sony representative.
Use and storage locations
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or
storing the unit in the following places.
• In excessive heat or cold (operating temperature
range: –5&deg;C to +40&deg;C (+23&deg;F to +104&deg;F))
270
• Remember that in summer in warm climates the
temperature inside a car with the windows
closed can easily exceed 50&deg;C (122&deg;F).
• In damp or dusty locations
• Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain
• Locations subject to violent vibration
• Near strong magnetic fields
• Close to radio or TV transmitters producing
strong electromagnetic fields.
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for
extended periods
Important Notes on Operation
If you move the camcorder from a very cold place
to a warm place, or use it in a damp location,
condensation may form on the optical pickup.
Then, if the camcorder is operated in this state,
recording and playback may not be performed
properly.
Do the following to prevent this from happening.
• When you move or operate the camcorder in an
environment where condensation may form, be
sure to load a disc in advance and close the disc
compartment lid.
• Whenever you turn on the power, check that the
HUMID indicator does not appear on the color
LCD. If it appears, wait until it disappears
before loading a disc.
For details, see “Loading and unloading a disc” on
page 80 and “Operation Warnings” on page 262.
Fitting the zoom lens
It is important to fit the lens correctly, as
otherwise damage may result. Be sure to refer to
the section “Mounting the Lens” on page 45.
Viewfinder
About the LCD panels
LCD panels are manufactured with extremely
high-precision technology that yields effective
pixel rates of 99.99% or higher. However, very
rarely, one or more pixels may be permanently
dark or permanently lit in white, red, blue, or
green.
This phenomenon is not a malfunction. Such
pixels have no effect on the recorded data, and the
unit may be used with confidence even if they are
present.
Appendix
• Do not leave the unit with the eyepiece pointing
directly at the sun.
The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun’s
rays and melt the interior of the viewfinder.
• Do not use the viewfinder close to strong
magnetic fields. This can cause picture
distortion.
The problem may be alleviated by executing the
APR (automatic pixel noise reduction) function
on the APR page of the MAINTENANCE menu
(see page 194). Pixel noise is reduced to some
extent by automatic black balance adjustment
(see page 60), but the detection capabilities of
that function are limited. For the most effective
correction, execute the APR function.
If “No More White Pixel” appears after the APR
function is executed, then there are no more
detectable white flecks.
In SLS mode, white flecks are more prominent
when you set the shutter speed (number of
frames) to higher values. Executing the
APR(SLS) function on the APR page (see page
194) may alleviate the problem of white flecks in
SLS mode.
Vertical smear
When an extremely bright object, such as a strong
spotlight or flashlight, is being shot, vertical tails
may be produced on the screen, or the image may
be distorted.
1
2
3
Phenomena specific to CCD image
sensors
The following phenomena that may appear in
images are specific to CCD (Charge Coupled
Device) image sensors. They do not indicate
malfunctions.
White flecks
Although the CCD image sensors are produced
with high-precision technologies, fine white
flecks may be generated on the screen in rare
cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc.
This is related to the principle of CCD image
sensors and is not a malfunction.
1 Monitor screen
2 Vertical tails shown on the image
3 Bright object (e.g. strong spotlight,
strong reflected light, flashlight, the sun)
Aliasing
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they
may appear jagged or flicker.
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the
following cases:
• When operating at a high environmental
temperature
• When you have raised the master gain
(sensitivity)
Important Notes on Operation
271
Dimensions in mm (inches)
Power voltage
11 V to 17 V DC
Power consumption
Approx. 40 W
Main unit only, recording, power from
battery pack, VDR SAVE/STBY switch
set to SAVE, LCD monitor on
(backlight: low).
332(13 1/8)
Video camera section
Imager
2
Note
Do not allow the total power consumption of peripherals
to exceed 60 W when peripherals are connected.
However, power consumed by the HDCA-702 MPEG
TS Adaptor is not counted in the total power
consumption.
Operating temperature
–5&deg;C to +40&deg;C (+23&deg;F to +104&deg;F)
Operating humidity
10% to 90% (relative humidity)
Storage temperature
–20&deg;C to +60&deg;C (–4&deg;F to +140&deg;F)
Recording format
Video: MPEG HD 422 50 Mbps
Proxy video: MPEG-4
Audio: MPEG HD 422: 4 channels, 24
bits/48 kHz
Proxy audio: A-law, 4 channels, 8 bits/8
kHz
Continuous operating time
Approx. 120 min. (with BP-GL95)
Mass
Approx. 4.3 kg (9 lb 7 oz) (main body
only)
Approx. 6.0 kg (13 lb 3 oz) (with
HDVF-20A viewfinder, ECM-680S
microphone, disc and BP-GL95
Battery Pack)
272
222(8 3/4)
Appendix
General
269(10 5/8)
124(5)
Specifications
Specifications
/3-inch type, 1920 (H) &times; 1080 (V)
Imager Configuration
RGB 3 CCDs
Spectral system
F1.4 prism system (with quartz filter)
Built-in filters
CC filter (optical, PDW-F800 only)
A: Cross filter
B: 3200K
C: 4300K
D: 6300K
ND filter (optical)
1: Clear
2: 1/4 ND
3: 1/16 ND
4: 1/64 ND
Lens mount
2/ -inch 48 bayonet mount
3
Sensitivity
F11 (system frequency: 59.94i)
F12 (system frequency: 50i)
(89.9% reflection chart, 2000 lx)
Minimum illumination
0.016 1x (F1.4, +42 dB, with 16-frame
accumulation)
Video S/N ratio
59 dB (With noise suppression on. Off
value is 54 dB.)
Audio (with standard playback machine)
Frequency response
20 Hz to 20 kHz, +0.5 dB/–1.0 dB
Registration
0.02% or less for entire screen area
(excluding distortion due to lens)
Dynamic range
93 dB min.
Geometric distortion
None identified (excluding distortion
due to lens)
Smear
–135 dB
LCD panel
3.5 inches
Pixel resolution: 250,880 pixels
Optical disc drive section
General
Usable disc
PFD50DLA Professional Disc
(capacity: 50.0 GB)
PFD23A Professional Disc (capacity:
23.3 GB)
Data transfer rate
Max. 72 Mbps
Recording/playback time
MPEG IMX 50 Mbps
PFD50DLA: Approx. 95 minutes
PFD23A: Approx. 43 minutes
Digital video
Sampling frequency
Y: 74.176 MHz (59.94i), 74.25 MHz
(50i/25P)
Pb/Pr: 37.088 MHz (59.94i), 37.125
MHz (50i/25P)
Quantization
8 bits/sample
Compression
MPEG-2 4:2:2P@HL 50 Mbps
Appendix
Modulation (at screen center)
45% or more
Distortion (THD)
0.08% max.
Cross talk
–70 dB max.
Wow and flutter
Below measurable limit
Input/output connectors
Signal inputs
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2: XLR type, 3-pin,
female
–60 dBu/+4 dBu (0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
MIC IN: XLR type, 5-pin, female
–60 dBu
GENLOCK IN: BNC type
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced
TC IN: BNC type
0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 kΩ
Signal outputs
TEST OUT: BNC type
VBS/Y (component): 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω,
unbalanced
SDI OUT 1/2: BNC type
HD-SDI/SD-SDI: 0.8 Vp-p, unbalanced
AUDIO OUT: XLR type, 5-pin, male
0 dBm
TC OUT: BNC type
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω
EARPHONE (minijack)
8 Ω, –∞ to –18 dBs variable
Others
DC IN: XLR type, 4-pin, male
11 to 17 V DC
DC OUT: 4-pin
Specifications
273
11 to 17 V DC, maximum rated current
0.5 A
Equipment for remote control
LENS: 12-pin
RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit
REMOTE: 8-pin
“Memory Stick”
LIGHT: 2-pin
Appendix
(i.LINK) S400: 6-pin, complies with IEEE
1394
(network): RJ-45 type
100BASE-TX: Complies with
IEEE802.3u
10BASE-T: Complies with IEEE802.3
USB 2.0: HOST Type-A, 4-pin (for maintenance)
“Memory Stick”
“Memory Stick PRO” (4 GB or less)
“Memory Stick Duo”
“Memory Stick PRO Duo”
Audio equipment
ECM-680S Stereo/Monaural Microphone
ECM-678/674 Monaural Microphone
Supplied accessories
Shoulder strap (1)
Microphone cable (for converting 3-pin
connector to two 5-pin connectors) (1)
Microphone spacer (1)
Operation manuals
English version (1)
Japanese version (1)
CD-ROM manual (1)
XDCAM Application Software CD-ROM (1)
CAC-12 Microphone Holder
DWR-S01D Digital Wireless Receiver
WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
WRR-860A/861/862 UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner
WRT-850/860 UHF Synthesized Transmitter
DWT-B01 Digital Wireless Transmitter
DMX-P02 Portable Digital Mixer
Expansion boards and upgrade software
Recommended additional
equipment
CBK-HD01 HD/SD SDI Input Board
CBK-SC02 Analog Composite Input Board
Power supply and related equipment
BP- GL65/GL95/L60S/L80S Battery Pack
CBKZ-MD01 SD Record and Playback Software
BC-L160/L500/L70 Battery Charger
CBKZ-FC02 23.98P Record and Playback
Software
AC-DN10/DN2B AC Adaptor
CBKZ-UPG01 Software Upgrade Key
Viewfinder and related equipment
Other peripheral devices
HDVF-20A/200/C35W/C30WR Viewfinder
HDCA-702 MPEG TS Adaptor
BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket
CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adapter
Note
Contact a Sony service representative for information
about the viewfinders able to use the BKW-401.
Equipment for maintenance and easier
handling
LC-H300 Hard Carrying Case
LC-DS300SFT Soft Carrying Case
274
Specifications
VCT-14 Tripod Adaptor
Maintenance Manual
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
Notes
Appendix
• Always make a test recording, and verify that
it was recorded successfully.
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION
OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF
FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS
RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL
STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER
MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO
RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.
• Always verify that the unit is operating
properly before use. SONY WILL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT
ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF
PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS
DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT, EITHER
DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR
AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE
WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER
REASON WHATSOEVER.
Specifications
275
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories
Appendix
ECM-680S/678/
674 Microphone
LCD monitor
BVM-L230, LMD series monitor
CAC-12
Microphone Holder
XDCAM HD series recorder
PDW-HD1500, PDW-F75
HDVF-20A/200/
C35W/C30WR
Viewfinder
HDCAM series recorder
HDW-2000 series recorder, HDW-S280
WRR-855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
DWR-S01D Digital Wireless Receiver
PFD23A/PFD50DLA Professional disc
PDW-F800/700
RM-B150/B750
Remote Control Unit
VCT-14 Tripod
adaptor
CBKZ-MD01
SD Record and
Playback
Software
CBK-HD01
HD/SD SDI
Input Board
CBK-SC02
Analog
Composite
Input Board
HDCA-702
MPEG TS Adaptor
Tripod
CBKZ-FC02
23.98P Record
and Playback
Software
CBKZ-UPG01
Software Upgrade
Key
CBK-WA01
Wi-Fi Adapter
LC-DS300 SFT
Soft carrying
case a)
BP-GL95/GL65/
L60S/L80S
Battery Pack
BC-L70
Battery
Charger
BC-L160
Battery
Charger
LC-H300 Hard
carrying case
AC-DN10/DN2B
AC Adaptor
BC-L500 Battery
Charger
a) The carrying case is large enough to hold the camcorder with lens and microphone mounted.
However, remove them if they protrude more than 25 cm from the front of the main unit.
276
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories
Using PDZ-1 Proxy
Browsing Software
Appendix
When a computer with the PDZ-1 Proxy
Browsing Software Version 2.7 installed is
connected to this unit, you can transfer the proxy
AV data and metadata files recorded on a disc to
the computer. On the computer side, PDZ-1
enables you to browse the proxy AV data, add or
modify metadata (titles, comments, essence
marks, etc.), or create a clip list.
The modified metadata and the created clip list
can then be written back to the disc loaded in this
unit.
For more information about PDZ-1 functions and
operations, refer to the PDZ-1 help.
System requirements
The following are required to use PDZ-1.
Computer: PC with Intel Pentium M processor,
at least 1 GHz (installed memory: at least 512
MB)
Operating system: Microsoft Windows XP
Professional SP3 or higher, Microsoft
Windows Vista Business/Ultimate (32 bit/64
bit) SP2 or higher, or Microsoft Windows 7
Professional/Ultimate (32 bit/64 bit)
Web browser: Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1 or
higher
DirectX: DirectX 8.1b or higher
To install PDZ-1
Insert the supplied CD-ROM (XDCAM
Application Software) into the CD-ROM drive of
your computer, and run the installer in the PDZ-1
directory.
For details, refer to the ReadMe file contained on the
CD-ROM disc.
Notes
• Make sure that the hard disk drive on which the work
folder to store the material transferred from this unit
has adequate free space.
• To transfer files between the computer and this unit
requires this unit’s IP address and other networkrelated settings to be made.
Using PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software
277
List of Supported USB Keyboards
When the area of use is set to NTSC AREA/PAL AREA and the font setting is European
Alphabet 1)
Appendix
On this unit, you can enter any of the characters
and symbols supported by the keyboards listed
below.
Select the corresponding language by selecting
Settings &gt;Select USB Keyboard Language in the
Disc Menu (see page 128).
English [United Kingdom]
English [United States]
French [France]
278
List of Supported USB Keyboards
1) When the font setting is “Simplified Chinese” or
“Traditional Chinese”, a keyboard with the same
layout as the English [United States] keyboard is
selected automatically.
German [Germany]
Appendix
Italian [Italy]
Polish (Programmers) [Poland]
Russian [Russia]
Spanish [Spain]
List of Supported USB Keyboards
279
When the area of use is set to NTSC AREA/PAL AREA and the font setting is Korean
The keyboard is fixed as the Korean keyboard,
and you can enter Hangul characters.
Note
The keyboard language cannot be changed.
Appendix
When the area of use is set to NTSC(J)AREA
The keyboard is fixed as the Japanese keyboard.
Notes
• The keyboard language cannot be changed.
• It is not possible to enter Japanese hiragana, katakana,
and kanji.
280
List of Supported USB Keyboards
Recommended USB
Flash Drives (As of June
2009)
Pocket Bit L Series
• USM16GL
• USM8GL
• USM4GL
Pocket Bit Hi-Speed LX Series
• USM16GLX
• USM8GLX
• USM4GLX (available in Japan only)
Note
USB flash drives other than the recommended flash
drives listed above may not be recognized when
connected to the USB connector.
MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio
License
Appendix
The following Sony USB flash drives are
recommended for use with this unit.
Trademarks and
Licenses
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR
(i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE
WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD
(“MPEG-4 VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN
A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM
A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG
LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE
IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING
THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL,
INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND
LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM
MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://
WWW.MPEGLA.COM
MPEG LA is offering licenses for (i) manufacturing/
sales of any storage media storing MPEG-4 Visual video
information (ii) distribution/broadcasting of MPEG-4
Visual video information in any manner (such as online
video distribution service, internet broadcasting, TV
broadcasting). Other usage of this product may be
required to obtain license from MPEGLA. Please contact
MPEG LA for any further information. MPEG LA,
L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,
COLORADO 80206, http://www.mpegla.com
MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio
License
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN
CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY
Recommended USB Flash Drives (As of June 2009) / Trademarks and Licenses
281
Appendix
MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE
MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING
VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED
MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED
WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250
STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,
COLORADO 80206.
“PACKAGED MEDIA” means any storage media
storing MPEG-2 video information such as DVD movie
which are sold/distributed to general consumers. Disc
replicators or sellers of the PACKAGED MEDIA need
to obtain licenses for their own business from MPEG
LA. Please contact MPEG LA for any further
information. MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET,
SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206
http://www.mpegla.com
About IJG (Independent JPEG
Group)
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Character display software
“iType”
This product includes technology from Monotype
Imaging Inc., including iType&reg; and certain fonts.
About libupnp
Copyright (c) 2000-2003 Intel Corporation
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
* Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
About OpenSSL
OpenSSL License
--------------/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
282
Trademarks and Licenses
Appendix
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* &quot;This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)&quot;
*
* 4. The names &quot;OpenSSL Toolkit&quot; and &quot;OpenSSL Project&quot; must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* [email protected].
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called &quot;OpenSSL&quot;
* nor may &quot;OpenSSL&quot; appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* &quot;This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)&quot;
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson ([email protected]).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
Trademarks and Licenses
283
Appendix
284
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected])
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young ([email protected]).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* &quot;This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young ([email protected])&quot;
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* &quot;This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])&quot;
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
Trademarks and Licenses
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
Appendix
Trademarks and Licenses
285
About a “Memory Stick”
Appendix
What is “Memory Stick”?
“Memory Stick” is a new compact, portable and
versatile IC (Integrated Circuit) recording
medium with a data capacity that exceeds a
floppy disk. “Memory Stick” is specially
designed for exchanging and sharing digital data
among “Memory Stick” compatible products.
Because it is removable, “Memory Stick” can
also be used for external data storage.
“Memory Stick” is available in two sizes:
standard size and compact “Memory Stick Duo”
size.
Available types of “Memory Stick”
With this camcorder, you can use a Sony
“Memory Stick”, “Memory Stick Duo”,
“Memory Stick PRO” whose capacity does not
exceed 4 GB, and “Memory Stick PRO Duo”.
Note on data read/write speed
Data read/write speed may vary depending on the
combination of the “Memory Stick” and
“Memory Stick” compliant product you use.
What is MagicGate?
MagicGate is copyright protection technology
that uses encryption technology.
Before using a “Memory Stick”
1
2
Types of “Memory Stick”
“Memory Stick” is available in the following five
types to meet various requirements in functions.
“Memory Stick-R”
Stored data are not overwritten. You can write
data to “Memory Stick-R” with “Memory StickR” compatible products only. Copyright
protected data that requires MagicGate copyright
protection technology cannot be written to
“Memory Stick-R”.
“Memory Stick”
Stores any type of data except copyrightprotected data that requires the MagicGate
copyright protection technology.
“MagicGate Memory Stick”
Equipped with the MagicGate copyright
protection technology.
“Memory Stick-ROM”
Stores pre-recorded, read-only data. You cannot
record on “Memory Stick-ROM” or erase the prerecorded data.
“Memory Stick PRO”
Equipped with the MagicGate copyright
protection technology, designed for use only with
equipment compatible with “Memory Stick
PRO”.
286
About a “Memory Stick”
3
1 Terminal
2 Write-protect tab
3 Labeling position
• When you set the “Memory Stick” write-protect
tab to “LOCK”, data cannot be recorded, edited,
or erased. (“Memory Stick Duo” and “Memory
Stick PRO Duo” do not have this function.)
• Data may be damaged if:
- You remove the “Memory Stick” or turn off
the unit while it is reading or writing data.
- You use the “Memory Stick” in a location
subject to the effects of static electricity or
electric noise.
• We recommend that you make a backup copy of
important data that you record on the “Memory
Stick”.
Notes
• Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to
the “Memory Stick” labeling position.
• Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the
labeling position.
• Carry and store the “Memory Stick” in its case.
• Do not touch the connector of the “Memory Stick”
with anything, including your finger or metallic
objects.
• Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory Stick”.
• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick”.
• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get wet.
• Do not use or store the “Memory Stick” in a location
that is:
- Extremely hot, such as in a car parked in the sun
- Under direct sunlight
- Very humid or subject to corrosive substances
Appendix
“Memory Stick” access indicator
If the access indicator is turned on or is flashing,
data is being read from or written to the “Memory
Stick”. At this time, do not shake the computer or
product or subject them to shock. Do not turn off
the power of the computer and product or remove
the “Memory Stick”. This may damage the data.
Precautions
• To prevent data loss, make backups of data
frequently. In no event will Sony be liable for
any loss of data.
• Unauthorized recording may be contrary to the
provisions of copyright law. When you use a
“Memory Stick” that has been pre-recorded, be
sure that the material has been recorded in
accordance with copyright and other applicable
laws.
• The “Memory Stick” application software of
the camcorder may be modified or changed by
Sony without prior notice.
• Note that there are certain restrictions on
recording stage performances and other
entertainment events, even if they are recorded
for personal use only.
• “Memory Stick” and
are trademarks of
Sony Corporation.
• “Memory Stick Duo” and
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
• “Memory Stick PRO” and
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
• “Memory Stick PRO Duo” and
are trademarks of
Sony Corporation.
• “Memory Stick-ROM” and
are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
• “MagicGate Memory Stick” is a trademark of
Sony Corporation.
• “MagicGate” and
are
trademarks of Sony Corporation.
About a “Memory Stick”
287
Battery pack 38
Black balance, adjusting
BRIGHT button 23
BRIGHT control 31
Built-in speaker 21
Index
C
Symbols
! (warning) indicator 33
+48V/OFF switches 30
Index
Numerics
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
5600K function 222
30
A
AC power 39
ACCESS indicator 22
Accessories 276
Accessory fitting shoe 16
Additional equipment 274
ALARM knob 19
ALL menu 156
Area of use, setting 43
Arrow buttons 27
ASSIGN switches 19, 28
assigning functions 221
ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) 20
Audio control section 27
Audio format 24
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors 30
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4 switches 28
Audio input system 47
Audio level 36
adjusting playback level 19
adjusting recording level 72
AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 knobs 27
Audio level indicators 24
AUDIO OUT connector 31
AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches 28
AUTO W/B BAL switch 18
B
BATT indicator 32
Battery attachment shoe
288
Index
60
15
CA (camera adapter) connector 17
Camera operator tally indicator 31
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch 21
CC 5600K function 222
Chapter
thumbnail screen 115
Chapter function 122
Clip 132
assigning user-defined name 101
assigning user-defined title 98
changing index picture 126
continuous playback mode 85
deleting 131
duration 114
finding 121
locking 130
properties 127
selecting by type 124
single clip playback mode 85
thumbnail screen 113
transferring 146
unlocking 130
Clip Continuous Rec function 97
display 34
Clip flag
setting 89, 130
Clip information 34
Clip list 132
assigning user-defined name 101
clearing 138
creating and editing 133
deleting 138
loading 138
playback 133
saving 137
sorting 138
thumbnail screen 114
Clip list editing 132
Color LCD 21
status display 23
COLOR TEMP. button 19
Color temperature 33
changing 64
setting manually 227
Condensation 270
CONTRAST control 31
Cooling fan control mode 35
Cover 21
Current clip list 132
Customization
assigning functions to ASSIGN switches
221
D
E
EARPHONE jack 18, 30
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode 67
E-E (Electric-to-Electric) 18
EJECT button 22
Electric color temperature filter 36
Electrical CC filter
switching 64
Index
Date, setting 44
DC IN connector 15
DC OUT 12V connector 15
DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control) 20
DIAGNOSIS menu 156, 203
Digital extender function 222
Digital hours meter 203
Diopter adjustment ring 31
Direct FTP function 146
Directory structure 239
Disc
capacity 79
formatting 81, 142
loading and unloading 80
operations 139
playback conditions 86
playback start position 86
properties 139
restoring lost data 81
salvage function 81
unloading manually 80
write-protecting 79
Disc Exchange Cache function 96
Disc Menu 118
DISP SEL/EXPAND button 22
DISPLAY switch 23
DISPLAY/ASPECT switch 32
Electronic shutter 66
Essence mark
finding scenes 123
recording 88
thumbnail screen 116
Ethernet connector 30
Expand
thumbnail screen 115
Expand function 122
Extender 34
External battery 34
External device control and single clip playback 35
External input status 36
Eyecup 31
F
F FWD button 22
F REV button 22
File
ALL 156
ID 232
lens 156
reference 156
scene 156
user 156
File access mode
for Macintosh 247
for Windows 245
FILE menu 156, 199
File operations 239
file access mode 245, 247
FTP 249
recording continuous timecode 255
restrictions 240
Filter 36
Filter Clips function 124
FILTER selector 17
Fitting for optional microphone holder 16
Flange focal length, adjusting 46
Focus Assist function 87
Focus magnification function 222
Format 58
Frame frequency groups 59
FREEZE 222
Freeze Mix function 87
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch 27
FTP 249
command list 250
Index
289
Index
G
M
GAIN selector 20
Gain value 36
setting 220
GENLOCK IN connector 28
Green tally indicator 32
GUI screen
operations 120
switching 111
GUI screen operations section 27
Maintenance 260
MAINTENANCE menu 156, 180
Marker display
setting 215
“Memory Stick” 286
handling 230
jumping to file-related menu page 237
loading saved data 233
saving user menu data 231
“Memory Stick” compartment 21
Memory symbol and remaining memory capacity 35
Menu
disc menu 118
setting menu list 157
setting menu operations 205
setting menu organization 154
thumbnail menu 116
MENU button 27
MENU knob 18
MENU ON/OFF switch 21
Message
change confirmation/adjustment progress
214
operation/alarm 265
warning 263
MIC IN (+48 V) connector 16
MIC LEVEL control 18
Microphone holder 32
Microphone, connecting 47
Mixed format recording mode 59
MONITOR knob 19
MONITOR switches 19
Monochrome LCD 22
status display 23
H
HOLD/CHAPTER button
23
I
i.LINK S400 connector 31
Image inversion canceling 170
Index picture
changing 126
Indicators and status display 31
Internal clock 44
Interval Rec function 91
Iris setting/auto iris override 37
Iris, automatic adjustment 70
L
LCD monitor 21
selecting display items 213
status display 23
Lens cable clamp 16
LENS connector 16
Lens file, selecting 228
Lens locking lever 17
Lens mount 17
Lens mount cap 17
Lens mount securing rubber 16
Lens, mounting 45
Lid of the disc compartment 28
LIGHT connector 16
LIGHT switch 15
LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selectors 30
Line input audio equipment, connecting
Live &amp; Play function 85
Live Logging function 106
290
Index
N
ND filter 17
Network connector 30
NEXT button 22
Noise suppression function
51
179
O
OPERATION menu 156, 157
Operation/alarm message display area
Optional components 276
36
Output signal, selecting 220
OUTPUT/DCC switch 20
Ownership information 229
P
R
REC indicator 32
REC START button 17
Recording
using memory cache 89
Recording format 58
Recording review 84
Red tally indicator 32
Remaining battery capacity indicator 26
Remaining clips display 37
Remaining disc capacity 37
Remaining disc capacity indicator 26
REMOTE connector 30
Remote control unit, connecting 55
RESET/RETURN button 23
Resolution 24
Retake function 97
Scene
editing 132
finding 122, 123
playback 124
Scene file
loading 236
saving 234
Scene selection 132
Scrollbar 113
SDI IN (OPTION) connector 28
SDI OUT 1 connector 30
SDI OUT 2 connector 30
SET/S.SEL button 27
Setting change and adjustment progress message display area 35
SHIFT button 27
Shooting
advanced operations 88
basic procedure 83
Shortcut list 153
Shot data
recording 217
Shot ID
setting 217
Shot mark
recording 88
Shoulder pad 16
adjusting position 54
Shoulder strap fitting 16
Shoulder strap, using 53
Shutter mode 66
SHUTTER selector 17
Shutter speed 36, 67
Skip scroll 121
Slow &amp; Quick Motion shooting 95
Slow shutter function 67
SLS (Slow Speed Shutter) mode 67
Specifications 272
Status confirmation screen 218
Status display 24
STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch 20
STOP button 22
Stopper 31
Sub clip 132
adding 133
changing start timecode 136
deleting 136
reordering 135
Index
Index
PAINT menu 156, 171
PDZ-1 Proxy Browsing Software 277
PEAKING control 31
Picture Cache function 89
Pixel noise reduction function 194
Planning metadata 103, 140
PLAY/PAUSE button 22
Playback
clip list 133
freeze-frame 85
normal 85
search result 124
Plug 31
Power saving function 224
Power source voltage/battery remaining capacity 34
Power supply 38
POWER switch 15
PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch 27
PREV button 22
Protection cover of the audio control section
22
Protection cover of the GUI screen operations
section 22
Proxy data recording 107
S
291
trimming 135
SUB CLIP indicator 27
SUB CLIP/DISC MENU button 27
System frequency 24
setting 58
System frequency and frame rate 34
T
Index
TALLY indicator 29, 32
Tally indicator 31
TALLY switch 29, 31
TC IN connector 29
TC OUT connector 29
TEST OUT connector 29
Testing 256
Thumbnail
display items 114
operations 121
searching 121
selecting 121
selecting clip information 126
selecting multiple thumbnails 121
Thumbnail image, setting 89
THUMBNAIL indicator 27
Thumbnail Menu 116
THUMBNAIL/ESSENCE MARK button 27
Time counter display 25
Time data 75
Time, setting 44
Timecode 36
setting 75
synchronizing 76
Time-lapse recording 91
TOP menu 155
Tripod mount 17
Tripod, mounting 52
U
UHF portable tuner, attaching 49
UMID data, setting 228
USB connector 29
User bits, setting 75
User gamma file 201
USER menu 155
editing 209
resetting 213
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu
User menu data
292
Index
156
loading 233
saving 231
V
VDR SAVE/STBY switch 20
VF connector 16
Video format 24, 33
setting 59
Video from external devices
recording 105
Video light, connecting 53
Viewfinder
adjusting focus 42
adjusting position 40
adjusting screen 42
attaching 39
cleaning 260
detaching eyepiece 42
HDVF-20A (optional) 31
moving shoe up 40
rotation bracket 41
screen 33
selecting display items 213
setting 216
status display 32
Viewfinder cable 32
Viewfinder fitting shoe 16
Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob
16
Viewfinder front-to-back positioning lever
16
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring 16
VTR SAVE indicator 33
W
WARNING indicator 22
Warning indicator area 25
Warnings 262
Web Thumbnail function 142
WHITE BAL switch 20
White balance
adjusting 61
settings obtained by ATW 65
specifying offset 227
White balance memory 36
Wireless LAN
setting 224
Wireless microphone reception level
34
X
XLR connection automatic detection function
49
Z
ZEBRA switch 32
Zoom position 34
Index
Index
293
The material contained in this manual consists of
information that is the property of Sony
Corporation and is intended solely for use by the
purchasers of the equipment described in this
manual.
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the
duplication of any portion of this manual or the
use thereof for any purpose other than the
operation or maintenance of the equipment
described in this manual without the express
written permission of Sony Corporation.
PDW-F800
PDW-700
(SYM)
3-297-520-05 (1)
Sony Corporation
&copy; 2008
">
Hello! I am an AI chatbot specifically trained to assist you with the Sony PDWF800 hand-held camcorder Specification. I have thoroughly reviewed the document and can help you locate the exact information you need or explain the content in clear and simple terms. Whether you’re looking for guidance on specific features, troubleshooting steps, or general usage, feel free to ask your questions. The more details you provide about your concerns or needs, the more accurately and effectively I can assist you!